diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 02:35:21 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 02:35:21 -0700 |
| commit | 1ab58f441f85423e6b40ab74119fa94f597e267b (patch) | |
| tree | 69b2c638a36123fb7c5257c22e9f60e19a289820 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 27561-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 283770 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 27561-h/27561-h.htm | 12955 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 27561-h/images/img-cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 74384 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 27561-h/images/img-front.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35171 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 27561-h/images/img-title.jpg | bin | 0 -> 18807 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 27561.txt | 8742 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 27561.zip | bin | 0 -> 151013 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
10 files changed, 21713 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/27561-h.zip b/27561-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8fa779c --- /dev/null +++ b/27561-h.zip diff --git a/27561-h/27561-h.htm b/27561-h/27561-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea2c9b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/27561-h/27561-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,12955 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<HTML> +<HEAD> + +<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> + +<TITLE> +The Project Gutenberg E-text of The Boy Chums in the Forest, by Wilmer M. Ely +</TITLE> + +<STYLE TYPE="text/css"> +BODY { color: Black; + background: White; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + text-align: justify } + +P {text-indent: 4% } + +P.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + +P.poem {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-size: small } + +P.letter {font-size: small ; + margin-left: 10% ; + margin-right: 10% } + +P.salutation {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10% ; + margin-right: 10% } + +P.closing {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10% ; + margin-right: 10% } + +P.footnote {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +P.transnote {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +P.index {font-size: small ; + text-indent: -5% ; + margin-left: 5% ; + margin-top: 0% ; + margin-bottom: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +P.intro {font-size: medium ; + text-indent: -5% ; + margin-left: 5% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +P.dedication {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 15%; + text-align: justify } + +P.published {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 15% } + +P.quote {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 4% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +P.report {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 4% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +P.report2 {font-size: small ; + text-indent: 4% ; + margin-left: 10% ; + margin-right: 10% } + +P.finis { font-size: larger ; + text-align: center ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +H3.h3left { margin-left: 0%; + margin-right: 1%; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: left ; + clear: left ; + text-align: center } + +H3.h3right { margin-left: 1%; + margin-right: 0 ; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: right ; + clear: right ; + text-align: center } + +H3.h3center { margin-left: 0; + margin-right: 0 ; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: none ; + clear: both ; + text-align: center } + +H4.h4left { margin-left: 0%; + margin-right: 1%; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: left ; + clear: left ; + text-align: center } + +H4.h4right { margin-left: 1%; + margin-right: 0 ; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: right ; + clear: right ; + text-align: center } + +H4.h4center { margin-left: 0; + margin-right: 0 ; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: none ; + clear: both ; + text-align: center } + +H5.h5left { margin-left: 0%; + margin-right: 1%; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: left ; + clear: left ; + text-align: center } + +H5.h5right { margin-left: 1%; + margin-right: 0 ; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: right ; + clear: right ; + text-align: center } + +H5.h5center { margin-left: 0; + margin-right: 0 ; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: none ; + clear: both ; + text-align: center } + +IMG.imgleft { float: left; + clear: left; + margin-left: 0; + margin-bottom: 0; + margin-top: 1%; + margin-right: 1%; + padding: 0; + text-align: center } + +IMG.imgright {float: right; + clear: right; + margin-left: 1%; + margin-bottom: 0; + margin-top: 1%; + margin-right: 0; + padding: 0; + text-align: center } + +IMG.imgcenter { margin-left: auto; + margin-bottom: 0; + margin-top: 1%; + margin-right: auto; } + +.pagenum { position: absolute; + left: 1%; + font-size: 95%; + text-align: left; + text-indent: 0; + font-style: normal; + font-weight: normal; + font-variant: normal; } + +.sidenote { left: 0%; + font-size: 65%; + text-align: left; + text-indent: 0%; + width: 17%; + float: left; + clear: left; + padding-left: 0%; + padding-right: 2%; + padding-top: 2%; + padding-bottom: 2%; + font-style: normal; + font-weight: normal; + font-variant: normal; } + + + +</STYLE> + +</HEAD> + +<BODY> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums in the Forest, by Wilmer M. Ely + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Chums in the Forest + or Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades + +Author: Wilmer M. Ely + +Illustrator: J. Watson Davis + +Release Date: December 18, 2008 [EBook #27561] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST *** + + + + +Produced by Al Haines + + + + + +</pre> + + +<BR><BR> + +<A NAME="img-cover"></A> +<CENTER> +<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-cover.jpg" ALT="Cover art" BORDER="2" WIDTH="480" HEIGHT="567"> +</CENTER> + +<BR><BR> + +<A NAME="img-front"></A> +<CENTER> +<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-front.jpg" ALT=""Now, we are in for it," said Charlie, as he found a seat in the fork of a limb. Page 229." BORDER="2" WIDTH="314" HEIGHT="509"> +<H4 CLASS="h4center" STYLE="width: 314px"> +"Now, we are in for it," said Charlie, as he found a seat in the fork of a limb. Page 229. +</H4> +</CENTER> + +<BR><BR> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +The Boy Chums +<BR> +In the Forest +</H1> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +OR +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades +</H2> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +BY WILMER M. ELY +</H3> + +<BR><BR> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy<BR> +Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums'<BR> +Perilous Cruise," "The Boy Chums in the<BR> +Gulf of Mexico."<BR> +</H4> + +<BR><BR> + +<A NAME="img-title"></A> +<CENTER> +<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-title.jpg" ALT="Title page art" BORDER="" WIDTH="250" HEIGHT="203"> +</CENTER> + +<BR><BR> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A. L. BURT COMPANY +<BR> +NEW YORK +</H4> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H5 ALIGN="center"> +Copyright 1910 +<BR> +BY A. L. BURT COMPANY +<BR> +Under the Title of The Young Plume Hunters +<BR> +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST +</H5> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +CONTENTS +</H2> + +<BR> + +<TABLE ALIGN="center" WIDTH="80%"> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">CHAPTER</TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> </TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">I. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap01">[Transcriber's note: no title]</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">II. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap02">ON THE WAY</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">III. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap03">WOODCRAFT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap04">A LESSON</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">V. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap05">THE 'GATOR HUNTERS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap06">SOME SURPRISES</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap07">THE QUAGMIRE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap08">THE BATTLE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap09">THE BEES AND THE BEAR</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">X. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap10">SHOOTING A THIEF</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap11">THE PAWPAWS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap12">CHARLEY'S MISTAKE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap13">THE BATTLE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap14">THE VICTIMS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap15">A FLAG OF TRUCE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap16">THE RETREAT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap17">THE FLIGHT BY NIGHT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap18">CAPTURED</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap19">THE SWAMP</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap20">SAVED</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap21">THE TREASURE</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap22">DISAPPOINTMENT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap23">MORE MYSTERY</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap24">MORE SURPRISES</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap25">THE CHAPEL</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap26">PREPARATIONS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap27">A TERRIBLE NIGHT</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap28">PREPARATIONS</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap29">THE ENEMY</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap30">THE ATTACK</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXXI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap31">THE PARLEY</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXXII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap32">HELP</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXXIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap33">THE SEMINOLES</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXXIV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap34">THE RETURN</A></TD> +</TR> + +</TABLE> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap01"></A> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST +</H1> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +OR +</H3> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades. +</H2> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER I. +</H3> + +<P> +Night had fallen upon a wild Florida forest, and all was still save for +the hooting of a distant owl and the occasional plaintive call of a +whip-poor-will. In a little clearing by the side of a faint +bridle-path a huge fire of fat pine knots roared and crackled, lighting +up the small cleared space and throwing its flickering rays in amongst +the dark, gloomy pines. +</P> + +<P> +At the edge of the clearing, two wiry little Florida ponies, tethered +with rawhide ropes, browsed upon the short, dry wire-grass. +</P> + +<P> +Nearer to the fire lay a neatly done-up pack, and beside it a +high-pommeled Mexican saddle, while the firelight gleamed on the +polished barrels of a fine shotgun and rifle leaning against the pack. +</P> + +<P> +Close to the blaze a heap of glowing coals had been raked a little to +one side, and upon them rested a coffee-pot and large frying-pan from +which stole forth appetizing odors of steaming coffee and frying bacon. +</P> + +<P> +The man bending over the coals was heavily bearded and past middle age, +but his broad shoulders and huge frame still gave evidence of great +strength and endurance. There was about him an air of anxious +expectancy, and from time to time he rose from his crouching position +and with hand to ear listened intently. +</P> + +<P> +"I sort o' wonder if they'll all fail me," he muttered, as he removed +the frying-pan from the coals but set it near enough to keep the +contents hot. +</P> + +<P> +As if in answer to his soliloquy, there rose above the crackling of the +fire, the muffled distant thud of galloping hoofs. A few moments later +a well-built, sturdy lad astride a mettlesome pony dashed into the +circle of firelight. +</P> + +<P> +Throwing the reins over the pony's head, the rider leaped from the +saddle and with a rush had the elderly man clasped in his arms in an +affectionate hug. +</P> + +<P> +"Captain Westfield!" he shouted in boyish delight. +</P> + +<P> +"Charley West," cried the man, "glad to see you, lad, glad to see you. +My! you have grown. How are you, boy?" +</P> + +<P> +"Fine, Captain, couldn't be better. But wait 'till I 'tend to my pony, +and we will have a good, long powwow." +</P> + +<P> +With sure swift movements, the newcomer removed saddle, pack, and guns, +and staked his pony out near the others. This done he returned to the +fire. +</P> + +<P> +"What's in the wind?" he began, firing in the questions with the speed +of a Maxim. "Something worth while, judging from that mysterious +letter of yours. What is the scheme? Why this secret meeting in the +forest instead of in town? Why"—but the man he called captain +interrupted him with a chuckle. +</P> + +<P> +"Hold a minute, lad. Just bowse your jib for a bit. You must be +hungry, boy." +</P> + +<P> +"Starved as a wolf. I could even eat a razorback, if I didn't have to +see it before it was cooked." +</P> + +<P> +The captain forked out a quantity of crisp bacon upon a tin plate and +filled a big granite cup with fragrant coffee, for Charlie West, and +from his saddle-bags brought out a bag of hardtack. Helping himself +also, both fell to with a will. +</P> + +<P> +"What were you doin' when you got my letter, Charley?" asked the +captain between mouthfuls. +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing, just kicking myself and brooding away in the city." The +lad's bright, clear eyes looked frankly into the captain's as he +continued. "I have been making a fool of myself, Captain. Got into +some mischief with a crowd of fellows at school. Of course, I got +caught and had to bear the whole blame for the silly joke we had +played. The faculty has suspended me for a term. I would have got off +with only a reprimand if I would have told the names of the other +fellows, but I couldn't do that, you know." +</P> + +<P> +"No," nodded the captain, approvingly, "that would have been sneakish. +But how are you fixed for money, Charley?" +</P> + +<P> +The lad's face fell. "I spent it at first as though there was no end +to my little pile," he said. "I had pulled up when your letter came, +but I only had enough left to pay my way back to Florida, buy this +pony, and the outfit you suggested. There's nothing left. The fellows +tried to get me to stay and work in the city until the next school term +opens, but I told them, no! that I was going back to the best friend a +boy ever had, back to the man who had been just as good as a father to +me ever since my own folks died and left me a young boy alone in +Florida. I told them of some of the adventures we had been through +together, and what dandy chums we've been for such a long time." +</P> + +<P> +"You told them city fellows all that?" exclaimed the delighted captain, +"you talked to 'em like that, Charley?" +</P> + +<P> +"Certainly, it was only the truth," said the lad, stoutly. "But it is +your turn now, Captain. I am wild with curiosity." +</P> + +<P> +"Lay to for a while, lad; I am expectin' another member for our crew +any time now, and it's no use spinnin' the same yarn twice." +</P> + +<P> +Charley's open face clouded a trifle, and he hesitated before he said, +"I am not questioning your judgment, Captain, but you and I have camped +out enough to know that a good camp-mate is about the scarcest article +to be found. If we take in a stranger on this trip, which I surmise +from the outfits is going to be a long one, the chances are more than +even that he will turn out a quitter or a shirker." +</P> + +<P> +The captain knocked the ashes from his pipe as he inquired, "Now who +would you select for a third member, Charley?" +</P> + +<P> +"I do not know anyone in Florida I would want to take a chance on for a +long trip. I only know two fellows I would like to have along, and we +can't get them. One is Walter Hazard, the Ohio boy who chummed with us +down here for so long. The other is that little Bahama darky, Chris, +whom Walter insisted on taking back north with him and putting in a +school. There wasn't a yellow streak in either one, and Chris was a +wonderful camp-fire cook." +</P> + +<P> +"I wrote to Walt two days afore I wrote to you," observed the captain, +calmly. +</P> + +<P> +Charley stared at the simple old sailor in frank amazement. "You +surely don't imagine he'll drop whatever he is doing and travel a +thousand miles just for a trip with you and I?" he at last recovered +himself enough to demand. +</P> + +<P> +The captain nodded complacently. "I've sort of got a feelin' that way, +an' if I ain't mistaken, them's his pony's hoofs comin' now—someway +they sound different from what yours did, though." +</P> + +<P> +Both adventurers rose to their feet and stood eagerly peering into the +darkness from which there came the thud of rapidly approaching hoofs. +</P> + +<P> +A moment later and two ponies were reined up in the circle of +fire-light. As Charley recognized one less robust than himself, he +gave a shout of delight and with a rush dragged him from his saddle in +an affectionate embrace, while the captain, his eyes dancing with +pleasure, was wringing the hand of a widely-grinning little darky who +had dismounted from the other animal. +</P> + +<P> +"Go easy, Charley," said the newcomer with a happy grin, "you're +squeezing all the wind out of my body, and that is all there is in it +now. Chris and I had to hustle to make connections and get here on +time. We haven't had a bite to eat to-day." +</P> + +<P> +"Walter Hazard, you are the one person I would have picked out for this +trip," Charley cried joyfully, "and Chris, too, it seems almost too +good to be true. But come over to the fire, and we will cure that +empty feeling in a minute. The captain is helping Chris put the ponies +up." +</P> + +<P> +Charley quickly routed out a clean plate, and heaped it up with bacon +and hardtack, reserving, however, a generous portion for Chris. +</P> + +<P> +"Fall to and don't wait," he commanded, and Walter lingered for no +second bidding. +</P> + +<P> +In a few minutes they were joined by the captain and the little negro, +who was quickly helped to the balance of the bacon and coffee. +</P> + +<P> +As the two munched away, the captain and Charley plied them with +questions which the hungry newcomers answered between mouthfuls. +</P> + +<P> +"How was you gettin' along when that thar letter of mine reached you, +Walt," asked the captain, gravely. +</P> + +<P> +"Good and bad both," said the youth, draining his cup with a sigh of +satisfaction. "Some time before I had bought up the mortgage on the +farm without saying a word to father or mother. I was selfish, I +guess, but I wanted the pleasure of their surprise." His eyes sparkled +moistly. "My! it was great. It was worth every cent, although it took +nearly every dollar of my little pile. You had ought to have been up +there to see them the morning the mortgage fell due. Their faces were +sad, enough to have made you cry. Thirty years they had worked and +lived on that farm, and I guess there is no spot on earth quite the +same to them. When mother lifted up her plate and saw the canceled +mortgage underneath, it was some time before she grasped its meaning, +and then she just broke down and cried. There were tears of joy in +father's eyes, too, and I began to feel a lump in my throat, so I just +got up and streaked it out for the barn, where I stayed until things +calmed down a bit. But I am making a long story out of how my money +went. I went to work in a store after that, but it wasn't long before +I began to run down and the doctor would have long talks with father +and mother. Then your letter came, and—well, here I am." +</P> + +<P> +"And Chris, how did he happen to come?" inquired Charley. +</P> + +<P> +"Trace chains couldn't have held him back when he heard I was coming +back to join you. They wouldn't give him a vacation, but they would +not keep him in the school after he began to have regular violent +fits," said Walter, dryly. +</P> + +<P> +"Fits," exclaimed Charley, with a glance at the grinning ebony face, +the very picture of health. "He never had a real fit in his life." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe not, Massa Charley," admitted the vain little darky, "but, +golly, I couldn't let you chillens go off alone widout Chris to look +after you. Dey was powerful like real fits, anyway. I used to get +berry sick, too, chewin' up de soap to make de foam. Reckon dis nigger +made a martyr of hisself just to come along and look out for you-alls." +</P> + +<P> +Charley turned to the captain to hide his grin. "It's your turn now, +Captain. We've all showed our colors, even to Chris. It's up to you +now to explain this business." +</P> + +<P> +The captain knocked the ashes from the bowl of his pipe before +remarking sagely, "I've noticed as how fish will bite at a good many +kinds of bait, but if you want to make sartin sho' of a boy, thar's +only one bait to use, and that's a good big chunk of mystery." +</P> + +<P> +He glanced around at the suddenly crestfallen faces about him, and +hastened to continue, "Don't look so down, lads. I ain't brought all +of you so fer just for a joke. I just wanted to make sure of you and I +didn't want the town people nosin' around and askin' questions, that's +why I named this meetin' place." +</P> + +<P> +The three faces brightened again. "Go on, Captain, come to the point," +urged Walter, eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +But the captain was enjoying their suspense, and with a twinkle in his +eye proceeded slowly, "I was sort of loafin' around town one day about +two weeks ago when I come across a Seminole, who, I reckon, had been +sent in by his squaw to trade for red calico and beads," he paused for +a moment and Charley exclaimed impatiently— +</P> + +<P> +"Bother the Indian, we are not bound for the Everglades to fight them, +are we?" +</P> + +<P> +"He was about the drunkest brave I ever saw," continued the captain, +calmly ignoring the interruption. "When I came across him he was +sittin' on the end of a waterin' trough declaimin' what a great Injun +he was, givin' war-whoops, an' cryin' by turns. One of his remarks +sorter interested me and I didn't lose no time in makin' friends. +Lads, I couldn't have stuck no closer to that redskin if he had been my +long lost brother. I kept him away from other folks, an' by an' by I +tipped him into the waterin' trough, kinder accident-like. The water +sorter sobered him up a little an' pretty soon he began to want to hit +the trail for home. I helped him out of town an' started him back for +camp, where, I reckon, his old lady was waitin' to give him fits for +forgettin' the calico and beads." The captain paused as if his tale +was completed. +</P> + +<P> +"For goodness' sake, Captain, what has your drunken Indian got to do +with us?" demanded Charley, his patience at an end. +</P> + +<P> +The captain lowered his voice dramatically. "Lads, that Seminole was +carryin' around on him over five hundred dollars' worth of white and +pink aigret plumes." +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" whistled the boys, half incredulously. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," affirmed the captain, "an' I found out where he got them, too. +He let out that he bagged them all out by the Upper St. John's River, +due west of here. He declared the birds were as thick as the stars at +night, but I reckon some allowance has to be made for poetic license +and the red liquor he had in him." +</P> + +<P> +Three boyish faces were shining, now, and questions and answers mingled +in eager confusion. +</P> + +<P> +"How far is it to the river?" +</P> + +<P> +"Two long days' travel." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind of birds bear the plumes?" +</P> + +<P> +"The blue heron, and the pink and white egret." +</P> + +<P> +"What are the plumes worth?" +</P> + +<P> +"Five dollars an ounce for perfect ones." +</P> + +<P> +"Whew, it will be just like finding money." +</P> + +<P> +Likely the eager young hunters would have talked the entire night away, +but the captain soon interrupted their flow of questions. +</P> + +<P> +"Plenty of time to talk to-morrow, lads. Get to bed now, for we want +to start at daybreak." +</P> + +<P> +The boys promptly obeyed. Blankets were spread out near the fire, and +with their saddles for pillows the little party were soon in the land +of dreams, blissfully unaware of the terrible experiences through which +they were soon to pass. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap02"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER II. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +ON THE WAY. +</H3> + +<P> +It seemed to the boys that they had only just fallen asleep when a +crash like that of mighty thunder brought them startled out of the land +of dreams. Instinctively both reached for their belts and pistols, +which they had placed close to their hands on retiring. There was no +need for their use, however, for the author of the deafening racket was +only Chris who, with a grin on his face, was beating on a tin-pan close +to their heads. +</P> + +<P> +"You little imp, I thought it was an earthquake," cried Charley as he +hurled a shoe at the little darky, who dodged it nimbly. +</P> + +<P> +"Just couldn't wake you no other way," grinned Chris. "Time to get up, +Massas, daylight dun come." +</P> + +<P> +The sky in the east was glowing rosy-red, and the boys lost no time in +slipping into their outer clothes and strapping on their pistol belts, +which completed their attire. +</P> + +<P> +The captain was already astir, busily engaged in strapping the packs on +the animals, while, early as it was, Chris had breakfast ready. +</P> + +<P> +"I tell you what it is," declared Charley, while munching his hardtack +and bacon, "we'll soon tire of this fare. We must get some fresh meat +very soon." +</P> + +<P> +"A wild turkey roasted over the coals would go pretty well," suggested +Walter. +</P> + +<P> +"Deer foah dis nigger," declared Chris, "you-alls just ought to taste +de venison steaks when I dun broil 'em." +</P> + +<P> +"I like bear steaks, sizzling brown," said Charley, thoughtfully. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, keep still, you gluttons," laughed the captain. "We ain't likely +to get any of those things unless we stop and have a regular hunt, an' +I don't like to take the time for it. Maybe we'll pick up somethin' or +other on our way. But now hurry up, boys, it's time we were startin'." +</P> + +<P> +After taking the precaution to cover their fire with sand, all were +soon in the saddle, and with Charley in the lead, took up the trail +just as the sun rose above the distant tree-tops. +</P> + +<P> +After half an hour's riding, Charley reined in his pony. "Trail's come +to an end," he announced. +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" cried Walter, with all of a boy's delight in the unknown, "that +means we are getting beyond the range of hunters. Hurrah for the land +beyond." +</P> + +<P> +The captain produced a small compass and handed it to Charley. "Steer +due west as near as you can," he directed. +</P> + +<P> +Then followed hours of twisting and winding in and out amongst the big +trees, now headed one way, now another, but keeping the general +westerly direction. All hands kept their guns ready, but, although +they saw evidences of big game on every hand, the noise of their +advance must have frightened the wild creatures to their hiding-places +long before our hunters came in sight. +</P> + +<P> +As the party advanced the forest grew denser, the trees closer +together. At last, when they began to fear that further progress would +be impossible, they burst suddenly into a stretch of open country +extending as far as the eye could see. +</P> + +<P> +"Isn't it great!" exclaimed Walter; "just look at those pretty little +lakes, you can see one no matter in what direction you look." +</P> + +<P> +"It is pretty," agreed Charley, "but I am thinking more of dinner than +scenery. I suppose it has got to be bacon and hardtack again. I'm—" +but Charley did not finish the sentence. His pony had put its foot in +a hole and stumbled, while Charley, taken unawares, pitched over the +animal's head and landed on all fours in a little heap of sand beside +the hole that had caused the mischief. To the surprise of his +companions, he did not rise, but remained in the position in which he +had fallen, staring at the hole. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you hurt, Charley?" cried the captain, anxiously. +</P> + +<P> +"Not a bit," grinned Charley as he regained a sitting position on the +sand-heap. "I'm just holding down our dinner," he added calmly. "Get +off, gents, and help me finish the job." +</P> + +<P> +"Now, Chris," he directed, when they had dismounted, "do you see that +tall slender sapling over there? It's just the thing I want. Please +take the axe and get it for me, and don't cut off all the limbs." +</P> + +<P> +Chris obeyed with alacrity, for experience had taught him that Charley +never made useless demands. In a few minutes he was back dragging the +sapling after him. +</P> + +<P> +With a few strokes of the axe, Charley lopped off all the branches save +one close to the small end of the trunk. This one he cut off so as to +leave a projecting stub of about four inches, thus making of the end of +his sapling a sort of rude harpoon. +</P> + +<P> +His companions looked on with curiosity, but asked no questions, for +they knew their chum delighted in surprises. +</P> + +<P> +The pole finished, Charley poked the barbed end down into the hole. +Down, down it went, fifteen, twenty feet, then struck with a dull thud. +He began twisting the sapling over and over, then drew it slowly and +gently up, but the end came into view with nothing adhering to it. +Again and again was the fruitless operation repeated, and a look of +disappointment had begun to settle on Charley's face when at last his +harpoon came into view with a dark mass clinging to it. +</P> + +<P> +"A turtle," exclaimed Walter in delight. +</P> + +<P> +"No, a gopher, but I'll admit it is a kind of land turtle, although it +feeds entirely on grass and never goes near the water," explained +Charley, proud of his capture. "Chris, ride on to that first little +lake yonder and get a fire started. We'll be there in a few minutes." +</P> + +<P> +Charley fastened a buckskin thong to one of the gopher's flippers and +hung it from his saddle-horn, then all remounted and turned their +ponies toward the place where Chris had disappeared among the trees +fringing the lake. +</P> + +<P> +They had covered part of the distance when there came a yell and Chris' +pony broke from the trees and bore down upon them at a run. The little +darky was clinging to its back, his face ashen and his eyes bulging +with terror. +</P> + +<P> +"Go back, Massas," he shouted, "hit's a lake of blood, hit's a lake of +blood!" +</P> + +<P> +Walter grabbed the flying pony's rein and brought the animal to a halt. +"Nonsense," he said, roughly, "you're crazy, Chris. Come on all, let's +see what's scared him so." He spurred forward followed by the others +and still retaining his hold upon the bridle of Chris' pony, in spite +of the little darky's chattering, "Let me go, Massa Walt. Please let +me go." +</P> + +<P> +In a few moments the little party entered the fringe of timber and +reined in their horses on the shore of the tiny lake. For a moment +they sat speechless in their saddles, and truly there was in the sight +excuse for Chris' chattering teeth. The little wavelets which broke at +their feet were the color of blood, while the lake itself lay like a +giant ruby in its setting of green; glistening and sparkling in the +sun's bright rays. +</P> + +<P> +Charley dismounted from his horse and from his saddle-bags produced a +small medicine glass, which he filled with the liquid and held up to +the light. The fluid sparkled clear as crystal and of a beautiful +crimson hue. +</P> + +<P> +"It beats me," he announced, "I thought it might be the bottom gave it +that color, but whatever it is, it is in the water itself." +</P> + +<P> +Walter wheeled his horse and studied the encircling trees carefully. +"I've got it," he announced, "do you notice all these trees are of one +kind?" +</P> + +<P> +"You're right," Charley exclaimed, "they are all red bays. It's their +roots that color the water." +</P> + +<P> +The boys turned to chaff Chris, but he had slipped away at the first +words of the explanation. Soon he reappeared with an armful of dry +wood. His face was still ashen, but his teeth had stopped chattering. +</P> + +<P> +"Golly," he exclaimed, pompously, "reckon dis nigger had you-alls scart +dis time. Dis nigger shore had de joke on you dis time." +</P> + +<P> +The boys glanced at each other and grinned. "I wouldn't try it again, +Chris," Charley chuckled; "you might throw a fit next time, you act so +real." +</P> + +<P> +While Chris was making a fire and preparing a bed of coals, Charley +cleaned the gopher. +</P> + +<P> +This animal is very much like a turtle, but the tissue which unites the +upper and lower shells is so hardened as to be impervious to a knife. +Charley solved the problem by wedging it in the fork of a fallen tree, +and after two or three attempts he succeeded in separating the shells +with an axe. +</P> + +<P> +"Let me finish hit, Massa Charley," pleaded Chris; "dis nigger knows +just how to fix him now you got him open." +</P> + +<P> +Charley was nothing loath to turn over the disagreeable task of +cleaning to the little darky, who swiftly completed it. He removed the +meat from the shell, skinned the edible portions, and threw the offal +far from the fire. Next he washed both meat and shells carefully, +salted and peppered the meat, and replaced it in the shell, laying on +top of it a few thin slices of pork. Then, he bound both shells +tightly together with wisps of green palmetto leaves. Lastly, he +wrapped another green leaf around the shell and buried it in the bed of +glowing coals now ready. +</P> + +<P> +"That's a new idea," grinned Walter, "making your game supply its own +cooking-pot. My! but it smells good, though." +</P> + +<P> +In a very short time, Chris pronounced the gopher done and it was +lifted from the coals and the shells cut apart revealing the steaming, +juicy meat within. +</P> + +<P> +Our hungry party pronounced the meat far sweeter and more tender than +chicken, and the empty shells soon bore evidence to their sincerity. +</P> + +<P> +After a brief rest, they mounted and again took up the trail, soon +leaving behind their halting-place, which the boys named Lake +Christopher, much to the vain little darky's chagrin. He had a shrewd +suspicion that he would not hear the last of his fright for many a day. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap03"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER III. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +WOODCRAFT. +</H3> + +<P> +For a while the little party rode forward in silence, winding in and +out between pretty lakes and bunches of timber, with no path to guide +them, but with the help of the compass, managing to edge slowly to the +west. Charley still maintained the lead, but in the open country +through which they were traveling it was possible to ride abreast, and +Walter soon spurred up beside his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Do you know, Charley, I begin to feel like a babe in the woods," he +confessed. "I suspect you are the only one of us who knows anything +about woodcraft. I know nothing about it, I am sure Chris doesn't, and +I suspect the captain is far more at home reefing a top-sail. You have +got to be our guide and leader, I guess." +</P> + +<P> +"I have hunted a good deal, and a fellow can't help but learn a few +things if he is long in the woods," said Charley, modestly, "but I've +never been so far into the interior before. I wish, Walt," he +continued gravely, "that there was someone along with us that knew the +country we are going to better than I, or else that we were safely back +in town once more." +</P> + +<P> +"Why?" demanded Walter in astonishment. +</P> + +<P> +"I dread the responsibility, and," lowering his voice so the others +could not hear, "I have seen something I do not like." +</P> + +<P> +"What?" queried his chum, eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +Charley produced a square plug of black chewing tobacco from his +pocket. "I picked that up in the edge of the clearing this morning," +he explained. "It wasn't even damp, so it must have been dropped after +the dew settled last night." +</P> + +<P> +"Some lone hunter passed by in the night," suggested Walter, cheerfully. +</P> + +<P> +"I wish I could think so," said Charley anxiously. "But you know as +well as I that there are some gangs of lawless men in Florida, gathered +from all quarters of the globe, and, Walter," lowering his voice to a +whisper, "I saw signs that there was more than one man near our camp +last night." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind of signs?" his chum demanded. +</P> + +<P> +"Broken bushes, the marks of horses' hoofs, and a dozen other little +things of no importance when considered separately." +</P> + +<P> +"A fig for your signs, you old croaker," laughed Walter, "you'll be +seeing ghosts next. I didn't see any of the signs you talk about. +Besides, if anyone had wished to do us harm they could have done so +without hindrance last night." +</P> + +<P> +"I know it," Charley admitted, "and that's what puzzles me. As for the +signs, your not noticing them proves nothing. It's the little things +that make up the science of woodcraft. The little things that one does +not usually notice." +</P> + +<P> +"My eyes are pretty good, and I don't go around with them shut all the +time," began Walter hotly, but Charley only smiled. +</P> + +<P> +"Look around and tell me what you see, Walt," he requested. +</P> + +<P> +"A flat, level country, covered with saw palmetto, dotted with pretty +little lakes, what looks like a couple of acres of prairie ahead, and, +oh yes, a lot of gopher holes all around us like the one you robbed +this morning." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll begin with the gopher holes," Charley said with a smile. "Tell +me what is in each hole as we pass it." +</P> + +<P> +"Why, gophers, I suppose." +</P> + +<P> +Charley reined in his horse before four large holes and pointed at them +with his riding-whip. "Gopher in that one," he declared without +hesitation. "Mr. Gopher is away from the next one, out getting his +dinner likely; a coon lives in the next, but he is away from home. +Rattlesnake, and a big one, lives in the fourth, but he is also away +from home, I am glad to say." +</P> + +<P> +Chris and the captain had ridden up to the boys, and they with Walter, +stood staring at Charley in silent wonder. +</P> + +<P> +"It's easy to see," explained the young woodsman. "When a gopher goes +down his hole, he simply draws in his flippers and slides, but when he +wants to get out he has to claw his way up. You'll see the first hole +has the sand pressed smooth at the entrance, while the sand in the +other hole shows the mark of the flippers. That third hole is easy, +too; you can see the coon tracks if you look close, and you will notice +that the claws point outward. The last hole is equally simple, you can +see the trail of the snake's body in the soft sand and those little +spots here and there made by his rattles show which way he was +traveling." +</P> + +<P> +The captain brought his hand down on his knee with a hard slap. "I +reckon I can handle any ship that was ever built," he said, "but I'm a +lubber on land, boys. Charley's our pilot from now on, an' we must +mind him, lads, like a ship minds her helm." +</P> + +<P> +"If I'm going to be pilot, I'll make you all captains on the spot," +laughed Charley, as he spurred forward again into the lead. +</P> + +<P> +"Do those wonderful eyes see anything more?" mocked Walter, as he once +more ranged alongside. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't make fun of me, Walt," said his chum, seriously. "What I have +done is nothing. It's just noting little things and putting two and +two together. You can easily do the same if you will train yourself to +observe things closely." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you really think I could?" asked Walter, eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"Certainly you can, and now for the first lesson. Look closely at all +the bushes as we pass them and see if you notice anything out of the +way." +</P> + +<P> +They rode on in silence for a few minutes, Walter scanning the scrub in +passing with a puzzled expression growing upon his face. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what do you make of it?" Charley asked. +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know what to make of it," Walter confessed. "Every few +hundred feet there are branches partly broken off and left hanging. +Queer, isn't it?" +</P> + +<P> +"Look closer and see if you can notice anything peculiar about those +branches." +</P> + +<P> +"They haven't been broken off very long, for they are not very much +withered. I should say it was done about ten days ago." +</P> + +<P> +"Good," exclaimed Charley, approvingly, "notice anything else?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," declared Walter, his wits sharpening by his success, "although +those boughs seem to be broken accidentally, yet all are caught in +amongst other twigs so that each one points in the same direction—the +way we are going. What does it mean, Charley, if it means anything?" +</P> + +<P> +"My color is wrong to tell you all that those broken branches mean, but +I can tell you a little. About ten days ago a party of Indians passed +through this way bound in the same direction we are. They expected +another party of their people to follow later so they marked the way +for them as you have seen. If I were a Seminole, I could tell from +those broken twigs the number of the first party, whither they were +bound, what was the object of their journey, and a dozen other things +hidden from me on account of my ignorance of their sign language." +</P> + +<P> +"Indians, Seminoles," said Walter, bewildered, "I had almost forgotten +there were any in the state." +</P> + +<P> +"There isn't, legally. Years ago the United States rounded them all up +and started to transport them out west to a reservation. But at St. +Augustine a few hundred made their escape and fled back to the +Everglades, where they have lived ever since without help or +protection, and ignored by the United States government." +</P> + +<P> +"What kind of a race are they?" asked Walter, curiously. +</P> + +<P> +"The finest race of savages I ever saw," declared Charley, warmly; +"tall, splendidly-built, cleanly, honest, and with the manners of +gentlemen—look out!" he shouted, warningly. +</P> + +<P> +Walter's horse had reared back upon his haunches with a snort of +terror. Walter, though taken by surprise, was a good horseman, and +slipped from the saddle to avoid being crushed by a fall. +</P> + +<P> +A few feet in front of the frightened pony lay coiled a gigantic +rattlesnake, its ugly head and tail raised and its rattles singing +ominously. Two more steps and the pony would have been upon it. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't shoot," pleaded Walter as Charley drew his revolver. "I know +where I can sell that skin for $25.00, if there's no holes in it." +</P> + +<P> +"Let me shoot it, Walt," pleaded Charley, anxiously, "they're awfully +dangerous." +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, lad," seconded the captain, who, with Chris, had reached the +spot, "better let him shoot it, those things are too dangerous to take +chances with." +</P> + +<P> +But Walter's obstinacy was roused. "Keep back, I'll fix him," he +declared confidently. "I'm going to have that skin and that $25.00." +</P> + +<P> +Breaking off a dead bough from a scrub oak he approached the snake +cautiously while the rest sat in their saddles silently anxious, and +Charley edged his restive pony a little closer to the repulsive reptile. +</P> + +<P> +Slowly Walter moved forward, his gaze fixed intently upon the slowly +waving head before him with its glistening little diamond eyes. Nearer +and nearer he crept till only a few feet separated him from that +venomous head with its malignant unwinking eyes. +</P> + +<P> +"Strike, boy, strike, you're getting too close," shouted the captain. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, golly," shrieked Chris, "look at him, look at him." +</P> + +<P> +Walter had stopped as though frozen in his tracks. His face had gone +deathly pale, and great drops of sweat stood on his forehead. The hand +that held the stick unclasped, and it rattled unheeded to the ground. +</P> + +<P> +"He's charmed," cried the captain. +</P> + +<P> +"Jump to one side, Walt, jump," Charley shouted, "for God's sake, jump. +It's going to strike." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap04"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IV. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A LESSON. +</H3> + +<P> +The reptile's swaying head had drawn back and the huge snake launched +itself forward from its coils straight for the dazed lad only a few +feet in front of it. +</P> + +<P> +Quick as was its spring, Charley was quicker. He dug his spur cruelly +into his little pony's flank. With a neigh of pain the animal leaped +forward. For a moment there was a tangle of striking hoofs and +wriggling coils of the foiled reptile, while Charley leaning over in +his saddle struck with the butt-end of his riding whip at the writhing +coils. Though it seemed an eternity to the helpless watchers it was +really only a few seconds ere the pony sprang away from its loathsome +enemy and Charley with difficulty reined him in a few paces away. The +snake with a broken neck lay lifeless on the ground, while Walter, +sobbing dryly, had sunk into the arms of the captain, who had flung +himself from his horse with surprising agility for a man of his age. +</P> + +<P> +With a glance at the group, Charley dismounted, and petting and +soothing his trembling horse, ran his keen eyes over the animal's legs +and flanks. From the little pony's left foreleg trickled a tiny stream +of scarlet. +</P> + +<P> +"Bring up the packhorse, quick, Chris," he commanded, with a break in +his usually steady voice. +</P> + +<P> +Quickly he removed pack, saddle and bridle from his mount. Rapidly as +he worked, he had only just removed the bridle when the pony sank to +its knees, struggled for a moment to rise, then sank slowly to the +ground, where it lay looking up at its master with dumb appealing eyes. +</P> + +<P> +Something welled up in Charley's throat. He flung himself on the +ground beside his pony and put his arms around its neck. +</P> + +<P> +"Good-bye, Billy," he whispered. "We haven't known each other long but +I've got mighty fond of you, Billy, and when the time came you didn't +fail me. You acted like a gentleman, old man." +</P> + +<P> +Poor Billy's legs kicked restlessly to and fro as the tremors went +through him. +</P> + +<P> +With a mist in his eyes, Charley arose and looked down on the faithful +animal. The wounded leg had already swollen to twice its natural size, +the body was twitching with spasms, and the large brown eyes were +eloquent with pain and suffering. +</P> + +<P> +"I've got to do it, Billy. It's to save you torture, old fellow, just +to save you useless suffering, Billy." He drew his pistol from his +belt, took careful aim just behind the pony's ear, and, turning his +head away, pulled the trigger. +</P> + +<P> +With never a backward glance at the still form, he strode over to the +pack pony and removing the pack transferred his own saddle to the +animal. +</P> + +<P> +The pack was quickly broken up into smaller packages and distributed +equally amongst the party, and soon all were moving forward again on +their westerly course. +</P> + +<P> +It was a still, white, and shaken Walter who once more rode beside his +silent chum. +</P> + +<P> +"You saved my life, Charley, and it's a poor return to merely thank +you," he said earnestly. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't say anything about it," protested Charley, cheerfully. "The +shoe may be on the other foot next time, and I know you will do the +same for me then." +</P> + +<P> +But Walter had not finished. "I want to say," he continued, "that you +are the only one of us qualified to lead this party. Hereafter, what +you say goes with me. I know it will with Captain Westfield too." +</P> + +<P> +"There's Chris," said Charley with a smile. "I fear he will have to +have his little lesson before he gets in that frame of mind. Walt," he +continued earnestly, "I do not want the responsibility but I am not +going to shirk it now that it is thrust upon me. Frankly, though, I +can't help wishing that this trip was over and we were safe back in +town once more." +</P> + +<P> +"Thinking about our visitors of the other night!" Walter inquired. +</P> + +<P> +Charley nodded. "If they meant any good to us, why did they not make +their presence known to us," he reasoned. "Mark my words, we have not +seen the last of them,—but hush, here comes the captain and Chris, +there is no need to worry them with vague conjectures." +</P> + +<P> +"See that prairie ahead, Charley?" asked the captain. "Chris says +there's a big bird in the middle of it, but I can't see anything but +grass." +</P> + +<P> +The party was now only a few hundred yards from the small prairie-like +patch. Charley rose in his stirrups and scanned it carefully. +</P> + +<P> +"Chris is right," he said. "It's a big sand-hill crane." +</P> + +<P> +"Good to eat, Massa Charley?" demanded the little darky, eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"I have eaten some that were equal to the finest turkey." +</P> + +<P> +"Dat settles it," Chris shouted. "Golly, I reckon dis nigger goin' to +show you chillens how to shoot some. My shot, I seed him first." +</P> + +<P> +"Don't shoot, Chris," said Charley, gently, "you can't get it and it +won't be fit to eat if you do." +</P> + +<P> +But Chris' obstinacy and pompous vanity were aroused. "Tink dis nigger +can't shoot, eh? You-alls just watch an' Chris will show you chillens +somfin'." +</P> + +<P> +Charley said nothing more but his mouth set in a grim line. "Time for +his lesson," he murmured to Walter. +</P> + +<P> +Chris waited until they had come within a hundred yards of the crane +when he unslung his rifle and dismounted while the others reined in to +watch the outcome. +</P> + +<P> +The little darky rested his gun on his saddle and took careful aim. +The crack of his rifle was followed by a hoarse squawk and the tall +bird tumbled over lifeless. +</P> + +<P> +Chris danced with delight. "I got 'em, I'se got 'em," he cried. Like +a flash he was on his pony and galloping towards the dead bird. +</P> + +<P> +"Come back, Chris," shouted Charley, but the little darky galloped on +unheeding. +</P> + +<P> +And now the rest of the party beheld a curious thing. Chris' pony had +reached the edge of the grass and had stopped so suddenly as to nearly +throw its rider over its head. In vain did the little negro apply whip +and spur. Not a step further would the animal budge. They saw Chris +at last throw the reins over the pony's head and leaping from his +saddle plunge into the grass. Only the top of his head was visible but +they could trace his progress by that and it was very, very slow. At +last he reached the crane and slinging it over his shoulder began to +retrace his footsteps. His return was infinitely slow, but at last he +regained his pony and dragging himself and his burden into the saddle +headed back towards the group of curious watchers. As he drew nearer +they stared in silent amazement. He was wet from head to foot, his +clothing was in tatters, and the blood flowed freely from a hundred +cuts on face, hands and arms. +</P> + +<P> +He rode up to Charley with a sickly smile. "I got 'em, Massa Charley," +he boasted weakly. +</P> + +<P> +Without a word Charley reached over and took the crane from him. +Stripping away the feathers, he exposed the body of the great bird and +held it up to view. The captain and Walter gave an exclamation of +disgust. The body was merely a framework of bones with the skin +hanging loosely from it. +</P> + +<P> +"It's their moulting season," he explained simply. +</P> + +<P> +"Why you doan tell me dat place full of water, dat grass cut like +knife, an' dat ole mister crane wasn't no good nohow," Chris demanded, +hotly. +</P> + +<P> +Charley gazed at the pathetic, wretched, little figure and his +conscience smote him. +</P> + +<P> +"I told you not to go, Chris," he said gently, "but you would do it. +This time there was plenty of time to explain to you that what you +thought was merely a plot of grass was really a saw-grass pond, and +that sand-hill cranes are not fit for use this season of the year; but +suppose that a danger suddenly threatened us. Is it likely, Chris, +that I would always have time to stop and explain just why I wanted you +to do this or that?" +</P> + +<P> +But Chris was suffering too much pain and humiliation to be soothed by +Charley's explanation. With a snort of anger he dug the spurs into his +pony's flanks and soon was far ahead of the rest of the party. In a +few minutes he came tearing back to them, his face shining with +excitement. +</P> + +<P> +"River ahead, river ahead," he shouted. +</P> + +<P> +"It's the St. Johns," declared Captain Westfield, scarcely less +excited. "There's no other river in these parts." +</P> + +<P> +Although they spurred forward their jaded steeds the animals were so +worn out that it was dusk before they reached the river bank, and they +went into camp immediately. +</P> + +<P> +After the supper was over, Chris approached Charley, who was sitting +apart from the rest, grave, silent, and evidently buried in deepest +thought. The little darky began awkwardly, "Massa Charley, Massa Cap +say you de leader an' he going to do just what you say widout axin' no +questions, Massa Walt say same ting, an' I guess Chris better say same, +now. Golly, I jus' reckon dis nigger made a big fool of hisself over +dat bird." +</P> + +<P> +But although he answered Chris lightly and kindly, Charley was not +elated over his unsought leadership. Vague suspicions were flitting +through his mind, and his new responsibility was weighing heavily upon +his young shoulders. As the evening wore on he still sat silent, +buried in thought. The captain was reading aloud from an old newspaper +he had brought along. Suddenly Charley straightened up, and a swift +glance passed between him and Walter. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap05"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER V. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE 'GATOR HUNTERS. +</H3> + +<P> +The captain was laboriously spelling out the scare-head articles by the +flickering firelight. +</P> + +<P> +"Desperadoes at large." +</P> + +<P> +"Last night twelve convicts, all of them life prisoners, escaped from +E. B. Richardson's turpentine camp near Turnbull. The escape was +effected by their overpowering the guards while their supper was being +served them. One guard was killed and the balance were gagged and tied +up to posts in the barracks. The revolters stripped their prisoners of +arms, ammunition and what money they had. Next they broke into the +commissary, taking a large amount of clothing and provisions and +wantonly destroying the rest. They then made their escape on horses +belonging to the guards. As soon as their absence was discovered, +bloodhounds were put upon the trail which led towards the interior. +The dogs were soon completely baffled, however, for the fugitives had +evidently taken to water whenever they came near a pond or creek. This +ruse, as well as the whole uprising, is believed to have been the +headwork of 'Indian Charley,' one of the escaped prisoners, who, it +will be remembered, was drummed out of his tribe and sentenced by the +courts for the murder of a white settler last spring. Small outlying +settlements will rejoice when this body of hardened desperate men are +once more in the grasp of the law." +</P> + +<P> +"I've got it!" exclaimed Charley, so suddenly that the captain looked +up in mild surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"Got what?" he inquired. +</P> + +<P> +"A pretty bad attack of sleepiness," Charley said with assumed +lightness. "I feel all done up to-night. Guess I'll turn in." +</P> + +<P> +But although he was first to turn in, it was along in the wee small +hours of morning before slumber crept in on his tired brain. +</P> + +<P> +He was awakened by Walter shaking him vigorously. +</P> + +<P> +"Get up, you lazy rascal, get up. The sun is half an hour high, and +breakfast is ready. Get up and gaze upon the beautiful St. Johns." +</P> + +<P> +"What does it look like?" inquired Charley, sleepily, as he buckled on +his heavy leggins and strapped on his pistol belt. +</P> + +<P> +"For a dismal, wretched, man-forsaken stretch of country it beats +anything I ever saw," Walter exclaimed in disgust. "The river itself +is about a half mile wide, but it twists, turns, and forks every few +yards so as to puzzle a corporation lawyer. The shores for half a mile +back from the water are nothing but boggy marsh, with here and there a +wooded island. Ugh, the sight of it is enough to make a man homesick." +</P> + +<P> +"Not giving out already, Walt," Charley said, cheerfully, as he made +his way through the boggy marsh to the water to wash, followed by his +chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Not much," said Walter grimly, "I for one am not going back +empty-handed after coming so far. But I'm beginning to realize that +this is not going to be all a pleasure trip. You noticed the article +that the captain read last evening about the convicts escaping. Can it +be they are the party you saw signs of?" +</P> + +<P> +"I believe they are," agreed his chum as they turned back towards the +camp where the captain and Chris were patiently waiting breakfast. "I +may be wrong, but I thought it all over last night and I decided it was +only fair to tell the others what I suspect." +</P> + +<P> +"The captain will want us all to pack right back home," said Walter, +glumly. +</P> + +<P> +His fears proved true, for when Charley related his suspicions over the +frugal breakfast, the captain was visibly worried. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm the cause of leading you into trouble again, boys," he reproached +himself. "However, I reckon thar ain't nothing to be gained by +regrets. As soon as we have finished eating, we'll pack up and head +back for the coast." +</P> + +<P> +But Charley opposed the plan of returning decidedly. "They have had +plenty of chance to kill us off easily on the way here if they had +wanted to," he argued. "Why they haven't done so puzzles me. Perhaps +they fear a searching party would be sent after us if we do not return +promptly. I have a feeling, though, that they are after bigger game, +although I have not the slightest idea what it can be. Anyway, I am +not going back, now, empty-handed, if there were twice as many +jail-birds at my heels." +</P> + +<P> +"I am with you, Charley," Walter said quickly. +</P> + +<P> +"Me too, Massa," grinned Chris, who was plucky enough when he +understood the nature of the threatened danger. "Golly, I jest reckon +dis nigger got to stay and look out for you chillens." +</P> + +<P> +The captain, whose only concern had been for the boys, brought his hand +down on his knee earnestly. "Then I'm with you, lads, till the last +mast carries away. You're the pilot in these waters, Charley. What +course shall we steer now, lad?" +</P> + +<P> +"I think," suggested Charley, modestly, "that the first thing is to fix +up a shelter in case of rain. We must be careful, and if we come into +contact with any of those fellows we must not let them see that we +suspect what they are. That would cause trouble right away, I am sure." +</P> + +<P> +"Go ahead and give your orders, lad; we will carry them out." +</P> + +<P> +"Then I'll deputize Chris to see if he can't get us some fresh fish," +said Charley with a smile. +</P> + +<P> +Chris, his face beaming, darted away to his saddlebags after his +fishing-tackle. If there was one thing the little darky liked above +all others it was fishing, and wherever he might be, his tackle was +never far away. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as he had departed, Charley, accompanied by the others, set +about selecting a site for their permanent camp. +</P> + +<P> +"You see," Charley explained, "we want a place that we can stand a show +of defending if we should be attacked, and at the same time a place +from which we can escape by water if we have to." +</P> + +<P> +They did not have to go far before they found the very place they were +hunting for, a long, narrow, scantily grassed point that penetrated +through the marsh far out into the river. +</P> + +<P> +"It's just the thing," Charley declared. "We will lead the ponies out +to the end and then fell a few pines across the neck here. That will +form a kind of a fence and keep them from straying away. There's grass +enough on the point to keep them busy for a week at least." +</P> + +<P> +Within half an hour the three eager workers had felled enough pines +across the neck of the point to form a kind of rude stockade. Then +they moved out to the end of the point and began the erection of their +shelter. It was quite primitive and simple. Two saplings about twelve +feet apart were selected as the uprights, and to them, about eight feet +from the ground, two poles were lashed securely with buckskin thongs, +the other ends of the pole being imbedded in the ground. Other smaller +saplings were trimmed and laid across the slanting poles, and on them +were piled layer after layer of fan-like palmetto leaves. In a short +space of time they had completed a lean-to which would protect them +from any storm they were likely to experience at this season of the +year. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you noticed that, Charley?" inquired Walter, as they placed the +last leaves on the lean-to. He pointed to a point, similar to their +own, scarce two thousand yards away, from which rose a thick column of +smoke. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I've been watching it for some time," Charley said. "I guess +it's our friends, the convicts. They are late risers. Somehow or +other, Walt, I've got what prospectors call a 'hunch' that they are not +after us and will not bother us as long as they think we are ignorant +of their true character." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll never trouble trouble 'till trouble troubles me," hummed Walter, +cheerfully. +</P> + +<P> +"A good motto," said his chum gravely, "but nevertheless it's better +still to be ready for trouble if it does come. Now we must provide a +means of retreat. Come, let's open packs one and two, we'll need their +contents soon anyway." +</P> + +<P> +Packs one and two, when opened, revealed bundles of numbered pieces of +tough, thin flexible steel and packages of thick water-proofed canvas. +Under the captain's skilled direction, the steel was quickly framed +together, the canvas stretched over it, and in a short time two canvas +canoes were floating lightly at their painters at the end of the point. +</P> + +<P> +All had been too engrossed in their labors to note the passage of time +until the captain snapped open his old-fashioned silver watch. +</P> + +<P> +"One o'clock," he exclaimed in surprise. +</P> + +<P> +Charley and Walter looked at each other apprehensively. "What can be +keeping Chris?" Walter cried. +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe he is having good luck and hates to quit," suggested Charley. +"Let's give him a while longer." +</P> + +<P> +But two o'clock came and no Chris appeared. +</P> + +<P> +"Get your guns, boys," commanded the captain. "We must go hunt him. +Something's the matter." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap06"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VI. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +SOME SURPRISES. +</H3> + +<P> +Loosening their pistols in their holsters, and grabbing up their guns, +the little party struck out in the direction in which Chris had +disappeared. +</P> + +<P> +They were proceeding almost at a run when Charley checked their +headlong speed. +</P> + +<P> +"Let's go slow," he panted, "it may be that the convicts have got him +and we may be running right into an ambush." +</P> + +<P> +He but voiced the fear in the minds of the others, and they slackened +their advance to a slow walk, keeping a cautious eye on every bush or +tree large enough to conceal an enemy. +</P> + +<P> +Trampled marsh grass and broken twigs gave them an easy trail to +follow, and in a few minutes they were in sight of the river bank. +Charley, who was in the lead, suddenly stopped short with an +exclamation of relief and disgust. +</P> + +<P> +"Just look at that," he said. +</P> + +<P> +On a little grassy knoll close to the water was Chris flat on his back, +his mouth open, fast asleep. A half dozen fine bass lay on the grass +beside him, the end of his fishing line was tied to one ebony leg, and +a coil of slack line lay upon the turf. +</P> + +<P> +"Let's give him a scare for causing us so much worry," Walter suggested. +</P> + +<P> +"Wait a minute," cautioned the captain, "he's gettin' a bite, let's see +what he will do." +</P> + +<P> +The little party drew in behind some bushes, where they could peep out +at the slumbering little darky. +</P> + +<P> +The slack was running out rapidly, and at last the line tauted with a +jerk on the sleeper's leg. +</P> + +<P> +Chris sat up with a start, rubbed his eyes and looked at the sun, then +at the pile of fish beside him. The continued jerking of the line at +his leg seemed to bring him out of his drowsiness. With a broad grin +he began pulling in the line, hand over hand. +</P> + +<P> +The three watchers stood peeping eagerly through the bushes, expecting +to see another fine bass appear. +</P> + +<P> +As the hooked victim was drawn in close to the knoll, Chris gave a +hearty yank and landed it on the grass beside him. +</P> + +<P> +But the result was not what the watchers expected. With a howl of +terror the little darky leaped to his feet and dashed away at a +bounding, leaping run, breaking through the undergrowth as though it +were reeds. One glance, as he flew by the watchers without seeing +them, caused them to hold their sides and double up with laughter. The +line was still fastened to Chris' leg, and drew after it the captive of +his hook. One glance behind and Chris began to holler, "Help, help, +Massa Walt, help, Massa Charley. De snake's goin' to get dis nigger. +Oh golly, oh golly!" +</P> + +<P> +The line caught on a bush and broke short off, but Chris was making for +the lean-to with championship speed and knew it not. +</P> + +<P> +Charley picked up the severed line and held up the prize to view. +</P> + +<P> +"The biggest, fattest eel I ever saw," he declared exultantly. "Guess +it must have been the first one Chris ever saw. They certainly do look +like snakes." +</P> + +<P> +"Keep it out of sight till we hear what he says," Walter said, and +Charley with a smile agreed. +</P> + +<P> +The captain gathered up the fish and stringing them upon a cord slung +them over his shoulder. +</P> + +<P> +In a few minutes they were back at the camp, where they found Chris +stretched out on the ground breathing heavily, his face an ashen hue. +</P> + +<P> +"Why you-alls doan come when Chris hollers for help?" he demanded +indignantly. "'Pears like you don't care if dis nigger's killed." +</P> + +<P> +"We came as soon as we could, Chris," said Walter, soothingly, "what +was the trouble, anyway?" +</P> + +<P> +Chris, mollified, sat up. "Done got into nest ob snakes," he declared, +"reckon I killed fifty of 'em, but more and more kept coming so I had +to run. Golly, I 'spect thar was mighty nigh a hundred chased me most +to camp. Dat's why I yells for you-alls." +</P> + +<P> +The captain smilingly laid down the string of fish, and Chris' +countenance fell. +</P> + +<P> +Charley swung the eel into view. "It isn't a snake, Chris," he +explained, "it's an eel; they are not poisonous, and are mighty good +eating." +</P> + +<P> +For once the little darky was fairly caught without chance of evasion. +Without a word he started building a fire, gutted the fish, washed them +clean, and without removing head or scales, thrust them into the +glowing coals. In twenty minutes they were done, the heads were cut +away, the skin with its load of scales peeled off, and our hungry +hunters sat down to a dish fit for a king. +</P> + +<P> +They were in the midst of the meal when Charley arose and getting his +rifle put it down by his side. "Get your guns quick and keep them +close to you. We are going to have visitors," he said. +</P> + +<P> +The bushes were crackling loudly at the neck of the point and a moment +later a body of men came into view. As they clambered over the +barricade, Charley counted them. They were twelve in number, one of +them an Indian, his face disfigured by a long scar that gave to it a +sinister, malignant expression. +</P> + +<P> +"Keep close together and your guns handy," counseled Charley, as the +band approached. "I declare, if they aren't all unarmed," he added. +</P> + +<P> +"What in the world is the matter with them?" whispered Walter in +amazement; "see, some of them can hardly walk." +</P> + +<P> +As the men drew nearer, our little party's wonder grew. Most of them +dragged themselves forward with stumbling footsteps. Their faces were +haggard, their hands moving restlessly and their features twitching. +They looked like men who had been for days undergoing severe mental and +physical strain and were on the verge of collapse. +</P> + +<P> +Our hunters drew close together with their guns, close to hand and +awaited the convicts' coming with lessened apprehension as they saw +that they carried no guns. +</P> + +<P> +The leader staggered in front, the balance following him like starved +sheep. He stopped before the captain and sank to a seat on a stump. +The perspiration stood in great drops on his face and he was breathing +heavily. +</P> + +<P> +"Strangers," he said hoarsely, "if you've got any tobacco, fer mercy' +sake, loan us some. We haven't had a scrap for two days." +</P> + +<P> +The boys had hard work to restrain a laugh, but the captain hastily +unbuckled the flap of his saddle-bags and brought out a huge package of +plug tobacco which he passed over to the spokesman. +</P> + +<P> +"I brought it along to give to the Indians in case we met any, but I +reckon you need it a heap sight worse," he said mildly. +</P> + +<P> +Without a word of thanks the man tore the package open and distributed +the plugs amongst his followers, and in a moment jaws and pipes were +going vigorously on the enslaving weed. +</P> + +<P> +In five minutes a change was visible; slouching backs began to +straighten, dull eyes commenced to brighten, and the color to steal +back into haggard faces. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm glad I never got into the habit of using it, now I have seen what +a slave it can make of a strong man," whispered Walter in disgust. +</P> + +<P> +"Some of our soldier boys in Cuba went crazy for a while when deprived +of the use of it," said Charley. "None of it for me. It doesn't do a +young growing fellow any good." +</P> + +<P> +As his muscles and nerves relaxed under the influence of the powerful +narcotic, the leader of the convicts removed his pipe from his mouth +with a sigh of relief. +</P> + +<P> +"You sho' saved our lives that time, partner," he cried; "we done +forgot the bacca when we wus getting up our supplies, an' didn't find +it out until we'd come too far to go back. Jim thar," (with a glare at +the culprit,) "had a sizeable piece, but he had to go and lose it on +the way." +</P> + +<P> +"Out for a hunt?" inquired the captain politely. +</P> + +<P> +"'Gators. We're just plain, honest 'gator hunters, working powerful +hard for a mighty poor living," declared the ruffian. "An' you-alls, I +reckon one guess will hit it, arter plumes, I allow." +</P> + +<P> +"We haven't said so," said Charley quickly. +</P> + +<P> +The ruffian favored him with an appraising leer. "Don't have to say +so," he drawled, "if you ain't, what have you-alls got them dinky +little canoes for, an' if you were after 'gators you'd be packing big +rifles 'stead of them fancy guns. You ain't got no call to deny it, +for I was aiming to give you a bit of neighborly advice." +</P> + +<P> +"What is it?" inquired Walter curiously. +</P> + +<P> +"That it ain't no use for you-alls to stop here. The Injuns have got +this section combed out clean. You couldn't get enough plumes around +here to pay for your bacon. Now, I knows of a tidy little island 'bout +twelve miles south of here where there's stacks of the birds. If you +start right now you'll hit it before them pesky varmints of redskins +find it. I'm telling you in pay for that tobacco. Max Hilliard ain't +the kind of man to take nothing without paying for it," he concluded, +grandly. +</P> + +<P> +"Them Indians don't seem to be bringing many plumes into town," said +the captain. +</P> + +<P> +"'Cause why? 'Cause they have to turn the bulk of what they get over +to their chiefs for tribute, an' them varmints are getting so foxy they +just hoards 'em up. They know the price is goin' up right along. Oh, +them pesky varmints are getting cunning these days. But come, boys, we +must be getting back to camp." +</P> + +<P> +The reinvigorated gang of cut-throats arose and with awkward, surly +thanks stamped away. +</P> + +<P> +Their leader lingered behind for a moment. "Better pack right up and +get out for that island right now, partners," he advised. "Thar's a +gang of Injins coming down the river day after to-morrow, an' they'll +be sure to clean it out." His voice grew low and menacing. "Anyway, +you fellows want to get out of here afore day after to-morrow." +</P> + +<P> +Before any of the hunters could question him, he was gone. +</P> + +<P> +"He seems set on our leaving here," said Walter, anxiously. +</P> + +<P> +"I reckon it was sort of an error of judgment that we didn't tie them +fellows up while we had the chance. They was too plum wore out to put +up much of a fight," said the captain, regretfully. +</P> + +<P> +Charley said nothing, but his expression was that of one who after long +puzzling has solved a troublesome problem, and has found the solution +not that which he desired. The outlaws' statement that there was a +party of Indians on their way <I>from</I> the Everglades had given him the +key. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap07"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE QUAGMIRE. +</H3> + +<P> +It was already late when the convicts departed, and our hunters +immediately began their preparations for their first trial with the +plume birds. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder where we had better strike in at first," said the captain, +"there seems a powerful lot of them islands, an' they 'pear to me +pretty much alike." +</P> + +<P> +"I have been keeping a kind of eye out all day," Charley answered, "and +it seems to me that there has been a lot of birds flying around that +little island of dead trees in the marsh right across from us. Suppose +we try that first." +</P> + +<P> +The others readily agreed, and, while Chris was cooking supper, the +boys prepared a number of torches from fat pitch pine and looked over +their fowling-pieces carefully. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as it was dark, Charley and Walter entered one of the canoes +and the captain the other. Chris begged hard to be taken, but Charley +was firm in his refusal. +</P> + +<P> +"We will have to take turn about at tending camp, and you'll have to +stay to-night, Chris," he said. "It won't do to leave the camp alone. +You'll have to keep a sharp lookout to guard against any possible +surprise from wild animals or men. Keep up the fire so we can find our +way back, and have some hot coffee ready. We'll need it when we get +back. Keep a sharp eye out, Chris," he concluded. "It isn't everyone +I would choose for such a responsible place." +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, Massa Charley," exclaimed the little darky, the bald flattery +tickling his great racial vanity, "I jus' reckon nothin' goin' to get +past dis nigger, though I sure 'spects I'd ought to go along so as to +watch out for you chillens." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll be careful," Charley assured him gravely. "If anything troubles +you or you see anything wrong, fire off your gun twice, and we will +hustle back. Shove her off, Walt." +</P> + +<P> +Walter obeyed with a vigor that nearly upset their frail craft. "My, +but she's cranky," he exclaimed. +</P> + +<P> +"She is pretty ticklish," Charley admitted, "but just the craft for our +purpose. She's so light she will float on a good heavy dew, and then +she's so easy to take to pieces and pack away. But we'd better stop +our chattering, for we are getting near the island now." +</P> + +<P> +The moon was shining brightly, giving to the dead whitened trees on the +little island a peculiar ghostly appearance. The canoes soon grounded +in the marsh grass, and, fastening them to paddles, stuck down in the +mud, our hunters shouldered their fowling-pieces and trudged ahead +through the mire. They had prepared themselves well for the trip and +each wore a pair of rubber boots reaching to the hip drawn on over +their rawhide boots and legging. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess we are on the right track," grinned Charley, ere they had +proceeded far. +</P> + +<P> +"Goodness, it's awful," exclaimed Walter. "I wish I had a clothes-pin +on my nose. Smells just like as island of Limburger cheese set in a +lake of broken spoiled eggs." +</P> + +<P> +"I reckon that's comin' it a little strong, Walt," chuckled the +captain. "I guess though we've stumbled onto a good big rookery for +sure. That smell comes mostly from the dead baby birds, broken eggs, +an' such like. But let's keep quiet, lads, we're nearly there now." +</P> + +<P> +A few minutes more and the hunters entered the fringe of dead trees. +By the time they reached the center of the little island where the dead +trees were thickest, the little party was nearly overcome by the +horrible stench. At every step they crushed in nestfuls of decayed +eggs which sent up their protests to high heavens. +</P> + +<P> +At last Charley commanded a halt. "We've gone far enough," he +whispered. "Let's light up our torches together and make as short work +of it as possible. Gee, but I'm sick for a mouthful of sweet, fresh +air." +</P> + +<P> +The fat pine-sticks flared up as though saturated with oil, their +flickering blaze lighting up a weird scene; the gaunt, bare, white +trees, ghosts of a departed forest, the miry ground strewn with eggs of +all sizes, shapes and colors, and dead birds of many kinds, in amongst +which writhed and twisted dirty-looking, repulsive water moccasins and +brilliant yellow and black swamp snakes, while overhead on the whitened +limbs, roosted hundreds of birds partly roused from their sleep by the +glare of the torches. +</P> + +<P> +"We'll have to shoot with one hand and hold our torches with the +other," said Charley. +</P> + +<P> +The guns were very light fowling-pieces, and the birds were clustered +too thickly together to be easily missed. The three guns belched out +their deadly message almost together and a score of birds fell to the +ground. Again and again were the volleys repeated before the dazed +birds recovered their senses enough to take to their wings. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters paused only long enough to pluck from the backs of the +fallen birds the long, silky plumes, which they carefully placed in a +stiff leather valise, then hastened on to another part of the island +where the same performance was repeated. +</P> + +<P> +At first all three hunters stuck close together, but they soon +separated, each picking out for himself what seemed to be choice places +in the little wood. Yielding to the incessant firing the birds began +to desert their roosts in great flocks until at last but few lingered +on the barren limbs. Charley was about to call his companions together +and propose a return to camp when a sudden cry sent the blood tingling +through his veins. It was Walter's voice, and its tone was that of +fear and horror unutterable. Pausing a second to locate the direction +of the sound, Charley bounded away for it at the top of his speed. As +he passed a thick clump of trees the captain broke out from among them +and lumbered on in his wake. +</P> + +<P> +"What's the trouble, Charley?" he panted. +</P> + +<P> +"Something's happened to Walt," he shouted back, "something terrible, +too—just hear him calling." +</P> + +<P> +The cries rose again with redoubled vigor, a world of dread in their +cadence. +</P> + +<P> +The island was small, and in a few minutes Charley was close to the +scene of the cries with the captain right at his heels. Suddenly they +broke out of the underbrush into a small open space perhaps forty feet +across. Near the center of this place was Walter, waving his torch +frantically back and forth. He ceased his cries as their lights +flashed into view. "Stop, stop!" he shouted, "don't come a step +further. I am sinking a foot a minute. The ground is rotten here. I +guess it's up to me to say good-bye, chums," he continued in a voice he +strove vainly to make steady. "You can't help me, and I'm sinking +deeper every minute." +</P> + +<P> +"Cheer up, lad, we'll find a way," declared the old sailor, with a +hopefulness he was far from feeling, for he knew well, by hearsay, of +the terrible swamp quagmires that swiftly suck their victims down to a +horrible death in the foul mud. +</P> + +<P> +Already Walter had sunk to his waist, and it was only a question of +minutes ere the slimy ooze would close over his head. It was a +situation that demanded instant action. For a moment Charley stood +silent beside the captain gazing hopelessly at his doomed chum. Then +he turned swiftly and darted away like an arrow. +</P> + +<P> +"Throw branches, boughs, anything that is light," he shouted back; "I +am going to get the canvas painters." +</P> + +<P> +Frantically the old sailor tore down dead limbs and flung them to the +entombed lad. His labor was in vain, for as each branch struck the +quagmire its own weight sunk it out of sight in the liquid mud. +</P> + +<P> +"Better give it up, Captain," advised Walter, cheerfully. "They are +doing no good, and Charley will soon be back with the ropes." +</P> + +<P> +The captain measured the distance to the helpless lad with a practised +eye, and groaned in despair. "They'll fall short by a dozen feet," he +murmured hopelessly. "God forgive me, for bringing him to this plight." +</P> + +<P> +In a moment Charley was back with the painters from the two canvas +canoes knotted together. His first toss confirmed the captain's fears, +the rope foil ten feet short. +</P> + +<P> +Charley's face grew sickly pale under the torch light, and he stood for +a space like one in a daze. The captain near him was kneeling praying +fervently. +</P> + +<P> +Of the three, Walter was the coolest. He had resigned himself to his +fate at the failure of the first cast of the rope. Already the mire +had sucked him down so that he had to throw his head far back to keep +the filthy stuff from entering his mouth. +</P> + +<P> +"Good-bye, old chums," he called cheerfully, "we've made our last camp +together. Don't feel too down, Charley. Remember what the jockeys +say, 'There's nothing to a race but the finish.'" +</P> + +<P> +Charley roused from his momentary trance. "You shan't die," he cried +wildly, "you shan't, you shan't,—you shan't." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap08"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VIII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE BATTLE. +</H3> + +<P> +All around the quagmire were the skeletons of what had once been great +lusty trees with far-spreading limbs. As Charley uttered his defiance, +his glance rested for a moment on the most advanced of these and a +gleam of hope lit up his face. Although this dead giant of the island +was many feet from the sinking lad, yet in its youth it had sent out +nearly over him one long, slender, tapering limb. In a second +Charley's quick eyes had taken in the possibility and the risk, the +next moment he had skirted round the quagmire at the top of his speed +and was swinging up the giant trunk. +</P> + +<P> +The captain was not slow in divining his intention, "Come back, +Charley," he called wildly. "It'll break with you, lad. Come back, +come back." +</P> + +<P> +Walter managed to twist his head around until he obtained a glimpse of +what was going on. "Don't try it, Charley," he implored, "or there +will be two of us gone instead of one." +</P> + +<P> +But Charley was smiling now and confident. He knew the kind of tree he +was climbing up. It was a black mangrove and among the toughest of +woods when well seasoned. To him it had become merely a question of +reaching the end of that limb before the mire closed over his chum's +head. Never did sailor go aloft more quickly than he swung himself up +from branch to branch. Quickly he reached the overhanging bough. At +its juncture with the trunk he paused for a second to catch his breath, +then swung himself out on it cautiously, hand over hand. The bough +creaked and cracked ominously, but did not break. Near the end of the +limb he stopped, and throwing a leg over to free his hands, he knotted +one end of the rope to the branch and flung the other end to his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"You'll have to pull yourself out, Walt," he sang down cheerily, "this +limb will not bear two." +</P> + +<P> +Fortunately Walter had managed to keep his arms above the mire. He +caught the rope and began to pull. He had occasion now to bless the +years of hard work that had made his body vigorous and his muscles hard +and strong. Slowly he drew himself up out of the clinging ooze which +closed behind him with a sickening, sucking sound. Once clear of the +mud, it was an easy feat to go up the rope hand over hand and soon he +was standing beside Charley at the foot of the tree where they were +speedily joined by the delighted captain. +</P> + +<P> +"Let us thank God, boys, for your wonderful escape. He put that plan +into Charley's head and gave him the courage and daring to carry it +out," the captain said. +</P> + +<P> +Devoutly the two boys knelt at the foot of the tree, while the old +sailor in simple, uncouth speech, offered up a little prayer of humble +thanks for the deliverance of the two lads he loved so well. +</P> + +<P> +As they arose from their knees, Walter caught Charley's hand and wrung +it vigorously. "You saved my life again, old chum," he cried. +</P> + +<P> +But Charley, embarrassed and blushing like a girl, pulled his hand +away. "I guess we'd better be getting back to camp," he stammered, +eager to change the subject. +</P> + +<P> +"Ever modest are the brave," quoted Walter with a laugh. "But you are +right about getting back to camp. I, for one, have had enough +slaughter and adventure for one night." +</P> + +<P> +The guns and plumes were quickly gathered together and, guided by the +light of the camp-fire, the two canoes were soon made fast again at the +point and their occupants were soon busy removing their rubber boots +and drying themselves before the roaring fire. +</P> + +<P> +Chris' eyes shone with delight when they spread out to view the +beautiful feathery pink, white and blue plumes. +</P> + +<P> +"Sixty-three of 'em," he announced after a hurried count. "Golly, +guess dis nigger goin' to be a rich man afore we get back home." +</P> + +<P> +The captain rummaged in his saddle-bags and brought out a small pair of +steelyards. The plumes were tied carefully together in a bunch and +suspended from the hook. +</P> + +<P> +"Twenty ounces," he announced. "At five dollars an ounce that makes +one hundred dollars, lads. That ain't half bad for our first night's +work." +</P> + +<P> +But in spite of their success the boys' faces were grave and depressed. +</P> + +<P> +The captain glanced shrewdly from one to the other. "I reckon you-alls +are thinkin' now of just what I've been studyin' on. You're thinkin' +of all them poor innocent birds we've killed to get them feathers. +You're thinkin' of them and of the dozens you only wounded which are +bound to die a lingerin', sufferin' death, poor things." +</P> + +<P> +Charley shuddered, "I killed one and it didn't fall," he explained, "I +climbed up and looked, and it was resting on a nest containing five, +cute, little fluffy ones." +</P> + +<P> +"We can't go on with it," declared Walter with deep feeling. "It's fit +work for brutes like those convicts but not for us." +</P> + +<P> +"Pulling out the plumes won't kill 'em, an' I don't think it hurts 'em +much," said the captain, thoughtfully. "Maybe we can rig up some sort +of trap that will do the work without killin' 'em. It's time for bed, +now, lads, but think it over and, perhaps, we can hit on some scheme. +Had we better take turns at keeping watch, Charley?" +</P> + +<P> +"I don't think we'll be bothered for a while yet, at any rate," said +Charley, thoughtfully, as he stretched out on his couch and pulled his +blanket over him. "Good-night, all; here goes for the land of dreams." +</P> + +<P> +Although he closed his eyes and endeavored to sleep, it was a long time +before it visited his excited brain. He was only a boy in years and +the responsibility for the safety of the little party now trustfully +thrust upon him bore heavily upon his young shoulders. It would not +have been so bad were it not for the close proximity of that band of +twelve, armed, desperate, escaped murderers. Their attitude towards +the hunters, together with scraps of conversation they had uttered, had +bred in Charley's active mind a theory for their actions and object, a +theory involving a crime so vile and atrocious as to stagger belief. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll be getting flighty if I keep brooding on this thing by myself +much longer," Charley mused. "I am beginning to fear my own judgment +is wrong. I'll confide it all to someone else to-morrow and see if +their opinion agrees with mine." With little reflection, he decided on +Walter as the fittest one to tell. This resolve lifted a burden from +his mind and he soon drifted off into healthy slumber. +</P> + +<P> +"I've got something I want to talk over with you, Walt," he found a +chance to whisper while breakfast was cooking next morning. "Let's get +away somewhere where the captain and Chris will not hear us," he +cautioned. +</P> + +<P> +Their chance came soon after breakfast while Chris was cleaning up the +things and the captain was engaged in sorting out and packing away the +plumes in the tin boxes they had brought with them. +</P> + +<P> +The two boys strolled off slowly and carelessly together, but did not +stop until they had reached the grassy knoll by the river. +</P> + +<P> +"Hurry up, tell me what it is, you have got me half wild with +curiosity," cried Walter, flinging himself at full length upon the turf. +</P> + +<P> +Charley smiled as he pointed at a thin wisp of smoke rising from the +convicts' camp. "It is about our neighbors," he said. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you learned anything new?" Walter demanded eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"No, but I've been putting two and two together concerning them again +and again until I'm uncertain whether I've got the proper answer or +have got everything distorted by long brooding over them. I want to +know what the conclusion would be to a mind that is fresh." +</P> + +<P> +"Good," said Walter, gleefully, "sounds just like a lawyer, go ahead, +I'll be the judge." +</P> + +<P> +"First," said Charley, gravely, "we can admit as an undisputed fact, +that those fellows over there were either close behind or ahead of us +at least part of the way here." +</P> + +<P> +Walter nodded assent, too interested to interrupt. +</P> + +<P> +"From the closeness with which they tally to that newspaper account, +even down to the renegade Indian, we are, I think, justified in +assuming that they are the escaped convicts." +</P> + +<P> +"Their faces would convict them without any evidence," Walter declared. +</P> + +<P> +Charley was now so absorbed in his chain of reasoning that he scarcely +heeded the interruption. "Twelve life convicts, which by the laws of +this state means twelve murderers, men without mercy, who would +hesitate at nothing, are for several days and nights close to a party +of four who do not even keep a watch at night. Why do they not kill +off the four and help themselves to several things that would make them +more comfortable?" +</P> + +<P> +"I give it up," said his puzzled chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Again," said Charley following his line of reasoning, "what do bodies +of men who have broken prison always do when they escape? Separate as +soon as possible, and scatter in all directions, make their way to +small, isolated places, change their appearance as much as possible, +and each shift for himself. To remain together increases the risk of +capture for each and all. There must be some powerful motive to make +them take such risks. Such men risk nothing except for money. But +there are no banks here to be looted, no strangers to be waylaid in +dark alleys, not even a blind beggar to steal pennies from." +</P> + +<P> +"Then, for goodness' sake, what is their object?" demanded the +mystified Walter. +</P> + +<P> +Charley's voice lowered in its seriousness. "I know there is a party +of Indians on the river now. I found traces on the shore, where they +had embarked in boats, they are likely the same party that were hunting +in the woods and have now returned to the Everglades. By the signs I +pointed out to you there is another party following. I told you I +could tell but little from the signs, but there is among the convicts +one of their race who can read their signs like an open book." +</P> + +<P> +"But the Indians are poor," Walter objected. "I don't see the +connection." +</P> + +<P> +"Remember what the leader of the convicts said yesterday, that each +Indian had to give the larger portion of his plumes to his chief as +tribute. Consider a party of expert hunters after a long hunt of +weeks; why, the chief's share must run up into the hundreds of dollars +to say nothing of each brave's individual portion." +</P> + +<P> +"What a diabolical scheme!" cried Walter in horror, "they mean to +slaughter the Indians for their plumes as they come down the river from +the 'Glades.'" +</P> + +<P> +"That's the conclusion I reached," said Charley coolly. "I am glad +that you prove I am not going crazy brooding over the matter." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap09"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IX. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE BEES AND THE BEAR. +</H3> + +<P> +Walter's first feeling was of horror and indignation, mingled with +frank admiration for the cleverness with which Charley had reasoned the +matter out to its logical conclusion. +</P> + +<P> +"You have got a great head on you, old chap," he said, affectionately. +"It certainly seems as though you have hit the nail on the head this +time. I understand, now, why their leader was so anxious to have us +move away. They expect to encounter the Indians somewhere in this +neighborhood and they do not want any witnesses. What shall we do, +Charley?" +</P> + +<P> +"We are in an unpleasant fix," said his chum, musingly. "The only safe +thing to do, I guess, is to take that convict's advice and move away at +once. If we interfere with their plans or even let on that we know +what they are, it will mean fight, with us outnumbered three to one." +</P> + +<P> +"But we can't leave here and let those fiends ambush and murder those +unsuspecting Indians," said Walter indignantly. +</P> + +<P> +"Certainly not," said his chum, heartily. "But we must be prepared to +take some risks. We can't fight that crowd in the open, they are too +many for us. We'll have to outwit them and put the Indians on their +guard without letting the convicts suspect that we have had a finger in +the pie. It would be an easy trick to turn if it were not for that +renegade Indian with them. I guess there isn't anything much that +escapes those black, beady eyes of his." +</P> + +<P> +"You have a plan then?" said Walter eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"One, such as it is. You see, we are between those fellows over there +and the Everglades. A party of savages coming from the Glades would +have to pass us before coming in rifle range of the convicts' camp. +Now we could halt them here and explain matters, but that would give us +dead away to the enemy." +</P> + +<P> +Walter's face fell. "They would be sure to catch on," he admitted. +</P> + +<P> +Charley pointed far to the south where, half a mile distant, another +long point jutted out through the marsh into the river. "That is the +key to the situation," he declared. "The Seminoles are not expected +until to-morrow, if that man's remarks are true. Well, beginning +to-morrow morning early, one of us will be on that point while daylight +lasts,—Indians do not generally travel at night, and when we sight +them we will signal and warn them, and the convicts will be none the +wiser. The Seminoles are no cowards and we can join them and wipe that +scum of humanity off the face of the earth." +</P> + +<P> +"Splendid," approved Walter enthusiastically. "But let's head for camp +now. The others will be wondering what has become of us." +</P> + +<P> +At the camp a surprise awaited the two boys. The captain was stumping +back and forth near the fire, his usually good-natured face nearly +purple with suppressed anger, while, squatting on his heels before the +fire, sat Indian Charley, his face impassive but his keen beady eyes +watching the irate sailor's slightest movement. +</P> + +<P> +At the sight of the boys, the captain lumbered towards them, waving a +dirty piece of paper. "Read that," he roared, "just brought in by that +copper-faced, shoe-button-eyed son of a sea cook." +</P> + +<P> +It was a piece torn evidently from a paper bag and on it was scrawled +in big, almost undecipherable characters. +</P> + +<P> +"The shootin' an' racket you-alls are doin' air drivin' the 'gators +away. You-alls have got to move. This is our huntin' ground. For +sake of that tobacco, which comes mighty handy, we'll give you-alls +'till to-morrow noon to move peaceable afore we comes down on you, +hands and feet." +</P> + +<P> +"How's that for gall?" demanded the captain, his wrath increasing, but +Charley silenced him with a shake of his head and turned to the +impassive redskin. "Tell your leader, that we are figuring on making a +move to-morrow," he said, courteously. The Seminole's beady orbs met +his in a suspicious glance, then he turned without a word and glided +noiselessly away among the bushes. +</P> + +<P> +Walter and Charley exchanged significant glances. "That means they do +not expect them before to-morrow afternoon," Charley commented. +</P> + +<P> +"Who! expecting who? Don't talk in riddles, lads," exclaimed the +captain, testily, his temper still suffering from the unaccustomed +restraint he had put upon it. +</P> + +<P> +In a few words Charley related his suspicions to him and Chris, and +detailed the plan he and Walter had agreed upon. +</P> + +<P> +The captain's face beamed with unenvious admiration as he gave Charley +a hearty thump on the back that well-nigh drove the breath out of the +lad's body. +</P> + +<P> +"Reasoned out plain an' fair as day," he exclaimed, "I reckon you've +hit it right plum center first shot, lad. You bet we'll be on the +watch to warn them poor Indians, an' if there's any fightin' we'll sho' +help to rid this country of them ornary, low-down, murderin', +cut-throats. It's a great head you've got for young shoulders, +Charley. You've reasoned it out like a detective and made your plans +like a general." +</P> + +<P> +Charley blushed with pleasure. "It looks logical and I hope it will +work out all right," he said, secretly pleased at the tribute to his +mental powers. But, as a great detective or general sometimes does, +Charley had passed over the simple, vital, obvious point that was the +most important of all and from its omission, destined to be far +reaching and terrible to hunters, Indians and convicts. +</P> + +<P> +"There's nothing special to do this morning," said Walter, "so let us +make a trip to that point and pick out a good place for our lookout." +</P> + +<P> +"Judging from their actions and their note, our neighbors don't intend +to make a move against us until to-morrow, so I guess it will be safe +for all of us to go," said Charley. "We will take the guns and make a +kind of all day hunting trip." +</P> + +<P> +"Den, I spect dis nigger's got to rustle around an' fix up some lunch," +said Chris, his face falling. "Golly, I spect you-alls going to be +powerful hungry nigh noon." +</P> + +<P> +"No, this is going to be a holiday for all of us," declared Walter with +boyish enthusiasm. "For one day let's all be just like the Indians, +get our food with out guns and not even take a frying-pan with us." +</P> + +<P> +To Chris' great delight the others gave ready assent to the plan. The +horses were watered and staked in fresh spots, and, with guns over +shoulders, our party followed their point in to shore, then struck off +southward along the margin of the marsh toward the distant point, +destined to be Point Lookout. +</P> + +<P> +They found it much like their own point, but somewhat more heavily +wooded. +</P> + +<P> +"Here's the very place for our lookout," exclaimed Walter, pausing +beside a clump of great oaks. "See, it couldn't be better if it had +been made to order. This knoll commands a good view of the marshes and +river towards the Everglades, while those trees will hide the watcher +from our point, and of course from the convicts' camp. I have got a +big, red, bandanna handkerchief which we can use as a flag. When the +one on watch sees the Indians coming, he can fasten it to that dead +sapling further out. That will be a signal to those in camp to get +ready for a hot time." +</P> + +<P> +"Bravo," said the captain approvingly. "You have got the right course +logged out to a point by the compass. Steer as you are going, lad, and +you'll have stored in your head as well packed and sorted a cargo as +good as Charley's here." +</P> + +<P> +"Or me, or me, Massa Captain," chimed in Chris. "Golly, I reckon +you-alls don't know what a smart nigger I is when I gets de chance." +</P> + +<P> +"We are all wonders, in our own minds," laughed Charley. "We have got +a chance to show our smartness right now. I, for one, am getting +mighty hungry and we haven't bagged anything for dinner yet." +</P> + +<P> +"We are for the woods, then," cried Walter, "on, noble leader. Shall +we separate or go together?" +</P> + +<P> +"We must stick together, provided you will try to keep that mouth of +yours closed and quit guying me," Charley retorted. "If not, I shall +feel it my duty to take you across my knee and give you a good +spanking." +</P> + +<P> +Walter checked the ready sally which was on his tongue's end, for they +had been moving on while talking and Charley was now leading them into +the dense forest where silence was absolutely necessary if they hoped +to secure any game. +</P> + +<P> +For some time they picked their way carefully through the forest, +warily avoiding dry twigs, and maintaining an absolute silence. But +although they saw numerous signs of game, both large and small, not a +glimpse of even a rabbit or squirrel rewarded their eager watchfulness. +</P> + +<P> +At last when all were beginning to get a bit discouraged, Charley +called a halt. "Now, all of you listen hard as you can for a few +minutes and then tell me what you hear," he said. +</P> + +<P> +For a full minute his companions listened intently, then the captain +gave an exclamation of disgust. "Can't hear anything out of the +usual," he declared. +</P> + +<P> +"Once or twice I thought I heard something, but I guess it was only my +imagination," said Walter. +</P> + +<P> +"And you, Chris?" inquired Charley of the little darky, whose face wore +a puzzled expression. +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, dis nigger hear something powerful plain but he can't just make +it out. Don't sound like anything he ever heard, afore. Now hit +sounds like a big dog growling an' then again hit sounds like one +whinin'." +</P> + +<P> +"Your ears are pretty good, Chris," Charley commented. "I guess we'll +follow up that sound for a little while." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap10"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER X. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +SHOOTING A THIEF. +</H3> + +<P> +"Are you working one of your little surprises on us?" Walter inquired +eagerly of his chum as the little party again advanced in the direction +Chris indicated. "Come, confess now that you know what is ahead of us." +</P> + +<P> +"I am all at sea this time," admitted Charley. "I heard just what +Chris described, but I can't fit the sounds to any animal I know. It's +getting plainer now, surely you can hear it." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," said Walter, with a puzzled frown, "but what under the sun, +moon, and stars can it be?" +</P> + +<P> +"A few minutes will settle the question. It's only a little ways off +now. My! it's getting to be a terrible din, we must be close at hand." +Charley's prophecy soon proved true for they suddenly came out of the +forest into a space which had evidently been fire-swept years before, +for it was bare of undergrowth and of the former mighty pines nothing +remained but the white, lifeless trunks. +</P> + +<P> +For a moment the hunters stood in the edge of the clearing, gazing in +speechless astonishment at the sight before them. +</P> + +<P> +Close to one of the largest of the dead pines was a large black bear, +reared back on his haunches and striking with both paws viciously at +some unseen foe. The hair of muzzle, head and paws was matted and +plastered with some thick liquid, giving him a curious frowsy +appearance. He was evidently in a towering rage but it was also +apparent that he was suffering great pain, his ferocious growls being +interspersed with long, low, pathetic whines. +</P> + +<P> +"He acts as though he had gone crazy," exclaimed Walter, recovering his +speech. +</P> + +<P> +At sound of his voice, the bear's head turned in their direction. With +a growl of fury he dropped to all fours and with incredible speed made +for the hunters. +</P> + +<P> +Charley had been quick to take in the meaning of the strange scene. +</P> + +<P> +"Shoot and run," he shouted, as the maddened animal charged. +</P> + +<P> +He, Walter and the captain shot almost at once. The shots struck home +but the sorely wounded beast still lumbered forward at a rapid pace. +</P> + +<P> +"Run," shouted Charley, striking into the forest at the top of his +speed, closely followed by the captain and Walter. They had run but a +few paces before Walter, who was in the rear, stopped suddenly. "Chris +has stayed," he shouted to the others, "we can't leave him." +</P> + +<P> +Almost as rapidly as they had fled, the three retraced their steps to +the edge of the clearing. +</P> + +<P> +"Stay where we are and watch," commanded Charley, with a grim smile. +"The bear's too badly hurt to be dangerous. Watch him, fellows, just +watch." +</P> + +<P> +Chris had knelt where he had been standing when the bear charged, had +rested his rifle on his knee, and was taking careful aim at the +advancing beast. There was a look of stubborn determination on his +little ebony face while his heart was beating with pride and +exultation. Here was his great chance to turn the tables on his white +companions. No longer would they dare tease him about running from the +eel or about his adventure after the crane. He would be able now to +twit them all, even the captain, with running away while he, Chris, +stood his ground. +</P> + +<P> +"Run, Chris, run," shouted Charley from the edge of the clearing, but +the little darky ignored the warning. +</P> + +<P> +His keen eyes could see that the bear was badly wounded and liable to +drop at any minute. Already it was swaying drunkenly from side to side. +</P> + +<P> +Now it was forty feet away, now thirty and almost ready to drop. Ten +feet more and he would fire, Chris resolved. But that ten feet proved +the ambitious little darky's undoing. A concentrated drop of buzzing +liquid fire struck him above the eye, while hand and legs seemed +splashed with molten fire. Down went the rifle with a thud and with a +shrieked "Oh golly, oh golly, oh golly!" a black streak cleared the +open ground with kangaroo-like leaps and shot into the forest. +</P> + +<P> +"Run for the marsh and roll in the mud, Chris,"' shouted Charley after +the streak. +</P> + +<P> +The bear stumbled forward a few feet further, then sank slowly to the +ground. Charley looked after the flying Chris, shaking with laughter, +while the others stood beside him in silent amazement. +</P> + +<P> +"Hold on a minute," said Charley, as the captain stepped forward toward +the bear which was kicking, out in the last convulsive throes of death. +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, aye," agreed the captain cheerfully, stopping short, "you're the +pilot in these waters, lad." +</P> + +<P> +"I promise you I will not keep you at anchor long, Captain," laughed +Charlie, as with his hunting-knife he began hacking at a clump of +scrub-palmetto. +</P> + +<P> +A few minutes was all the time needed to accumulate a heap of the big, +fan-like leaves. These Charley made into three torch-like bundles, +taking care to place a dead dry leaf between each two green ones. +Binding each bundle together with a wisp of green leaf, he struck a +match and lit up the three, passing one to the captain and Walter, and +keeping one himself. +</P> + +<P> +The dry leaves blazed up like tinder but the green ones only smoldered, +sending forth a volume of black, thick pungent smoke. +</P> + +<P> +"Keep waving them about you," he cautioned, "that's the way. Now all +ready. Forward, march." +</P> + +<P> +As they drew nearer to the carcase of the hear, they became aware of a +curious humming sound in the air. The cause was soon apparent and the +mystery that had puzzled them was solved when they reached the beast. +The carcase was covered with bees while close above it hummed a swarm +of others watching for an exposed place to plant their stings. +</P> + +<P> +A few minutes beating about with the smoking torches cleared the scene +of the vicious little insects, those not stupefied by the smoke beating +a hasty retreat back to their home in the hollow log which bruin had +tried to despoil. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters had now a chance to view their prize without being +molested. It was only a common, black Florida bear, weighing not over +four hundred pounds, but fat and in the pink of condition. Its thick, +glossy fur had protected its body from the bees' assault, but swollen +muzzle, eyes, and ears, told of the penalty it had paid in playing +robber for its favorite food,—honey. +</P> + +<P> +All fell to work with their hunting-knives and speedily had the heavy +skin removed. +</P> + +<P> +Walter smacked his lips as he cut away a couple of huge steaks with a +thick rim of fat. "Gee, those are fit for a king," he exclaimed. "I +wonder where our cook is. Do you suppose he has stopped running yet?" +</P> + +<P> +Charley chuckled. "It's mean," he admitted, "but I can't help but +laugh when I think of how he looked kneeling there in stern resolve to +be covered with glory, and the transformation when he was covered with +bees." +</P> + +<P> +The three laughed heartily at the recollection, but Walter's laugh +ended in a hungry sigh. "I wish he was here to cook these steaks. If +he comes back, don't let's tease him, fellows. He's suffered enough +for one time." +</P> + +<P> +"I bet he will be back by the time we get this fellow cut up and a fire +going," Charley said. +</P> + +<P> +But the big animal was all cut up, what was not wanted for immediate +use cut into thin strips for drying, and a roaring fire going, and +still no sign of the missing one. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess we will have to cook some of it the best we can, +although I expect we'll make a sorry mess of it without Chris. I guess +broiling some of it will be the easiest way." +</P> + +<P> +Each cut himself a long, green palmetto stem which would not take fire +readily and sharpened one end to a point upon which he impaled a +generous slice of steak. With flushed faces and singed fingers they +kept turning the meat over and over before the blaze. It was an +unsavory mess, burnt and ash covered, which they at last pronounced +done and deposited upon a clean palmetto leaf. Hungry as wolves, each +cut off a generous mouthful and began to chew. They chewed and chewed +looking at each other with keen disappointment on their faces. +</P> + +<P> +Walter at last spat out his mouthful in disgust. "It's tough as sole +leather and about as tasteless. We even forgot the salt, too." +</P> + +<P> +A little figure lurking behind a tree on the edge of the clearing +evidently deemed this just the proper time to make its presence known, +for it stepped boldly out from behind its shelter. Its right eye was +closed tight by an enormous swelling, and its nose was twice its +natural size, but it strode forward with head up and dignity in its +tread. +</P> + +<P> +"Chris," shouted in delight the three beside the fire. +</P> + +<P> +The little darky looked down on the pile of burnt and ruined meat in +disgust. "I knowed you chillen's would go an' spoil de best part ob my +bear. Now you-all jis get out ob de way an' dis nigger goin' to show +you how to cook b'ar meat." +</P> + +<P> +"But it's so tough, Chris, that we can't chew it," Walter objected. +</P> + +<P> +"You chillens jes get out of de way like I tells you," said the little +negro vaingloriously. "Just come back in forty minutes an' dinner will +be ready. Leave dis nigger alone 'till then 'cause he's powerful cross +to-day." +</P> + +<P> +Charley nudged the captain and Walter and the three withdrew to a +little distance, leaving Chris in possession of the field. +</P> + +<P> +"Chris will fix it up all right," Charley assured them. "While he's at +it, let's have a try for some of the honey the bear was into," he +suggested. +</P> + +<P> +His two companions gave an eager assent. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap11"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XI. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE PAWPAWS. +</H3> + +<P> +Three more torches of palmetto leaves were quickly made, lighted up, +and, with extra handfuls of the green leaves, our party advanced +towards the tree where they had first seen the bear. They were met by +a buzzing horde of the workers who swarmed out to defend their homes, +but these were soon silenced by the pungent smoke of the torches and +our hunters soon stood by the tree where bruin had met his Waterloo. +</P> + +<P> +A few feet from the ground was a massive limb and a little above it was +a cavity in the trunk itself, around which more bees buzzed +industriously. A few waves of the smoke torches quieted these, and +Charley swung himself up on the limb beside the hole. A little more +smoke completed the job and with his hunting-knife he dug out great +squares of the clear, dripping comb, which he passed down to his +companions who had stripped off a slab of hickory bark for its +reception. +</P> + +<P> +"That is more than we can eat," he at last declared, slipping to the +ground, "besides I've got a 'hunch' that Chris has got that bear meat +ready for us and I am hungry as a wolf." +</P> + +<P> +"It may be cooked all right but it will still be too tough to eat," +mourned Walter. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't you believe it," chuckled Charley, "those bear steaks are going +to be as tender as chicken. If you will not give me away to Chris, I +will show you the reason why." +</P> + +<P> +The captain and Walter eagerly gave the promise of secrecy. +</P> + +<P> +"See that shrub?" said the instructor, pointing to a banana-like stalk +of a tree-like shrub without branches, but from which protruded large, +round glossy leaves with short stems. Close to its trunk near the +crown hung a close cluster of golden fruit about the size of an apple. +</P> + +<P> +Walter plucked one of the ripe fruit and bit into it hungrily, but spat +out the mouthful in disgust. +</P> + +<P> +"You have to acquire a taste for it, the same as you have to for turtle +eggs, olives, and a dozen other things that taste unpleasant at first," +Charley said. "You'll find that little tree scattered all over Florida +where the soil is at all rich. It is called pawpaw by the natives, who +regard it highly for the sake of its one peculiar virtue. A few drops +of the juice of its ripe fruit spread over a tough Florida steak will +in a few minutes, make it as tender as veal. The same results can be +attained by wrapping the steak in the leaves and letting it lay a +slightly longer time. The best of it is that meat treated in this +manner is not injured in the slightest. In fact it seems to gain in +flavor from the treatment. But there is Chris waving to us. Keep +quiet about the pawpaws. I want to hear his explanation." +</P> + +<P> +They were too hungry to lose any time in obeying Chris' signals. The +little darky had arranged a kind of tablecloth of moss on the ground +and had put upon it slabs of clean cut bark for plates, while upon each +rude plate reposed a thick, juicy, bear steak, done to a turn. The +steak was delicious and tender as chicken and with a taste all its own. +</P> + +<P> +"You're a born cook, Chris," declared Walter, as he paused to take a +full breath. "What makes it so tender, now? that which we cooked was +tough as leather." +</P> + +<P> +"You chillens doan know how to cook like dis nigger," declared the vain +little darky, proudly. "Hit's all in de cookin', Massa Walter, hit's +all in de cookin'." +</P> + +<P> +Charley turned over a morsel of his steak, examined it closely and +sniffed it critically, while Chris watched him with anxious suspicion, +and Walter with mischief dancing in his eyes. +</P> + +<P> +Slowly Charley's eyes took on an absent, far-away look, his arms and +legs seemed to stiffen, and a tremor ran through his limbs. Chris +watched him with distending eyeballs. +</P> + +<P> +"I see," Charley said, in a low, hollow voice, "I see a tree, not a big +tree, but a small one. It has round, green leaves and a cluster of +golden fruit near the top. What is it I see creeping toward the tree, +a monkey? No, not a monkey, though it looks like one. It's a boy, a +small black boy. He nears the tree. He looks around to see if anyone +is watching. He shins up the tree and breaks off several of the +leaves. I see him again near a big fire. He still has the leaves. He +is wrapping them around pieces of meat. As he does it, I can hear him +chuckling to himself. I see——" +</P> + +<P> +"Oh golly, stop him, stop him! He's got de 'haunts'!" cried Chris in +terror, as he grabbed Charley by the shoulder and shook him wildly. +</P> + +<P> +Charley seemed to come to with a start. "Where was I, what was I +saying?" he murmured. +</P> + +<P> +"You was filled wid de haunts," declared Chris solemnly. "You was jes' +tellin' to yourself how dis shiftless, lying nigger got dem pawpaw +leaves to make dis bar meat tender." +</P> + +<P> +Walter and the captain were roaring with laughter, but Chris went on +solemnly with his confession. "Golly, but dis nigger's been a powerful +liar lots ob times, but you doan ketch him at it any more. You sho' is +got de conjerer eye, Massa Charley, else how you know dat lake wid de +crane on it was full of grass like knives, else how you see bees round +dat bear when you is too far off to see 'em, else how you see Chris +getting dem pawpaw leaves when you is clean out ob sight. I guess dis +nigger doan lie any more when you is round, Massa Charley." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, if you are all through, we had better make back for camp for the +sun is getting low," said Charley, hurriedly, to forestall a lecture on +the wickedness of lying, which he saw by the working of the captain's +features, he was preparing to deliver to the little culprit. +</P> + +<P> +Their things were quickly collected together and they were soon headed +back to their point. With the passing of the excitement of the day, +they all began to have vague alarms as to what might have happened +during their absence, and to reproach themselves for leaving the place +so long unguarded. +</P> + +<P> +Their reproaches were wasted, however, for they found everything as +they had left it, save stuck in the bark of a pine tree near the fire, +was the badly scrawled notice. "Don't forget to pull out from these +diggin's afore to-morrow noon." +</P> + +<P> +"They evidently mean business," said Walter, as the hunters stood +together reading the dirty, ill-written paper. +</P> + +<P> +"And I'm not so sure but what we would be wiser if we obeyed their +warning, but I hate to run away from such a crowd," observed Charley +gravely. +</P> + +<P> +"I feel the same way," agreed Walter, "but it would be cowardly to go +now and leave the Seminoles to their fate." +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, aye, lad, truly spoken," said the captain, firmly, "stay we must." +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, I jis guess dis nigger ain't none scairt of their +threatenings," chimed in Chris. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we seem to be pretty well agreed," Charley said, trying in vain +to shake off the vague feeling of impending evil, that had suddenly +settled over him. "Speaking for myself, I feel too keyed up and +anxious to do anything much until we get this thing over with. I move +we get all our gear into shape and try to plan some way to get the +plume birds hereafter without killing. That will take us until dark, I +guess. Then let's quietly take our blankets and move back into the +forest a ways. Our neighbors may take a notion to pay us a visit +without waiting for to-morrow." +</P> + +<P> +The others readily agreed to this proposal and were soon busy trying to +scheme out some means to take their feathered prey alive. +</P> + +<P> +It was Chris who at last solved the problem. +</P> + +<P> +"You know dat stuff we used puttin' dem boats together?" he demanded. +</P> + +<P> +"A quick drying glue," exclaimed Charley, catching the idea at once. +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, I should say hit was," grinned Chris, "hit dun stick my fingers +together so tight that it peared like I'd never get 'em apart. Now +doan you reckon by spreading hit thick-like on dem limbs whar dem birds +roosts dat hit would hold 'em down till we-alls got ready to pry 'em +off?" +</P> + +<P> +"The lad's got the right idea, I reckon," allowed the captain. "We +could fix the limbs up just before dusk and needn't bother about 'em +any more until it was broad daylight." +</P> + +<P> +The boys were unstinted in their praise of Chris' suggestion until the +little darky forgot the humiliation of the day and was once more his +bright, vain, cheery self. +</P> + +<P> +As night shut down on the point, more wood was heaped upon the fire, a +hasty lunch was made from the remains of dinner, and, taking their guns +and blankets with them, our hunters stole off into the depths of the +wood. They soon reached a little open spot that they had noted during +the day. Their blankets were spread out upon the moss-covered ground +close together so as to be encircled with the hair rope which Charley +had brought to protect them from snakes while sleeping. +</P> + +<P> +Before they wrapped themselves in their blankets, the captain offered +up a fervent, simple prayer of thanks for past protection and a plea +for blessings on the work before them on the morrow. +</P> + +<P> +"How much of that glue stuff is there, Chris?" whispered Walter as they +stretched out to rest. +</P> + +<P> +"'Bout two quarts, I reckon." +</P> + +<P> +"Pshaw, that will not last us any time," said Walter in disappointment. +"It will be all gone in a week." +</P> + +<P> +It was well for the lad's peace of mind that he could not look forward +into the future and see how little of Chris's discovery was destined to +be used. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap12"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHARLEY'S MISTAKE. +</H3> + +<P> +All were awake early next morning, in fact, the captain and Charley had +slept but little during the night. They were worried and anxious as to +what the coming day would bring forth. As he lay awake during the long +silent hours, Charley felt his burden of responsibility grow heavy +indeed and doubts began to assail him as to the wisdom of the course he +was pursuing. After all, there was yet time to retreat. He had only +to say the word and his companions would willingly follow. His plans +in remaining were built largely on guesswork and theory. If they +worked out as he had reasoned, the Indians would be warned. With their +aid the convicts could be surrounded, captured, and sent back to a +coast town under guard. Some blood would likely be shed but not as +much as if they were left free to run at large. But if his reasoning +were wrong, if his plan for some unforeseen reason, failed,—the boy +shuddered as he thought of himself and three companions pitted against +twelve desperate ruffians, far away from any help or assistance. Deep +down in his active brain some awakened cell was trying to send a +message of warning, but it would not rise to his consciousness, he +could not quite grasp it or its meaning. Thus tortured and worried, +our young leader passed a weary night, and was relieved when dawn began +to break and his companions to awaken. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as it was light enough, they made their way back cautiously to +the camp, where they found everything as they had left it. Evidently +they had had no visitors during the night. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, it was just as well to be on the safe side," Charley announced, +"anything is liable to happen now. I guess while you make some coffee, +Chris, I will stand guard at our wall. Walt, you make up two packages +of provisions, say enough to do for a couple of days and put one in +each of the canoes. Captain, if you will, please look over the outfits +and pick out what we will be able to carry and what would be most +useful to us if we should have to take to the canoes in a hurry. Don't +be alarmed," he said cheerily, noting the grave look on the others' +faces. "Things are going to go all right, but a good general always +looks to it that he has a way of retreat ready. Now, as soon as Chris +has coffee ready, we will have one last talk together about this +thing." Shouldering his rifle, he made his way to the breastwork of +fallen trees, where he paced back and forth until Chris came to relieve +him for breakfast. +</P> + +<P> +During the meal, Charley went over the whole puzzle again, explaining +freely his doubts and fears, and the possibility of his whole chain of +reasoning being wrong. "Now you know all I know about it," he +concluded. "There is yet time to escape. If you say the word, we'll +start in half an hour." +</P> + +<P> +The captain shook his head gravely. "Your reasoning seems clear as +print to me, lad. You have just brooded over it so long that it's +natural you should begin to have doubts and fears. To me it's as sound +as when you first gave it. That being so, we can't run an' leave them +poor ignorant savages to be shot down maybe like snipe. It wouldn't be +Christian like to go when that chance remains." +</P> + +<P> +"Those are my sentiments exactly," said Walter eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"Good," Charley sighed in relief, "this shifts at least part of the +responsibility from my shoulders. Now for our plans. Walter, I am +going to put you to watch at Lookout Point to-day. If you see the +Indians, signal them in and tell them of the whole plot against +them,—there's sure to be one or more of them who understands English. +As soon as you make them understand, lead them back through the woods +till you get to the neck of the convicts' point, then post them behind +trees and stumps so the convicts cannot get by them. Then fire two +shots close together and we will be with you in ten minutes, and our +birds will be caged. Have Chris fix you up a lunch, for the Indians +are not likely to pass the point until afternoon." His voice sank from +the crisp tone of command to a softer note, and his hand for a moment +rested affectionately on his chum's shoulder as he continued. "I hate +to send you out there alone, old chap, but I have got to stay here. +The convicts may try to drive us out of this place this morning. No +matter how much shooting you may hear, don't desert your post." +</P> + +<P> +"But, if for some reason you want me, how am I to know?" +</P> + +<P> +Charley reflected for a moment. "I have a couple of rockets in my +saddle-bags," he said; "if I send up one, you may know it's a signal to +come back. Now be sure to keep your eyes out for trouble as you near +the point. No one can tell, now, what the situation may be." +</P> + +<P> +The two chums silently clasped hands in a hearty, farewell grip, and +Walter, picking up his rifle and some of the remnants from breakfast, +vaulted the tree breastwork and with a cheery nod and wave of his hand +to those left behind, quickly vanished in the forest. +</P> + +<P> +Charley stood for a moment gazing after him with something like a mist +in his honest brown eyes. "Dear old fellow," he murmured, "God grant +that all will turn out well and that we may be safe together again +before night falls." +</P> + +<P> +The captain's voice brought him back from his musing. "Well, Charley," +he sung out cheerily, "I've got together the things we can't well spare +and distributed them between the canoes. I reckoned that was where you +wanted 'em. What's the next orders, General?" +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing, but to get our guns and all the spare ones, and take stands +along the wall. Those fellows may try to drive us off this morning." +</P> + +<P> +The captain grinned with satisfaction as he took his place behind the +barricade. +</P> + +<P> +"I reckon they'll have to be pretty smart to get on this point," he +commented. "There's a tidy stretch of right open ground to be crossed +before they reach here." +</P> + +<P> +"I picked it out just for that reason," Charley admitted. "We can +stand them off here during the day, but at night we cannot stop them, I +fear." +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, aye," nodded the captain thoughtfully, "that's the reason for +fixing up the canoes." +</P> + +<P> +Charley nodded in turn. "I hope we won't have to take to them," he +said. "It would come hard to lose our ponies, our packs, and all that +helps to make our camp life comfortable." +</P> + +<P> +"We won't lose 'em," declared the captain, cheerfully. "This time +to-morrow night we'll be safe and hearty sitting around the fire +figuring up our share of the rewards they must be offering by this time +for those pretty jail-birds." +</P> + +<P> +This ended the conversation, for each took his position behind the tree +barricade with all senses alert for any indications of an attack. +</P> + +<P> +For long Charley kept shifting his gaze from the woods before him to +the tall sapling on Lookout Point. At last a smudge of red showed near +the sapling's top for a minute, then disappeared, and he gave a shout +of relief. "Walter's there all right," he called to his companions, "I +saw his signal." +</P> + +<P> +The morning wore slowly away without a sign of their enemies. +</P> + +<P> +"What have you figured out is the reason they ain't troubling us, +Charley?" the captain called when the noon hour was at last reached. +</P> + +<P> +"I have been studying over it for a long time, sir," the lad answered, +"and have come to the conclusion that they have decided to postpone +finishing us up until they have disposed of the Indians. I guess they +are afraid that the noise of firearms would put the Seminoles on their +guard if they happen to be within hearing. Anyway, I guess, we can +spare Chris long enough to get us a lunch." +</P> + +<P> +Chris lost no time in getting together a hasty dinner, which was as +quickly disposed of by the sentinels. +</P> + +<P> +From now on Charley kept his eyes anxiously on the distant point and +sapling, hoping, longing, and expecting to catch a glimpse of the +fluttering square of red which would wave the welcome news that Walter +had sighted the Indian fleet. +</P> + +<P> +One o'clock passed, two o'clock, three, and still no signal. +</P> + +<P> +"Take it calm, lad, they'll be along soon," the captain said +soothingly, to Charley, who was nervously pacing back and forth, his +face drawn and anxious. +</P> + +<P> +"For de Lawd sake, look over there by dem convicts' point. Oh, golly, +oh golly!" cried Chris, suddenly. +</P> + +<P> +Charley gave one glance and buried his face in his hands to shut out +the coming horror. "Fool, fool that I was," he moaned. "Not to know +that it would be the home-bound Indians loaded with plumes they would +be laying for, not the empty handed ones coming out of the glades." +</P> + +<P> +The captain was by his side in a second. "Don't take it hard, lad," he +said, gently. "You done your best. We all stumbled into the same +mistake. Look away for a minute, lad. It will soon be over, I dare +say." +</P> + +<P> +But Charley, though torn with regrets, took his hands from his face and +gazed steadily at the tragedy nearing its climax. +</P> + +<P> +Winding past the convicts' point in single file, came a long line of +some thirty canoes, uncouth, shapeless things, each hewed out of a +great cypress log. In the end of each an Indian stood erect plying a +long pole which sent their clumsy looking crafts forward at surprising +speed. Magnificent savages they were, not one less than six feet tall, +framed like athletes, and lithe and supple as panthers. +</P> + +<P> +One man in each boat was the rule, but in the leading canoe a young +Indian lad was also squatted, in the bow. +</P> + +<P> +With breathless suspense our hunters stood helpless to warn or help as +the long line glided on to its fate. +</P> + +<P> +Ten, twelve, fourteen, fifteen stole past the point. Then the horror +of horrors happened. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap13"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE BATTLE. +</H3> + +<P> +From the point burst out a sudden cloud of flame and smoke. Six of the +canoes in the lead and six in the rear of the long procession came to a +sudden halt. Of their occupants, some crumpled up where they had stood +like bits of flame-swept paper. Others pitched forward in the bottom +of their crafts, while still others stood for a minute swaying from +left to right like drunken men, to finally crash over the sides like +fallen trees, taking their cranky crafts over with them in their plunge +of death. +</P> + +<P> +Only for a second was there confusion amongst the remaining canoes. +Before the volley could be repeated, they had drawn closer together. +Each Indian had dropped his pole, and seizing his rifle crouched low in +the bottom of his craft, his keen eyes searching the point. +</P> + +<P> +"They're heroes, that's what they are," cried Charley, his eyes +flashing and cheeks aflame, "they are as good as dead if they stay, and +yet they will not flee." +</P> + +<P> +"Suicide, I call it," said the captain harshly, to conceal his emotion +of horror and admiration. "But there's one there who is going to save +his skin. See that young lad who was in the first canoe. He is poling +away now that his companion has fallen." +</P> + +<P> +"But not willingly," said Charley, who had been watching the little +by-play, "did you see him pick up his gun? He wanted to fight, but the +rest shouted and made signs to him till he put it down. I've got it," +he exclaimed, "it was the chief in that canoe. They are trying to +cover his retreat, poor fellows. They are what I call men." +</P> + +<P> +There had been no cessation in the fighting while the captain and +Charley were talking; flame and smoke continued to burst out from the +point in almost a continuous stream, while those in the canoes were not +inactive. Where an arm or leg showed to their hawk-like eyes, their +rifles cracked sharply, to be generally rewarded with a howl of pain +from some cutthroat who had been winged. But there could be but one +end to such a battle. The convicts were well protected behind big +trees, while the flimsy sides of their canoes afforded the brave little +band of Seminoles almost no protection. Still they fought stubbornly +on, answering shot with shot until the point and canoes were shrouded +in a fog of smoke. +</P> + +<P> +"They see the young Indian, they see him," cried Charley in an agony of +suspense. "Look, look, they are all shooting at him." +</P> + +<P> +The young Indian had passed out of the smoke pall, but his flight had +not been undetected; some of the convicts, with an eye out for just +such escapes, had drawn back to higher ground where they could see +above the smoke which hung close to the water. These at once gave the +alarm, and a shower of bullets began to rain around the dugout. +</P> + +<P> +The Indian lad stood stoically at his poling, not even glancing back, +and paying no more attention to the hail of bullets than if they were +so many flies. The little Seminole seemed to bear a charmed life, +bullets struck the pole he was handling, and again and again they sent +out splinters flying from the sides of the dugout itself, but still he +shoved steadily ahead. +</P> + +<P> +"By the ghost of the Flying Dutchman," shouted the captain, "he is +going to get away from them. Two hundred feet more and their bullets +won't hurt if they hit." +</P> + +<P> +"He's hit," cried Charley, a second later; "watch him." +</P> + +<P> +The Indian lad had given a sudden, involuntary start and one hand went +to his head, he sank to his knees, struggled to rise, then slowly and +gently slipped down; a huddled heap in the bottom of his canoe, while +an exultant yell rose from the convicts' camp. +</P> + +<P> +Charley's face was white and haggard, but his voice was steady and cool +as he turned to the captain. "Please go to my saddle-bags. You'll +find two rockets there. Set them both off; that will bring Walter, and +we will have need of him soon. I am going after that Indian and bring +him in dead or alive. You and Chris had better mount guard again at +the wall; those cut-throats will be here soon." +</P> + +<P> +One look at Charley's face convinced the captain that remonstrances +were useless, so, with a hearty squeeze of the lad's hand, he turned +away to his duties. +</P> + +<P> +Charley unmoored one of the canvas canoes and, taking his place in the +stern, with a mighty shove of the paddle drove it far out into the +stream. +</P> + +<P> +"Massa Charley, my own Massa Charley, going to be killed," wailed +Chris, giving way to his fears and grief with the emotionalism of his +race. +</P> + +<P> +The captain shook him vigorously. "Shut up," he said, roughly, partly +to hide his own feelings, "Charley's comin' back without a scratch. +The good Lord, I reckon, don't make lads as true and white as he to be +killed off by a pack of jail vermin. Come to the wall as he told us +to. Maybe we'll get a shot at those murderers before the day is done. +Come along an' stop that blubberin'," and he grabbed the soft-hearted +little darky by the arm and dragged him to the post. +</P> + +<P> +The convicts were quick to see and interpret Charley's action, and +their guns were quickly turned upon his frail craft. As he drew nearer +the drifting dugout and came within range, a perfect hail of bullets +splashed the water into foam around him. He did not falter or +hesitate, but with long clean strokes of the paddle, sent his light +little craft flying towards his goal. Perhaps it was this very speed +that saved his life. Bullet after bullet pierced the thin canvas sides +and one struck a corner of his paddle, tingling his arm and side like +an electric shock. A few minutes of this furious paddling brought him +to the bow of the dugout. Seizing its rawhide painter, he fastened the +end to a seat in his own boat. Then taking the paddle again, he headed +back to the point. The leaden hail fell as thickly as ever, but by +crouching low he was shielded somewhat by the high sides of his tow. +His return progress was now slow, but gradually he worked the two +crafts out of the range of the convicts. +</P> + +<P> +Walter had lost no time in getting back to camp at the call of the +rockets, and was waiting at the water's edge to receive his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"Haul both boats in and make them fast," Charley ordered as he wearily +paddled in. +</P> + +<P> +Walter waded out knee deep, and seizing the bow of each boat as it came +in reach, drew it up on the shore, and taking the painter, quickly made +them fast to a nearby pine. +</P> + +<P> +"We have got some heavy, quick work ahead of us," Charley said quickly +enough to forestall the volley of eager questions on the tip of his +excited chum's tongue. "Every minute counts now. I dare not call +either Chris or the captain away from their posts. Help me into the +lean-to with these poor fellows, then get your gun and join the +captain. Those murderers may be over here any minute now. They are +bound for their own safety to let no witness of their horrible crime +escape." +</P> + +<P> +As he rose from his cramped crouching position, Charley got his first +glance of the interior of the dugout and his face grew dark with anger +towards those who had brought this thing to pass. +</P> + +<P> +Prone on his face in the bottom lay a magnificent specimen of savage +manhood. His height, when standing, could not have been less than six +feet three. His shoulders were broad and clothed with great, powerful +muscles. His body sloped away gracefully to a slim waist and straight, +muscular limbs—the ideal body, striven for by all athletes. His dress +was that usual to Seminoles on a hunt—a long calico shirt belted in at +the waist, limbs bare, moccasins of soft tanned deer-skin, and a +head-dress made of many tightly-wound crimson handkerchiefs bound +together by a broad, thin band of polished silver. In the turban, now +dyed a richer hue from the blood flowing from the warrior's shoulder, +was stuck a large eagle feather, the insignia of a chief. At his feet, +where he had crumpled down under the enemy's bullets, lay the Indian +lad in a huddled heap. It did not need the tiny eagle feather in the +diminutive turban to convince Charley's observant eye that it was a +case of father and son, a chief and son of a chief. +</P> + +<P> +All that we have taken so long to describe, Charley had taken in at one +swift glance. +</P> + +<P> +"Both are still living," he declared. "Run to the lean-to, Walt, and +get a blanket. We will have to drag that big one up to the camp. It +will be pretty rough, but it's our only way. We cannot carry him." +</P> + +<P> +In a minute Walter was back with a thick, strong horse-blanket, which +he spread out on the turf close to the water. +</P> + +<P> +It took every ounce of strength the two lads possessed to lift the +heavy body from the dugout to the blanket, then each taking a forward +end of the blanket, they drew it gently after them sled-wise up to the +lean-to, avoiding rough places as much as possible. There, they had to +exert themselves to the limit of their strength to lift their burden +from the blanket to one of the couches. +</P> + +<P> +Their second trip was easier. The Indian lad, though showing promise +of great future strength, was still only a stripling, and they bore his +limp body in their arms without difficulty. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap14"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIV. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE VICTIMS. +</H3> + +<P> +"Hurry back to the captain, Walt," urged his chum as soon as the Indian +boy was laid on another conch. "He may need you any minute. Those +demons will be here as soon as they finish off the Seminoles. Thank +the Lord, the firing is still going on. I will do what I can for these +poor chaps and be with you as soon as possible." His eye flashed and +his face darkened as he added, "Tell the captain everyone must shoot at +anything that shows itself—and shoot to kill." +</P> + +<P> +As soon as his chum had gone, Charley turned his attention to the +Seminole chief. From the clotted mass of blood, he guessed the +location of the main wound, and with his hunting-knife he rapidly cut +away the shirt, exposing the warrior's chest and back. As he drew back +the blood-soaked cloth, he gave a sigh of relief. The bullet had +passed clear through the body close to the lungs,—a serious wound, but +one which perhaps with proper care need not prove fatal. The amateur +surgeon had no antiseptic except common salt, but with that and water +he quickly cleansed and sterilized the wounds and tearing up one of his +own clean shirts, he first scraped a strip with an old case knife until +he had a quantity of soft lint with which he stopped both the ugly +holes made by the bullet, and then with other strips of the same, he +neatly bandaged the wounds. Next he drew on one of the captain's +shirts in the place of the one he had cut away. Lastly, he broke open +a pack and took out a quart bottle of brandy. Pouring out a large +drink he let it trickle slowly down between the Indian's set teeth. +</P> + +<P> +The effect was noticeable at once. Slowly the warm blood flowed back +into the dusky cheeks, the limbs began to twitch, the breathing grew +audible, and the wounded man began to show signs of returning +consciousness. +</P> + +<P> +Before turning to his other patient, whom he reckoned as good as dead, +Charley stepped outside the wigwam and cast a quick look around. A +smile of satisfaction parted his lips as he noted the distant figures +of his companions behind the tree barricade, each at his post, gun in +hand, nervously alert. From them, his glance went on to the point, +where the battle was still going on. To even an unobserving person, it +was clear that the firing from the canoes was slackening rapidly, and +with a sigh of regret and anxiety, the lad turned back into the lean-to. +</P> + +<P> +When he bent over the Indian lad, he uttered an exclamation of joy; +from the matted hair and abundance of blood he had believed him shot +through the head. A closer examination showed, however, that the +bullet had only ploughed a neat little furrow down to the skull. +Charley washed the wound clean, forced some of the brandy down the +boy's throat, and dashed a cup of cold water in his face. The effect +was startling. In a few minutes the little Indian was sitting up, +swaying drunkenly and in a half dazed way staring about the little +shelter. +</P> + +<P> +"You arc coming around all right, old chap," said Charley, cheerily. +</P> + +<P> +His voice and face brought back to the Indian lad with a rush the +memory of the recent ordeal he had been through. He gave one glance at +the unconscious form on the other couch and his hand darted to the +hunting-knife at his hip as he staggered, dizzily, to his feet. +</P> + +<P> +"Stop, you are among friends," cried Charley, holding up both empty +hands palm upward as a token of peace. "You were grazed on the head by +a rifle bullet and it knocked you out for a few minutes, so I went out +in my canoe and towed you in. Your father is hurt pretty bad, but I +have fixed him up good as I can and I think he will pull through with +care." +</P> + +<P> +The little Indian lad's keen, beady eyes searched the white lad's open, +smiling face, his hand dropped from his knife, and he sunk back weakly +on the couch. +</P> + +<P> +"My father over there, heap big chief," he declared proudly, in +guttural English. "Name Big Tiger. Me, they call Little Tiger." A +shade of suspicion crept over his face. "You white you say you friend. +More whites hid behind trees and shoot and kill many of Big Tiger's +braves," he said with an ironical smile. +</P> + +<P> +Charley saw that now, if ever, was the time to clear his little party +from the natural suspicion of the Seminole. He sat down on the couch +opposite and his honest blue eyes met the other's keen, black ones +unwaveringly. "The Seminoles, once a mighty people, have grown as few +in number as the deer in the forest," he began, falling naturally into +the speech of the Indians. "Yet, few though they became, there walked +among them, at least, one of their race whose heart and mind was like +the night when the moon shines not and clouds have hid the stars. One +day this evil one rose up and slew a harmless white settler. The wise +men of the tribe took counsel together, saying, 'times are changing, we +will turn him over to the law of the white men.' The ears of the +Little Tiger may have heard whispered the name of the white settler's +slayer." +</P> + +<P> +The Indian's eyes were gleaming with scorn and hatred. "Injun +Charley," he hissed. +</P> + +<P> +"The white men judged the slayer of the settler according to their +laws. They sent him to ha shackled with chain and iron ball and do +heavy, squaw-work in misery the balance of his years. They did not say +because this Indian was bad that all Seminoles were slayers of white +men." +</P> + +<P> +The young Indian started up and began to speak, but Charley silenced +him with a gesture and gravely continued. +</P> + +<P> +"No, these judges were not fools to believe that a whole people should +be judged by the crimes of one, or a few of its race. Among the +paleface race were brother, squaw, and father murderers, in great +numbers, not because the white race is worse than the red, but because +they exceed the red men in number as the leaves exceed the trunks of +the tree." +</P> + +<P> +"With the bad Indian, serving out a lifetime of work and exile, were +eleven white men just as bad. When those that watched them had their +eyes turned away, the twelve plotted. One night they rose up and +murdered the guards, took their guns and ponies, and, under the lead of +the bad Indian, came as the crow flies for here, where were camped +myself and three companions, seeking only the bird that bears plumes +upon its back. The balance you know," he concluded, gravely. "As +brother to brother, should the Seminoles be judged by the slayer of +whites, or the white hunters by lawless murderers whose color is the +same as theirs?" +</P> + +<P> +During Charley's short argument, the suspicion had fled from the young +chieftain's face. At the conclusion, he drew himself up proudly erect +and extending his hand spoke the one English word he knew that stood +with him for friendship and confidence,—"How." +</P> + +<P> +"How," said Charley cheerfully, giving the offered hand a hearty shake. +"Now let's get outside and take a look. As soon as they have finished +with your followers, I expect the bad men to come down upon us." +</P> + +<P> +Short as had been the time they had spent in the lean-to, a great +change had taken place at the scene of the battle. The firing had +ceased from all the canoes but one, and even as they looked, a rifle +cracked, the canoe's occupant half rose, then crashed down over its +side, and the last Seminole rifle was silenced. +</P> + +<P> +The pall of smoke had drifted away from the point, revealing a terrible +sight, twenty-nine canoes or dugouts drifted on the quiet water at the +mercy of wind or current, some floated bottom upward, others' sides +were punctured and splintered with innumerable bullets. Here and there +was one splotched and spotted with the crimson life-blood of its heroic +defender. Not a sign of life was visible amongst the little squadron. +As Charley looked, one of the convicts ventured out from his place of +concealment and with a long branch, drew the nearest canoe in to shore. +With a coil of rope in one hand, he jumped in and shoved out amongst +the drifting craft. His errand was easy to be guessed, to make fast to +the drifting canoes and tow them all in to shore. +</P> + +<P> +At the sight of the wiping out of the last of his comrades, the young +Indian had sunk to a seat on a log and buried his face in his hands. +Now, Charley tapped him gently on the shoulder. "It is not a time for +the son of a chief to be grieving like a squaw," he said, "his +followers are gone, but they died like brave men. Paleface history +tells of no braver stand than they made to-day. It's not meet for the +son of a chief to sit repining. His thought should be of punishment +for the doers of the evil." +</P> + +<P> +The young Indian sprang to his feet, his eyes gleaming fiercely. +"How?" he demanded. "They have slain the pack. Will they not soon +come for the leaders? Has the young white chieftain magic to work +against their many guns and canoes?" +</P> + +<P> +"When the blood runs hot is not the time to reason coolly," said +Charley, calmly. "I go now to help my comrades. Go you into the +wigwam and watch by your father; when he awakens tell him all. As soon +as we may, we will all meet here in council, and the counsel of a chief +will shed a light in the dark around us." +</P> + +<P> +Without a word the young Seminole whirled on his heels and disappeared +in the lean-to, while Charley hurried in to the barricade, where his +presence was now sorely needed. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap15"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XV. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A FLAG OF TRUCE. +</H3> + +<P> +From the woods beyond the barricade the convicts were pouring in a +rapid fire upon its defenders. Luckily the little band of hunters were +so placed that the shower of bullets pinged harmlessly against the +thick logs. Whenever a convict showed an arm or leg one of the +defenders' rifles cracked and a howl of pain from the forest sometimes +followed the report. +</P> + +<P> +Charley crept to where Walter was crouching, his face flushed and eyes +shining as he peered eagerly through a crack between the logs watching +for a chance to shoot. "Gee, this is great sport," he exclaimed as he +caught sight of his chum. "They are afraid to cross that open space +and are hiding amongst the trees just wasting powder and lead on these +logs." +</P> + +<P> +Charley looked up thoughtfully at the sun, which was now less than two +hours high. "You saw the killing of those innocent Indians," he said +gravely. "It was terrible." +</P> + +<P> +"It was grand the way they stayed to the last man and died that their +chief might escape," declared Walter with boyish enthusiasm. +</P> + +<P> +"Grand but terrible," his chum agreed. "But we must look out for +ourselves, now. They are not going to let us get back to town, now, +with our tale of their crime and whereabouts. We can keep them off +from this barricade until night, but what then? They have boats now, +and can attack by land and water at the same time. We are too few in +numbers to defend both ends of the point." +</P> + +<P> +"What can we do, then?" demanded the other. +</P> + +<P> +Charley smiled grimly. "I am not going to trust my own judgment alone +this time, after the terrible mistake I've made. We must scare those +fellows off for a bit and then hold a council to decide on the wisest +course. Thank goodness we have cartridges to burn. Fill your magazine +full, and when you see me raise my hand pour all sixteen shots into the +wood. I'll have the captain do the same at the same time. Chris and I +will fire while you two are reloading. If we keep that up for a few +minutes, I think we will drive them off long enough to talk over the +situation." +</P> + +<P> +Walter nodded comprehension and began stuffing shells into the magazine +of his Winchester. +</P> + +<P> +From him, Charley passed on to the captain and Chris, to whom he gave +the same explanations and instructions. As he took his own place +behind the barricade, the young Indian crawled quietly up beside him. +</P> + +<P> +"Why did you not stay with your father?" said Charley, impatiently. +The little Indian drew himself up proudly and recklessly to his full +height, inviting a storm of bullets, all of which happily missed their +mark. Before the volley could be repeated, Charley pulled him down on +the turf beside him out of danger. +</P> + +<P> +"The chief has awakened from his sleep," said the young Seminole with +dignity. "Of the things you had told me and I had seen, I told him all +and he believed. Then he bade me come forth, saying, 'Where the +bullets sing is the place for the son of a chief.'" +</P> + +<P> +"Then keep close to me and shoot when I do," Charley ordered. He +raised his right hand in the air and the captain's and Chris' rifles +sent thirty-two bullets zipping and singing in amongst the trees. +Before the convicts recovered from their surprise, forty-eight more +leaden messengers whined through the air above them. The effect was +magical, the convicts ceased their fire, and puzzled and alarmed by the +sudden leaden hail, sought shelter behind the largest trees they could +find. +</P> + +<P> +For ten minutes the hunters poured volley after volley of lead into the +forest. Suddenly a white rag tied to a stick was thrust out from +behind a tree. +</P> + +<P> +Instantly Charley gave the signal to stop firing. As it ceased, a man +stepped out into the open, bearing the flag of truce in his hand. +</P> + +<P> +Charley laid down his smoking rifle and leaped lightly over the +barricade. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't go to meet him, Charley," Walter implored, "anyone of those +murderers are likely to take a pot shot at you. Do come back." +</P> + +<P> +"Better listen to the lad, Charley," said the captain, earnestly. "You +can't count on that gang respecting a truce flag. Don't go, my boy." +</P> + +<P> +But Charley only smiled determinedly. "I want to hear what he has to +say, and I don't want him to see the weak points in our barricade," he +said, "besides, the other day, I was noticing that fellow coming. +Criminal he may be, but he is far too good for the company he's in. +I've got a feeling that he would not stand to be a decoy. Here goes, +anyway. Don't worry." +</P> + +<P> +Midway of the open space the two met. The convict was a young man, +with a dark, handsome face and bold, reckless eyes. He greeted the +young hunter as coolly as though they were meeting for a pleasant +social chat. +</P> + +<P> +"I came because the rest were afraid," he explained, cheerfully, eyeing +the other from head to foot with cool assurance. "They are so crooked +and treacherous themselves that they think that your companions will do +as they would do,—not hesitate to fire on the bearer of a white flag." +</P> + +<P> +"They have a good chance at me now," said Charley with a smile. +</P> + +<P> +The stranger grinned as he skilfully rolled a cigarette with one hand. +"I gave them to understand before I left that they would have to reckon +with me if they tried any such trick," he remarked, cheerfully. "I +guess that will keep the brutes quiet for a while. But let's get down +to business. I have," he said ironically, "the distinguished honor to +be their messenger, but first let me say that, although with that gang +of beasts, I am not of them. I've killed my man, but it was in fair +fight, and not by a knife in the back. I have no kick coming over what +the law dealt out to me. Furthermore, if I had known the animals, I +would have to travel with, I would not have let my longing for freedom +draw me away from the turpentine camp. Lord knows, I wish I was back +there now." His voice, which had grown earnest, dropped again into a +sarcastic note. "But I am wandering, as I said before, my noble, +gallant friends have made me their messenger and agent. It will help +you to understand their demands if I state that the afternoon's work +has been far from satisfactory. So many of the canoes were overturned +that the plumes secured will not amount to more than seven hundred +dollars where my friends expected to reap as many thousand as the fruit +of their labor." +</P> + +<P> +"Come to the point," said Charley, impatiently, his eyes shifting +anxiously to the declining sun. +</P> + +<P> +The other's tone grew still more bitterly sarcastic. "We have been +bitterly disappointed," he declared. "My brave, valiant companions +have suffered sorely in body and spirit. You saw them engage a mighty +fleet of a race whose color was an offense in their eyes. It was also +rumored that the fleet contained many thousands of dollars in bird +plumes which it was clearly wrong to leave in the possession of those +who would not know how to spend the money intelligently. +</P> + +<P> +"It is true my dear companions kept in the shelter of the largest +trees, but the incautious ones,—there was an arm barked here and a leg +scratched there, and pain stalked abroad in our midst. Then, when the +battle was over, judge of the bitterness of mind of my noble comrades +when they searched the canoes not overturned and found less than seven +hundred dollars' worth of plumes, barely enough for one good right's +drunk and carouse in town." +</P> + +<P> +Charley was interested in spite of himself in this gay, humorous young +outlaw, who was so evidently superior to his brutal companions, and he +would have liked to let him come to the point in his own amusing way, +but the sun was getting low, and he feared to waste more time. "Cut +out your nonsense and come to the point," he said curtly. "What do you +want with us?" +</P> + +<P> +The other dropped his mocking tone. "We want that chief and his boy, +whom you are harboring in your camp. According to our Indian +companion, they own, or know of the hiding-place of, a fortune in +plumes. If the plumes are not to be easily reached, we can still hold +the chief and boy for a big ransom. His people will raise it quick +enough, for he is a big man among them." He hesitated and then went +on. "The gang said for me to tell you, if the chief and boy were given +up, your party would not be troubled further." +</P> + +<P> +Charley smiled incredulously. "And what do you say?" he demanded. +</P> + +<P> +"That whether you give them up or not, you are all as good as dead," +exclaimed the other in a burst of frankness. "Good Lord, boy, do you +dream that they figure on letting any eyewitness escape to a town and +set the officers of law on their trail? You can hold them off here +until night, but when darkness comes you'll be wiped out like the +blowing out of a candle." +</P> + +<P> +Charley laid his hand on the other's arm. "You are too good for that +gang, better come over to our side," he said, earnestly. +</P> + +<P> +The young outlaw hesitated for the fraction of a second, then shook off +the hand roughly. "No matter how bad they are, they are my comrades, +and I am no traitor," he said curtly. "Your answer, please." +</P> + +<P> +"Tell them we will not give up the chief or boy," said the young envoy +earnestly. "Tell them that they have not got us yet by a long shot. +Tell them that the one object we are going to work for from now on, is +to get them back into the hands of the law." +</P> + +<P> +The young outlaw gave him a look of admiration. "You've got the nerve, +all right," he said. "Well, so long, till we meet again," and whirling +around he sauntered slowly off in the direction of the forest, merrily +whistling as he went. +</P> + +<P> +Charley for a moment looked after him regretfully, then turning, he +quickly rejoined his companions behind the barricade. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap16"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVI. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE RETREAT. +</H3> + +<P> +A few words gave his companions the substance of the conversation. +"Now," he continued, "I wish we could all get together in the camp for +a few minutes to talk this thing over, and decide on our next move, but +it's too risky to leave the wall unguarded, although I don't believe +they will try another assault before dark." +</P> + +<P> +The young Seminole spoke up, "when the Big Tiger speaks, the whelp is +silent, I will stay." +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, I reckon dis nigger ain't no good at planning, spec I better +stay here, too," observed Chris. +</P> + +<P> +A parting volley was fired into the forest, and under cover of the +smoke the rest retired quickly to the lean-to. +</P> + +<P> +The wounded man was lying awake on his couch, his keen, black eyes +burning with an unnatural light. +</P> + +<P> +Although he must have been suffering intense pain from his wound, his +features were calm and composed. He tried to rise as the hunters +entered, but could not raise himself even on his elbow. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't try to move," exclaimed Charley, hurrying to his side. +</P> + +<P> +"How," said the sufferer, in greeting, extending a hand surprisingly +small and well-formed for a man of his size. +</P> + +<P> +Charley gave it a hearty shake and his companions crowding around, +gravely followed his example. +</P> + +<P> +The wounded man lay silent for a moment surveying the little party with +shrewd, appraising eyes. A friendly gleam shone in his beady orbs as +they lingered for a second on the captain's kindly, weather-beaten +face. He looked a trifle longer at Walter's eager, open countenance, +but his glance came back to rest on Charley's face, and to him his +words were addressed. +</P> + +<P> +"He, whom his people call the Big Tiger, was made as weak as a tiny +papoose by the bullet of a jackal," he began in broken English. "The +Little tiger has told me all; how the jackals would have taken their +prey but for your coming in the canoe of cloth and bringing the +helpless ones here. The jackals' bullet has sped true, and the Big +Tiger will lead his followers no more in the hunt, but the son of a +chief will remain and his life will be at the young white chieftain's +command." +</P> + +<P> +The stricken man burst into a fit of coughing, and Charley noted with +pity that flecks of scarlet stained the sufferer's lips. "Shot through +the lungs," he decided, but he allowed no trace of pity to show on his +face. +</P> + +<P> +"A chief of the Seminoles must be wise with the wisdom of the owl in +council," he said, as soon as the fit of coughing had left its victim. +"Payment from father or son we desire not, only the counsel of wisdom +now. We are but braves in the hunt or fight, and great danger +threatens, now, but the ripe wisdom of a great chief may be able to +point out a path to safety." +</P> + +<P> +Clearly and in few words, he described their present desperate position +and the demands and threats of the outlaws. +</P> + +<P> +The Indian listened in impassive silence and for some time after +Charley finished, remained buried in profound meditation. +</P> + +<P> +"The young white chief carries an old head on young shoulders," at last +he said approvingly. "He speaks truly when he says that the air is +thick with danger. When the blackness of night comes, then will come, +also, those who make war from behind the trees of the forest. In the +darkness, how is the young white and his friends to tell enemies from +friends? The jackals will wriggle through and over the wall of trees +like snakes through tall grass. After what they have seen, can my +white friends expect mercy at hands already stained red?" +</P> + +<P> +Charley shook his head. "Thou speakest my thoughts, but are we to be +murdered in the dark by creatures such as those?" +</P> + +<P> +"The mind of the young is ever quick and hasty in its flights," +reproved the wounded chief, gravely. "What use for the medicine man to +point out the sickness, unless he has the proper barks and plants?" +</P> + +<P> +"Well," said Charley, "let the wisdom of one grown wise in councils +tell us of the cure for this disease." +</P> + +<P> +The wounded savage was again seized with a fit of coughing, and it was +some moments before he could reply. "Between the glades and here—a +swift half day's journey—a small island lies in the middle of the +river. There, four men could stand off an army. If I commanded the +paleface friends as I do my tribe, I would say, bury all things too +heavy to carry away in the canoes of cloth, while it is yet light, turn +the ponies loose that they may not starve. Put all else in the cloth +boats. Let some keep up a noise and fire from the wall of trees to +convince the white men without hearts that you are going to stay and +fight. With the first darkness of night let all take to the boats. I +with the Little Tiger will lead the way, then may come him you call +captain with the little one whose face is like the night, lastly, may +come you and the one with the eager face (Walter). Without noise must +we go, and keep close to each other, for the river has many arms +stretched out for the unwary stranger. At the island of which I spoke, +you may camp in safety while we go on alone. I stop at my wigwam to +die, alone, in peace and quietness with the great spirit, as becomes a +chief of a long line of chiefs, but he, who will soon he chief, will +travel quickly on gathering together my people. With them he will +return, and of the twelve who murder from behind trees not one shall +return to boast of his deeds. When the buzzards are feeding off their +bones, then, may you return and secure that which you have buried, the +ponies, and all of that which is yours. That is the counsel of one of +a race of chiefs. What is the answer of the young white chief?" +</P> + +<P> +"I must consult with those who share my dangers, Chief," said Charley +gravely. "We talk not like squaws, and in five minutes you shall have +our answer." +</P> + +<P> +The Seminole rolled over on his side exhausted from his long speech and +frequent coughing spells, while Charley beckoned the captain and Walter +out of earshot. +</P> + +<P> +"You have heard it all, now I want your opinion," he said simply. +"After this last terrible mistake of mine, it will be long before I +trust to my judgment again." +</P> + +<P> +"We all fell into the same error, lad," said the captain, kindly. "The +blame, if any, belongs to us all. Forget it, Charley, and don't let it +weaken your self-confidence. Now what do you think of the plan of our +red-skinned friend?" +</P> + +<P> +"I believe it's our only chance for life," he answered regretfully, +"those cut-throats have got us foul. It's run away or be killed." +</P> + +<P> +"Then I'm for running. But, think you, he can be trusted to pilot us +aright?" +</P> + +<P> +"He will not pilot us far, I fear," said Charley, sadly. "I doubt if +he will reach his wigwam. That bullet touched a lung all right. If he +dies on the way we must look to the son; he is of the same spirit as +the father, or I am no judge of character." +</P> + +<P> +"They both speak English wonderfully well," said Walter musingly. +</P> + +<P> +"So do most of the Seminoles," explained Charley. "They come in to the +outlying towns at rare intervals to exchange their venison and skins +for ammunition and cloth, and it's wonderful how quickly they pick up +the language. But I am rambling. The question before us is, shall we +abandon all our things and run away with a fair chance of escaping with +whole skins, or stay and fight it out with the certainty of being +killed, sooner or later?" +</P> + +<P> +"Run," said the captain decisively, "and trust to luck and the chief to +recover our things." +</P> + +<P> +"Retreat," voted Walter regretfully. +</P> + +<P> +Without another word, Charley turned back to the bedside of the +suffering savage, whose pain-tortured eyes had never strayed from their +faces during the conference. +</P> + +<P> +"Chief, we have decided that your plan is the only one to follow," +Charley said, simply. +</P> + +<P> +Exultation showed for a second on the Indian's, set features. "Good," +he exclaimed, "listen, young white chief. Do not mourn the loss of +ponies and things such as you must leave behind. To-day you risked +your life to save a stranger Indian and his boy. Great shall be your +reward when this trouble is over. That with which to trade for many +ponies shall be yours." +</P> + +<P> +In his excitement the wounded man had partly raised himself on his +elbow, but the exertion was too much; there was a rush of blood from +his lips and he sank back on his couch in a dead faint. In a second +Charley was by his side forcing down more brandy between the clenched +teeth. The powerful stimulant acted quickly. In a moment the sufferer +again opened his eyes to consciousness. Charley beckoned to his chum. +"Go relieve his boy," he whispered, "and send him here. I want him to +get his instructions from his father before there comes another attack. +The captain and I will fix for our departure." +</P> + +<P> +"Good," exclaimed the chief, whose keen ears had caught the +low-whispered conversation, "we won't die yet, though. Die in our own +wigwam when Great Spirit tolls the bell of mystery." +</P> + +<P> +Walter was off like a shot, and the young Seminole soon stood by his +father's couch. While the two indulged in earnest conversation in +their own tongue, the captain and Charley worked hastily, for the sun +was already setting. What things they dared risk carrying were hustled +into the frail canoes. One of the couches was conveyed to the dugout +and spread out in the bottom and two of the thickest blankets spread on +top of the leaves. The ponies were cast loose to shift for themselves. +Their remaining stuff was shoved into the water-proof bag and buried in +a high spot. By the time this was done, the first shades of night had +fallen. At Charley's suggestion, all hurried into the barricade, and +for fifteen minutes poured a hail of bullets into the forest to +convince the outlaws that they were still there and on the alert. +</P> + +<P> +Then all hurried back to the camp. Many hands made easy and gentle +work of conveying the wounded man from his couch to the comfortable bed +in the dugout. The young Indian took his place in the stern of the +ticklish craft, and with a single shove of his long pole sent it far +out into the stream. The captain, with Chris, followed a few yards +behind, paddling with soft noiseless strokes. A few yards in their +wake came the last canoe containing Walter and Charley, and quickly the +outline of the point was lost in the darkness behind. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap17"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE FLIGHT BY NIGHT. +</H3> + +<P> +As the canoes glided silently towards the convicts' camp the paddle +strokes of the fugitives grew slower and more guarded, the blades of +the paddles were no longer lifted clear of the water lest the falling +drops from them should be heard by those on shore. The river narrowed +suddenly opposite the point, and the canoes would be compelled to pass +within a hundred feet of the enemy's camp. All of the convicts might +be in the woods surrounding the hunters' camp, waiting to close in on +their supposed victims, but there was a chance that they had had the +foresight to count upon this very attempt at escape and had left some +of their number on the point to cut off the retreat. +</P> + +<P> +Charley thought of all this as he knelt in the stern of his little +craft and plied the paddle slowly and with infinite caution, his every +nerve tense, and sight and hearing strained to catch any sound of +movement on the rapidly nearing point. Were it white men only that +they were seeking to elude, he would have felt far less apprehension, +but he recognized that in the person of Indian Charley they had to deal +with a mind crafty and cunning, that would be likely to provide against +the very move they were making. Even in his anxiety, Charley could not +but notice and admire the marvelous skill with which the young Indian +in the dugout handled his clumsy craft. He hugged close to the farther +shore and glided along its border as noiselessly as a shadow. The +captain, although but little used to the paddle, was also doing +surprisingly well and was following closely in the wake of the dugout. +Silently the dugout at last glided past the dangerous point, and a +moment later the captain's canoe also slipped gently by. +</P> + +<P> +Charley gave a sigh of relief. They were safely past and could laugh +at any attempted pursuit in the clumsy dugouts the convicts possessed. +</P> + +<P> +But that one unguarded moment of relief was disastrous in its result. +In a deep, careless stroke, his paddle struck a submerged log and the +slender blade snapped short off with a loud crack, the ticklish canoe +careened suddenly to one side, then righted again with a sullen splash. +At the sound the silent point quickly stirred with life. There was the +hum of excited voices and a blinding flash of flame lit up the +darkness, followed by the sharp crack of rifles and the hum of +bullets,—they were discovered. +</P> + +<P> +"Give way all," shouted Charley, as he fumbled in the darkness for the +spare paddle, which he at last succeeded in finding. "Are you hurt, +Walt?" he called anxiously to his companion. +</P> + +<P> +"Not a bit," answered his chum cheerfully, "but hurry up or we will be +getting another volley." +</P> + +<P> +The canoe had drifted beyond the point before her way died out, but was +still less than a hundred yards from it. By the splashing of water the +boys could tell that the convicts were launching one of the dugouts in +pursuit. With vigorous strokes Charley sent their light craft flying +ahead; a few minutes and they would be out of rifle-shot and out of +danger, but again there was the crack of rifles and Charley called to +his chum with a voice hoarse with pain, "You'll have to take her, Walt, +they got me that time." +</P> + +<P> +"Bad?" cried Walter anxiously, as they changed places. +</P> + +<P> +"In the shoulder," weakly, "but don't mind about me. Shove her ahead +as fast as you can, the others have got quite a start of us, and we've +got to catch them." +</P> + +<P> +For half an hour Walter paddled silently on, putting all his strength +into the strokes that sent the light craft leaping ahead, leaving the +pursuing dugout far behind. +</P> + +<P> +"Charley," he called at last, "isn't it time we were up with at least +the chief's dugout?" +</P> + +<P> +But only silence greeted his question, his plucky chum had fainted from +pain and the loss of blood. +</P> + +<P> +For a few moments Walter let the canoe drift, while he pondered as to +what he should do. He felt sure that they had passed the captain and +his companions—but how? In the excitement of the pursuit he must have +passed unnoticed a point where the river branched and had taken the +wrong fork. There were, he knew, dozens of such forks to the river and +the mistake was one that might easily have been made under any +circumstances. The question now was what to do about it. To return +was to run the risk of falling into the hands of the convicts, and the +chance of finding the stream the others had taken was exceedingly +small. There might be a dozen tributaries between him and the +convicts' point, and how was he to tell which was the right one? In +desperation he crawled forward to his unconscious companion and +sprinkled his face again and again with water from the river. +</P> + +<P> +At last Charley opened his eyes with a moan of pain. +</P> + +<P> +"We're lost," shouted Walter eagerly. "I can't find the captain or +chief, what shall I do?" He bent his head to catch the feeble answer +from the wounded lad's lips. +</P> + +<P> +"Keep on, keep on. When the river forks, take the largest stream, +and—" but Charley had fainted again. +</P> + +<P> +With a heavy heart, Walter crept back to his place in the stern and +resumed the paddle. It was a terrible situation for a young, +inexperienced lad; lost on a great river in a frail canoe, pursued by +relentless enemies, and alone, except for a wounded, and perhaps dying +companion. It was enough to strike terror into one much older than our +boy hunter. +</P> + +<P> +Throughout the long night the despairing lad paddled steadily on, +praying for the day to break. At last it came with a blaze of glory in +the east. When it grew light enough to see, he rose cautiously and +gazed around him. +</P> + +<P> +The prospect was disheartening enough. The river had narrowed to less +than a hundred yards in width and wound and twisted amongst the waste +of marsh that stretched desolately ahead and astern as far as the eye +could see. To the east and west the marsh extended back at least a +mile before it met solid timbered land, here and there, and an +occasional long point jutted out until it met the stream. Although the +weary lad strained his eyes in all directions, not a sign could he see +of the other canoes or of any human life. With a sigh of despair, he +sank again to his knees and crawled forward to where his chum lay half +unconscious and moaning in pain. +</P> + +<P> +Dipping his handkerchief over the side, he gently sponged Charley's +pale face with it. +</P> + +<P> +The contact of the cold water seemed to revive the wounded lad. He +opened his eyes and attempted to smile, although his lips were +twitching with pain. "What a nuisance I am, old chap," he said faintly. +</P> + +<P> +"Not a bit," declared Walter, cheerfully, overjoyed at his return to +consciousness. "Here, take a drink of this cold water, and then I am +going to have a look at your wound." +</P> + +<P> +With his hunting-knife, Walter cut away the bloody shirt from the +shoulder and exposed the gaping hole to view. It was still bleeding +slightly, but he noted with satisfaction that the bullet had passed +completely through the fleshy part of the shoulder without touching the +bone, a painful wound, but not a fatal one. He washed it clean with +river water and bound it up with strips from his own shirt. "You'll be +all right in a few days," he declared cheerfully. "Now just lay quiet. +I am going to paddle in to the nearest point and start a fire and make +you some broth." +</P> + +<P> +Walter's heart was lighter than it had been in many hours as he again +resumed his paddle. Day had brought fresh hope and courage. Charley +was getting along far better than he had dared to hope during the +night. He soon would be well enough to take command, and then, thought +Walter, they would soon find their friends. He had great confidence in +Charley's ability to get them out of their present predicament. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Walter paused in his paddling and sat staring at the point, +which was now scarce a hundred yards distant. A thin wisp of smoke +curled up above the thick growth of palmettos with which the point was +covered. +</P> + +<P> +"Charley," he called softly, "there is someone on the point; they have +just started up a fire." +</P> + +<P> +"Better sheer off and give it a wide berth, then," counseled his chum. +"If it were the captain or the chief, you would see the canoes." +</P> + +<P> +"But the boats may be pulled up among the mangrove bushes," Walter +objected. "If it should be the captain and Chris, just think what our +passing by them would mean. We might never see them again, Charley. I +am going to have a look." +</P> + +<P> +"All right," agreed his chum, "but be very careful, Walt." +</P> + +<P> +The fire was located well in on the point, and Walter steered to land +some distance out from it. A few strokes of the paddle sent the light +canoe gliding in amongst the mangrove bushes that fringed the shore. +Climbing out upon the curious gnarled roots, Walter pulled the canoe +far enough in to effectually screen it from sight. Next he examined +his pistols to see that they were properly loaded, and with a parting +word of cheer for his chum, he made his way slowly and cautiously over +the intervening roots to the shore. +</P> + +<P> +He soon found that it was no easy task he had set himself. Between +himself and the fire fifty yards away, intervened the heaviest growth +of timber he had ever seen; palms, sweet gums, satinwoods, and pines +mingled in close and wild confusion, while the ground beneath them was +a matted mass of vines and creepers. +</P> + +<P> +For a moment Walter hesitated. Some of the vines and creepers, he +knew, were poisonous. To touch them meant sores, swellings, and +suffering. But it was only for a moment he paused. The thought of how +much might depend on his errand drove him on. Tearing two strips from +his already tattered shirt, he wrapped them around either hand, and +dropping on hands and knees he cautiously wound his way towards the +fire. +</P> + +<P> +His progress was slow and painful. Dangling brier vines drew blood +from arms and face, and sharp thorns repeatedly lacerated hands and +knees. At each move forward he had to pause and remove the dead +branches and twigs from his path lest their cracking should betray him +to the campers. At last, however, he could catch the sound of voices, +and wriggling forward with infinite caution, he reached a place from +which he could get a glimpse between the trees at the group gathered +around the fire. +</P> + +<P> +The sight was not reassuring. Near the blaze a half dozen of the +convicts lay lounging at their ease, while another one was busily +engaged in making coffee and frying bacon. The neighing of ponies in +the background told the watcher how they had arrived at the point +before him. They must have ridden most of the night to have covered +the distance, and Walter felt a sinking of heart as he realized the +determination of their pursuit. The conversation that came to his ears +did not tend to reassure him. +</P> + +<P> +The convicts were evidently tired and in bad humor, and a hot argument +was raging. +</P> + +<P> +"I tell you it's all foolishness, this losing sleep and wearing +ourselves out," declared a tall, thin, pasty-faced individual. "Here's +my plan: just break up into parties of two or three and each party +strike out for a different town and catch a freight out of the state. +I 'low we're just wasting time and making trouble for ourselves by +following up them chaps." +</P> + +<P> +"Bill Salino, you've got as little sense as courage," declared a man +whom Walter recognized as the leader of the gang. "The time for +scattering and getting out of the state has gone by. There will be men +watching for us at every point, and to be caught means hanging for all +hands now. We've got to lay quiet here for six months or so until they +give up watching for us. We're safe enough here unless them chaps get +away and bring the Indians or a sheriff's posse down on us; and they +won't get away if I have to follow them into the heart of the +Everglades," he declared vindictively. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap18"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVIII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CAPTURED. +</H3> + +<P> +From the expression on their faces, Walter judged that the other four +convicts were in doubt as to which of the two plans they should lend +their support to. "Are you sure we'll catch 'em, Cap?" inquired one, +doubtfully, "there are so powerful many forks to this river, it's like +hunting for a needle in a haystack." +</P> + +<P> +"If we don't get 'em, Injin Charley will," declared the leader, +confidently. "I wouldn't be surprised to see him show up with 'em any +minute now. He's an Injin and knows just what course them redskins in +the dugout will be likely to take." +</P> + +<P> +Still the outlaws seemed to waver, and the leader shifted his +arguments. "If you fellows take up with Salino's fool idea, just think +what shape you'll be in, even if you don't get caught. You won't have +no money and will have to go around like a hobo until you make a +strike. Now if we catch this chief, I reckon we can torture him, till +he tells us where his plumes are hid. Then when things have quieted +down a bit we can send a man in to dispose of 'em and walk out of here +like gentlemen with money in our pockets." +</P> + +<P> +This argument seemed to appeal to his companions, and the murmuring +ceased. +</P> + +<P> +Walter decided that he had heard enough, and turning, started to +retrace his way back to the canoe. His second movement forward, +however, was his undoing. A large limb upon which he had trusted his +weight broke noisily under him, and he was precipitated forward into a +huge clump of briars. Before he could regain his feet, strong hands +seized him and dragged him, still vainly struggling, out into the +clearing. +</P> + +<P> +"One of 'em," cried the leader triumphantly, "I reckon the rest ain't +far off. Scatter and search the point for 'em, boys,—but wait a bit, +maybe this young cub can save us trouble." +</P> + +<P> +But Walter had been thinking rapidly. If he was to save his chum it +was no time for nice scruples. With a silent prayer for forgiveness, +he waited the outlaws' questions. +</P> + +<P> +The leader drew a revolver, cocked it, and presented it at the lad's +head. "You can tell me the truth now or I'll blow your head off," he +growled. +</P> + +<P> +Walter's face took on an expression of fear and cringing terror far +greater than he was really feeling. The brutal ruffian eyed this +appearance of fear with every evidence of satisfaction. "Now I guess +you'll answer my questions truthfully," he said threateningly. "First, +where are your companions?" +</P> + +<P> +"They left us in the darkness and we could not catch up with them. +They must be way up the river by now," Walter stammered. +</P> + +<P> +His questioner swore loudly. "Got past us, did they? Well, no matter, +we'll get them easily now, we know for sure which stream they took." +</P> + +<P> +Walter could hardly conceal his delight at having put the ruffian upon +a false trail, but he was ready for the next question, which came +quickly. +</P> + +<P> +"How did you get here?" +</P> + +<P> +"The canoe struck a log, capsized, and sank. I swam ashore." +</P> + +<P> +"What became of the fellow in the boat with you?" +</P> + +<P> +"Drowned, I guess," said Walter with a sob. +</P> + +<P> +The leader turned to the others. "I reckon he's too scairt to be +lying," he said, "however, you had better take a look around the point. +Be quick about it, though, for we will have to hurry to catch up with +those other chaps. Here, tie this fellow up before you go." +</P> + +<P> +Walter was seized, his hands tied behind him, and he was lashed with +his back to a small satinwood tree. +</P> + +<P> +He watched the departure of the ruffians with sinking heart. If they +searched thoroughly, Charley and the canoe were sure to be discovered. +</P> + +<P> +The outlaws soon returned, however, after a very careless search and +reported nothing in sight. Truth to tell, tired as they were, they had +quickly wearied of trying to force their way through the dense jungle. +</P> + +<P> +After a hasty breakfast, the leader gave the order to mount. "You two +stay here and wait for Injin Charley," he commanded, indicating two of +the gang. "We have got to let him know what we've learned. I reckon +we'll be back by night, if we ain't, you follow us in the morning." +</P> + +<P> +"What shall we do with the kid?" inquired one of the men. +</P> + +<P> +"Turn him over to Injin Charley when he comes in. I reckon he'll know +what to do with him," said the leader with a grin so evil and +suggestive that it made the helpless lad's blood run cold. +</P> + +<P> +The four outlaws and their leader mounted their ponies and soon were +lost to sight among the trees. The two left behind proceeded to make +themselves comfortable without a thought for the exhausted lad whose +tight bonds cut cruelly into arms and legs. They raked up beds of +leaves upon which they spread their blankets and then proceeded to make +up for the sleep they had lost during the night. +</P> + +<P> +Walter was not only suffering much physically, but was in great mental +distress as well. He feared that at any moment Charley, alarmed by his +long absence, might call or fire off one of the guns and bring the +outlaws to his hiding-place. How could he warn him of the danger he +was in? Suddenly the bound lad was seized by an ingenious idea. +Assuring himself by their deep breathing, that his captors were fast +asleep, he began to whistle, softly at first, then gradually louder and +louder till the weird, mournful strains of the "Funeral March" filled +the air. +</P> + +<P> +One of the guards tossed restlessly and woke up cursing. "Shut up that +whistling," he shouted, "that blooming thing gets on my nerves." +</P> + +<P> +Walter had no option but to obey, but the awesome tune had carried its +doleful message. The mournful notes had reached the ears of the +wounded lad in the canoe. Its message was plain to him. Walter was a +captive, or in great danger. And now began a contest between +will-power and pain and weakness from which many a man would have +shrunken. +</P> + +<P> +Three times Charley struggled to rise to his feet, only to sink back +exhausted with great beads of sweat standing out on his brow. At last, +abandoning the attempt, he began to wriggle back towards the stern of +the canoe. His progress was slow and painful, and even in the short +distance to be covered, he had often to lay quiet and rest. At last he +succeeded in reaching the stern, but here his difficulties were by no +means ended. Working awkwardly with his left hand he managed to draw +his hunting-knife and slash open the pack of provisions they had +brought with them. From these he selected a can of milk. It was slow +work opening it with one hand, but at last he succeeded in removing the +top. Part of the contents he swallowed as it was, the balance he +diluted with water and broke hardtack up in it. By the time he had +finished the food, a little color had crept back into his face. He was +still very weak, however, and another attempt to rise met with failure. +For a few minutes he lay quiet thinking, then rummaging in the pack he +brought forth a pint bottle of brandy. With repugnance written on his +face, he took several swallows of the fiery liquor. It ran through his +veins like fire. Shoving the bottle into his pocket, he succeeded in +staggering to his feet and slowly pulled himself up on one of the +mangrove's roots, and, pausing frequently to rest, gradually worked his +way to the shore. +</P> + +<P> +Walter's captors slept heavily until the noon hour, when they awoke, +stirred up the fire, and prepared some dinner; but they offered none of +it to the unfortunate lad, who watched its preparation with hungry +eyes. Their repast finished, the two ruffians enjoyed a long smoke, +after which they played a few games of cards which ended in a violent +dispute that nearly resulted in blows. +</P> + +<P> +As the afternoon wore on without the appearance of the party they were +expecting, they again composed themselves to slumber. Slowly the +afternoon wore away and the two outlaws still slept on. The sun went +down and night began to fall and still the two showed no signs of +awakening. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Walter felt the bonds that held him slip to the ground and +Charley's voice whispered, "Drop on all fours, Walt, and work your way +back into the thicket." +</P> + +<P> +Walter did as he was bid as quickly as his stiffened limbs would permit +and soon caught up with his chum, who had begun to retrace his steps as +soon as he had severed the captive's bonds. In fact, he dared not wait +or tarry, for the false strength engendered by the brandy was fast +leaving him. To give out on the way would be fatal to both. He must +reach the canoe before the last remnant of his strength gave out or all +was lost. +</P> + +<P> +Slowly the two boys wormed their way through the jungle, expecting +every second to hear the sounds that would indicate that the prisoner +was missed and pursuit begun. +</P> + +<P> +At last they reached the clump of mangroves that concealed the canoe. +Here outraged nature claimed its due and Charley sank on the edge of +the shore unable to go further. It required nearly all of Walter's +remaining strength to drag his insensible chum over the roots and lower +him into the canoe. Precious as was each moment lost, Charley demanded +instant attention, his wound had broken open again from his exertions +and his tattered shirt was wet with blood. Walter stuffed bits of +cloth into the hole and bound it up as well as he could in the +darkness. This labor completed, he cast loose the canoe, and with a +few strokes of the paddle sent her over to the other side of the +stream. Here he laid aside his paddle and sank back to rest and think. +The friendly darkness completely hid them from the gaze of anyone on +the point. Until the moon rose they were as safe there as any place on +the river. The plucky lad sorely needed rest and refreshment. For two +days and a night he had been without sleep and for twenty-four hours +without food. This, with the strenuous labor and excitement through +which he had passed, had rendered him nearly as weak as his unconscious +companion. Sleep was out of the question until they were safe from +their enemies, but food was handy and he lost no time in making a +hearty meal on a can of corned beef, crackers and a tin of milk. The +repast brought fresh strength and courage, although his head felt very +heavy and he could hardly keep his eyes open. +</P> + +<P> +With the outlaws ahead and behind them, there was little choice of the +direction in which they should flee, and Walter paddled steadily on up +the river, keeping close to the opposite shore from the convicts. +</P> + +<P> +Hour after hour passed and found him still paddling wearily onward, +every muscle and nerve in his body aching with fatigue. At last a +brightening of the sky in the east warned him of the rising of the +moon. As its bright beams lit up the gloomy river and desolate +marshes, Walter gave a cry of joy; directly ahead, right in the middle +of the stream, lay a small island, its shores fringed with a dense +growth of mangroves. As the canoe drew nearer, Walter surveyed it with +increasing delight. Here was surely a safe place of refuge where they +might stay as long as their provisions lasted and until their enemies +tired of the pursuit. Where the island lay, the river had widened out +into a fair sized lake and the nearest shore was out of gunshot. There +was no way that the outlaws could reach them except by boat, and they +had none with them. +</P> + +<P> +With lightened heart, Walter ran the canoe far up into the mangroves +and fastened it securely to a large root. Making his way ashore he +soon found a small space of cleared ground, to which he speedily +conveyed their blankets which he spread out on the dry sand. Returning +to the boat he endeavored in vain to rouse Charley from the stupor into +which he had fallen. At last he gave up the attempt and half carried +and half dragged his chum ashore and laid him on his blanket, then +quickly stretching himself out by his side, was soon fast asleep. +</P> + +<P> +Once in the night Walter was awakened by a loud splashing. With pistol +in hand he stole to the water's edge. Many dark masses were slowly +gliding to and fro on the surface of the stream. "Alligators," he +exclaimed with a sigh of relief and returned to his blanket and sleep, +from which he was only aroused again by the rising of the sun. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap19"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIX. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE SWAMP. +</H3> + +<P> +Walter's first thought on awakening was for his chum. Charley was +tossing restlessly on his blanket, his face and hands flushed and hot +with fever. All of Walter's attempts to rouse him met only with +unintelligible words and phrases. The exertion of the previous day in +his weak state, the opening of his wound afresh, and the unhealthy +river water he had drank, had all combined to bring him to a dangerous +condition. +</P> + +<P> +Walter removed the bandages and looked at the wound. It was of an +angry red and greatly swollen, and its changed appearance frightened +him. "Charley," he called, shaking him gently, "don't you know me?" +</P> + +<P> +Reason gleamed for a moment in the sufferer's eyes. "Sure, it's Walt," +he muttered. +</P> + +<P> +"Listen and do try to understand," begged Walter, earnestly. "We are +safe, Charley. The convicts cannot get at us now. We can stay here +and rest up as long as we want to and you can lay quiet and get well +again. Now, I am going to light a fire and get you some broth and +strong coffee, and, after you have taken them, I am going to heat some +water and give that wound a good cleansing. Do you understand, old +chap?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," murmured the sufferer, wearily. +</P> + +<P> +After putting his own blanket under Charley's head for a pillow and +making the sick lad as comfortable as possible, Walter began his +preparations for breakfast. Selecting a spot where the ground seemed +soft and free from roots, he dug a hole about two feet deep to contain +his fire. It required only a few minutes to make one large enough for +his purpose, and his next step was to bring up the provisions and +cooking utensils from the canoe. +</P> + +<P> +It was only a short distance to where the little craft lay moored +amongst the mangroves and a few steps carried Walter to the spot, but +on the edge of the bank he paused with a cry of surprise and dismay. +</P> + +<P> +The canoe lay bottom side up in the water. +</P> + +<P> +With the strength of despair, Walter succeeded in righting the +overturned craft and pulled it up on shore where he quickly tipped the +water out of it. +</P> + +<P> +One glance at the interior confirmed his worst fears, nothing remained +inside but the paddle, which had been wedged under the seats; +provisions, guns, and ammunition were all gone. +</P> + +<P> +Walter sank down on the bank in despair and buried his face in his +hands. He understood now, the meaning of the splash he had heard +during the night. A curious alligator had upset the light craft with +its nose or a flirt of its powerful tail. +</P> + +<P> +For a long time Walter sat silent and still, pondering on their now +desperate situation. One fact stood out clear in the mind of the +sorely tried and unhappy boy; they must, without delay, leave the +island, which only a few hours before had promised them a safe and +comfortable refuge. Their only chance lay in finding their friends +before he became helpless from lack of food. It needed no great +medical knowledge to tell him that Charley was fast sinking into a +critical condition. Without food or proper medicine, the injured lad +was not likely to last long and every moment they tarried on the island +lessened their chances, which were already very slight, of escaping +with their lives. +</P> + +<P> +When he had arrived at this conclusion, Walter arose and made his way +back to his companion, who was lying as he had left him, tossing +restlessly from side to side. +</P> + +<P> +"I'm sorry, Charley, but you'll have to wait a little longer for your +broth," he said, cheerfully. "I have decided we had better waste no +more time here but hurry on and catch the captain; he has medicines +that will soon fix you up and make you all right again." +</P> + +<P> +His explanation was wasted so far as Charley was concerned, for the +wounded lad was beginning to rave in the delirium of fever. After a +few unsuccessful attempts, Walter abandoned the effort to rouse him to +consciousness, and, leaving him as he lay, proceeded to make ready for +their departure. He cut a pile of small myrtle boughs which he carried +down to the canoe and spread out upon the bottom and upon these he +stretched their blankets, making a soft and comfortable bed for his +chum to lie upon. Now came his hardest task, the getting of the sick +boy down to, and aboard of, the canoe. Fortunately the hearty meal and +rest of the night before had so far restored his strength, that he was +able, by half carrying and half dragging him, to get Charley, at last, +upon the bed prepared for him. Then pausing only long enough to get +his breath again, Walter took his old place in the stern and paddled +out into the stream, where he headed once more for the south, and with +long, steady strokes sent their little craft flying towards the unknown. +</P> + +<P> +As they slid over the water, leaving the miles rapidly behind them, +Walter kept a sharp watch on either bank for signs of the outlaws. +That they were still hunting for him and his friends, he felt no doubt, +but he cherished faint hopes that he had distanced them during the +night. He consoled himself with the thought that even were they +captured, death by a bullet would be far quicker and less painful than +a slow, lingering death from fever and starvation. +</P> + +<P> +All day the despairing lad paddled ahead, pausing only at noon for a +brief space to rest his wearied arms and drink sparingly of the river +water, which, black and foul as it was, reeked with fever. +</P> + +<P> +Charley, on his bed in the bow, tossed and muttered incessantly. Every +once in a while, Walter would crawl forward and sprinkle cold water on +the lad's hot face; it was all he could do to relieve the sufferer, +whose ravings fell heavily on his anxious heart. +</P> + +<P> +As the afternoon wore away, Walter's strength began to fail; the mental +strain, steady work, the blistering sun, and lack of food, were fast +telling on him. The temptation to stop and rest and sleep grew almost +irresistible, but he bravely fought off the weakness. Their only hope +lay in pushing on and on until they found their friends or came out +upon civilization. Whither the river led he knew not, but was in hopes +that it might at last bring them out into a settled country. To stop +now meant certain death. +</P> + +<P> +As night settled down, his tired eyes caught the gleam of a fire on the +shore not far ahead. A wild hope possessed him that it might prove to +be the captain and his companions, but, warned by his previous +experience, he approached the blaze cautiously. +</P> + +<P> +Slowly he drifted in towards the fire, against which he could soon +distinguish moving figures. At last, he approached near enough to +recognize the forms against the bright firelight, and hope fled. It +was another party of the outlaws, four in number, and, the disappointed +lad swung the canoe around to the further shore and paddled safely past +without being discovered. +</P> + +<P> +The night passed slowly away, and through the long hours the lad in the +canoe urged it steadily forward into the darkness. His tired, aching +brain was now possessed of but one thought, to paddle on, and on, and +on. His hands had cramped to the paddle handle, and the strokes were +feeble as a child's, but the blade still rose and fell regularly, and +the canoe still moved slowly ahead. +</P> + +<P> +Daybreak found him in the same position, the paddle still slowly +moving, and his bloodshot, staring eyes still fixed ahead. +</P> + +<P> +The rising sun brought him staggering to his feet, a cry of hope on his +lips. +</P> + +<P> +Dead ahead, and more than a mile away, the river disappeared in a great +forest of strange-looking trees. Amongst its shelter might be found +food and friends, thought Walter, and the hope gave him fresh courage +and strength. +</P> + +<P> +Before sinking back into his seat he carefully surveyed the further +shore. His gaze was arrested at a point about a mile behind the canoe. +There for about a half mile, the shore lay comparatively clear of +timber, very likely having been swept by fire at some time in the past. +It was not the character of the shore, however, that arrested Walter's +attention. His gaze was fixed upon four objects moving swiftly across +the open space and headed towards him. It required no great reasoning +to tell him that the four figures wore mounted outlaws and that they +had sighted the canoe. It was to be a race between ponies and canoe, +as to which should reach the forest first. +</P> + +<P> +With the strength born of desperation, Walter forced the light canoe +ahead. Behind him the riders spurred their ponies on at the top of +their speed. Walter could see, by glancing over his shoulder from time +to time, that the outlaws were steadily gaining, but the canoe was +moving swiftly, also, and was rapidly drawing near to the strange +forest, and Walter decided with a thrill of joy that the enemy would +not arrive in time to cut him off from the shelter of the trees. +</P> + +<P> +The outlaws were not slow to recognize this fact. Their rifles began +to crack and the bullets to whistle around the canoe. Fortunately the +motion of their mounts made their aim uncertain, and the bullets did +but little damage, only one touching the canoe, and it passed +harmlessly through the side far above the water line. Before the +pursuers could draw near enough to make their fire certain, the canoe +had passed in amongst the trees and the outlaws reined in their mounts +swearing loudly. +</P> + +<P> +As he neared it, Walter had watched the forest with growing amazement. +The river seemed to end at its edge, but as he drew closer the reason +for the anxiety of the outlaws to prevent his entering it was plain. +No horse could travel through that dark, gloomy expanse. It was a +floating forest. Great cypress and giant bays reared their mighty +stems from the surface of black scummy water. Amongst their boughs +bloomed brilliant orchids and from limb to limb stretched tangled +masses of creeping vines and briers. +</P> + +<P> +The trees with their huge spreading roots grew so closely together that +it was with difficulty that Walter forced the canoe in and out between +them. His exultation at his escape from their enemies had given way to +a settled despair. From descriptions he had heard, he recognized this +mighty floating forest as the fringe which surrounds that greatest of +all mysterious, trackless swamps, the Everglades. Before him lay the +mighty unknown, unexplored morass, reeking with fever, and infested +with serpents; behind him waited sure death at the hands of the outlaws. +</P> + +<P> +One faint hope alone remained to him. If his strength held out, he +might in time come upon a camp of the Seminoles, the only human beings +in this unknown land. +</P> + +<P> +Considering the small numbers of the Indians and the vastness of the +swamp, it was a faint chance indeed that he or his companion would live +to see any of the tribe, but, faint as it was, no other hope remained +and Walter sent the canoe onward with feeble strokes. +</P> + +<P> +Gradually the trees grew further and further apart until at last the +canoe passed out from their shadows into a lake, surrounded by tall +growing grass and reeds. Far as the eye could reach stretched the +dismal swamp, broken here and there by lakes or creeks and now and then +by an island of higher ground rising from the rotting mud. +</P> + +<P> +Under the heat of the blazing sun there rose around the canoe thick +vapors from the scum-covered water and rotting vegetation, bearing in +their foul embrace a sickening, deadly stench. +</P> + +<P> +The paddle strokes grew slower and slower, and gradually ceased, +Walter's eyes slowly closed, and he sank down unconscious. His paddle +fell from his nerveless hand and floated away on the stagnant water +just as a dark, shapeless mass crept out of a bunch of reeds and struck +the canoe with a gentle thud. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap20"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XX. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +SAVED. +</H3> + +<P> +Darkness, black as night, floated over Walter's reeling brain; +darkness, pierced by a thousand gleaming, twinkling lights, brilliant +as stars, then came a void and nothingness. Slowly at last he felt +himself struggling up out of the void, battling, fighting for +consciousness, then came a delicious sort of languor. If this was +dying, it was very pleasant. Forms seemed to be flitting before his +half-opened eyelids and the hum of voices seemed to float in his ears. +One voice irritated him greatly; it was faintly familiar in its loud +joyousness. What was it saying? +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, Massa Captain, bless de Lawd, he ain't dead." +</P> + +<P> +Another voice responded, "No, thank God, he's goin' to live, Chris. +Bear a hand and we'll get him into the wigwam." +</P> + +<P> +There was a sensation of being home through the air, and Walter +surrendered to the delicious languor,—and slept. +</P> + +<P> +When he opened his eyes again an ebony face was bending over him and +Chris' voice demanded, "Golly, don't you know me, Massa Walt?" +</P> + +<P> +"It's Chris," Walter said, smiling feebly, and the little darky danced +about in joy. +</P> + +<P> +Walter raised his head with an effort and looked about him. He was +lying on a bed of soft moss with a pillow of blankets under his head. +He seemed to be surrounded by walls of bark which met in a point far +above his head; opposite him lay another figure on a bed similar to his +own. +</P> + +<P> +"Where am I, and how did I get here?" he demanded confusedly, "the last +I remember was being in the canoe a few minutes ago and everything +getting dark before me." +</P> + +<P> +"A few minutes ago," cried Chris, excitedly. "Why, it's dun been two +days since Massa Captain come on you when he was paddlin' around the +lake. You was layin' in the bottom of the canoe like you was dead." +</P> + +<P> +"Two days," exclaimed Walter in astonishment; then, with a sudden note +of dread in his voice, he cried, "Charley!" +</P> + +<P> +"He's gettin' along pretty well," said the little darky cheerfully, +"he's lyin' right across from you thar. Now you jus' keep still an' +doan' talk no more," he commanded. "Massa Captain out fixing up some +soup. Reckon he'll let you talk some more after you drink it." +</P> + +<P> +The captain soon appeared with a gourd full of steaming liquid. He was +overjoyed at finding Walter conscious, but firmly insisted that he +should remain quiet, and he fed him liberally with the hot soup. +Indeed, Walter felt little desire to talk; a few swallows of the warm +liquid made him very drowsy, and he quickly sank into a deep sleep from +which he awoke feeling much stronger and almost like his old self again. +</P> + +<P> +To his great joy, he found Charley conscious, and without fever, +although still very weak. He sat down on the edge of the invalid's bed +and the two talked over the thrilling adventures through which they had +passed. +</P> + +<P> +They were interrupted by the entrance of the captain and Chris, the +captain bearing an armful of yams and Chris a string of fresh fish. +"We are layin' in a stock of provisions against the appetite I reckon +you lads will have now you are gettin' better," explained the captain, +cheerfully. +</P> + +<P> +Walter caught the old sailor by the sleeve and held him tightly. "Now +you have got to sit right down and tell us your story before I will let +you go," he said. "First, Charley and I want to know where we are." +</P> + +<P> +The captain filled his old black pipe, and got it to drawing good +before he answered. +</P> + +<P> +"You're on an island about two miles inside the Everglades, as near as +I can calculate." +</P> + +<P> +"Did you build this shelter since you have been here?" asked Charley +eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +A shade of sadness passed over the captain's open face. "No," he said +slowly, "this island belonged to the chief an' this wigwam was where he +lived, an' it was here we brought him to die." +</P> + +<P> +"To die?" echoed both boys together. +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, lads, he passed away the same day we reached here," said the +captain, sadly. "He was a white man clean through, if his color was +red. I got to know him powerful well on the trip here, an' he sure had +all of a white man's feelings." +</P> + +<P> +The boys remained silent in face of the captain's evident grief, and +the old sailor, after a pause, continued. "We buried him under a big +oak tree, with his gun and plenty of food by his side, just as he had +directed, an' I reckon his spirit is up in his happy hunting-grounds +now." +</P> + +<P> +"And the young chief, his son, what has become of him?" Walter asked +after a pause. +</P> + +<P> +"Gone to gather his people together an' swoop down with them on the +murderin' convicts. He found out from signs, that I couldn't make +nothin' of, that his tribe had divided into two parties, one going +towards a hunting-ground called Big Cypress, an' the other to another +place where deer an' bear are thick. As soon as the chief was buried, +he jumps into his dugout an' starts to round 'em up. If he gets back +with them in time to catch them outlaws, may the Lord have mercy on +their murderin' sin-stained souls, for the young chap will have 'em +slowly tortured to death if he catches them." +</P> + +<P> +"Tell us all about your trip," Walter urged, "how did we get separated, +I wonder?" +</P> + +<P> +"It puzzled me for a bit as to what had become of you, but the chief +soon explained it by saying that you likely had taken another stream. +Chris an' I was for turnin' back an' huntin' you, but the chief +reasoned us out of it, by saying that you might have taken any one of a +dozen forks and that there would be mighty little chance of our hitting +on the right one, while we would be almost sure to run right into the +convicts' hands again. But what influenced us most, was his explainin' +that all streams thereabout ran into, or from, the Everglades, an' that +all we had to do was to get here first and keep a sharp lookout along +the cypress for you, and you'd soon show up. The chief had great +confidence in your good sense, Charley, an' seemed to feel certain that +you would reason that the only safe thing to do was to keep right on up +the stream you had taken. 'Course, we never suspected that you had +been shot." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I guess my successor in command did all I would have done and +perhaps more," remarked Charley with a smile. +</P> + +<P> +"It was just by luck that I happened to do the right thing," said +Walter, modestly. +</P> + +<P> +"You didn't appear like as though luck had helped you much when I found +you, Walt," remarked the captain, dryly. "It sorter looked to me like +only hard work an' an amazin' lot of pluck an' grit had brought you +that far." +</P> + +<P> +"Now don't you go trying to make a hero out of me," said Walter, hotly, +"I won't have it. I only did what anyone would have done, and I made a +whole lot of foolish blunders besides." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, you can have it your own way, lad," agreed the captain, with a +glance of affection at the embarrassed young hunter. "I reckon that's +about all of our story worth tellin'," he concluded. "We made the best +speed we could so as to get here before you. We caught sight of +parties of the convicts searchin' for us now an' then, but the chief +was more than a match for them an' they never caught sight of us. +Since we got here, Chris and I have patrolled the rivers' mouths for +sight of you every day, but we had begun to despair when we came upon +your canoe day before yesterday. And now, that's all, my lads, except +that I feel we had all ought to join in thankin' our Heavenly Father +for deliverin' us from our enemies an' bringin' us together again." +</P> + +<P> +With hearts full of gratitude, the young hunters sat with bowed heads +while the kindly old sailor offered up a simple, fervent prayer of +thanksgiving for the mercies they had received from the One who heeds +even the sparrow's fall. +</P> + +<P> +"Thar's one thing more to tell you, an' then I'm through," said the +captain, breaking the thoughtful silence that had followed the prayer. +"The chief seemed to set great store by you, Charley. I reckon it came +from your savin' his life at the risk of your own. Anyway, he spoke +right often of the 'young white chief', as he called you, an' once he +said you should be honored with riches. Not an hour before he died, he +gave me this an' charged me to give it to you." +</P> + +<P> +Charley took with wonder the object the captain handed him. It was a +piece of exquisitely dressed doe-skin about six inches square. On the +smooth side was traced in a reddish sort of ink a kind of rude sketch +of a lone palm tree, amongst the leaves of which a large bird was +perched. Resting against the foot of the palm was an object that bore +a faint resemblance to a paddle. +</P> + +<P> +"It is sign language, but I cannot make out what it means," said +Charley in perplexity. "I wonder why he wanted me to have it and what +he wanted me to do with it." +</P> + +<P> +"I've puzzled over it some myself," said the captain slowly, "an' I +can't make anythin' out of it. From what the chief let fall from time +to time, though, I gathered he wanted to make you a valuable present, +an' I've been kinder thinkin' that picture tells what an' where it is." +</P> + +<P> +Charley folded the piece of doe-skin and put it carefully away in an +inner pocket. "I will try to find out what it means when my head is +clearer," he said. "Just now, all I can think of is something to eat." +</P> + +<P> +"And you shall have something to eat right off," said the captain, +heartily, "it's about time for supper anyway. Hustle up, Chris, an' +get them fish cleaned. I reckon it won't hurt the lad to have a bit of +solid food, now, providin' it's well cooked." +</P> + +<P> +The sun was just setting when the captain and Chris reappeared bearing +gourds full of smoking fish, and sweet sugary yams, and ears of curious +small kernelled Indian corn. +</P> + +<P> +The boys made merry over the delicious meal, but a curious constraint +seemed to rest upon the captain and Chris. Once Walter surprised them +exchanging glances full of a strange, expectant uneasiness. The +circumstance aroused his curiosity, but he refrained from asking any +questions, deciding that the captain would explain the trouble in his +own good time. +</P> + +<P> +As the evening wore away, the change in the captain's manner became +more and more marked. All his cheeriness of the day had departed, +leaving him glum and silent. He took no part in the lively +conversation going on between the boys, but sat apart answering their +questions in monosyllables. His manner, Walter decided, was that of a +man who faces some great impending evil. +</P> + +<P> +With the coming of darkness the air was filled with the noises of the +swamp; the croaking of multitudes of frogs, the hooting of owls, and +the hoarse bellowing of many alligators. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly the boys sat up erect and stared at each other in amazement. +"What is it?" Walter cried. +</P> + +<P> +Clear and sweet above the noises of the night rang the tolling of a +silver-toned bell. +</P> + +<P> +"It's the bell of the spirits callin' us," said the captain gloomily, +while Chris sat ashen-faced trying vainly to control his terror. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap21"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXI. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE TREASURE. +</H3> + +<P> +"Nonsense, there are no such things as spirits," cried Charley, hotly. +"That tolling is made by a big bell, and a remarkably sweet-toned one, +too." +</P> + +<P> +"It's over a hundred miles to the nearest settlement," said the captain +gloomily, "do you reckon you could hear the biggest bell made that far?" +</P> + +<P> +"No," the lad admitted, "but that bell is not over two miles away. +Some Indian has traded for a bell and tolls it for his own amusement." +</P> + +<P> +The captain lowered his voice to a superstitious whisper. "It's a +mystery to the Indians," he declared, "and they avoid the sound like it +were an evil spirit. Even the chief could not tell me what it was, +although all his life he had heard its tolling. He wasn't so much +afraid of it as are the other Indians an' he built this wigwam here so +as to be within sound of it." The captain's voice dropped still lower +as he added impressively, "It tolled all the night after he died." +</P> + +<P> +"Have you tried to follow up the sound and discover where it comes +from?" demanded Charley, sharply. +</P> + +<P> +"Not me," declared the captain, solemnly, "I ain't got any call to +interfere with the doings of the dead. I tell you, lad, this is a land +of mystery, an' a man's got no call to fool with what he can't +understand." +</P> + +<P> +Charley checked the angry reply rising to his lips. He bethought +himself that the captain had spent his life in a calling that often +makes the strongest minded superstitious, while Chris inherited a +belief in ghosts and spirits from his race. Though he lapsed into +silence, Charley resolved that as soon as he was able to get around, +the mystery should be solved. +</P> + +<P> +For about an hour the air rang with the sweet chiming notes, then they +ceased as suddenly as they had begun and the boys dropped off to sleep +to dream of this strange incident in this mysterious swamp. +</P> + +<P> +Walter was astir early, apparently as well as he had ever been. +Hastily dressing he lifted up the bark flap which covered the doorway +and stepped out of the wigwam. +</P> + +<P> +The captain was busy cooking breakfast over a rude fireplace of stones, +a few feet away, while Chris on the bank by the water was industriously +fishing. +</P> + +<P> +The island upon which they were camped was only a couple of acres in +extent but rose high above the water. It was barren of timber, except +for a large live oak and one lonely palm which Walter noted with an +increasing interest. Some attempt had been made to cultivate the loamy +soil, and flourishing little patches of yams, sugar-cane, gourds, and +Indian corn testified to its fertility. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Captain, it doesn't look as if we ran much risk of starving to +death," remarked Walter, approaching the old sailor. +</P> + +<P> +"No, thar ain't much danger of that, I allow," said the captain with a +heartiness from which all depression of the night before had fled. +"Over thar is the place you come in at, Walt," he continued, pointing +to the distant fringe of cypress. +</P> + +<P> +Walter looked long and earnestly in the direction indicated. "I can +see a thin line of smoke above those tree-tops," he declared finally. +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, I noticed it too," agreed the captain. "'Pears like them friends +are going to hang at our heels until they get another chance at us. I +wouldn't borrow any uneasiness if it weren't for that Injin bein' in +the party. I warrant he's found out already that the Injins are all +gone, an' is layin' his plans accordingly." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, they can't get to us without boats," said Walter, hopefully. +</P> + +<P> +"No, but they can make one if they are determined enough," observed the +captain, gravely. "I sorter calculate to paddle up near enough to them +to-day to learn what kind of mischief they are up to." +</P> + +<P> +"I'll go with you," said Walter, eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"No, you ain't strong enough yet. Jes' keep quiet for a day or two, I +reckon that will be a plenty to keep you busy. Wall, I guess this stew +is done an' we might as well have breakfast." +</P> + +<P> +The kettle with its contents was carried into the wigwam, and from a +cake, made of pounded Indian corn, and the stew, our hunters made a +hearty breakfast. +</P> + +<P> +After the meal, a council of war was held. The captain outlined their +situation in a few simple words. "We are fairly comfortable here at +present, lads, but it's goin' to be a week or ten days before Young +Tiger gets back with his people. We've got plenty of food to last a +good while, but I reckon this swamp is about the most unhealthy place +on earth an' we run a good big risk of being sick with fever before the +Indians come. On the other hand, it's risky to try to get out of here +any way but the one we came in. We'd be about sure to get lost in the +swamp, an' there's no tellin' what might happen to us. We can't get +out the way we come in as long as those fellows are standin' guard +outside waitin' for us." +</P> + +<P> +"I vote to stay where we are," said Walter, promptly. "We may be able +to escape the fever if we take good care of ourselves." +</P> + +<P> +Charley and Chris quickly agreed with Walter. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess it's the wisest thing to do," admitted the captain, "although +I will be mighty glad to get out of this creepy place. I tell you this +ain't no place for white men, lads. But I've got to leave you now, +boys. Make yourself as comfortable as you can, an' keep out of the sun +during the heat of the day. I reckon I'll be back long before sundown." +</P> + +<P> +Walter accompanied the captain down to the canoe and begged hard to go +with him, but the old sailor was firm in his refusal and Walter watched +him paddle out of sight with a dim foreboding of evil at his heart. +</P> + +<P> +On his way back to the wigwam, Walter paused a moment on the island's +highest elevation to take a more careful survey than he had yet done of +the surrounding country. He discovered nothing new, however, save what +was apparently a large island lying some two miles to the west of their +own. It seemed to rise far above the surrounding swamp and was +evidently very heavily timbered. +</P> + +<P> +Passing on into the wigwam, he was greeted with an exultant cry from +Charley. +</P> + +<P> +"I've solved it," he shouted. +</P> + +<P> +"Solved what?" demanded Walter in amazement. +</P> + +<P> +"This," cried his chum excitedly, extending the square of doe-skin with +its red ink tracings. "It's really absurdly simple," he continued. +"According to the captain, the chief talked about leaving me riches of +some sort. I took that circumstance for my key and tried to think what +a race as poor as the chief and his people would consider as riches. +The picture of that bird answered the question. Plumes are their only +form of wealth, hence plumes must be the treasure of which he spoke." +</P> + +<P> +"Reasoned like a detective," approved Walter, scarcely less excited +than his chum. +</P> + +<P> +"The rest was simple. The picture of the tree was to show where it was +hidden and the object at its base is intended as a shovel to tell that +I would have to dig for the treasure, but," and his face fell, "how are +we to find that identical tree?" +</P> + +<P> +"There's only one palm on the island," Walter assured him. +</P> + +<P> +"Then all we have to do is to go there and dig and we'll find the +treasure," Charley declared. "But we must wait for the captain, we +must all be present when it is unearthed." +</P> + +<P> +The morning slipped away quickly, the boys amusing themselves by +exploring their little island, fishing from the bank, and loafing in +the shade of the solitary palm, at whose base was supposed to lie the +buried treasure. +</P> + +<P> +Dinner time came and the meal was eaten without the captain, who had +not returned. As the afternoon wore away without any sign of the old +sailor, the boys began to feel a vague uneasiness which increased as +the sun set and night began to fall. Walter, who alone knew the real +object of the captain's trip, was greatly worried. Long after the +others had retired to the wigwam for the night, he sat alone straining +eye and ear for sight or sound that would herald the absent one's +return. As the night wore away, anxiety deepened into certainty with +the troubled lad. Something must have happened to the captain. +Impatiently the lad waited for daylight, determined to set off at the +first break of dawn in search of the missing one. Suddenly, the lad +started up from the reclining position weariness had caused him to +assume. Full and deep upon the still night air rang out the tolling of +the mysterious bell. To the anxious watcher, its tones no longer rang +full and sweet as upon the previous evening, but sounded slow and +threatening, as if freighted with an ominous meaning. +</P> + +<P> +A step sounded behind him and the overwrought lad sprang to his feet, +every nerve a-tingle. +</P> + +<P> +"Where are you, Walt?" called Charley's voice from out of the darkness. +</P> + +<P> +"Here," answered Walter, with a sigh of relief. +</P> + +<P> +"The captain not here yet?" asked his chum, fearfully, as he found his +way to his side. +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Walter sadly, "and I am sure something must have happened to +him. I am off to search for him as soon as it's light enough to see." +</P> + +<P> +"And I am going with you," Charley declared. +</P> + +<P> +"You are not," said his chum, decidedly. "You are too weak for such a +trip yet. You would only make my task harder. You have no business +even to be out in this night air and dew. It may bring your fever back +on you." +</P> + +<P> +"I could not rest inside when I saw your bed and the captain's empty +and heard the tolling in the air." +</P> + +<P> +"What do you suppose it really is, Charley?" asked his chum, eagerly. +"It cannot be produced by anything human. Remember the captain's +saying that it had been tolling this way longer than the oldest Indian +could remember back." +</P> + +<P> +"It's a bell," declared his chum, a trifle uneasily. "Nothing else +could produce those tones and that regular tolling." +</P> + +<P> +"Charley," and Walter's voice lowered with the horror of the thought, +"the captain said it tolled all night when the chief died, and now the +captain himself is gone and the awful thing goes on as though it would +never stop." +</P> + +<P> +Charley, with an effort shook off the feeling of dread that was fast +stealing over him. +</P> + +<P> +"Nonsense," he said, cheerfully, "you are getting as bad as Chris and +the captain. I repeat, it is a bell: listen how regularly it tolls." +</P> + +<P> +As though in mockery at his words, the long, even reverberations +changed to a quick, harsh, discordant clatter and suddenly ceased. +</P> + +<P> +For awhile both boys sat silent, Walter striving to overcome the +superstitious dread tugging at his heart, and Charley searching his +active brain for some explanation of the mysterious sound, that would +harmonize with common sense and reason. +</P> + +<P> +At last Walter, by sheer will, regained his mental balance. "I am +tired and nervous, or I would never imagine such foolish things," he +said. "Of course it is as you say, produced by natural causes, and I +will likely laugh at my fears as soon as we stumble on the key to the +mystery. And now I am going to insist upon your going back inside, +Charley. It won't do for us to have you down with the fever again. +For our sakes, as well as your own, you must be very careful." +</P> + +<P> +Reluctantly, Charley retired to the wigwam and Walter once more was +left alone. +</P> + +<P> +With the first hint of gray in the east, he began to prepare for his +departure. What cooked food was on hand he stored in the bow of the +canoe, and casting off the painter took his seat in the stern. Then he +paused for one last look around before dipping his paddle. +</P> + +<P> +Away in the distance a moving speck on the water caught his eye. For a +few minutes he watched it in suspense, then gave a cheer of delight. +</P> + +<P> +It was the captain's canoe. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap22"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +DISAPPOINTMENT. +</H3> + +<P> +As the speck drew nearer all doubt vanished, it was the captain's canoe +with the old sailor himself in the stern paddling with slow, weary +strokes. +</P> + +<P> +Walter's cheer had brought forth his companions from the wigwam, and +all now gathered on the bank to welcome the wanderer. +</P> + +<P> +Slowly the canoe drew in to the shore, and Walter at last was able to +catch the painter and haul the light craft's bow up on the sand. Its +occupant sat still in the stern unable to move. His clothes were +stained and tattered, his hands torn and bleeding from many scratches, +and his pale, haggard face told of hardship and suffering. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't look scairt, lads," he called out cheerily, "I ain't hurt none; +jes' scratched up a bit, an' powerful tired. I reckon you'll have to +give me a hand to get me out. I'm cramped that bad I can't move a leg." +</P> + +<P> +Walter and Chris flew to the old sailor's help and between them +assisted him out of the canoe and up into the wigwam. Then Chris +quickly kindled a fire and soon presented the weary man with a gourd of +steaming coffee and the cold food which Walter hastened to bring from +the canoe. +</P> + +<P> +The captain ate like one famished, while the boys stood around eager to +hear his story. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll spin my yarn as soon as I've rested a hit, lads," he said, as he +finished the last morsel of food. "I'm clean spent, now, and want to +stretch out for a while." +</P> + +<P> +The boys helped him up and onto his bed, which he had no sooner touched +than he was fast asleep. +</P> + +<P> +It was noon before the old sailor awoke to find a hot dinner ready and +the boys patiently waiting. He was surprised to find that his +stiffness had nearly all disappeared, and, except for the cuts on hands +and face, he was as well as ever again. +</P> + +<P> +"My, this grub tastes good," he exclaimed, attacking the smoking fish +and yams. "I didn't have a bite to eat all day yesterday. But I +reckon I had better start at the beginning of my yarn. I reckon you +boys are some curious how I happened to turn up again in such shape. +Wall, after I left here I paddled on, till I came to that fringe of +cypress right opposite where the smoke was curling up. When I got that +far I got mighty careful, an' the way I coaxed that little craft in +between them cypresses was so quiet that I didn't even wake up the +water moccasins asleep on the roots. When I came near the outer edge +of the cypress, I fastened the canoe to a root and crept forward on +hands an' feet from one cypress tussock to another, sorter calculatin' +that I'd make less noise that way than in the boat. At last, I got +where I could glimpse out between the trees and get a view of the fire. +There was the whole twelve of them rascals workin' away as hard as +honest men. I watched them quite a while afore I caught on to what +they was doing, an', when I found out, it didn't make me feel any +easier. Lads, they was hollowing out the biggest dugout you ever seed. +They had got a giant of a cypress chopped down, hewed it sharp at both +ends and were burning it out inside with fire. While I was watchin', +that varmint of an Injin, Charley, left the gang an' struck into the +cypress an' passed by so close to where I was hid that I was sartin +sure he'd see me, but he didn't. I lay still there for hours, afeard +to move for fear I'd meet him comin' back. It was most sundown when he +returned, and I stayed on quite a bit after that listenin' to the +conversation. As I guessed, he had been out scouting an' had found out +that we were on the island an' that his tribe was too far away to +interfere with any plans he had in his head. Cute as he was, though, +he hadn't learned that the old chief was dead and the young one gone +for help. When I had learned all I could, I crawled back to the canoe +and struck out for the island. It was being cramped up so long in one +position in the cypress and in the canoe, that made me so stiff and +sore." +</P> + +<P> +"They surely can't be so reckless as to think of entering this swamp!" +exclaimed Charley. +</P> + +<P> +"'Tain't so very reckless, the way they look at it," observed the +captain. "You see they think that the Indians are all far off an' +ain't likely to come back for some weeks. When the redskins started on +their hunt they left plenty of signs behind to tell where they had +gone, and them signs are plainer than print to Injin Charley. Now, +them fellows figures they can drop down on this island, kill off all +hands but the chief, an' torture him 'till he gives up the plumes he's +counted on havin', an' be off, an' safe out of reach afore the +Seminoles return from their hunt. No, it ain't such a foolish sort of +undertaking after all." +</P> + +<P> +"How long will it take them to finish the canoe?" Walter inquired. +</P> + +<P> +"I calculate it will take at least three days more," said the captain, +reflectively. "You see, the cypress is green an' burns pretty slowly." +</P> + +<P> +"Three days," mused Charley, "and it will be at least a week before +help can come. We have got to count on meeting this danger by +ourselves." +</P> + +<P> +"I don't see nothin' to do but push on into the swamp," said the +captain disconsolately. "They outnumber us three to one. An' this +island ain't got no shelter for us to find cover behind." +</P> + +<P> +"Let's not worry about it now," urged Walter cheerfully. "The captain +says it will be three days at least before the canoe is finished so we +have plenty of time. If we decide to leave the island, we can easily +keep ahead of a clumsy dugout in our light canoes." +</P> + +<P> +"I am of Walter's opinion," agreed Charley. "Something may turn up in +the next two days, and, anyway, there are some things I want to +investigate before I vote to leave this neighborhood. I can promise +you one thing, captain, those fellows will never handle the plumes that +belonged to the chief." +</P> + +<P> +The captain listened in admiring astonishment as Charley recounted his +solution of the chief's legacy. "We have been wild to dig for the +treasure," Charley concluded, "but we would not touch a spadeful of +earth until you could be with us to share in the excitement." +</P> + +<P> +"Then you needn't wait another minute," cried the old sailor, who was +nearly as excited as the boys. "Get your spade an' we'll start right +in." +</P> + +<P> +"We haven't got one," confessed Charley, suddenly crestfallen. "What a +fool I was not to think of that." +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, I reckon dis nigger goin' to fix up somethin' to dig with +mighty quick," cried Chris, whose eyes were sparkling with anticipation. +</P> + +<P> +Running down to the canoe, the little darkey was back in a moment with +one of the paddles. "Reckon dis will do," he said, "got to be mighty +careful not to break it, though." +</P> + +<P> +Armed with the implement, which Chris' thoughtfulness had provided, +they lost no time in making their way to the lone palm. +</P> + +<P> +The next perplexing question was on which side of the tree to dig. +</P> + +<P> +"It's as likely to be on one side as the other," Charley declared. "We +might as well start in at random and dig a circle around the tree until +we come to it." +</P> + +<P> +The others had no better plan to suggest, and Walter, seizing the +paddle, began to throw the dirt away. Luckily the soil was not packed +hard, for even, loose as it was, progress was very slow with the rude +implement he was wielding. At the end of an hour, he was content to +surrender the paddle to the captain, who, when tired, turned it over to +Chris. +</P> + +<P> +It was slow work and the sun was getting low in the west when the +circle around the palm was at last completed, and the diggers stood +looking at each other with disappointment written on their faces. +</P> + +<P> +"We must go deeper," Charley declared, "I am certain that this is the +right spot, and the chief would have had no interest in deceiving or +misleading us." +</P> + +<P> +"We have gone down two feet already," said Walter, in a discouraged +voice, as he started wielding the paddle again. "I guess there is +something wrong with our calculation, Charley." He stopped suddenly +and looked up with a comical look of surprise and anticipation. +</P> + +<P> +"I struck something," he announced breathlessly, "something kind of +soft and yielding." +</P> + +<P> +"Go on," Charley shouted in his excitement, and Walter bent to his task +again. +</P> + +<P> +The removal of a few more shovelfuls of earth exposed to view a large, +dark, hairy object. Stooping, Walter with difficulty lifted it out of +the hole. +</P> + +<P> +All clustered close around it in their eagerness. +</P> + +<P> +What had looked at first glance like a large, dead animal, proved to be +a deer-hide stretched on framework, the hairy side out. A few slashes +of Charley's hunting-knife laid open this rude leather box and revealed +to their eager gaze a smaller similar box inside. Charley lifted it +out and cut away the top. +</P> + +<P> +By the now dim light, they could only see the tapering shapes of +hundreds of long plumes carefully packed inside. +</P> + +<P> +"There must be all of fifty pounds of them," said Walter, in an +awe-struck voice, "why, they'll make us rich men." +</P> + +<P> +"Give me a hand to carry them up to the wigwam," said Charley. "Run +ahead, Chris, and stir up the fire so we can see what we have got." +</P> + +<P> +The excited captain swung the box upon his shoulder and strode forward +hard upon Chris' heels. He laid his burden down close to the fire and +all crowded around. +</P> + +<P> +One look and a loud murmur of disappointment broke from every lip. +</P> + +<P> +What the dim twilight had hid, the firelight revealed in all its +disheartening truth. What had been once a beautiful heap of valuable +plumes, now lay an ugly mass of mildew and mould. +</P> + +<P> +For a moment no one spoke, so keen was their disappointment. At last, +Charley summoned up a feeble smile. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we are no worse off than we were before," he remarked with a +voice that he endeavored to render cheerful. +</P> + +<P> +"That's the way to take a disappointment, lad," said the captain, +heartily. "A pound of meat is worth more to us now than a hundred +pounds of plumes, anyway. Now, Chris, quit your grieving an' see if +you can't rustle up some supper. I reckon we'll all feel better after +a warm bite." +</P> + +<P> +"What shall I do with them, Charley?" asked Walter, who had remained +kneeling by the ruined treasure. +</P> + +<P> +"Throw them away, they are valueless," exclaimed his chum somewhat +testily, for his disappointment was almost more than he could bear +cheerfully. +</P> + +<P> +Walter lifted the leather box and disappeared in the darkness toward +the water. He did not throw it into the stream, however, but after a +moment's hesitation on the bank, descended to his canoe and, shoving +his burden far up under the stern deck, retraced his steps to the fire. +</P> + +<P> +In spite of their attempts at cheerfulness, the gloom of their +disappointment hung heavy upon them, and it was rather a silent group +that gathered in the wigwam after supper. Chris and the captain soon +sought their beds and ere long their loud, regular breathing told that +they had found solace for the disappointment of the day. The two boys +felt too excited to sleep and sat long talking over their still +perilous situation. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly, as on the other two nights, began the now familiar tolling of +the mysterious bell. +</P> + +<P> +The captain stirred uneasily in his sleep and Chris opened his eyes +drowsily but soon fell off to sleep again. +</P> + +<P> +"Come outside, Walt, where we can talk without the chance of being +overheard," Charley whispered. +</P> + +<P> +The two lads stole softly out of the wigwam and down to the water's +edge where they sat down on the grassy bank. +</P> + +<P> +"Now listen closely," Charley commanded. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap23"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +MORE MYSTERY. +</H3> + +<P> +The two boys remained quiet for several minutes listening to the bell's +deep toned tolling. At last Walter remarked, "It don't sound as though +it was very far away from us, not over two miles, I should say." +</P> + +<P> +"Good," exclaimed Charley with satisfaction, "I was about to ask you +what you thought the distance was. Two miles is about what I had +estimated. We can't say very exactly, for sound is likely to travel +far in this still air. But let us make a liberal allowance for the +stillness. I think we are safe in saying that the sound comes from a +point not more than four miles distant from this island. Now, the next +question is, from what direction does it come?" +</P> + +<P> +"It's hard to tell exactly, the sound seems to fill the air so, but I +should say that it came from the westward," said Walter after another +moment of careful listening. +</P> + +<P> +"We agree again," declared Charley, "it is not likely that we are both +mistaken. Now that we have settled the distance and the direction from +which the sound comes, what do you say to starting out in the morning +and trying to solve the mystery?" +</P> + +<P> +"The captain will not let us go," Walter objected. +</P> + +<P> +"For this once, I do not intend to consult him," Charley said. "We +will get off before he is awake. We can leave a note saying that we +will be back before dark." +</P> + +<P> +"Good," exclaimed his chum, "even if we accomplish nothing else, we may +find an island that can be defended better than this one." +</P> + +<P> +So it was settled and the boys crept back to bed eager for the coming +of the morrow. +</P> + +<P> +The eastern sky was just beginning to lighten a little when the boys +got up and dressed, collected what cold food they could find, and, +leaving a note where the captain could not fail to find it, stole down +to the canoe and quietly embarked. +</P> + +<P> +Charley's shoulder was still too sore to permit of his using the paddle +so he made himself comfortable in the bow while Walter in the stern +wielded the blade. +</P> + +<P> +The canoe was headed around to the westward, as near as they could +determine, for the point from whence had come the tolling of the bell. +"I noticed what looked like a large island, from our camp, about two +miles off and in the direction we are headed," observed Walter as they +glided swiftly away. +</P> + +<P> +"I noticed it too," Charley answered, "and I do not think we can do +better than start our search there, if it proves to be an island. We +will be there in an hour at this rate. I wish I could spell you, Walt, +but it don't seem right for you to be doing all the work." +</P> + +<P> +"Nonsense, I am enjoying it," his chum protested, "everything about +this swamp is so novel and strange. See those cute little turtles on +every log, and those curious looking smoke-birds, and did you ever see +anything more beautiful than those trees with their hanging moss and +with every bough full of orchids of every color of the rainbow?" +Walter ceased his paddling for several minutes and the canoe drifted +slowly on while the two boys gazed with delight at the novel beauty +that surrounded them. The dark, stagnant water through which they +drifted was nearly hidden from view by great white and gold +water-lilies and the butterfly flowers of water hyacinths, the trees on +either side stood like beautiful gray ghosts under their festoons of +Spanish moss through which flashed the blazing hues of flowering +orchids. Brilliant-hued paroquets and other birds flitted amongst the +tree-tops, while to finish the delicious languor of the scene the air +hung heavy with the subtle, drowsy scent of wild jasmine. +</P> + +<P> +"It is the great swamp in its happiest mood," observed Charley, "but +even here under all this beauty are hidden countless serpents and +crawling things, while everywhere under this fair appearance lurks +fever and disease." +</P> + +<P> +Walter resumed his paddle with a sigh of regret and sent the canoe +flying around a point and away from the scene of beauty. Here the +stream widened out to about half a mile in width and increased in +breadth as they advanced. Half a mile ahead lay the island they were +seeking, its banks rising high above the great lagoon in which it lay. +It was about four hundred acres in extent and its shores were covered +with a dense tropical growth. Between it and the canoe was another +tiny island about two hundred yards distant from its big sister. +Between the boys and the smaller island floated a score of dark masses +like the roots of trees. +</P> + +<P> +"Alligators," declared Walter as they drew nearer to the floating +objects. +</P> + +<P> +"I am not so sure about that," said Charley, who was watching the +objects with closest attention. "Sheer off, Walt, and give them as +wide a berth as possible." +</P> + +<P> +He watched with anxiety as two or three of the strange creatures, as +though impelled by curiosity, swam lazily out towards the canoe. "Give +way, Walt," he cried, "paddle as fast as you can." +</P> + +<P> +Under Walter's vigorous strokes the canoe shot past the lazily swimming +creatures whose curiosity did not appear to be great enough to induce +them to increase their exertions. +</P> + +<P> +When they were left behind Charley heaved a sigh of relief. "They are +crocodiles," he explained, seeing his chum's look of surprise. +"Alligators are harmless, generally speaking, but if one of those +fellows should upset you, you'd be chewed up into mince meat in a +jiffy. But here's island number one. I guess we do not care about +landing there now, do we? The bigger one looks far more promising, +let's try it first." +</P> + +<P> +Walter gave ready assent, and they passed by the little island with +only a casual glance. +</P> + +<P> +In a few minutes more they had left it behind and had drawn close to +its bigger sister. Choosing a place at which the timber seemed +thinnest they ran the canoe up on shore and fastened it securely. +</P> + +<P> +With guns in hand they scrambled up the high bank and stood for a +moment surveying the surroundings. From that elevation, they could see +quite clearly for a couple of miles in each direction. Save for the +little island they had passed they could see no other solid land within +the range of their vision. +</P> + +<P> +Charley noted the fact with satisfaction. "The solution of our mystery +must lie on one of these two islands," he declared, "and the chances +are in favor of this one, so here goes to discover it," and he plunged +into the timber with Walter close at his heels. He had taken no more +than twenty steps when he stopped with an exclamation of surprise and +astonishment, his way was barred by a great wall of stone that towered +several feet above his head. It had once been a fortification of +considerable strength, but growing trees had made breaches in it here +and there, their thrusting, up-growing trunks tumbling its blocks to +the ground, where they lay hidden by covering vines. +</P> + +<P> +"Whew," whistled Walter as he readied his chumps side, "who could have +built this? It could hardly have been done by the Seminoles." +</P> + +<P> +"No," said Charley, who was examining the strange wall carefully, "this +stone is all limestone, which is found only along the coast or at a +great depth. It has been brought here from a considerable distance. +Indians may have done the work, but they never did it willingly. If +they did it at all, it was as slaves. But we have no time for idle +speculation. Let's walk along it and see how far it extends." +</P> + +<P> +But after forcing their way along the wall for almost a quarter of a +mile, at the expense of a good deal of exertion, they gave up the task. +</P> + +<P> +"I believe it extends clear around the island," Walter declared, "we +can't spare any more time to follow it up; it's noon already. Let's +see what is inside." +</P> + +<P> +Charley offered no objection, and the two boys climbed through a gap in +the wall and reached the great enclosure. +</P> + +<P> +At first glance, they could see but little difference between the dense +growth amongst which they stood and that outside the wall, but a closer +examination showed that, while the timber was very thick, it was of +smaller size than that which they had left behind. +</P> + +<P> +"This was a clearing at one time, years and years ago," Charley said, +"see, there is an ironwood stump there that still shows the signs of an +axe. It takes generations and generations for one of those stumps to +rot." +</P> + +<P> +"Look, Charley," cried his chum who had pushed a little ahead, "just +see this." +</P> + +<P> +A couple of strides brought Charley to his side, "A road," he cried in +amazement. +</P> + +<P> +Straight as an arrow, it extended before them into the depth of the +forest. So well and carefully had its smooth surface been laid that +even the assaults of time and the forest had been unable to dislodge +the great blocks of stone of which it was composed. Vines and creepers +had grown over its surface and the forest trees had met in solid mass +above it, but still it lay intact, a triumph of road building, as solid +and strong as when built. +</P> + +<P> +With a feeling of awe, the boys moved forward over its hard surface. +They had to stoop continually to avoid branches and the tangled vines +and briers had often to be cut away, but their progress was easier and +far more rapid than it would have been through the forest itself. +</P> + +<P> +They had proceeded perhaps a quarter of a mile when the road ended +suddenly at the base of another wall. A break in the wall told of an +ancient gateway but the gate itself was gone, probably rotted into dust +by the passage of time. +</P> + +<P> +The boys pushed through the gap and stopped short with a cry of wonder. +Before them lay an inclosure of perhaps two acres, and in its center +stood a half dozen buildings of stone, all in a fair state of +preservation. Near the building closest to the boys, a sparkling +little spring gushed forth and flowed away down a gentle incline +towards a corner of the wall. +</P> + +<P> +"Someone must be living here," Walter cried, "see, there are no trees +or vines growing here." +</P> + +<P> +But Charley stooped and scratched away the dead leaves blown in from +the trees of the forest. "As I suspected," he said, after a moment's +inspection, "this enclosure is paved like the road. My, what workmen +those fellows that did this job must have been for their work to +continue so perfect down to this day! I tell you this thing makes me +feel creepy, Walt." +</P> + +<P> +"And me too," agreed his chum. "Instead of solving a mystery, we have +discovered a greater one." +</P> + +<P> +But the young hunters were not the kind of boys to remain long under a +superstitious dread, and they were soon approaching the buildings +before them. +</P> + +<P> +The first building was the largest of the group. It was constructed +entirely of stone and had been little hurt by the passage of time. Its +doors and windows had, of course, rotted away, but otherwise it +appeared uninjured. Passing through the arched doorway the boys found +themselves in a large apartment divided into two by a stone partition. +Small holes here and there in the walls left little doubt as to the +character of the building. +</P> + +<P> +"It was their strong house or fort," Charley declared, as he gazed +around. "Here was where they used to gather when danger threatened. +The other buildings are no doubt dwelling-houses where they lived in +time of peace. You take one side and I will take the other and we will +search this one over carefully." +</P> + +<P> +But although the boys searched closely they could discover nothing to +tell them who had been the builders of this little city in the swamp. +</P> + +<P> +By the time they had completed their search of the larger building, it +was nearly noon and they sat down in the shade in the great arched +doorway and ate the lunch they had brought with them. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap24"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIV. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +MORE SURPRISES. +</H3> + +<P> +"What do you make of it, Charley?" Walter inquired, as he munched away +at his fish and yams. +</P> + +<P> +"The roads, walls, and these buildings were undoubtedly built by the +Spaniards," said his chum, decidedly. "I have seen lots of their work +in St. Augustine, and the West Indian islands, and there is no +mistaking its character. They are the greatest road-builders since the +Romans." +</P> + +<P> +"But history contains no mention of such a place as this," Walter +objected. +</P> + +<P> +"Yet here it is, history or no history," Charley replied. "Perhaps all +the voyages of gentlemen adventurers following Columbus were not known +to the historians of the time. Perhaps this place may have been built +by a detachment of De Soto's expedition. We must bear in mind that +Florida was long the favorite land amongst the Spaniards. From the +small number of buildings, I should say that this place was very likely +built by a comparatively small party, using, no doubt, the Indians for +slaves." +</P> + +<P> +"And the slaves at last destroyed their masters," Walter suggested. +</P> + +<P> +"I am not so sure about that," replied his chum. "I expected to find +bones in the fort but we discovered none. Perhaps the builders +abandoned this place even after going to so much trouble to fortify it." +</P> + +<P> +"Maybe we can find something to throw light upon it in the other +buildings," Walter remarked. "While you are finishing your dinner, I +am going to see where that spring goes to." +</P> + +<P> +Walter followed the little rivulet to where it disappeared in a small +gully under a corner of the wall. Climbing the stones the lad dropped +down lightly on the other side. +</P> + +<P> +Charley finished his lunch, washed his hands at the spring, and +resuming his seat in the doorway, leaned back upon one of the great +pillars to wait for his chum. The air was soft and warm and the noises +of the swamp stole to the tired lad's ears with a gentle lulling sound. +His eyes slowly closed and his head dropped forward upon his breast and +he slept. +</P> + +<P> +Quickly the hours slipped away and the sun was getting low in the west, +when Charley awoke. One glance at the declining sun brought him to his +feet, anxiety and dread in his heart. What could have become of +Walter? It took the thoroughly alarmed lad but a moment to reach the +wall where his chum had disappeared. He swarmed up it like a monkey +and dropped down on the other side. But no solid ground met his +descending feet. Instead, he crashed through leafy boughs and landed +in a tangled mass of vines. In the second before the vines gave way +under his weight, Charley succeeded in grasping a limb and swinging +himself in to the trunk of the tree where he found a safe resting-place +between two branches. Below him yawned a gigantic pit, its edge hidden +from view by the clustering trees. +</P> + +<P> +"Walter," he called anxiously, "are you down there?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," growled his chum's voice, "and I have been here for hours. +You're a nice companion for a man when he gets in trouble." +</P> + +<P> +"I fell asleep," confessed Charley, sheepishly. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, don't sleep any longer," said his chum sharply. "Help me out of +this, quick. It is awful down here." +</P> + +<P> +"All right, be patient a minute and I will have you out," Charley +answered as he climbed nimbly up his tree and reached the edge of the +pit. A moment's search and he found what he wanted, a long, stout +grape vine strong as a rope. He cut off a piece some forty feet in +length, fastened one end to the tree, and dropped the other down into +the pit. "You'll have to pull yourself out, Walt," he called. +</P> + +<P> +With the help of the grape vine and the aid of foot holds on the trees +growing up from the sides of the pit, Walter succeeded in scrambling +out. His face was pale and there was a look of horror in his eyes. +</P> + +<P> +"I believe I would have died if I had been compelled to stay down there +all night," he declared in a voice that trembled. +</P> + +<P> +"What is there down there?" asked Charley regarding his chum curiously. +</P> + +<P> +"The demon work of the fiends who built this wall," said Walter +fiercely, "It's their old stone quarry. They didn't bring rock from +the coast, they just dug down till they found the kind they wanted. +And Charley, all around the sides, chained to the solid rock, are the +skeletons of the workers." +</P> + +<P> +"I am right about the Spaniards building this place then," Charley +observed. "That's the way that most Christian nation always used to +treat its captives." +</P> + +<P> +"Let's go," his chum urged, "I guess my nerve is shaken from being down +there with those skeletons so long. The sun is getting low, anyway. +We will not have time to more than get back home before dark." +</P> + +<P> +"You're right, we must go, but I wish we had time to go through the +balance of those buildings," said Charley, regretfully. +</P> + +<P> +The two boys soon regained the canoe and paddled safely past the +floating crocodiles. +</P> + +<P> +"We haven't solved the mystery, after all," remarked Walter, as he +urged the canoe forward. +</P> + +<P> +"No, but we have done far better," declared Charley, enthusiastically, +"we have found a place where we will have ample protection in case we +are attacked by the outlaws. I am in favor of moving our camp there +to-morrow morning." +</P> + +<P> +"Of course that is the wisest plan," Walter agreed, "but since my +experience in that pit I have a dread of the place." +</P> + +<P> +"That will wear off in time. Hallo, there's our island and there's the +captain and Chris on the bank waiting for us." +</P> + +<P> +"I expect we will get a good lecture," grinned Walter, "I guess we +deserve it, too." +</P> + +<P> +But the captain was so delighted over their safe return, that he let +both off with a light scolding. +</P> + +<P> +Over the supper, the boys related the story of their discoveries amid +exclamations from the captain and Chris. +</P> + +<P> +The captain readily agreed to their proposal to move camp to the larger +island. "The young chief showed me how to fix signs that would tell +him which way we had gone in case we left the island before he +returned," the captain observed. +</P> + +<P> +This removed the only possible objection to the plan, and early next +morning the hunters prepared to shift camp. +</P> + +<P> +The little patch of yams was dug up, yielding several bushels of the +sugary tubers, the remaining ears of Indian corn were plucked from the +stalks, and a large quantity of dry gourds gathered, these, together +with the little that remained of their stock of provisions, were +conveyed to the canoes and our hunters were ready to depart. Before +leaving, the captain arranged the signs agreed upon with the young +chief. These were very simple, consisting merely of twigs partly +broken off and laid to point in the direction they had gone. +</P> + +<P> +"I reckon he'll see those," observed the captain, "The worst of it is, +though, that Injin Charley ain't likely to overlook them either." +</P> + +<P> +"That can't be helped," said Charley, "and once we are in our new home, +we will stand some show of being able to defy them. I only wish we had +the two rifles that were lost when the canoe upset. I wouldn't fear +the outlaws at all then." +</P> + +<P> +"I wish we had more provisions," Walter added. "Chris used the last of +the coffee this morning, and there is not much of anything else left." +</P> + +<P> +"It ain't no use wishing, lads," declared the captain, "we had ought to +be thankful for what we have. The Lord will provide. Jes' think of +the trials an' dangers He has brought us through already." +</P> + +<P> +A thoughtful silence, that continued until they reached the island, +followed the old sailor's gentle reproof. +</P> + +<P> +Although they had been partly prepared by the boys' account of their +discoveries, the captain and Chris were astonished at the sight of the +great wall, the road, and the group of stone buildings. It was plain, +too, that there was a good deal of superstitious dread mingled with +their wonder. +</P> + +<P> +Charley was quick to note this in their faces and gave them no time to +brood upon their fears. "We have got a lot of work to do," he +declared, as they deposited the loads they had brought up from the +canoes. "I think, we will get along better if we divide it up and go +at it with some system. Now, the captain and I will bring up the +balance of the things, and the canoes,—it will not do to leave them +where the outlaws can find them if they pay us a visit. While we are +doing that, Walt, you pick out one of the buildings for us to +occupy—the fort is too big, we would be lost in it; and you, Chris, +light up a fire and get us something to eat." +</P> + +<P> +The two addressed, accepted Charley's suggestions, cheerfully, and he +and the captain departed to carry out their own task. When they +returned laden with the balance of the canoe's cargo, Walter was +standing idly by the fire watching Chris prepare the dinner. +</P> + +<P> +"What, through already?" demanded Charley in surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"No, just resting," smiled his chum. But the moment the captain's back +was turned, his face became grave, and he gave a warning shake of his +head in Chris' and the captain's direction. +</P> + +<P> +Charley was quick to catch its significance. "I am afraid that +carrying is too much for my shoulder," he said, quietly, "Chris, you +give the captain a hand with the canoes, and I will look after the +dinner." +</P> + +<P> +No sooner had the two disappeared, than Charley turned to his chum. +"What's the trouble?" he demanded eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"Come and see," said Walter soberly. +</P> + +<P> +He led the way quickly to the first building and entered the open +doorway, followed closely by Charley. At the threshold, Charley paused +in horror. The room in which he looked was about twenty by fourteen +feet in size. In the center a great slab of stone rested on four large +blocks of the same material. It had evidently once done duty as a +table for at one side of it was a bench of stone, and upon the bench +sat, or rather lolled, four white, ghastly, grinning skeletons. Death +had evidently come to the sitters like a bolt from the sky. One +rested, leaning forward, with the bony claws clinching the table, while +yet another held a pewter mug as if about to raise it to his grinning +jaws. They had evidently been feasting when the grim visitor came, for +before them on the table sat a great stone jug and dishes of crockery +stained and discolored with age. +</P> + +<P> +"You acted wisely, Walt," declared Charley, recovering his composure. +"If Chris and the captain had caught sight of them, we would never have +been able to keep them on the island. We will have to work quickly and +get them out of sight before they return." +</P> + +<P> +With deep repugnance the boys immediately began the grewsome task of +removing the bodies. +</P> + +<P> +"We have no time to bury them now," said Walter, "let's lower them into +the pit; they will not be seen there, and we can bury them at the first +opportunity." +</P> + +<P> +The lads did not linger any over their task, but quickly bore their +ghastly burdens to the wall. With the aid of grape vines, the whitened +bones were hoisted to the top of the wall and lowered into the pit. +</P> + +<P> +They had only time to get back to the fire and pretend to be busy with +the dinner when the captain and Chris appeared bearing the first canoe. +</P> + +<P> +"Now for the other buildings," said Charley, sharply, as the two again +disappeared, "we have got to work lively if we are to finish before +they return." +</P> + +<P> +From building to building the lads swiftly passed. In all but one they +found ghastly occupants, some stretched out in the posture of sleep, +some sitting at table like the first seen, but all showing that death +had come suddenly and unexpectedly. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap25"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXV. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE CHAPEL. +</H3> + +<P> +The boys worked with the utmost swiftness, expecting every moment to +see the captain and Chris appear, but, luckily, those two, wearied by +their hard work, had paused to rest before returning with their load. +</P> + +<P> +"Thirty-one," counted Walter as he lowered the last grinning skeleton +into the pit. "There seems a kind of stern justice in their present +position, Charley," he continued. "Now, they are resting side by side +with those whom they tortured and enslaved while living." +</P> + +<P> +"They paid terribly for their cruelty," said his chum, fingering the +flint arrow-heads he had found by the skeletons. "The whole story is +as plain as print. The thirty men whose bones we have just disposed +of, enslaved and tortured members of what was at that time a great +race, working them as slaves in building these walls, and in that +terrible quarry. I confess to a feeling of admiration for them, in +spite of their cruelty. They must have been great warriors, though so +few in numbers, to hold at bay one of the bravest of the Indian tribes." +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder why they remained in this awful swamp," said Walter, musingly. +</P> + +<P> +"Case of necessity, perhaps," Charley replied, thoughtfully. "They had +probably lost many men by the time they reached this island, and had +concluded that to continue on meant utter annihilation, while here +they, with their superior arms and suits of mail, could stand off the +enemy. So they decided to remain and make the best of it. With the +labor of the Indians they captured from time to time they proceeded to +fortify the island and make it more secure." +</P> + +<P> +Walter gazed at his chum admiringly. "You talk as though you saw it +all in front of your eyes," he declared. +</P> + +<P> +Charley did not heed the interruption. "Years went by," he continued, +musingly, like one in a dream, "years in which they grew more and more +confident of their own power, and learned to despise their red foes. +But the Seminoles were only waiting with the patience of their race. +Mark the cunning of the savage. There comes a day and night of +feasting and rejoicing in the Spaniards' religious calendar. Work and +worry is laid aside and they gather in their homes to feast and +rejoice. Night comes and as the sun sets the sentries cast a look +around. Nothing is in sight. There is nothing to fear. They join the +merry-makers, and care and their suits of mail are laid aside, and +merriment prevails. The Indians' hour has come. Over the walls swarm +a red horde, creeping towards the unsuspecting feasters. One long +war-whoop, a shower of arrows, cries of agony, and all is over." +</P> + +<P> +Charley stopped. "I've been talking like a five cent novel," he said, +sheepishly. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll bet that is just the way it really happened," his chum declared. +"That explains why the fort was empty." +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps," Charley said, "but here comes Chris and the captain, and +we'll have to change the subject." +</P> + +<P> +"I 'spect you-alls don't pay no 'tention 'tall to dis dinner," grumbled +Chris. "De fire's all out, mighty nigh." +</P> + +<P> +"We are not good cooks like you, Chris," said Charley soothingly, and +the vain little darky grinned at the compliment. +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, I reckon dat's so," he declared pompously, "you chillens sho' +don't know nothin' 'bout cookin'. Spect you-alls mighty near starve to +death if it warn't for dis nigger. You chillens jes' get out, an' I'll +finish gettin' de dinner." +</P> + +<P> +The boys, relieved of the cooking, turned their attention to other +tasks. They carried the two canoes into the empty fort and placed them +bottom up in one corner. The other goods they piled up in the shade of +a tree. +</P> + +<P> +Charley then disappeared but soon came back with a large kettle he had +noticed when removing the skeletons. "It's copper," he said, +exhibiting it proudly, "with a little cleaning it will be as good as +when it was made. We need it for boiling water, for we have got to +clean house this afternoon." +</P> + +<P> +While he carried the copper to the spring and scrubbed lustily away +with sand to remove the green verdigris with which it was thickly +coated, Walter attempted the manufacture of a mop. Selecting a +straight piece of the root of a scrub palmetto, which grew in abundance +around the wall, he trimmed it with his knife into the desired shape +and size. Laying the piece, thus prepared, upon a large stone, he +pounded one side of it lustily with a piece of rock. A few minutes +sufficed to pound out the pith and leave the harsh fiber exposed. +</P> + +<P> +By the time the two lads had completed their respective tasks, Chris +announced that dinner was ready and all fell to with appetites +sharpened by the morning's work. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as dinner was finished, the copper kettle was filled with water +and placed upon the fire. By the time the water had come to a boil, +the party was sufficiently rested to attack the house cleaning. +</P> + +<P> +The building nearest the fort was selected as their future abode, and +never did mansion receive a more thorough scouring. Walter plied the +brush, while the captain dashed the water about, and Chris wiped the +floor dry with armfuls of Spanish moss. Charley, on account of his +still lame shoulder, was excused from this labor. +</P> + +<P> +Leaving his companions thus busily employed, Charley took his way to +the building that had aroused his curiosity in the morning, the one in +which they had found no skeletons. +</P> + +<P> +This building was a trifle larger than its fellows and differed very +little from them in external appearance, except that from its roof +projected a little tower. It was the inside, however, which had +excited our young hunter's curiosity. At one end was a kind of raised +platform and the space between it and the entrance was filled with +benches of stone. Charley reverently removed his hat ad he entered, +for he had guessed the character of the place during his morning visit. +It was a chapel that the hardy adventurers of long ago had erected for +the worship of their Maker. +</P> + +<P> +Upon the stone altar stood several vessels, likely of gold or other +precious metal for they were apparently untouched by the ravages of +time. Charley gave them hardly a glance but passed on to the end of +the building until he stood beneath the tiny tower. +</P> + +<P> +One glance upwards, and he uttered an exclamation of satisfaction. +Directly above his head in the little tower hung a large ship's bell. +A part of the mystery of the tolling was solved, but the most puzzling +part remained. +</P> + +<P> +Charley sat down on one of the stone benches and fell into a deep +study. There was the bell but where was the mysterious ringer? The +bell rope had long ago rotted away. The walls had once been plastered +and were still too smooth to offer a foothold to the most expert +climber. How then to account for the regular nightly tolling? The +mystery had in reality deepened instead of lightened. +</P> + +<P> +When Charley at last left the building, he was still puzzled in mind +and had decided to say nothing about his discovery to his companions. +Chris and the captain would be sure to view the matter in its most +supernatural light. +</P> + +<P> +On his return, he found the house scrubbed sweet and clean and the +workers taking a rest after their labors. Feeling that he had not +performed his just share of the work of the day, Charley took upon +himself the carrying in and arranging of their possessions. With these +unpacked and arranged, the room looked less bare and much more cozy and +home-like. +</P> + +<P> +But Charley viewed their scanty possessions with a trace of +dissatisfaction. Two rifles, two shotguns, a half of their ammunition, +and a half of their scanty stock of provisions had been lost when the +canoe upset. Of their original outfit, the two boys retained only +their pistols and ammunition and the tattered clothes they were +wearing. The captain and Chris still had their four guns but their +clothing was as rent and tattered as the two boys'. Of the provisions +there only remained a little sugar, a few pounds of flour, and a small +strip of bacon. +</P> + +<P> +"I tell you what it is," said Charley, as he joined his companion +outside, "we have got to do some tall hustling the next two days. We +have got to lay in a stock of food sufficient to last us for at least a +week, and we have got to make some kind of windows and doors for that +building, besides, which, we have got to manufacture some kind of +clothing for ourselves—mine are almost dropping from me." +</P> + +<P> +"My, what a list of impossibilities!" groaned Walter. "Frankly, I do +not feel as though I could do another stroke of work to-day." +</P> + +<P> +"No, we are all too tired for further effort to-day," Charley agreed, +"but we must get an early start in the morning. We will get some +boughs for beds, have supper, and knock off for the day." +</P> + +<P> +"I know just the stuff we want for beds," Walter declared, "there are +lots of the bushes growing just outside the wall." +</P> + +<P> +The bush Walter referred to, proved to be a species of myrtle with +small leafy boughs of a delicious, spicy fragrance. It grew so +abundantly, that in a few minutes the boys had gathered a large +quantity, which they carried back to the building and spread in four +great heaps on the floor. Upon these their blankets were spread, and +the room took on a cozy, homelike appearance. +</P> + +<P> +Supper was cooked over the camp-fire outside and by the time it was +eaten, night had begun to fall. The little party at once repaired to +their room. They know that the night air of the great swamp was +peculiarly unhealthy. Already they had exposed themselves far too much +to its baneful influence. +</P> + +<P> +They stretched out on their soft, fragrant couches and talked cheerily +over the events of the day and their present situation. Not since they +had left the camp on the point, had the boys felt so bright and +hopeful. They were well housed, none were sick, they were all together +once more, and even the threatened danger from the convicts did not +cause them great uneasiness. They felt confident of their ability now +to keep the outlaws at bay until help arrived. +</P> + +<P> +But their content was not to last long, for soon, harsh, and menacing +in its nearness, rang out the tolling of the bell. +</P> + +<P> +The captain, brave as the bravest in most any kind of danger, turned a +sickly white and sunk to his knees in prayer, while Chris, trembling in +every limb, buried his face in the blanket to shut out the awful sounds. +</P> + +<P> +"Come, Walt," whispered Charley, and the two boys stole out into the +darkness of the night. A few steps brought them to the chapel, and +pistols in hand they circled around it in opposite directions, but +their eager eyes caught no sight of moving forms. +</P> + +<P> +"It must be on the inside," declared Charley, as they met near the +door. "Let's go in and see." +</P> + +<P> +It took all their courage to venture into that dim, mysterious +interior, but the boys never hesitated, but stepped boldly in. Back +and forth they paced the grim interior, searching every nook and +corner, and found nothing. Not even a sound fell on their strained +hearing, save only the strong, steady tolling above their heads. +</P> + +<P> +Charley stood under the little tower and gazed longingly up into its +darkness where the bell, under some mysterious power, swayed steadily +to and fro. +</P> + +<P> +"I wish I could get up there, I'd tie the thing down," he declared. +"If this keeps up, we will have our hands full to keep Chris and the +captain on the island." +</P> + +<P> +"Come away, Charley," said Walter, nervously, "this thing is getting +positively uncanny. I declare I am beginning to feel a sympathy for +Chris' terrors." +</P> + +<P> +The two lads retraced their steps to the hut where they found the +captain, in spite of his superstitious fears, preparing to sally out in +search of them. +</P> + +<P> +For long the two boys sat trying to argue the captain and Chris out of +their superstitious fears. They might as well have tried to argue +against fate itself. +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, lads," the captain would say in reply to their logic, "I know +spirits seem against reason to shore-staying folks, but sailors know +better. Now there was Tom Bowling who took to hearing bells during his +watch on deck, an' not two days later, poor old Tom was missing." +</P> + +<P> +"Went crazy and jumped over-board," muttered Charley, but the captain +shook his head with the air of a man who had no doubt as to the nature +of his friend's fate. +</P> + +<P> +It was not long after the bell ceased tolling that the last of the +little party fell into a troubled sleep. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap26"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXVI. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +PREPARATIONS. +</H3> + +<P> +At dawn Charley arose, feeling unrefreshed after his broken rest, lit +the camp-fire, started breakfast, and then awakened the others. +</P> + +<P> +"We had better divide the duties for the day," he said, as they +dispatched their light breakfast. "The two things most pressing, are +to secure more food and make our windows and door bullet-proof. I +suggest that we divide into two parties for the day, one to hunt, and +the other to keep camp and work on our building. Suppose we call for +volunteers for each party." +</P> + +<P> +"I stay an' do de cookin', an' maybe catch some fish for supper," said +Chris, promptly. +</P> + +<P> +"I reckon I had better stay with Chris," decided the captain, who had +in a measure recovered from his scare of the night. "You lads are +nimbler an' better shots, an' consequently, likely to have better luck +in the hunting." +</P> + +<P> +This arrangement delighted Charley and Walter who were eager to explore +the island. Pistols were oiled, cleaned and carefully examined. Their +own guns being at the bottom of the river, the boys had to borrow arms +of Chris and the captain. +</P> + +<P> +Walter took Chris' light shotgun while Charley shouldered the heavy +rifle belonging to the captain. Thus equipped they were prepared for +either small or big game. +</P> + +<P> +Leaving the clearing, the boys plunged into the forest and headed for +the interior of the island. Their progress was at first very slow, the +forest being almost as tangled and thickly grown as that which they had +encountered near the water. As they advanced, however, the trees +gradually grew fewer and further apart until, after a half hour's slow +traveling, they emerged from the forest into a kind of prairie country, +consisting of stretches of flat grassy land broken by clumps of timber. +</P> + +<P> +"This is just the place for game," declared Charley, "this grass seems +to be a kind of wild rice, there had ought to be birds here without +number." +</P> + +<P> +As he spoke there was a whirl of wings, Walter's shotgun spoke twice, +and a brace of plump partridges struck the ground with a thud. +</P> + +<P> +The report of the firearm woke the prairie into life. Hundreds of +birds rose from amongst the tall grass. For the next few minutes, +Walter was busy with his gun, while Charley with his heavy rifle could +only stand idle watching. +</P> + +<P> +"Never mind, my turn will come," he declared. "That little popgun you +have will not be any good against big game." +</P> + +<P> +When the frightened birds had at last passed beyond range, the boys +gathered up those that had fallen victims; four partridges, three +doves, and a full dozen of black and red rice-birds. +</P> + +<P> +"Good," approved Charley, as he surveyed the feathered heap. "Those +are all fine eating and will provide us with a couple of dandy meals. +The only fault I have to find is that they use up too much ammunition. +If we use it up at this rate, we will have none when the outlaws come." +</P> + +<P> +"We can make traps for the birds," Walter suggested. "I know how to +rig up a figure-four trap that will fool the wisest of them." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we will not bother with traps this trip," Charley said. "We +have got enough birds for the present. We can come again to-morrow and +fix up for them." +</P> + +<P> +"What shall we do with these?" Walter inquired. "We don't want to turn +back yet, and they are too heavy to carry with comfort." +</P> + +<P> +"Leave them tied up in the first tree we come to and get them on our +way back," his chum answered. +</P> + +<P> +With this object in view, the two boys turned their steps towards the +nearest clump of timber. At their first step amongst its dry twigs and +branches, there was a crash amongst the bushes and a form of yellowish +brown shot past them like an arrow. +</P> + +<P> +Charley's rifle flew to his shoulder and its sharp crack woke the +echoes in the little wood. "It's a deer and I have got it," he +exclaimed, dashing off after the animal which was staggering and +wavering as it ran. +</P> + +<P> +Walter paused only to hang his birds high up in the crotch of a big +tree, and followed after his chum. +</P> + +<P> +But the deer, though wounded and losing blood at every step, was really +running faster than either of the boys calculated. It soon became +evident to both that they would have to work hard to overhaul the +wounded creature before it entered the main forest on the other side of +the prairie. Once amongst the dense growth, it would soon lose its +pursuers. +</P> + +<P> +Walter was only a few feet in the rear of his chum and running at the +top of his speed when Charley stopped so short and unexpectedly that he +collided with him with such force as to bring both to the ground. +</P> + +<P> +"Look," exclaimed Charley breathlessly, as he pointed ahead, "did you +ever see such a repulsive sight?" +</P> + +<P> +Charley had stopped just in time, not fifteen feet from where the two +had fallen, was a deep, saucer-like depression in the ground. In its +center, where the ground was soft, and muddy, was a writhing, twisting, +tangled mass of snakes of dozens of kinds, though the dirty, +sickening-looking, stump-tailed moccasin predominated. There must have +been thousands of serpents in the mass which covered a space twenty by +thirty feet, from which came the sibilant hiss of puff adders, and a +strong, nauseating odor. +</P> + +<P> +"It's an awful sight," shuddered Walter after one glance, "and just +think how close you were to running into that mass. You would never +have got out alive." +</P> + +<P> +"I would never know what struck me," Charley agreed. "I expect there's +a full quart of the deadliest of poisons distributed among those +beauties." +</P> + +<P> +"Ugh," said Walter, "the sight of them makes me sick. Come away, +Charley." +</P> + +<P> +"They have done us considerable damage anyway," Charley said, as they +pressed on giving the snake-hole a wide berth. "I cannot see anything +of the deer, can you?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I expect he got safe into the forest while we were delayed. We +might as well follow up his tracks for a ways although I guess it's but +little use." +</P> + +<P> +The fugitive had left a thread of scarlet blood behind him so the boys +had no trouble in following the trail. +</P> + +<P> +At the very edge of the forest, the boys stopped with a cry of delight. +A motionless heap of yellowish brown lay half in half out of the fringe +of trees, the shelter of which the poor creature had striven so +gallantly to gain. +</P> + +<P> +The boys wasted no time in rejoicing but at once fell to work with +their hunting-knives to remove the skin. This done, they cut off the +valuable parts of the carcass and bound them up in the hide for +transportation back to camp. When the task was completed the noon hour +had been reached and the boys kindled a fire and broiled some of the +venison. +</P> + +<P> +"That was a lucky kill for us," observed Charley as he attacked another +juicy steak. "It will give us fresh meat for several days. What we +cannot use before it spoils, we can cut thin and dry. The hide +properly prepared will furnish us with a couple of stout fishing lines +and a shirt for one of us." +</P> + +<P> +After a brief rest the boys resumed their exploration. They had no +present need for more game and were loath to waste any more ammunition. +The wild folks of the forest seemed to be aware of the fact and showed +themselves fearlessly. +</P> + +<P> +"We won't starve for lack of game," declared Walter, "in the last half +mile, I have seen coons, possums, deer, and a wild-cat, to say nothing +of the thousands of birds." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, it's a sportsman's paradise," agreed Charley, "it has probably +not been hunted since the Spaniards' time. Likely these wild creatures +have never seen a human being before." +</P> + +<P> +The boys had been pushing onward into the forest as they talked. By +the growing denseness of the jungle they surmised that they were +approaching the island's shore. This surmise proved correct, for about +a quarter of an hour after leaving their lunching place, they came out +on the bank directly opposite where they had landed on the island. +</P> + +<P> +This shore was very much like the other and the boys soon began to +retrace their steps. +</P> + +<P> +As they neared the place where they had left their venison hung in a +tree, their ears were greeted with a curious sound of mingled grunt and +growl. +</P> + +<P> +With their guns ready for instant use, the boys crept cautiously +forward. An exclamation burst from them as they came in sight of the +tree. Squatted round it in an angry, eager circle was a drove of at +least twenty wild boars; great, fierce-looking animals with dangerous +looking tusks. They were sniffing longingly, and looking up at the +suspended meat. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't shoot, Walt," cried Charley, but his warning came too late. +</P> + +<P> +Without pausing to think, Walter had discharged both barrels of his +shotgun at the huddled animals. +</P> + +<P> +The effect was not what he had anticipated. The shot glanced +harmlessly off their thick hides, and with grunts of rage, the whole +drove charged for the smoke and sound. +</P> + +<P> +"Get up a tree," shouted Charley, as he noted the effects of the shot. +</P> + +<P> +Walter did not wait for a second bidding but swung himself up the +nearest tree which happened to be a huge spreading live oak. Charley +swarmed up after him in such haste that he dropped his rifle at the +foot of the tree. He was not a moment too soon for a large boar made a +lunge for his legs just as he drew them up. +</P> + +<P> +"Now we are in for it," he exclaimed in disgust as he found a +comfortable seat in the fork of a limb. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, I guess they'll soon get tired and go away," Walter said +cheerfully. +</P> + +<P> +But the boars seemed to have no such intention. They ranged themselves +around the foot of the tree as they had around the venison and sat +looking longingly up among the branches. +</P> + +<P> +"I am going to try a shot at that big fellow that seems to be the boss +of the gang," said Walter after an hour had dragged away without the +animals showing any signs of leaving. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't do it," Charley advised, "you can't kill him with that small +calibered revolver, and it will only make them madder than ever." +</P> + +<P> +Walter put back his revolver with a sigh. "I guess you're right," he +admitted, "but, I declare, it makes me mad the way that big brute is +leering up at me." +</P> + +<P> +Wearily the hours dragged away, the boys getting cramped and weary in +the tree, and the besiegers showing no sign of abatement in their +interest. +</P> + +<P> +The darkness found two, very tired, hungry boys seated in the tree +while the boars still grunted in a circle around them. +</P> + +<P> +With the rising of the moon came the distant tolling of the chapel bell +and the boys looked worriedly at each other. +</P> + +<P> +"The captain and Chris will be frightened to death with that thing +tolling and we absent," Walter said. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, the captain will be sure to believe that we are all dead," +Charley agreed. "There is something unearthly about that ringing, but +of course there is a natural cause for it if we could only discover it." +</P> + +<P> +"After our experience last night I am almost ready to agree with the +captain and Chris," said Walter. +</P> + +<P> +"Except for its worrying those two, I would not mind it in the least," +Charley declared. "I am more upset by our position here. I guess we +will have to stay all night, those fellows below show no signs of +leaving." +</P> + +<P> +"What's that?" cried Walter, excitedly. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap27"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXVII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +A TERRIBLE NIGHT. +</H3> + +<P> +A shrill piercing scream, like the cry of a tortured soul, rang out of +the forest, rising clear and trembling above the tolling of the bell +and the noises of the night. +</P> + +<P> +The boys looked at each other with white, frightened faces. +</P> + +<P> +"A panther," Charley cried, "a panther, and we penned up here helpless +as babes." +</P> + +<P> +"Look," said Walter, eagerly, "look at the boars." +</P> + +<P> +The great animals were stirring uneasily and their hoarse, threatening +grunts had dropped to a kind of frightened whine. Again the scream +rose shrill and clear, and, with a grunt of fear, the big leader +charged into the forest followed by the rest. +</P> + +<P> +"They are afraid of the panther, and I don't blame them," Charley +exclaimed. "Come, we must get out of here in a hurry." +</P> + +<P> +The boys slid to the ground as fast as their stiffened limbs would +permit, picked up Charley's rifle, and hastily cutting down the +venison, plunged out of the forest onto the prairie. +</P> + +<P> +The screams, rapidly drawing nearer, hastened their footsteps, but, +fast as they traveled, the sound continued to draw closer. +</P> + +<P> +"It has got a sniff of the venison and is following us up," Charley +declared. "We can never get away from it, and there is small chance of +our being able to kill it in the dark. We may as well stop right here +where there is a little wood and build a fire, that is our only chance." +</P> + +<P> +Charley had chosen this halting place wisely, for a large dead tree lay +on the ground, where he had stopped. +</P> + +<P> +Hastily the boys tore up a heap of dry grass and piling broken limbs on +it, lit the pile with a match. +</P> + +<P> +The dry stuff roared up with a flame not a minute too soon, the +flickering light revealed a crouching form not thirty feet away. With +a snarl of rage the creature retreated from the blaze and began +circling the fire from a distance. The soft pattering footfalls could +be easily heard. +</P> + +<P> +The boys crouched close to the fire filled with apprehension that +gradually decreased as they saw the panther feared to approach. Thrice +Charley fired at the dim skulking form, but, in the darkness, his +bullets went wide of the mark, and he stopped wasting more ammunition. +</P> + +<P> +"Let's set fire to the tree itself," Walter suggested, "it will make a +bigger fire, last a long time, and save us the trouble of gathering +wood." +</P> + +<P> +"Good," exclaimed Charley, and seizing a couple of blazing brands he +thrust them under the tree's trunk. The dry wood caught like tinder +and soon the whole tree was aflame. +</P> + +<P> +"I hope they will see it at the camp," Walter said. "If they do, they +will know we are still alive." +</P> + +<P> +As their fear of the panther decreased, the boys began to feel hungry +and tired. The venison was unwrapped and some thick steaks were cut +off and broiled over the fire, and from them the lads made a hearty +meal. +</P> + +<P> +They felt greatly refreshed after their hearty repast but they were +still very tired and sleepy. They strove to converse together and keep +awake but the fatigue of the day, the heavy meal, and the warmth of the +fire proved too much for them and every now and then one would catch +the other nodding. +</P> + +<P> +"There's no use of both of us sitting up all night, when one is all +that is necessary to keep an eye on the fire," said Charley, sleepily. +"Let's make up a bed of the prairie grass and take turn about sleeping +and keeping watch." +</P> + +<P> +Walter heartily agreed to the suggestion and they proceeded to make up +their couch without loss of time. They did not have to go outside the +circle of firelight for their mattress, for the wild rice grew all +around the blazing tree. All they had to do was to pull it up in great +handfuls and stack it before the fire. +</P> + +<P> +Suddenly Charley gave an exclamation and leaped back out of the grass. +"Come out of that grass, Walt," he cried, "I have been bitten by a puff +adder. I heard it hiss." +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, Charley," cried his chum in terror, "what can we do?" +</P> + +<P> +"Quick," commanded Charley, "open one of your shotgun shells and take +out the shot." While he had been speaking the lad had slipped one leg +out of his pants and exposed the wound to view. It was only a tiny red +puncture of the skin midway between knee and hip, but the bitten one +knew that tiny place was more dangerous than a rifle ball. Like a +flash, he drew his hunting-knife and cut out a chunk of flesh as big as +a hen egg where the wound had been. "Give me that cartridge," he +commanded, his teeth gritting with pain. +</P> + +<P> +Walter passed over the open shell and Charley emptied its contents of +powder into the open cut. Quickly, he applied a match to the black +grains and they caught with a hiss, there was a tiny cloud of black +smoke and a whiff of burning flesh. +</P> + +<P> +Walter sprang to his chum's side and caught him, as he staggered and +reeled under the awful pain. +</P> + +<P> +"Gee, but that was a plucky thing to do," he cried. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess I got it done in time," murmured Charley, through pale lips. +"It was the only thing to do. I would have been dead in half an hour +otherwise—and such a death. But I guess I've got the best of it, I +cut out that piece before the poison had a chance to get into the +circulation, I think. Give me a hand to bind up the cut before +anything gets into it." +</P> + +<P> +Walter hastened to comply and bound up the gaping cut as well as he +could with the means at his command. While Charley lay back and +gritted his teeth to keep back the moans of pain. +</P> + +<P> +"Strange the place don't bleed any," said Walter, curiously. +</P> + +<P> +"The heat of the powder flash cauterized the cut ends of the veins and +closed them up," Charley explained. "I have seen the same thing done +before and the wound never bled." +</P> + +<P> +"Is it always a good thing to do?" his chum inquired. +</P> + +<P> +"It is useless in some cases. It all depends upon the kind of snake +and where the person is struck. I never knew a case of a person +recovering when hit by a genuine Florida rattlesnake. Puff adders and +moccasins are deadly enough, but they are mild beside the rattler. The +rattler's fangs are so long that they strike deep and the quantity of +venom injected is enormous, some of it is almost instantly taken up by +the veins punctured. I do not believe that anything but instant +amputation would save the life of one struck. But all bitten do not +die equally soon. I have known a man struck in the ankle where the +circulation was poor, to live for several hours, while another struck +in the neck while bending over a flower, died almost instantly. The +poor fellow did not have time to straighten up even. But he was lucky +in dying quickly. There is no death more painful and horrible than +that from a rattlesnake bite." +</P> + +<P> +"What loathsome creatures," shuddered Walt, "and the state is accursed +with them." +</P> + +<P> +"They are few in number compared with what they used to be," Charley +remarked, "and I'll bet you can't guess what has thinned them out so." +</P> + +<P> +"The clearing up of the state and their wholesale destruction by +settlers," Walter suggested. +</P> + +<P> +Charley smiled in spite of his pain. "What settlers destroy in a year +do not amount to a ten thousandth part of the number born. Each mother +snake has upward of twenty-five little ones at a time. Birds, +especially the blue jay, kill a great many but their worst enemy is the +Florida hog." +</P> + +<P> +"The hog?" exclaimed Walter, in surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," Charley affirmed. "If you want to clear a patch of ground of +snakes, just turn in a drove of hogs, they will do the work for you in +short order. They kill and eat the most poisonous snakes without the +slightest hurt to themselves. Either their thick hide saves them, or +else they are immune from the venom." +</P> + +<P> +"No more Florida pork on my bill-of-fare," declared Walter in disgust. +</P> + +<P> +Pain and excitement had driven all thought of sleep from both boys' +minds and they sat close together by the fire and talked the night away. +</P> + +<P> +As the slow minutes slipped away, Walter watched his chum's face in an +agony of apprehension for any sign that the subtle venom was getting in +its deadly work. But the hours passed by and, although Charley was +suffering considerable pain, there was no indication that any of the +poison had passed into his system—the lad's prompt act had saved his +life. +</P> + +<P> +Dawn came at last and found two weary waiting boys, one of them weak, +pale, and haggard. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as it was light enough to see, Walter made his way back to the +edge of the forest, and cut a strong forked limb to serve as a crutch +for his chum. +</P> + +<P> +Before leaving the fire, the boys cooked and ate a couple more venison +steaks which gave them fresh strength and courage. +</P> + +<P> +Walter shouldered the guns and venison and staggered on in the lead +under his heavy load, while Charley hobbled painfully on behind. +</P> + +<P> +They had just crossed the remainder of the prairie and were resting a +bit before plunging into the forest on the other side, when Chris and +the captain broke out from the clump of trees and hailed them with +shouts of joy. +</P> + +<P> +Chris relieved Walter of a part of his load while the captain assisted +Charley forward, and the little party made good time on their homeward +way and before long reached the clearing. +</P> + +<P> +Chris' and the captain's haggard faces showed they had passed as +sleepless a night as the two lads. +</P> + +<P> +"Golly," said Chris, gravely, "when night comes an' you chillens don't +show up, an' de haunts begin a-tollin' dat bell, I spects Massa Captain +an' dis nigger went most crazy. When we seed you-alls' fire a little +later, we feels some better, but, Massas, I jes' tell you dat daylight +seemed powerful long comin' to dis nigger." +</P> + +<P> +Amid the others' breathless interest, Walter related the adventures of +the night. When the captain learned of Charley's accident, he brought +out the brandy bottle and insisted on his drinking what remained of the +liquor. His wound was then bathed, clean and bandaged again and he was +made to lay down upon his couch in the hut, while Walter stretched out +on his own bed for a nap. +</P> + +<P> +"Good," exclaimed Charley, as he caught sight of the windows and door, +"you and Chris made a good job of those, captain." +</P> + +<P> +The captain nodded in satisfaction. "I reckon it will take some +battering to get in there," he observed. +</P> + +<P> +Inside the hut, the two workers had planted large posts of palmetto +that effectually blocked the windows save for the cracks between the +posts. The door was similarly barricaded, save for one post left out +for present ingress and egress. It stood close to hand, however, ready +to be slipped into the hole provided for it, at an instant's notice. +</P> + +<P> +Charley suddenly staggered to his feet. "I can't waste time lying +here," he exclaimed. "Why, this is the day we expect the outlaw." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap28"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXVIII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +PREPARATIONS. +</H3> + +<P> +"Sit down, Charley," said the captain sternly, "are you crazy, lad? +You can do nothing in your present state, and if you go and make +yourself sick, you will cause us all a deal of trouble and worry." +</P> + +<P> +Charley sank back upon his couch. "But there is so much to be done, +Captain," he protested. +</P> + +<P> +"Now look here, lad," said the old sailor, "say those fellows have got +their boat finished and start for that island we left this morning, it +will take them quite a while to get there and I expect they will look +it over a bit before following us. Take the time spent there and the +time it will take them to reach here, an' I reckon it will be late in +the afternoon before we see anything of them." +</P> + +<P> +"It won't do to take any chances, Captain. We had ought to be ready +now." +</P> + +<P> +"Go ahead and say what you want done and we will do it while you +sleep," said the captain. "But if you persist in getting up, I'll be +hanged if I'll do a stroke of work, outlaws or no outlaws." +</P> + +<P> +"Me neither," chimed in Chris. +</P> + +<P> +"Better go to sleep, Charley," advised his chum. "I am going to get a +nap, myself. I know I'll be able to work better for it." +</P> + +<P> +Charley gave in with an unwilling sigh. "All right, I suppose I'll +have to do as you all say." +</P> + +<P> +"Tell us your plans and we will see that they are carried out," the +captain said. +</P> + +<P> +"We cannot keep those fellows from landing on the island," said the +young leader, thoughtfully. "There are so many places where they can +come ashore, and we are too few to guard the entire coast. I do not +think we can even hold the walls against so many. There are more gaps +in them than we could defend. I have thought it all over and I believe +that all we can do is to confine the defense to this house. We ought +to be able to hold this place until the Indians come." +</P> + +<P> +"My ideas exactly," approved the captain. +</P> + +<P> +"It's the only sensible thing to do," Walter agreed. +</P> + +<P> +"To be successful, it is necessary for us to have a good supply of food +and water. I intended to dry the venison, but there is not time to do +that, you will have to cut it into thin strips and smoke it, that will +not take long and it will keep for several days. That big copper and +all the gourds should be filled with water and brought inside. When +that is all done, we will have food and drink to last us a week with +care." +</P> + +<P> +"Chris and I will see to it all," said the captain arising. "Is that +all, lad?" +</P> + +<P> +"We had ought to keep a lookout at the landing so as to know when they +come and be ready for them." +</P> + +<P> +"We'll 'tend to that when we get the other chores done. It's too early +to expect them yet, anyway. Now you lie down and get a nap, lads, and +don't worry, Chris and I will look out for everything." +</P> + +<P> +Charley laid back and closed his eyes, obediently, while Chris and the +captain passed out of the hut to attend to the tasks set them. +</P> + +<P> +The two boys were soon fast asleep. +</P> + +<P> +It was noon before Walter awoke, sat up, and looked around him. He +noted that the workers had already completed their tasks; long strings +of smoked venison strips were hung down from the roof, gourds and +copper kettle were brimming full of sweet, clean water, and all of the +guns had been freshly cleaned and oiled. +</P> + +<P> +Treading softly so as not to awaken his chum, Walter passed out of the +hut. +</P> + +<P> +The captain and Chris were busily engaged in trying to dispatch a pot +of venison stewed with yams, and Walter lost no time in joining them. +</P> + +<P> +"Well, we are all through," observed the captain as he took a second +helping of stew. "We would have called you to dinner, but I reckoned +the sleep would do you more good. How do you feel now?" +</P> + +<P> +"All right," Walter answered. "You should have left some of that work +for us to do, Captain." +</P> + +<P> +"I reckon you will have enough to do before we get a chance to leave +this island," said the old sailor with a sigh. "If you are through, +Chris, take your gun and go down to the landing and keep a sharp +lookout. Those fellows had ought to be here this afternoon, some time. +I will come down and spell you in a couple of hours." +</P> + +<P> +"You had better go in and get a nap yourself, Captain, while there is +nothing doing," said Walter. "It may be all hands on deck to-night." +</P> + +<P> +"I reckon I'll take your advice, lad. I was awake all last night +worrying about you boys and I can't stand loss of sleep now like you +young fellows. I will just take forty winks. Call me when it is time +to spell Chris." +</P> + +<P> +Walter sat waiting until the old sailor's loud snoring proclaimed he +was asleep. Then filling a small gourd with water from the spring, he +made his way into the fort, where he righted one of the overturned +canoes and fished out a large package from under the stern and undid +its fastenings. "I wonder they did not notice it when they carried the +canoe up," he muttered. +</P> + +<P> +For a long time he was busily engaged with the contents of the package +and the gourd of water. At last he gave a sigh of triumphant +satisfaction which died away as he heard Charley's voice calling his +name from the hut. +</P> + +<P> +With an exclamation of impatience, he emptied out the water, quickly +bound up the package again, and thrust it back in its old place under +the canoe's stern deck, then turning the canoe again bottom up, he +passed out of the fort whistling, carelessly. +</P> + +<P> +Charley in the door of the hut eyed him curiously as he approached. +"What has happened to you?" he exclaimed, "you look as happy as if you +had discovered a gold mine." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, I haven't," laughed his chum, "how's your leg now?" +</P> + +<P> +"Stiff as a ramrod, and, whew, how it hurts," Charley said with a +grimace of pain. "I can't bear my weight on it." +</P> + +<P> +"You don't want to try to," said Walter, severely. "Just go back to +your bunk and keep still. All the work is done, now, and I am going +down to the landing right off to relieve Chris so that he can get a +little sleep." +</P> + +<P> +Charley obeyed and Walter made his way down to the landing where he +found Chris sitting on a log watching intently. +</P> + +<P> +Walter took the gun from the tired little darky and sent him up to the +hut to rest. +</P> + +<P> +The hours passed swiftly by without any signs of the outlaws. When +darkness fell, Walter abandoned his now useless post and made his way +up to the hut where he found his three companions gathered around the +camp-fire outside. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you seen anything of them?" Charley inquired anxiously as he came +in sight. "Not a sign," Walter answered. "I think you have done wrong +in lighting that fire," he continued gravely. "There was a bare chance +that they would have given up the chase after not finding us at the +chief's island. If they are anywhere near, though, that fire will give +us dead away." +</P> + +<P> +"They would not have given up the chance of getting the plumes they +have worked so hard to obtain as easily as all that," said his chum +decidedly. "Remember, they believe that Big Tiger and his son are +still with us and that the rest of the Indians are far away. No, they +would not have given up so easily after the trouble they have been to." +</P> + +<P> +Walter said no more but helped himself to an ear of corn and a piece of +fish and fell to eating. +</P> + +<P> +The silence that had fallen upon the party was broken by an exclamation +from Chris. +</P> + +<P> +"Golly, dar dey is," he cried. +</P> + +<P> +Far off in the direction of the chief's island, a tiny shaft of light +pierced the darkness. +</P> + +<P> +"They are on the island we left," exclaimed Charley, "that's their +camp-fire." +</P> + +<P> +"No, no," said Walter. "See, it is getting bigger, I bet they have +fired the wigwam." +</P> + +<P> +In a few minutes all the party agreed with Walter, there was no +mistaking the cause of the pillar of flame that rose high in the air on +the distant island. +</P> + +<P> +They watched it in silence until it died down and nothing remained but +a faint glare. +</P> + +<P> +"Let's go to bed," said Charley at last. "If they are on the chief's +island, they will not bother us to-night." +</P> + +<P> +But after a short discussion, it was decided to stand guard and watch, +Charley and Walter to stand on guard until midnight, and then to be +relieved by Chris and the captain. +</P> + +<P> +The two sentinels climbed up on a portion of the wall that lay in the +shadow of a big tree and from which they could command a good view of +the rest of the wall and inclosure itself. +</P> + +<P> +"I have been thinking that the unsavory reputation of this island may +keep those fellows from coming here," Walter observed in an undertone. +</P> + +<P> +"It will likely keep Indian Charley away, and I am more afraid of him +than all the balance. I do not think it will stop the rest though," +Charley answered, and they lapsed again into cautious silence. +</P> + +<P> +The minutes had lengthened into an hour when there fell upon their ears +the now familiar tolling of the bell. +</P> + +<P> +"I am going to have another look in that chapel," declared Walter, as +he slipped down from his perch. +</P> + +<P> +"I'd like to go with you," said Charley, wistfully, "but my game leg +won't carry me that far." He watched his chum until he disappeared in +the shadow of the church. +</P> + +<P> +Walter hesitated for a moment at the chapel doorway. It required more +courage to enter that gloomy, black, mysterious interior, alone, than +it had when he and Charley were together. Summoning up all his +resolution he passed through the gaping doorway into the blackness +beyond. All was dark and still inside, the bright moonlight shining +through the high little windows threw patches of ghostly light upon the +white, ghastly walls. Walter felt his flesh creep as he made his way +through the darkness up towards the bell. +</P> + +<P> +He stumbled often and bruised his knees against the stone seats but at +last he reached the little platform and stood beneath the little tower. +He could not see up into its gloomy interior, but the great bell above +him tolled mournfully on. +</P> + +<P> +For a space Walter stood silent, a superstitious dread creeping over +him. "Dreaming, dreams no mortal ever dared to dream before." A +horror grew upon him, a feeling that something, some being +antagonistic, repugnant to his very nature was sharing the darkness +with him. The strokes of the bell above him seemed to grow horribly +menacing to his feverish fancy. He struggled with himself to throw off +the mantle of terror descending upon him but the feeling grew and grew. +With a rush of unreasoning anger he flung up his gun and fired at the +swaying bell. +</P> + +<P> +A shrill, human-like cry rang out, the bell ceased tolling, and a heavy +body crashed down at the terrified lad's feet. +</P> + +<P> +Throwing out his arms Walter sank to the floor in a dead faint. +</P> + +<P> +He opened his eyes again to see Charley bending over, examining him by +the light of a flaring torch. +</P> + +<P> +"What, what was it?" he whispered. +</P> + +<P> +Charley shifted the torch and held it close to a dark figure stretched +out on the stone floor. +</P> + +<P> +Its glare lit up a face strangely human, and bearing the apparent mark +of centuries in its furrowed features and wrinkled skin. +</P> + +<P> +"A big monkey," gasped Walter in astonishment. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," said Charley gently, "an old man monkey, old, old, very, very +old." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap29"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIX. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE ENEMY. +</H3> + +<P> +Walter broke into a weak, hysterical laugh, "and I took that for a +spirit," he exclaimed. "Well, our mystery is solved now." +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," his chum admitted, looking down at the dead bell-ringer with a +kind of regret, "still there are some points about it which still +remain a mystery, and always will. There is no record of there ever +being monkeys found in this state. It must have been brought here by +one of the Spanish gentlemen as a pet and taught the trick of ringing +the bell, and yet, that theory is unbelieveable. Consider, Walter, if +such is the case, this creature has reached an incredible age." +</P> + +<P> +Walter bent down and flashed the torch in the monkey's face. "He looks +as though he had lived for centuries," he exclaimed, "his face is like +that of a shriveled mummy, and see, that look of cunning and +aged-wisdom in his features. Charley," continued the tender-hearted +boy with a break in his voice, "I feel as badly about it as I would if +I had shot a man. Think of the poor, harmless creature, remaining true +year after year to the one task he knew how to perform, and then to be +shot down at last while doing it." +</P> + +<P> +"Nonsense, this is no time for sentiment. We must get back to our +post, we have left it altogether too long. You will have to help me +back, I guess, Walt," Charley said. +</P> + +<P> +"How did you get here?" demanded his chum, the current of his thoughts +suddenly changed. "Why, your trousers' leg is wet with blood and you +are as pale as a ghost." +</P> + +<P> +"I couldn't have walked a hundred feet under ordinary circumstances, +but that scream brought me here on the run. Now that the excitement is +over I feel weak as a kitten," Charley answered. +</P> + +<P> +"You're going back to bed and stay there until that wound is completely +healed," declared Walter as he put his arm around his chum and assisted +him out of the chapel. +</P> + +<P> +Before he could get the exhausted lad to the hut, he had become a dead +weight in Walter's arms. Walter let him down gently upon the ground +and ran to the hut where he aroused Chris and the captain, and the +three bore Charley inside and laid him on his couch. +</P> + +<P> +Captain Westfield bathed the wound and bandaged it afresh. His face +was very grave as he examined the unconscious lad's skin and pulse. +"He has a high fever," he declared anxiously. "I thought yesterday +from the way he was yawning and stretching that he was in for an attack +of swamp fever. With a dose of it on top of this hole in his leg it is +likely to go hard with the poor lad. I'd give a sight now for some +brandy and quinine." He glanced up at Walter's haggard face. "You get +to bed this minute or we will have two on our hands," he commanded. +"Chris and I have had a good nap and we'll keep watch the balance of +the night, though, I 'low, there ain't much use in doing it." +</P> + +<P> +Walter was too near collapse, himself, to offer objections and dropping +down on his couch was soon sleeping the sleep of exhaustion. He woke +again just as the sun arose feeling rested and quite his old vigorous +self, but his spirits soon fell as his chum's meanings fell upon his +ears. +</P> + +<P> +Charley was tossing restfully upon his couch in a high fever and the +wounded leg was greatly swollen and flushed an angry red. +</P> + +<P> +There was nothing he could do to relieve the sufferer, so Walter with a +heavy heart stole out of the hut. +</P> + +<P> +The captain and Chris were busy over the fire preparing breakfast. +They greeted Walter with grave faces for Charley's condition was +resting heavily upon them. +</P> + +<P> +"If I only had some quinine I could check that fever," sighed the old +sailor. "He is healthy and clean-blooded and I reckon he'd get over +that bad leg in time, but he can't fight them both. How in the world +did he come to start the wound to bleeding again?" +</P> + +<P> +Sadly Walter recounted the adventures of the night. He told of their +previous discovery of the bell, their first fruitless search of the +chapel, and of his venturing in alone and the shooting of the +bell-ringer. +</P> + +<P> +As he proceeded with his narrative the captain's face grew crimson with +mortification and chagrin, as he saw his much-asserted ghostly theories +shattered. +</P> + +<P> +The effect on Chris' humorous nature was different. The first +expression of relief on his little ebony face was succeeded by a broad +grin. +</P> + +<P> +"Golly," he giggled, "an' me an' Massa Capt was scart nigh to death by +a poor ole harmless monkey." +</P> + +<P> +Few men like to be placed in a ridiculous position and the captain +turned on the little darky in a rage. +</P> + +<P> +"Shut up, you grinning little imp," he shouted, "or I'll thrash you so +you can't sit down for a week. What call have you got to be giggling +over the death of one of your ancestors?" +</P> + +<P> +Chris checked the flow of words on his tongue, but sat rocking back and +forth in glee muttering, "Golly, only a monkey. A poor, old, +he-monkey," until the irate captain chased him out of ear-shot. +</P> + +<P> +Leaving the captain and Chris to the settlement of their trouble, +Walter took one of the canoes' paddles and proceeded to the chapel. +Just outside its wall he dug a deep grave, and carrying the faithful +old monkey to it he lowered him gently to the bottom and filling up the +grave again, heaped a little pile of stones on the mound. +</P> + +<P> +To the tender-hearted lad there was something pathetic and touching in +the way the poor creature had met its death. +</P> + +<P> +Charley's illness cast a gloom over even the irrepressible Chris, and +breakfast was eaten in sad silence. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as he had finished, Chris shouldered one of the rifles and +headed for the landing to watch for the outlaws, while the captain and +Walter repaired to the hut to attend to the stricken lad. +</P> + +<P> +There was little they could do to relieve his sufferings beyond +sponging his hot body with a wet cloth and giving him sparingly of the +water that he called for incessantly. At last he sank into a kind of a +stupor and the heavy-hearted watchers stole outside for a breath of +fresh air. +</P> + +<P> +Walter at last broke the silence that hung like a cloud upon them. +"I've been thinking," he said, "that it might not be a bad plan to meet +the outlaws at the landing. We could dispose of several before they +could get on shore." +</P> + +<P> +"No," said his companion decidedly, "they would only land in some other +place and maybe cut us off from the hut. You mark my words, lad, +Charley thought over every side of this question before he laid his +plans an' we can't do better than follow them. The most we can hope to +do is to hold this hut until Little Tiger comes with his people." +</P> + +<P> +Their further discussion was cut short by the sudden appearance of +Chris. +</P> + +<P> +"Dey's comin', Massa, dey's comin'," shouted the excited little darky. +"Dey ain't more dan a half mile away." +</P> + +<P> +Gathering together the cooking utensils scattered around the fire, the +three entered the hut and soon had the last post secured in its hole, +effectually barring the doorway. +</P> + +<P> +Through the cracks in the windows and door, the hunters watched for the +appearance of the foe. +</P> + +<P> +An hour of suspense passed slowly by, then suddenly there came the +noise of a falling stone and an evil face peeped cautiously over the +wall. +</P> + +<P> +Walter fired quickly but missed, and the face disappeared with +ludicrous haste. +</P> + +<P> +For some minutes the outlaws remained quiet, no doubt conferring +together, then a tiny square of white was hoisted above the wall, to be +quickly followed by the youngest outlaw who dropped coolly down into +the inclosure bearing the flag in his hand. +</P> + +<P> +"We can't fire upon him," declared Walter as Chris raised his gun. "He +bears a truce flag and is unarmed. You keep a sharp watch on the +others and I will talk with this fellow. If I am not mistaken, it is +the one Charley was so impressed by." +</P> + +<P> +The young outlaw approached the hut at a careless sauntering walk, +waving the flag jauntily in his hand. He noted the barred openings and +protruding rifle barrel with a cool smile and strolled around to the +door. +</P> + +<P> +"Hallo in there," he called, cheerfully. "I want to talk to you." +</P> + +<P> +"Go ahead," Walter answered grimly, "we're listening." +</P> + +<P> +"Come now, that's no way to receive a visitor," said the young fellow, +lightly. "I want to talk with that bright-eyed chap I talked with +before." +</P> + +<P> +"You can't," Walter said, sadly. "He's dying of fever." +</P> + +<P> +"Why don't you cure him up?" demanded the envoy, sharply, "the swamp +fever is nothing if it's treated right." +</P> + +<P> +"We haven't a grain of medicine," Walter replied. "But state your +errand," he added sharply. +</P> + +<P> +"Look here," said the young outlaw after a short pause. "I talked +those fellows into this conference idea so as to get a good chance to +speak with you fellows. I am sick of that gang. I am not as bad as +they, and I am clean disgusted with them. I want to join forces with +you fellows. I know they are bound to finish you sooner or later, but +I would rather die with gentlemen than to live with murderers." +</P> + +<P> +"We cannot afford to take any chances," Walter said decidedly. +</P> + +<P> +"But you are taking chances, chances on the life of your friend," said +the outlaw sharply. "I can cure him, I tell you. I studied medicine +and I have a few things in my bag." +</P> + +<P> +"Can we risk it?" said Walter, wavering, and turning to the captain for +advice. +</P> + +<P> +"We can risk anything for Charley's sake," said the old sailor, +eagerly. "We can shoot him at the first sign of treachery. Let him +in, Walt." +</P> + +<P> +"I have got to go back for my things," interrupted the outlaw, whose +keen ears had caught the low conversation. "I'll be back again in a +minute. I'll fix up some excuse to return. I guess pretending that +you are considering surrendering will do as well as anything else." +</P> + +<P> +Walter gazed after the young fellow's retreating form with reluctant +admiration. "He moves like a trained athlete and he hasn't got a bad +face," he admitted. "I pray he does not prove to be our undoing." +</P> + +<P> +"We must take the chance, lad," said the captain. "Better remove the +post so he can get inside quick." +</P> + +<P> +In a few minutes the outlaw strolled carelessly back towards the hut. +A yell of rage went up from the convicts behind the wall as he darted +through the opening into the building. +</P> + +<P> +Walter quickly replaced the post and turned to watch the newcomer. +</P> + +<P> +Without a word, he had marched over to where Charley lay and knelt by +his side with his finger on the lad's pulse and his keen eyes searching +his face. +</P> + +<P> +After a moment's examination he turned to face the others. "Your +friend is nearly dead," he said quietly. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap30"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXX +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE ATTACK. +</H3> + +<P> +"He has a bare chance yet," declared the outlaw, noting their looks of +grief. "I will do what I can for him, but I wish I'd been here an hour +sooner." +</P> + +<P> +He took a little package from the bosom of his shirt and spread the +contents out upon the table. "I couldn't bring much without arousing +suspicion," he said regretfully, "but I guess I can make out with what +I've brought." +</P> + +<P> +With deft fingers, the newcomer measured out a powder from one of his +packages and administered it to the unconscious lad and next turned his +attention to the wounded leg. Emptying a spoonful of liquid from one +of his bottles into a gourd of water he began to bathe the inflamed +limb. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters could not but admire the deftness and skill with which the +stranger worked. His long tapering fingers seemed to have the +suppleness and deftness of a woman's and his whole attention seemed +concentrated upon his patient. +</P> + +<P> +The hours passed slowly away, each seeming a day in length to the +anxious hunters. The convicts remained hidden behind the wall and +there was nothing to do but to keep a sharp lookout. At noon the +watchers made a light lunch on the smoked venison and water, but the +young outlaw waved away the offered food and remained engrossed by the +patient's side. At intervals of a few minutes all during the +afternoon, he administered medicine to the sufferer and repeatedly +bathed the wounded leg with the solution he had prepared. +</P> + +<P> +The sun was barely an hour high, when he arose from the side of the +couch with a weary sigh. "I think he will live," he announced, "he was +almost gone for a while, though. I gave him enough strychnine during +the first few hours to have killed a normal man, but his heart had +weakened so that the stimulant hardly raised his pulse a single beat. +The heart action is better now, and with close attention he had ought +to pull through." +</P> + +<P> +"How can we ever repay you for what you have done?" said the old +sailor, with tears of thankfulness in his eyes, while Walter wrung the +stranger's hand warmly. +</P> + +<P> +"The saving of many lives will hardly atone for one I took once, though +the deed was done in self-defense," said the outlaw gravely. "I am +glad to have been of help in this case." He glanced around the room +with a return of his former light careless manner and nodded +approvingly as he noted the stores of provisions and water. "Good," he +exclaimed, "you are better prepared than I expected and certainly in +much better shape than my former gentle companions dream. Why, it will +be impossible for them to take this place by force." +</P> + +<P> +"Can you tell us of their plans, Mr.——," inquired Walter, hesitating +for want of a name. +</P> + +<P> +"You may call me Ritter, James Ritter," supplied the outlaw promptly. +"I am not ashamed of my real name but my relatives had cause to be +ashamed of its owner in his present condition. Their plans are almost +self-evident, my lad. They will wait until dark and then slip over the +wall, some will stop in that big building while the balance will make +their way around to a building on the other side of you. They will +then have you surrounded and have only to watch and wait to starve you +out. They have plenty of provisions with them and can get that spring +behind the fort without exposing themselves. It is only a question of +time before you will have to give up, and then may the Lord grant us +all a speedy death." +</P> + +<P> +"Don't be too sure of it, friend," observed the captain. "The Lord +never deserts those who fully believe and trust him. Those villains +may be defeated yet." +</P> + +<P> +The outlaw grinned as he looked around the room. "My dear friends are +badly fooled," he chuckled with glee. "They believe the chief is with +you, and he is not here. Why, they have already spent, in imagination, +the money that they are going to derive from the sale of his plumes. +What a shock it will be to them when they learn that the bird has +flown. I wish I could see their faces when they hear the news." +</P> + +<P> +"The chief is dead," said Walter, "do you think they would go away if +they knew the truth?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, I do not," replied Ritter, after a moment's thought, "in spite of +all you might say, they would have a suspicion that you had secured the +plumes yourselves, and, anyway, they are so mad that they will not +leave until they have finished the job." +</P> + +<P> +The hunters were favorably impressed with the frankness of the former +outlaw. He had the speech and the manners of a gentleman, and his +earnestness and apparent sincerity went far towards removing their +suspicions, and, much to their surprise, they found themselves soon +talking to him with the freedom of old acquaintances. +</P> + +<P> +Ritter chuckled with delight when they told him of the young chief +going for aid. "That gives us a fighting chance," he declared, +joyfully. "We must put ourselves on short rations and try to hold out +until they come." +</P> + +<P> +"Where is Indian Charley?" asked Walter, "is he with the others?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, they could not induce him to set foot on the island. The place +evidently has a bad name among the Indians and I am not surprised after +what I have seen. Even the convicts are puzzled and a little alarmed +by the walls, courts, and buildings. They none of them know enough +about history to lay them to the Spaniards as you folks have probably +done. Charley, the Indian, swears that there is a mysterious bell +which tolls every night. Have you heard anything of the kind?" +</P> + +<P> +Walter briefly related their adventure with the bell-ringer, omitting +any reference to the captain's superstitious fears, much to the old +sailor's relief. +</P> + +<P> +Further conversation was interrupted by darkness and preparations for +the night. +</P> + +<P> +Chris built a little fire near the door where the smoke would pass out +through the cracks and prepared a stew of venison and some broth for +Charley. +</P> + +<P> +Taking turns the besieged made a hearty meal which did wonders in +renewing hope and courage. +</P> + +<P> +It was decided that they should take short shifts of watching during +the night, two in each watch. It fell to Walter to share the watch +with the young outlaw, for which he was not at all displeased, for he +was greatly interested in the strange character, and their turns at the +watch passed quickly in pleasant conversation. +</P> + +<P> +The outlaw spoke freely of the incident that had brought him to the +convict gang, claiming firmly that the deed which had made him a felon +had been done in self-defense, but, owing to lack of witnesses and to a +well-known enmity between him and the dead man, the jury had brought in +a verdict of murder in the second degree. +</P> + +<P> +Walter, under the spell of the man's attractive, strong personality, +could not but believe his assertion. +</P> + +<P> +At the end of their watch, Walter awoke Chris and the captain and +stretched out for a nap, but the outlaw never closed his eyes during +the long uneventful night. When not watching, he was hovering over +Charley's bedside administering medicine or working over the bitten +leg. Yet daylight found him as cool and fresh as ever, apparently +unaffected by his long vigil. +</P> + +<P> +To the hunters' great delight, day found Charley visibly improved. He +had fallen into a deep sleep, his body was wet with profuse +perspiration, and the swelling of the limb had greatly decreased. +</P> + +<P> +They showered thanks upon the outlaw until he was visibly embarrassed +and begged them to say no more. +</P> + +<P> +The morning passed as had the night, without any hostile demonstration +by the convicts. Smoke curling up from the fort and from a building on +the other side of them told the besieged that the enemy had taken up +their positions during the night as Ritter had prophesied. Evidently +they were willing to wait for their triumph rather than risk any lives +by trying to take their victims by assault. +</P> + +<P> +When Chris started to make a stew for dinner, Ritter stopped him. "We +can't spare any more water for cooking," he declared. "I have used a +good deal on the patient, and the gourds are already almost empty. Our +only hope of life is in husbanding our water and it would be wise to +put ourselves on an allowance now. I figure that there is enough in +that big copper to allow each of us a pint and a half per day for ten +days." +</P> + +<P> +The others saw the wisdom of his proposal and immediately agreed to it, +and they made their dinner of roasted yams, smoked venison broiled +before the fire, and a few swallows of water. +</P> + +<P> +Once during the afternoon a convict tried a shot at a crack between the +posts barricading the window. The bullet passed through, missing +Ritter's head by a scant two inches. The former outlaw never winced +but began singing mockingly, "Teasing, teasing, I was only teasing you." +</P> + +<P> +A perfect storm of bullets answered his taunt. +</P> + +<P> +"The rascals don't appreciate good singing," he said with a grin. +</P> + +<P> +Charley's condition continued to steadily improve under the outlaw's +careful ministrations and by nightfall, he was conscious once more and +comparatively free from pain. +</P> + +<P> +Night brought no change in the condition of the besieged. Watches were +arranged as on the night before, and those off duty retired as soon as +darkness had fallen. +</P> + +<P> +"Do you believe in premonitions," asked Ritter, gravely, as he and +Walter stood peering out of the windows. "Do you believe that coming +events cast their shadows before them?" +</P> + +<P> +"I hardly know," answered Walter, thoughtfully, "sometimes I almost +believe that we are given warnings of coming events, but I can never +quite convince myself that the happenings confirming, for instance, say +a dream, are anything more than coincidences." +</P> + +<P> +"A few days ago I would have laughed at such an idea, but all day I +have had a vague presentiment of coming evil which I have found +impossible to shake off," explained his companion. +</P> + +<P> +"It's your liver, I dare say," said Walter cheerfully, "for my part, I +feel that we are going to get out of this hole all right, and live +happy ever after as the story books say." +</P> + +<P> +"There can be but little happiness for me in the future, however, if we +come out of this affair," said his companion sorrowfully. "Death, I +sometimes think, would be the best thing that could befall me. I am a +life convict, you remember, found guilty by a jury, and condemned to +pass a life at hard, degrading labor in company with ruffians of the +lowest, most debased type. It is not a future to look forward to with +pleasure!" +</P> + +<P> +Walter remained silent, he could not but admit the truth of the man's +words and reflect upon the misery of such a life would naturally bring +to a man of education and refinement like this one. "You might escape, +go to some other state, and begin life anew," he at last suggested. +"After what you have done for us, and believing you innocent as we now +do, we should do all we could to help you to get away." +</P> + +<P> +"The life of a fugitive would be worse than that of a convict," +declared the other bitterly. "In every face I would read suspicion, +and dread of detection and arrest would haunt me all the time." +</P> + +<P> +Walter could say nothing more to encourage this strange, unfortunate +character, and with an effort the other shook off the black mood that +had fallen upon him. +</P> + +<P> +"I guess you're right, it must be my liver," he said lightly. "After +all there is something in the old jockey saying, "There is nothing to a +race but the finish." If I live a convict I can at least die a +gentleman." +</P> + +<P> +A sympathetic silence fell upon the two that lasted unbroken until +their watch ended. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap31"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXXI. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE PARLEY. +</H3> + +<P> +Only once during the night were the watchers disturbed. Two convicts +endeavored to worm their way up to the hut unseen but were quickly +spotted by the captain who emptied his revolver at them without any +other effect than to cause them to take to their heels. Aside from +this incident the besieged were not disturbed. +</P> + +<P> +The convicts were evidently keeping as keen a watch as the besieged to +guard against the possibility of any of them escaping. A hat which +Chris squeezed out through a crack between the posts was promptly +riddled with bullets. +</P> + +<P> +Morning found the hunters and their new friend weary with suspense and +their long inactivity. All longed for a stroll in the open air, a +chance to stretch their legs, and an unlimited supply of water to +drink. It almost seemed that their meager allowance of a pint and a +half each for the twenty-four hours did little more than increase their +thirst. They could not safely alter their unpleasant situation, +however, and they wisely made the best of it and did not grumble. +</P> + +<P> +They had one great consolation in Charley's rapid progress towards +health. He was gaining with astonishing rapidity and bid fair to be +completely recovered in a few days. +</P> + +<P> +With the coming of another day, the convicts opened an irregular fire +upon the doors and windows of the hut. Many of their bullets passed +between the cracks in the post barricades and imbedded themselves in +the walls. The defenders husbanded their ammunition, firing only when +a convict exposed arm or leg. They were satisfied now of the +impregnability of their building and their main concern was to keep out +of the way of chance bullets. +</P> + +<P> +The morning was well advanced when Walter, who was watching at a +window, felt a curious sensation in the soles of his feet, and, +startled, looked down to find that he was standing in a tiny pool of +water. With a cry of alarm he sprang to where the big copper sat. A +glance confirmed his worst fears; a stray bullet had torn a great hole +in the vessel near the bottom, and of their precious store of water +barely a cupful remained. +</P> + +<P> +It was a staggering blow to all. Food they could exist without for +several days, but in that warm, humid climate life could not be +sustained without water for any length of time. Before forty-eight +hours had passed they would be confronted by the alternatives of +surrendering to the convicts, or to suffering the awful tortures of +thirst. +</P> + +<P> +"We must hold out as long as we can," declared Ritter, "something may +turn up. Even death by thirst would be better than torture at the +hands of those fiends. What little water is left, I would suggest that +we save for the sick lad. We can stand thirst longer than he." +</P> + +<P> +The rest agreed heartily to this proposal and the little water +remaining was poured into an empty gourd and placed where it would be +safe from bullets. By tacit consent they agreed that their loss should +be concealed from Charley, who had slept throughout the incident. They +knew him well enough to be sure that he would not touch the little +water remaining if he knew they were suffering from thirst. +</P> + +<P> +To add to the troubles of the little party, the day proved very hot and +sultry, not a breath of air stirring. By noon all were very thirsty, +and when night came without bringing any relief from the heat, they +began to suffer severely for lack of water. +</P> + +<P> +The hot night dragged slowly away to bring another breathless sultry +day, the close of which found the little party almost at the limits of +their endurance. Since the night before they had been unable to eat +the dry venison as it greatly increased their thirst. Their tongues +and throats were dry and swollen and every nerve and atom of their +heated bodies clamored for water. +</P> + +<P> +As night fell, Ritter got out the punctured copper and busied himself +in plugging up the hole. +</P> + +<P> +"What are you doing that for?" Walter inquired. +</P> + +<P> +"I'll tell you when the rest are asleep," whispered the young outlaw, +"there is no use alarming them." +</P> + +<P> +It was late in the night before the others, tortured by fear and +thirst, fell into uneasy slumber, and Walter and Ritter were free to +continue their conversation. +</P> + +<P> +"We are in a desperate condition," declared Ritter. "In this heat we +cannot exist very much longer without water. Something has got to be +done at once if we are to hold out another forty-eight hours." +</P> + +<P> +"But what can we do?" said Walter, hopelessly. "It's sure death to +venture outside." +</P> + +<P> +"I am not so sure about that," said the other, "anyway, I am going to +try it, anything is better than the tortures we will soon be suffering." +</P> + +<P> +"You'll be killed," exclaimed Walter. "I'll go, Ritter, I can be +spared better than you." +</P> + +<P> +"Death by bullet is better than death by thirst," said his companion +coolly, "and you cannot be spared as well as I. Your companions are +fond of you and your death would be a terrible blow to them, while I am +only an unknown convict whom no one will miss. But I am getting +tragic," he continued, lightly. "I really think there is a good chance +of success, the night is dark, and the very boldness of the attempt +will be in its favor. They will not dream of one of us venturing right +under the shadow of their fort." +</P> + +<P> +Although he spoke with apparent sincerity, Walter was not deceived. +Both knew the hopelessness of such an attempt. In vain did Walter +attempt to dissuade the other, Ritter remained firm. +</P> + +<P> +"We will remove a post from the doorway as quietly as possible and you +do your best to protect me with your rifle," he said. +</P> + +<P> +With a heavy heart, Walter assisted the other to remove the post. He +had grown very fond of Ritter in the few days they had been together. +He admired him for his bravery and the cheeriness and sweetness of his +disposition under trials and suffering. He gave the outlaw's hand a +long, friendly clasp at parting. +</P> + +<P> +"May God bring you back safe and sound," he whispered, brokenly. +</P> + +<P> +With a return pressure of the hand, Ritter dropped to his hands and +knees and wound his way out of the doorway into the darkness. Walter +watched his progress from the doorway with an anxious heart. He saw +him crawl a considerable distance from the hut, then rise to his feet +and saunter carelessly towards the fort. The very boldness of the act +made it successful. The convict on guard no doubt thought the figure +one of his companions, needlessly exposing himself to a bullet from the +hut, and only wondered vaguely at his taking needless risks and perhaps +speculated dully as to what was the nature of the large object he bore. +</P> + +<P> +Carelessly, Ritter sauntered slowly past the fort and approached the +spring. There was no guard posted on that side of the fort and he +partly filled the copper and kneeling by the cool water took a deep +drink and bathed his feverish face in the refreshing liquid. Half of +his mad task was performed, but, as he fully realized, the riskiest +part was yet to come. +</P> + +<P> +Taking another long drink, he lifted the heavy copper and, bearing it +in front of him so as to conceal it as much as possible by his person, +he walked slowly back towards the hut. +</P> + +<P> +Two-thirds of the return was covered in safety when the convict guard +shouted with an oath, "Come back, you fool, do you want to get the +daylights shot out of you?" +</P> + +<P> +Ritter's answer was a taunting laugh as he bounded towards the hut. +</P> + +<P> +The guard's rifle cracked and the fleeing man staggered drunkenly but +sped on, while the convict working the lever of his Winchester with +remorseless cruelty, emptied its contents after the fleeing figure. +</P> + +<P> +At the doorway of the hut, Ritter crumpled to his knees. +</P> + +<P> +"Take the copper," he cried to Walter, "I'm hit." Walter quickly +placed the vessel inside, then, heedless of the rain of bullets, +dragged the wounded man inside. +</P> + +<P> +The others had been awakened by the noise and were quickly at his side. +</P> + +<P> +"Chris, give me a hand to lay him on my bed; Captain, replace the post +in the doorway," Walter commanded with heartsore calmness. +</P> + +<P> +The wounded man opened his eyes as they laid him gently on the couch. +</P> + +<P> +"It's no use bothering with me, old chap," he said, quietly. "I'm hit +in a dozen places and I'm doctor enough to know that I'm going fast." +</P> + +<P> +Walter buried his head by the dying man's side and sobbed dryly. +</P> + +<P> +"There, there," the other said, soothingly, "don't feel bad about it. +It's just what I wished for. I'm going to die like a gentleman." +</P> + +<P> +Walter hushed his sobs with an effort to catch the feebly spoken words. +</P> + +<P> +The wounded man's eyes closed, and Walter held his breath for a second +thinking him dead, but in a moment he opened them again and smiled +faintly, "There's nothing to a race but the finish," he whispered. +</P> + +<P> +A little longer he lay still breathing heavily. Suddenly by a mighty +effort he raised himself on his elbow, his eyes shining with a strange +light. "Not guilty, your honor," he said in a firm voice, then sank +back still and white. +</P> + +<P> +"He's dead," said Walter, brokenly. "He had his wish; he died like a +hero." +</P> + +<P> +They covered the still form reverently with a blanket, and the silence +of bitter grief settled on the little party. The others had not become +so intimate with the dead man as Walter, but they had grown to admire +him greatly, and the thought that he had given up his life in their +service added to their grief. +</P> + +<P> +Walter's suffering was intense and it was well that his mind was of +necessity soon forced into other channels. +</P> + +<P> +The convicts, exasperated at the way they had been outwitted, opened a +heavy continuous fire upon the hut, under cover of which several +attempts were made to carry the hut by assault. But the assaulting +parties were easily discouraged by the steady fire that met them at +each attempt. +</P> + +<P> +"It looks as if they were getting desperate," said the captain. "I +reckon they know now that we can hold out for a long time yet, and they +are gettin' discouraged," and his companions agreed with him. +</P> + +<P> +Towards morning the convicts' fire slackened and gradually ceased. +</P> + +<P> +Just as day was breaking, the distant report of a rifle was borne to +the ears of the besieged. +</P> + +<P> +Charley, who was now able to leave his bed, listened eagerly. "It's +Indian Charley's rifle. I know the sound," he declared, "ten shots; I +wonder what it means." +</P> + +<P> +From the fort, came an answering volley of ten rifle shots. +</P> + +<P> +"It's a signal," cried Walter. "I wonder what it's for." +</P> + +<P> +"Hallo there in the but, we want a parley," hailed a rough voice from +the fort. +</P> + +<P> +"All right," answered Charley, "send forward one man, unarmed." +</P> + +<P> +A convict emerged from the fort and advanced towards the hut with +fearful, hesitating footsteps. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't be afraid, we won't hurt you," Walter called to him +encouragingly. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap32"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXXII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +HELP. +</H3> + +<P> +"Say what you want and be quick about it," said Charley sharply, as the +convict halted close to the hut. +</P> + +<P> +"Me and my mates want to know if you are ready to call this thing +quits," the man growled. "We agree to leave you the island all to +yourselves right off if you won't fire on us while we are leaving." +</P> + +<P> +Charley turned to the others for counsel. +</P> + +<P> +"There's something in the wind," he declared in a low tone. "This +proposal coming so soon after that signal means something. Maybe the +Indians are coming." +</P> + +<P> +"We can't bank on that, it's hardly time for them yet," observed the +captain. "Better agree to their offer, lads. I guess they are just +tired of the game." +</P> + +<P> +"We can't well stop them if they have taken a notion to leave," said +Walter. "I agree with the captain. Let them go." +</P> + +<P> +Charley turned to the man. "We agree, provided you leave at once," he +said. +</P> + +<P> +The convict, with a surly growl, turned and rapidly retraced his steps +to the fort. +</P> + +<P> +The convicts were in evident haste to be gone, for their envoy had +hardly got inside before they began to file out, each bearing his gun +and other belongings. +</P> + +<P> +Within ten minutes from the envoy's visit the last of the outlaws had +scaled the walls and was lost to sight. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters waited for half an hour before they removed the barricade +from the door and let the fresh cool morning breeze into their stuffy +prison. Even then they did not venture outside, for they still feared +some trick on the part of the convicts. As the moments, passed quietly +by, however, without any sign of their foes, their fears began to +decrease. +</P> + +<P> +"I am going to find out what has become of them," Walter at last +declared. "Unless we make certain now of what they are up to, we will +be afraid to venture outside for a week to come." +</P> + +<P> +His companions in vain tried to dissuade him from his rash project, his +mind was made up and he turned a deaf ear to their words. +</P> + +<P> +Shouldering one of the rifles, he made his way to the wall, clambered +over it nimbly and disappeared on the other side. +</P> + +<P> +It was over half an hour before Walter returned. His companions had +begun to feel uneasy about him when he appeared on the top of the wall +and dropped down inside with a hearty cheer. +</P> + +<P> +"Come out, all of you," he shouted, "there's nothing more to fear from +the convicts." +</P> + +<P> +The little party crowded around him with eager questions. +</P> + +<P> +"I followed them down to the landing," he said. "They had just shoved +off in their dugout and were headed back for their old camp and +paddling away for dear life. +</P> + +<P> +"I had not long to wait before I discovered the reason for their haste. +Far up the stream was a big fleet of Indian dugouts coming down, there +must have been forty of them at least. Then all was as plain as print: +the convicts were aiming to get back to their ponies and make their +escape on them. Likely they would have done so if Indian Charley had +only warned them a little sooner, but they were too late." +</P> + +<P> +"Go on," said Charley, eagerly, as Walter paused in his story. +</P> + +<P> +"They had only got as far as that little island near this one, when +another big fleet of canoes appeared just ahead of them. I guess they +realized that they stood no show to make a successful fight for it, +crowded up as they were in the dugout; anyway, they ran ashore on that +little island and threw up mounds of sand and are lying behind them." +</P> + +<P> +"Have the Indians attacked them?" Charley demanded. +</P> + +<P> +"Not a shot has been fired. The Indians have formed a circle around +the island with their canoes just out of good gunshot and seem to be +waiting." +</P> + +<P> +"Let's all go down to the landing," proposed Charley, eagerly, as +Walter concluded his account. +</P> + +<P> +The others were as excited as Charley and readily agreed to the +proposal. +</P> + +<P> +They found the situation just as Walter had described, the little +island with the band of convicts on it with the circle of canoes around +it. +</P> + +<P> +"They won't stand much show if the Indians attack them in earnest," +observed the captain, "there ain't a bit of shelter on that island and +it ain't hardly a foot above water." +</P> + +<P> +As the little party gazed eagerly upon the scene, the next act in the +grim tragedy occurred. +</P> + +<P> +"Look," exclaimed Charley, "they didn't fasten their canoe and it is +drifting away. They are so busy watching the Indians that they haven't +noticed it yet." +</P> + +<P> +A yell of dismay from the convicts soon told that they had discovered +their loss. A few dashed down to the water as though they would plunge +in after the drifting craft, but they evidently lacked the courage to +face the bullets that would surely greet them if they ventured the act, +for they stopped at the water's edge and soon returned to the +breastworks of sand. +</P> + +<P> +An Indian paddled out from the circle of canoes and securing the +drifting craft, towed it back to the others. +</P> + +<P> +"Just look," exclaimed Walter, "I wonder what the Seminoles mean by +that move." +</P> + +<P> +The others gazed eagerly with many exclamations of astonishment. +</P> + +<P> +The circle of besieging canoes was breaking up, first one dropped out +of the circle, then another, until the whole fleet had formed in one +long, unbroken line. Paddles flashed in the water and the long line +came sweeping gracefully on past the little island. +</P> + +<P> +"You may hang me to the cross-trees, if they ain't agoin' to let them +scoundrels go," cried the captain in disgust. +</P> + +<P> +"It certainly looks like it," admitted Charley, sadly. "All they have +to do is to swim to shore and make their way out on foot." +</P> + +<P> +The big fleet came sweeping steadily on, headed directly for the +landing where the little party stood. +</P> + +<P> +An exultant yell burst from the convicts as they saw the dreaded attack +so quickly abandoned. +</P> + +<P> +A hundred yards from the landing, the fleet of canoes seemed to slacken +speed, many of the Indians stopped paddling, and the long line was +thrown into confusion. +</P> + +<P> +An Indian in the leading canoe stood up and seemed to be haranguing the +others. +</P> + +<P> +"That's Little Tiger," said Walter eagerly, as he recognized the +orator. "He's making a speech." +</P> + +<P> +The hunters could, of course, make nothing of the speaker's words, but +the tone of his voice told him that the young Indian was terribly in +earnest. His clear, resonant voice seemed to now ring with despairing +scorn, now sink to touching appeal. +</P> + +<P> +"My, but he's a born orator!" exclaimed Charley in admiration. "It +sounds as though he was lashing them up to some desperate undertaking." +</P> + +<P> +The Indian at last ceased speaking and resuming his paddle sent his +craft forward, his companions following in his wake. +</P> + +<P> +He grounded his rude canoe at the hunters' feet and sprang out with the +light, lithe leap of a panther. +</P> + +<P> +"How," he said, gravely, extending his hand to each in turn. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters shook the small, shapely hand with genuine pleasure. They +were all struck by the change in the young Indian. In the short time +since they had seen him last he had changed from a care-free stripling +to a thoughtful chief whose word was law with his people. His manner +had become grave and reserved, and there was about him an air of +conscious power that well became his manly bearing. +</P> + +<P> +He glanced from one to the other of the little party with keen eyes. +"It is well," he said, in his clear, musical voice. "All here, none +missing, not even the little one with a face like night. The Little +Tiger's heart was heavy with fear lest he should come too late. But +neither the jackal's tribe nor the spirits of the night have harmed his +friends." +</P> + +<P> +"Did not the young chief fear to land on the island of the spirits?" +asked Charley with a smile. +</P> + +<P> +The Indian drew himself up proudly. "Shall a Seminole fear to follow +where the paleface dares to tread?" he demanded. +</P> + +<P> +"Even the palefaces were filled with fear," said Charley, quickly, +regretting his attempt at pleasantry, "but they found that they had +been only children frightened at shadows. They have slain that which +made the noises full of mystery." +</P> + +<P> +"Does the young white chief speak with the tongue of truth?" asked the +Seminole, eagerly. +</P> + +<P> +"Even as he would be spoken to," answered Charley, gravely. "If the +Little Tiger will come with his paleface friends, they will show him +many wonderful things." +</P> + +<P> +For a moment the young Indian hesitated, the fears bred in him by +tradition struggling with his curiosity, but curiosity conquered. +Turning to his followers, who had all drawn in to the landing, he gave +some sharp commands in his own language. They stepped ashore with +evident reluctance and there was considerable murmuring amongst them. +The chief looked them over with a scornful eye. +</P> + +<P> +"Some of my warriors are not men, but squaws in men's clothing," he +said, bitterly. "Their blood is like water in their veins with fear." +</P> + +<P> +The murmuring Seminoles grew silent under their chief's scornful gaze, +and when he moved forward with his white friends they followed closely +in the rear. +</P> + +<P> +On the way up to the wall, Charley explained to the young Indian about +the bell and its nightly ringer. +</P> + +<P> +The chief listened with relief and satisfaction on his face and quickly +communicated the news in his own tongue to his followers. Immobile as +were the Indians' faces, they could not conceal entirely their relief +and pleasure at the explanation of what had been to them a life-long, +fearful mystery. +</P> + +<P> +Little Tiger was astonished when he saw the ancient road through the +forest, and, at the sight of walls and buildings of stone, he exhibited +a childish delight. "This is an island worthy of being the home of a +great chief," he declared. "In the big wigwam of stone (the fort) the +Little Tiger will rest in peace when not on the hunt, and the squaws +shall make of this dirt of black, great fields of yams and waving corn. +It is good, that which the palefaces have done; how can their red +brother reward them?" +</P> + +<P> +"By lending them one of his warriors to guide them back to where their +ponies and goods are waiting," answered Charley, promptly. +</P> + +<P> +"It shall be done," said the chief, "though the hearts of their red +brothers will be heavy at parting. Their hearts were filled with +gladness with the hope that the palefaces would bide with them and take +unto them squaws from among the Seminoles." +</P> + +<P> +The captain was on the point of exploding with indignation at the +thought of an Indian squaw, but Charley spoke up quickly. +</P> + +<P> +"Little Tiger does his friends great honor, yet, though their hearts +are heavy at the thought of parting, they must go." Charley glanced at +the captain and added mischievously, "He with the gray hair on face and +head has, without doubt, many squaws amongst his people whose hearts +are longing for his return." +</P> + +<P> +The old sailor glared at the speaker in speechless indignation. +</P> + +<P> +"There cannot be too many hands to till the fields," observed the +chief, gravely. "I will give him another squaw to take back with him +to his wigwam." +</P> + +<P> +Charley silenced the embarrassed captain with a shake of his head. +"The chief is kind," he said, "but squaws are not as men, there would +be great enmity and hair-pulling between the white squaws and the red, +and when squaws quarrel the wigwam is sad for the warrior." +</P> + +<P> +The chief nodded gravely. "The young white chief speaks truly," he +said. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap33"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXXIII. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE SEMINOLES. +</H3> + +<P> +The conversation on the part of the hunters had so far been conducted +by Charley. Walter had remained silent, busily thinking over the +wrongs that had been done them by the convicts. He could not forget +the still, cold form in the hut that had been robbed of life by the +murderers' bullets. He was not usually a vindictive boy, but, as he +thought of Ritter's noble act and sudden death, his passion steadily +grew and at last he turned scornfully to the young chief. +</P> + +<P> +"Little Tiger speaks with the tongue of a man, but his deeds are those +of a squaw," he declared, bitterly. "Are he and his braves afraid of +the murderers of his people and the slayers of his father that they +leave them to escape in peace and safety?" +</P> + +<P> +"They will not escape," said the young Indian, his face darkening with +anger at the savage taunt. "A man's death for a man, but jackals shall +die like jackals. With hearts of terror and blood turned to water in +their fear, they shall die a death more horrible than the palefaces can +give them." +</P> + +<P> +"You have offended him, Walter," said Charley, as the young savage +walked proudly away. "Why couldn't you be more patient? I have felt +all along that he had some plan for dealing with the convicts." +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose I have put my foot in it," said Walter regretfully, "but +it's no use crying about it now." +</P> + +<P> +The Indians were already lighting fires and preparing breakfast, but +the hunters had a task before them which they felt they must perform +before they could touch food, and they immediately set about it. +</P> + +<P> +In the shade of a majestic live oak, they dug a deep grave and in it +laid to rest the body of the unfortunate Ritter. Their eyes were moist +as the earth covered the remains of the young hero. +</P> + +<P> +Little Tiger rose to meet them as they approached the group of Indians. +</P> + +<P> +Walter walked up to him with outstretched hand. "I am sorry for my +angry, foolish words," he said. "When sorrow bears heavy on the heart, +the tongue grows bitter." +</P> + +<P> +The young Seminole grasped the offered hand with evident pleasure. +"Even squaws forgive and forget, and a warrior should be nobler than a +squaw," he said, sagely. "The palefaces shall be seated and share the +food of their red brothers." +</P> + +<P> +The hunters would gladly have declined, but could not well do so +without giving offense, so they seated themselves in the circle +surrounding the steaming kettle containing the food and with inward +qualms partook lightly of the stew. +</P> + +<P> +There was a kettle to every fifteen Indians, and their manner of eating +left much to be desired. Spoons and forks they had none, but they +solved the problem by dipping their hands into the pot and fishing out +the portions desired. With true courtesy, the guests were given the +first dip into the pot. +</P> + +<P> +As they ate, the hunters had an opportunity to study their hosts more +carefully than they had yet done. +</P> + +<P> +They were all splendid specimens of savage manhood. Not one was less +than six feet tall, and each was shaped and muscled like an athlete. +All wore the usual Seminole dress, a long shirt belted in at the waist, +moccasins, and turbans of tightly wound red handkerchiefs. They were +extremely neat and cleanly in appearance, a virtue not common with +Indian tribes. +</P> + +<P> +There were a few squaws among the company, but they did not tempt a +second glance. They were wooden-faced, slovenly-looking creatures +almost disgusting in appearance. They were loaded with string upon +string of colored beads forming a solid mass, like a huge collar, from +the point of their chins down to their chests. +</P> + +<P> +"Which one have you picked out for your own, Captain?" whispered +Charley. "That big one over there seems to have her eye upon you." +</P> + +<P> +The old sailor flushed with embarrassment. "Look out or they'll have +you," he cautioned fearfully, "I kinder feel that big one has singled +me out, an' I don't want to encourage her none." +</P> + +<P> +The Indians seemed to regard the day as a holiday to celebrate the +laying out of the spirits and the adding of a large fertile island to +their domain. +</P> + +<P> +The morning was given over to feasting and to running, jumping and +wrestling matches. Only the young Indians indulged in these contests, +the warriors sitting gravely looking on. +</P> + +<P> +Our young hunters tried their strength and skill with the Indian lads, +but, although they were stronger and more nimble than most boys of +their age, they found that they were no match for the young Seminoles. +</P> + +<P> +While the boys were enjoying the contests, the captain sat moodily +apart, keeping a worried eye upon the squaws. +</P> + +<P> +With a mischievous twinkle in his eye, Charley drew aside one of the +Seminole lads, whom he had found could speak English, and whispered +eagerly to him. +</P> + +<P> +The Indian lad's bright, beady eyes twinkled as he listened, and, when +Charley concluded, he nodded his head and slipped away into the group +around the fire. +</P> + +<P> +"Look, Walt, oh, look," shouted Charley a moment later, "look at the +captain, oh my, oh my," and Charley rolled on the grass in wicked glee. +</P> + +<P> +The young Indian had done his work well. A dozen of the squaws had +formed a ring around the old sailor and were slowly closing in. The +captain had struggled to his feet and with red face and horrified eyes +was waving his arms frantically, shouting, "Go away, go away," much as +one would shoo a flock of chickens. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't be afraid, captain," called Charley, "they only want to embrace +you." +</P> + +<P> +"I won't be embraced, I won't, I won't," cried the old sailor, +frantically. +</P> + +<P> +"Come, Captain, do the Hobson act," said Walter, "the ladies expect it." +</P> + +<P> +"Help, help," shouted the captain appealingly, as the circle of +grave-faced squaws steadily advanced, "I won't be embraced, I won't." +</P> + +<P> +With a sudden howl of terror the squaws turned and fled. +</P> + +<P> +In his fear, the captain had opened his mouth a little too far and his +false teeth had tumbled out. The old sailor caught them in his hand +and continued to wave his arms. "I won't be embraced," he shouted. +</P> + +<P> +But there was no need of the defiance; the squaws would not, for untold +beads, have come near the strange being with the movable teeth. +</P> + +<P> +"Shame, Captain," said Charley severely, as the two boys approached the +old sailor. "You must have been flirting with those ladies to make +them act like that." +</P> + +<P> +"I guess they was just attracted by my appearance," said the captain +modestly, "I always was a favorite with the ladies." +</P> + +<P> +"Looks as if they were headed this way again," said Walter. +</P> + +<P> +With a cry of fright the old sailor turned and dashed away for the +shelter of the hut as fast as he could run. +</P> + +<P> +The boys shouted with laughter, and even the grave warriors smiled at +the scene. +</P> + +<P> +After dinner the celebration was renewed, but this time the youths +formed the audience while their elders held shooting matches and more +sober contests of skill and strength. +</P> + +<P> +The captain did not emerge from the hut until nearly sundown, and when +he did appear he carried both upper and lower teeth in his hand. +Whenever a squaw approached anywhere near him he would open his mouth +to its fullest extent and wave the teeth in the air. +</P> + +<P> +"They will get used to seeing you without them and soon think you as +beautiful as ever," Charley said to him, gravely. +</P> + +<P> +"Charley," said the old sailor, solemnly, "for good or ill, we leave +this island to-morrow. It ain't often them Injin women meets with a +man of my looks, an' it has drove 'em plum crazy. It ain't safe for me +to stay longer." +</P> + +<P> +"I'm wondering what that widow lady in Shelbourne will say when she +hears of this," said Walter musingly. "She will naturally think that +you must have given them great encouragement." +</P> + +<P> +"If either of you lads breathe a word of this in town, I'll throttle +you," declared the apprehensive old sailor. +</P> + +<P> +"We won't say a word," said Charley, severely, "but I must say you have +been setting Walter and I a terrible example, captain." +</P> + +<P> +After this parting shot, the two tormentors retired quickly, for the +old sailor was almost at the exploding point with indignation. +</P> + +<P> +The captain was not the only one to whom the afternoon had brought +trials. Chris had not been without his share of troubles. The +Seminoles treated him with marked disdain and would not even permit him +to eat with the others. +</P> + +<P> +"The Indians consider the darky as an inferior being," Charley had +confided to Walter in a whisper. "There are rumors that there is more +than one negro slave in the heart of the Everglades. The Seminoles +have a proverb, 'White man, Indian, dog, nigger,' which expresses their +opinion of the colored race." +</P> + +<P> +Chris' troubles reached their climax when the little party was seated +around the fire with the Indians in the evening. +</P> + +<P> +The chief, who had been watching the little darky closely all day, +turned to Charley: "Me buy 'em," he said, indicating Chris with a wave +of his hand. "Me buy nigger." +</P> + +<P> +"I ain't no nigger," shouted Chris in a rage, "I'se a free-born black +Englishman, dat's what I is." +</P> + +<P> +Charley silenced the indignant little darky with a wave of his hand. +</P> + +<P> +"He already has a master and is therefore not ours to sell," he said, +while Chris bristled with indignation. +</P> + +<P> +"Who master?" inquired the Seminole with an appraising glance at the +sturdy little darky. +</P> + +<P> +"A man called King Edward," said Charley gravely, and Chris' +indignation subsided. +</P> + +<P> +"Too bad," grunted the chief, and dropped the subject. +</P> + +<P> +"What's that?" exclaimed Walter suddenly, as distant rifle shots echoed +in the air, were repeated irregularly and finally ceased. +</P> + +<P> +"The convicts, I guess," whispered Charley, "I don't understand why +they are firing, though. All the Indians are here." +</P> + +<P> +Significant glances passed between the Indians. +</P> + +<P> +"Jackals are dead," said the chief, a fierce exultation in his face. +</P> + +<P> +"Who killed them?" cried Charley. +</P> + +<P> +"Crocodiles," said the Seminole, briefly. +</P> + +<P> +The little party stared at each other in horror. They understood now +why the Seminoles had not made an attack, and had showed so much +confidence in the convicts not being able to escape. +</P> + +<P> +Much as the hunters hated the men who had persecuted them, they felt +shocked and horror-stricken at the horrible fate that had overtaken +them. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap34"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXXIV. +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE RETURN. +</H3> + +<P> +The hunters soon withdrew from the circle around the fire and made +their way to their hut. +</P> + +<P> +"This has been a queer trip," said Charley musingly. "I do not believe +I care to make another like it. Look at all we have been through, and +what have we gained by it? Nothing." +</P> + +<P> +"We might stop on the St. Johns on our way back and hunt again for +plumes," suggested Walter. +</P> + +<P> +But the others negatived the proposal decidedly. +</P> + +<P> +"It would be like tempting Providence, after the dangers we have been +spared from," the captain declared. +</P> + +<P> +"Dis nigger wants to get out ob a kentry where a black Englishman is +called a nigger," said Chris. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't mention plumes to me," exclaimed Charley, "I am sick of +everything connected with this trip." +</P> + +<P> +Walter smiled. "I am quite sure that I would not feel at all bad if I +knew we were carrying back several thousand dollars' worth of plumes +with us," he said. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, quit your dreaming and go to bed," exclaimed Charley, testily, +"instead of carrying back a few thousand dollars' worth of plumes with +us, we will all have to hunt for a job, when we get to the coast." +</P> + +<P> +But in spite of Charley's dire prophecy, Walter was smiling as he +undressed in the dark. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters were astir at break of day and preparing for an early +start. They cooked and ate a hasty breakfast and then carried their +canoes down to the water. +</P> + +<P> +The Indian whom the chief had assigned as their guide was already +patiently waiting in his dugout. +</P> + +<P> +It did not take the hunters long to stow away their few belongings and +they were soon ready for their departure. +</P> + +<P> +The chief followed them to the water accompanied by all his band. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters parted with the young Seminole with genuine regret, and he, +for his part, seemed greatly affected. +</P> + +<P> +"The Little Tiger hopes that his white brothers will return again to +the Glades," he said as he shook hands with each. "His wigwam will be +always open to them. Will not he with the hair like the Spanish moss, +consider again, and choose from among them one of the squaws to cheer +his wigwam?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, thank ye, chief," said the old sailor hastily, "it would only make +the rest of 'em jealous." +</P> + +<P> +The rest of the Indians gathered around and each shook hands with the +little party, gravely saying "How," the only English many of them knew. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters stepped aboard their canoes, and took up their paddles. +The Indian guide in his dugout took the lead and with flashing blades +the hunters followed closely in his wake. +</P> + +<P> +As they passed the little island where the convicts had met their +death, the hunters could not repress a shudder of horror. Around it +lay the repulsive-looking crocodiles, placidly sleeping on the water, +and amongst them floated a man's straw hat. It was all that remained +of the cruel, merciless band. +</P> + +<P> +"They deserved death, but the death they met was too awful for any +human being," Charley murmured. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder what became of Indian Charley," said Walter. "He was not +with the others." +</P> + +<P> +Their guide's quick ears had caught the question. "He tied to tree in +swamp for mosquitoes to eat," he volunteered pleasantly. +</P> + +<P> +"I think," remarked Charley, after a long pause, "I think I would +rather be a Seminole's friend than his enemy." +</P> + +<P> +"Aye, lad," agreed the captain, "they are savages still in their loves +and hates." +</P> + +<P> +The Seminole guide led them out of the Everglades by a short cut, and +the hunters sighed with relief when the great swamp was left behind. +</P> + +<P> +For two days they traveled while daylight lasted, making camp at night +on some convenient point. On the morning of the third day they reached +their old camp where their things were buried. Here they went into +camp again while the Seminole scoured the woods for their ponies. He +returned triumphant the second day riding one of the horses and driving +the others. The animals were sleek and fat from rich feeding and long +inactivity. +</P> + +<P> +The hunters made their guide presents of a couple of clasp knives and a +revolver with its ammunition and sent him away delighted. +</P> + +<P> +"I wanted to wait until we got home to give you a big surprise, but I +can't keep it concealed any longer," said Walter regretfully, as his +companions began to take the canoes apart preparatory to stowing them +in the packs. +</P> + +<P> +While the others gazed at him in surprise, he drew out a bundle from +under the thwart of one of the canoes. Undoing it he took out a long +feathery plume. +</P> + +<P> +"Where did you get that?" exclaimed Charley in surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"It's one of those we dug up on the chief's island," explained Walter. +"You see I used to work in a store where they used to handle such +things, and I got an idea when we first opened the package that those +plumes were not in as bad shape as they appeared. I did not say +anything about it, because I did not want to run the risk of possibly +causing more disappointment, but I put the box in the canoe and the +first chance I got on the island I took a weak solution of vinegar and +water and went to work on them. I had only time to clean two or three, +but I am sure that at least three-fourths of them can be made saleable." +</P> + +<P> +"Walter, you're a trump," exclaimed Charley in delight, and the others +were not much behind in expressing their admiration and joy. +</P> + +<P> +Owing to Walter's thoughtfulness, it was a gay, happy party that took +up the trail back for the coast. +</P> + +<P> +The return trip was made without any uncommon incident and the little +party arrived safely at the little seacoast town of Shelbourne. Here +they sold their ponies and arms, and renting a little house, went +busily to work cleaning and preparing the damaged plumes for market. +When the task was finished and the last plume sold, they found +themselves the happy possessors of the not insignificant sum of $3,200, +which divided between them gave each a capital of $800. +</P> + +<P> +With the first money they received from their plumes, they purchased a +handsome repeating rifle which they despatched to their friend, Little +Tiger, by an Indian who had come into town to trade. +</P> + +<P> +A couple of weeks after, the hunters received a visit from the Seminole +who had acted as their guide. He was the bearer of a bundle of +beautifully tanned deer-skins, a present from the chief. +</P> + +<P> +"The Little Tiger mourns for his white brothers," said the chief's +messenger, "the beautiful rifle speaks to him like a message from them. +He bids them when they will to return and end their days in the shelter +of his wigwam. He says, if the gray-haired one desires, the offer of a +squaw is still open." +</P> + +<P> +The joke on the captain was too good to keep, and the boys have told it +to the widow lady whom the captain is interested in. She sometimes +tasks him with having given the dusky ladies too great encouragement, +and the old sailor gets very red and protests that such was not the +case; that he couldn't help it; that he always was a great favorite +with the ladies. At first, he used to call upon Walter and Charley to +prove the truth of his statements, but they would only shake their +heads ominously and remain gravely silent. +</P> + +<P> +Upon their return the hunters had prepared a full statement of the +death of the convicts and mailed it to the proper authorities, but, +much to their indignation, their story was not believed but was +regarded as an attempt to secure the reward money that had been offered. +</P> + +<P> +Chris is just now greatly incensed over a song that every one seems to +be humming. We believe the chorus runs, "Coon, coon, coon, how I wish +my color would fade." He regards "coon" as a much more offensive title +even than nigger, and contends that it is no name to be applied to a +free-born black English gentleman. +</P> + +<P> +Just now all our hunters are resting up from their terrible +experiences. One would think that they had passed through enough to +discourage them from undertaking another hazardous trip, but adventures +breed a love for adventure, and the free, open air calls loudly to +those who have followed stream and forest. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<P CLASS="finis"> +THE END. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap35"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS SERIES +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +By FRANK FOWLER +</H3> + +<P> +A Series of Stirring Stories for Boys, that not only contain +considerable information concerning cowboy life, but at the same time +seem to breathe the adventurous spirit that lives in the clear air of +the wide plains, and lofty mountain ranges of the Wild West. These +tales are written in a vein calculated to delight the heart of every +lad who loves to read of pleasing adventure in the open; yet at the +same time the most careful parent need not hesitate to place them in +the hands of his boy. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS AT KEYSTONE RANCH; or, +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +Three Chums of the Saddle and Lariat. +</P> + +<P> +In this story the reader makes the acquaintance of the devoted chums, +Adrian Sherwood, Donald McKay, and William Stonewall Jackson Winkle, a +fat, auburn-haired Southern lad, who is known at various times among +his comrades as "Wee Willie Winkle," "Broncho Billie," and "Little +Billie." The book begins in rapid action, and there is surely +"something doing" up to the very time you lay it down, possibly with a +sigh of regret because you have reached the end; yet thankful to know +that a second volume is within reach. Besides the adventure, there is +more or less rollicking humor, of the type all boys like. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS DOWN IN ARIZONA, or, +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A Struggle for the Great Copper Lode. +</P> + +<P> +The scene shifts in this story, from the free life of the cattle range, +and the wide expanse of the boundless prairie, to that rugged +mountainous section of Arizona, where many fabulous fortunes have been +won through the discovery of rich ore. The Broncho Rider Boys find +themselves impelled, by a stern sense of duty, to make a brave fight +against heavy odds, in order to retain possession of a valuable mine +that is claimed by some of their relatives. That they meet with +numerous strange and thrilling perils while enlisted in this service, +can be readily understood; and every wideawake boy will be pleased to +learn how finally Adrian and his chums managed to outwit their enemies +in the fight for the copper lode. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS ALONG THE BORDER; or, +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +The Hidden Treasure of the Zuni Medicine Man. +</P> + +<P> +Once more the tried and true comrades of camp and trail are in the +saddle, bent on seeing with their own eyes some of the wonderful sights +to be found in that section of the Far Southwest, where the singular +cave homes of the ancient Cliff Dwellers dot the walls of the Great +Canyon of the Colorado. In the strangest possible way they are drawn +into a series of happenings among the Zuni Indians, while trying to +assist a newly made friend: all of which makes interesting reading. If +there could be any choice, this book would surely be voted the best of +the entire series, and certainly no lad will lay it down, save with +regret. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS ON THE WYOMING TRAIL; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, A Mystery of the Prairie Stampede. +</P> + +<P> +As the title will indicate to readers of the previous stories in this +Series, the three prairie pards finally find a chance to visit the +Wyoming ranch belonging to Adrian, but which has been managed for him +by a relative, whom he has reason to suspect might be running things +more for his own benefit than that of the young owner. Of course they +become entangled in a maze of adventurous doings while in the Northern +cattle country. How the Broncho Rider Boys carried themselves through +this nerve-testing period makes intensely interesting leading. No boy +will ever regret the money spent in securing this splendid volume. +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS SERIES +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +By RALPH MARLOW +</H3> + +<P> +A Series of Splendid Stories, in which are contained the Strange +Happenings that befell a bunch of five lively boys, who were fortunate +enough to come into possession of up-to-date motorcycles. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS' SWIFT ROAD CHASE; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Surprising the Bank Robbers. +</P> + +<P> +It is doubtful whether a more entertaining lot of boys ever before +appeared in a story than the "Big Five," who figure in the pages of +this volume—Rod Bradley; "Hanky Panky" Jucklin; Josh Whitcomb; Elmer +Overton; and last, but far from least, "Rooster" Boggs. From cover to +cover the reader will be thrilled and delighted with the accounts of +how luckily they came by their motorcycles; and what a splendid use +they made of the machines in recovering the funds of the robbed Garland +bank. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS IN TENNESSEE WILDS; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, The Secret of Walnut Ridge. +</P> + +<P> +In this story the boys with the "flying wheels" take a trip through +Kentucky, and into Dixie Land. The wonderful adventures, and amusing +ones as well, that were their portion on this glorious spin, have been +set down by the author in a way that will be most pleasing to the boy +reader who delights in tales of action. There is not a single dry +chapter in the book; and when the end is finally reached, the happy +possessor will count himself lucky to have it handy in his library, +where, later on, he may read it over and over again. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS THROUGH BY WIRELESS; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, A Strange Message from the Air. +</P> + +<P> +Even in a quiet Ohio town remarkable things may sometimes happen +calculated to create the most intense excitement. The five motorcycle +boys were put in touch with just such an event through a message that +came to their wireless station while many miles away from home. What +that "voice from the air" told them, and how gallantly they responded +to the call for action, you will be delighted to learn in the third +volume of this intensely interesting series. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS ON FLORIDA TRAILS; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Adventures Among the Saw Palmetto Crackers. +</P> + +<P> +Once more a kind fortune allows Rod Bradley and his four +"happy-go-lucky" comrades a chance to visit new fields. Down in the +Land of Sunshine and Oranges the Motorcycle Boys experience some of the +most remarkable perils and adventures of their whole career. The +writer spent many years along the far-famed Indian River, and he has +drawn upon his vast knowledge of the country in describing what befell +the chums there. If there could be any choice, then this book is +certainly the best of the whole series; and you will put it down with +regret, only hoping to meet these favorite characters again in new +fields. +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +The Boy Spies Series +</H3> + +<P> +These stories are based on important historical events, scenes wherein +boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of +history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home +life, and accurate in every particular. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS.<BR> +A story of the part they took in its defence.<BR> +By William P. Chipman.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY.<BR> +A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL.<BR> +A story of two boys at the siege of Boston.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT.<BR> +A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE.<BR> +The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY.<BR> +The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS.<BR> +The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive the +British from that State.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX.<BR> +The story of General Marion and his young spies.<BR> +By James Otis,<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN.<BR> +The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of +Yorktown.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA.<BR> +The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at +Valley Forge.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD.<BR> +The story of the part they took in its brave defence.<BR> +By William P. Chipman.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK.<BR> +The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General +Washington.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +The Boy Scout Series +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +By HERBERT CARTER +</H3> + +<P> +New stories of Camp Life, telling the wonderful and thrilling +adventures of the Boys of the Silver Fox Patrol. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Marooned Among the Game Fish Poachers. +</P> + +<P> +Through a queer freak of fate, Thad Brewster and his comrades of the +Silver Fox Patrol find themselves in somewhat the same predicament that +confronted dear old Robinson Crusoe; only it is on the Great Lakes that +they are wrecked instead of the salty sea. You will admit that those +Cranford scouts are a lively and entertaining bunch of fellows. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp. +</P> + +<P> +New and startling experiences awaited the tried comrades of camp and +trail, when they visit the Southland. But their knowledge of woodcraft +enabled them to meet and overcome all difficulties. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMP FIRE; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Scouting with the Silver Fox Patrol. +</P> + +<P> +This book is brimming over with thrilling adventure, woods lore and the +story of the wonderful experiences that befell the Cranford troop of +Boy Scouts when spending a part of their vacation in the wilderness. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners. +</P> + +<P> +Those lads who have read The Boy Scouts' First Camp Fire will be +delighted to read this story. It tells of the strange and mysterious +adventures that happened to the Patrol in their trip through the +"mountains of the sky" in the Moonshiners' Paradise of the old Tar Heel +State, North Carolina. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Scouting through the Big Game Country. +</P> + +<P> +The story recites the many adventures that befell the members of the +Silver Fox Patrol with wild animals of the forest trails, as well as +the desperate men who had sought a refuge in this lonely country. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, The New Test for the Silver Fox Patrol. +</P> + +<P> +In the rough field of experience the tenderfoots and greenhorns of the +Silver Fox Patrol are fast learning to take care of themselves when +abroad. Thad and his chums have a wonderful experience when they are +employed by the State of Maine to act as Fire Wardens. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, The Search for the Lost Tenderfoot. +</P> + +<P> +A serious calamity threatens the Silver Fox Patrol when on one of their +vacation trips to the wonderland of the great Northwest. How apparent +disaster is bravely met and overcome by Thad and his friends, forms the +main theme of the story, which abounds in plenty of humor, and +hairbreadth escapes. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, The Secret of The Hidden Silver Mine. +</P> + +<P> +By this time the boys of the Silver Fox Patrol have learned through +experience how to rough it upon a long hike. Their tour takes them +into the wildest region of the great Rocky Mountains, and here they +meet with many strange adventures. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A story of Burgoyne's defeat in 1777. +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +The Boy Chums Series +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +By WILMER M. ELY +</H3> + +<P> +In this series of remarkable stories by Wilmer M. Ely are described the +adventures of two boy chums—Charley West and Walter Hazard—in the +great swamps of interior Florida and among the cays off the Florida +Coast, and through the Bahama Islands. These are real, live boys, and +their experiences are well worth following. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY CHUMS ON INDIAN RIVER; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, The Boy Partners of the Schooner "Orphan." +</P> + +<P> +In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard meet deadly rattlesnakes; +have a battle with a wild panther; are attacked by outlaws: their boat +is towed by a swordfish; they are shipwrecked by a monster manatee +fish, and pass safely through many exciting scenes of danger. This +book should be read first. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY CHUMS ON HAUNTED ISLAND, +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Hunting for Pearls in the Bahama Islands. +</P> + +<P> +This book tells the story of the boy chums' adventures on the schooner +"Eager Quest," hunting for pearls among the Bahama Islands. Their +hairbreadth escapes from the treacherous quicksands and dangerous +waterspouts, and their rescue from the wicked wreckers are fully told. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades. +</P> + +<P> +The story of the boy chums hunting the blue herons and the pink and +white egrets for their plumes in the forests of Florida is full of +danger and excitement. In this story is fully told how the chums +encountered the Indians; their battles with the escaped convicts; their +fight with the wild boars and alligators; and many exciting encounters +and escapes. This is the third story of the boy chums' adventures. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY CHUMS' PERILOUS CRUISE; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, Searching for Wreckage on the Florida Coast. +</P> + +<P> +This story of the boy chums' adventures on and off the Florida Coast +describes many scenes of daring and adventure, in hunting for ships +stranded and cargoes washed ashore. The boy chums passed through many +exciting scenes, their conflicts with the Cuban wreckers; the loss of +their vessel, the "Eager Quest," they will long remember. This is the +fourth book of adventures which the boy chums experienced. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek Spongers. +</P> + +<P> +This story of the boy chums hunting for sponges is filled with many +adventures. The dangers of gathering sponges are fully described; the +chums meet with sharks and alligators; and they are cast away on a +desert island. Their rescue and arrival home make a most interesting +story. This is the fifth book of adventures of the boy chums. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS; +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +or, the Perils and Dangers of the Fishing Fleet. +</P> + +<P> +In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard embark upon a new and +dangerous quest for fortune. With their old and tried comrades, +Captain Westfield and the little negro, Chris, they join the great army +of fishermen that yearly search the Florida seas for the thousands of +kinds of rare fish and water creatures that abound there. The Florida +waters hide many strange and unknown dangers. The perils the chums +encounter from weird fishes and creatures of the sea and the menace of +hurricane and shipwreck, make very interesting and instructive reading. +This is the sixth book of adventures of the boy chums. +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +The Navy Boys Series +</H3> + +<P> +A series of excellent stories of adventure on sea and land, selected +from the works of popular writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY.<BR> +A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772.<BR> +By William P. Chipman.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND.<BR> +A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA.<BR> +Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam in 1772.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG.<BR> +A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES.<BR> +A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO.<BR> +The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1812.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING.<BR> +A boy's story of privateering in 1780.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY.<BR> +A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The Laughing +Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy.<BR> +By James Otis.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY.<BR> +The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "providence" +and the Frigate "Alfred."<BR> +By William P. Chipman.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE.<BR> +The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter +"Margaretta," in 1775.<BR> +By William P. Chipman.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS.<BR> +The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an +American Squadron in 1775.<BR> +By William P. Chipman.<BR> +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS.<BR> +The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in his +discovery of America.<BR> +By Frederick A. Ober.<BR> +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +The Girl Chums Series +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. +<BR> +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. +</H3> + +<P> +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and +full of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting +motives, vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl +readers. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +BENHURST CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow. +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +The Girl Comrades Series +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. +<BR> +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. +</H3> + +<P> +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and +full of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting +motives, vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl +readers. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER. By I. T. Thurston. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +ANNICE WYNKOOP. Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. +Rouse. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie E. Newberry. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +HELEN BEATON, COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide E. Rouse. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. +</P> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. +</P> + +<BR> + +<HR ALIGN="center" WIDTH="60%"> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +THE LITTLE GIRL SERIES +</H3> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +By AMANDA M. DOUGLAS +</H3> + +<BR> + +<P> +A series of stories for girls by that popular author, Amanda M. +Douglas, in which are described something of the life and times of the +early days of the places wherein the stories are located. Now for the +first time published in a cheap edition. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD NEW YORK +</P> + +<P> +This is a pretty story of life in New York 60 years ago. The story is +charmingly told. The book is full of vivacious narrative, describing +the amusements employments and the social and domestic life of Old New +York. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD BOSTON +</P> + +<P> +The story deals with the bringing up of little Doris by these Boston +people, who were her nearest relatives. It is a series of pictures of +life in Boston ninety years ago. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD BALTIMORE +</P> + +<P> +This tells the story of how a little girl grew up in a Southern city a +hundred years ago. A host of characters of all sorts—women, children, +slaves, rich people and poor people, fill the pages. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD PITTSBURG +</P> + +<P> +An interesting picture is given of the pioneer settlement and its +people; while the heroine, Daffodil, is a winsome lass who develops +into a charming woman. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL OF LONG AGO +</P> + +<P> +This story is a sequel to A Little Girl in Old New York. This is a +book for girls and boys of the present age, who will enjoy going back +to the old times. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD CHICAGO +</P> + +<P> +Ruth Gaynor comes to Chicago with her father when she is but eight or +nine years old. Ruth is a keen observer and makes a capital heroine. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD NEW ORLEANS +</P> + +<P> +The story gives a very picturesque account of the life in the old +Creole city. It is a well told and interesting story with a historical +background. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD SAN FRANCISCO +</P> + +<P> +This is the story of the little Maine girl who went to live in the +strange new city of the Golden Gate; she grows up a bright and charming +girl. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD WASHINGTON +</P> + +<P> +This story carries one back to Washington, a city then in its infancy. +The story throws a strong light on the early customs and life of the +people. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD PHILADELPHIA +</P> + +<P> +Little Primrose was the child of Friends, or Quakers. The author tells +Primrose's experiences among very strict Quakers, and then among +worldly people. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD QUEBEC +</P> + +<P> +The heroine is called "The Rose of Quebec." The picturesque life of +this old French city, as seen through the eyes of the little girl, is +here pictured. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD SALEM +</P> + +<P> +Cynthia Leveritt lived in old Salem about one hundred years ago. +Cynthia grows up, and so dear a girl could scarce have failed to have a +romance develop. The book will be enjoyed by all girls. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD ST. LOUIS +</P> + +<P> +This story will give a delightful treat to any girl who reads it. The +early days of this historical old city are depicted in a manner at once +true and picturesque. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="noindent"> +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD DETROIT +</P> + +<P> +The stirring times in which the little girl lived, and the social life +of a bygone age are depicted very happily. The heroine is a charming +girl. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR><BR> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Boy Chums in the Forest, by Wilmer M. Ely + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST *** + +***** This file should be named 27561-h.htm or 27561-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/7/5/6/27561/ + +Produced by Al Haines + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</BODY> + +</HTML> + diff --git a/27561-h/images/img-cover.jpg b/27561-h/images/img-cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4352375 --- /dev/null +++ b/27561-h/images/img-cover.jpg diff --git a/27561-h/images/img-front.jpg b/27561-h/images/img-front.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..529cb8c --- /dev/null +++ b/27561-h/images/img-front.jpg diff --git a/27561-h/images/img-title.jpg b/27561-h/images/img-title.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dfcdefe --- /dev/null +++ b/27561-h/images/img-title.jpg diff --git a/27561.txt b/27561.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6a8eedc --- /dev/null +++ b/27561.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8742 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums in the Forest, by Wilmer M. Ely + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Chums in the Forest + or Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades + +Author: Wilmer M. Ely + +Illustrator: J. Watson Davis + +Release Date: December 18, 2008 [EBook #27561] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST *** + + + + +Produced by Al Haines + + + + + + + + + +[Illustration: Cover art] + + + + + +[Frontispiece: "Now, we are in for it," said Charlie, as he found a +seat in the fork of a limb. Page 229.] + + + + + +The Boy Chums + +In the Forest + + +OR + +Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades + + +BY WILMER M. ELY + + + + Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy + Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums' + Perilous Cruise," "The Boy Chums in the + Gulf of Mexico." + + + +[Illustration: Title page art] + + + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +NEW YORK + + + + +Copyright 1910 + +BY A. L. BURT COMPANY + +Under the Title of The Young Plume Hunters + +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST + + + + + + +CONTENTS + + +CHAPTER + + I. [Transcriber's note: no title] + II. ON THE WAY + III. WOODCRAFT + IV. A LESSON + V. THE 'GATOR HUNTERS + VI. SOME SURPRISES + VII. THE QUAGMIRE + VIII. THE BATTLE + IX. THE BEES AND THE BEAR + X. SHOOTING A THIEF + XI. THE PAWPAWS + XII. CHARLEY'S MISTAKE + XIII. THE BATTLE + XIV. THE VICTIMS + XV. A FLAG OF TRUCE + XVI. THE RETREAT + XVII. THE FLIGHT BY NIGHT + XVIII. CAPTURED + XIX. THE SWAMP + XX. SAVED + XXI. THE TREASURE + XXII. DISAPPOINTMENT + XXIII. MORE MYSTERY + XXIV. MORE SURPRISES + XXV. THE CHAPEL + XXVI. PREPARATIONS + XXVII. A TERRIBLE NIGHT + XXVIII. PREPARATIONS + XXIX. THE ENEMY + XXX. THE ATTACK + XXXI. THE PARLEY + XXXII. HELP + XXXIII. THE SEMINOLES + XXXIV. THE RETURN + + + + +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST + +OR + +Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades. + + +CHAPTER I. + +Night had fallen upon a wild Florida forest, and all was still save for +the hooting of a distant owl and the occasional plaintive call of a +whip-poor-will. In a little clearing by the side of a faint +bridle-path a huge fire of fat pine knots roared and crackled, lighting +up the small cleared space and throwing its flickering rays in amongst +the dark, gloomy pines. + +At the edge of the clearing, two wiry little Florida ponies, tethered +with rawhide ropes, browsed upon the short, dry wire-grass. + +Nearer to the fire lay a neatly done-up pack, and beside it a +high-pommeled Mexican saddle, while the firelight gleamed on the +polished barrels of a fine shotgun and rifle leaning against the pack. + +Close to the blaze a heap of glowing coals had been raked a little to +one side, and upon them rested a coffee-pot and large frying-pan from +which stole forth appetizing odors of steaming coffee and frying bacon. + +The man bending over the coals was heavily bearded and past middle age, +but his broad shoulders and huge frame still gave evidence of great +strength and endurance. There was about him an air of anxious +expectancy, and from time to time he rose from his crouching position +and with hand to ear listened intently. + +"I sort o' wonder if they'll all fail me," he muttered, as he removed +the frying-pan from the coals but set it near enough to keep the +contents hot. + +As if in answer to his soliloquy, there rose above the crackling of the +fire, the muffled distant thud of galloping hoofs. A few moments later +a well-built, sturdy lad astride a mettlesome pony dashed into the +circle of firelight. + +Throwing the reins over the pony's head, the rider leaped from the +saddle and with a rush had the elderly man clasped in his arms in an +affectionate hug. + +"Captain Westfield!" he shouted in boyish delight. + +"Charley West," cried the man, "glad to see you, lad, glad to see you. +My! you have grown. How are you, boy?" + +"Fine, Captain, couldn't be better. But wait 'till I 'tend to my pony, +and we will have a good, long powwow." + +With sure swift movements, the newcomer removed saddle, pack, and guns, +and staked his pony out near the others. This done he returned to the +fire. + +"What's in the wind?" he began, firing in the questions with the speed +of a Maxim. "Something worth while, judging from that mysterious +letter of yours. What is the scheme? Why this secret meeting in the +forest instead of in town? Why"--but the man he called captain +interrupted him with a chuckle. + +"Hold a minute, lad. Just bowse your jib for a bit. You must be +hungry, boy." + +"Starved as a wolf. I could even eat a razorback, if I didn't have to +see it before it was cooked." + +The captain forked out a quantity of crisp bacon upon a tin plate and +filled a big granite cup with fragrant coffee, for Charlie West, and +from his saddle-bags brought out a bag of hardtack. Helping himself +also, both fell to with a will. + +"What were you doin' when you got my letter, Charley?" asked the +captain between mouthfuls. + +"Nothing, just kicking myself and brooding away in the city." The +lad's bright, clear eyes looked frankly into the captain's as he +continued. "I have been making a fool of myself, Captain. Got into +some mischief with a crowd of fellows at school. Of course, I got +caught and had to bear the whole blame for the silly joke we had +played. The faculty has suspended me for a term. I would have got off +with only a reprimand if I would have told the names of the other +fellows, but I couldn't do that, you know." + +"No," nodded the captain, approvingly, "that would have been sneakish. +But how are you fixed for money, Charley?" + +The lad's face fell. "I spent it at first as though there was no end +to my little pile," he said. "I had pulled up when your letter came, +but I only had enough left to pay my way back to Florida, buy this +pony, and the outfit you suggested. There's nothing left. The fellows +tried to get me to stay and work in the city until the next school term +opens, but I told them, no! that I was going back to the best friend a +boy ever had, back to the man who had been just as good as a father to +me ever since my own folks died and left me a young boy alone in +Florida. I told them of some of the adventures we had been through +together, and what dandy chums we've been for such a long time." + +"You told them city fellows all that?" exclaimed the delighted captain, +"you talked to 'em like that, Charley?" + +"Certainly, it was only the truth," said the lad, stoutly. "But it is +your turn now, Captain. I am wild with curiosity." + +"Lay to for a while, lad; I am expectin' another member for our crew +any time now, and it's no use spinnin' the same yarn twice." + +Charley's open face clouded a trifle, and he hesitated before he said, +"I am not questioning your judgment, Captain, but you and I have camped +out enough to know that a good camp-mate is about the scarcest article +to be found. If we take in a stranger on this trip, which I surmise +from the outfits is going to be a long one, the chances are more than +even that he will turn out a quitter or a shirker." + +The captain knocked the ashes from his pipe as he inquired, "Now who +would you select for a third member, Charley?" + +"I do not know anyone in Florida I would want to take a chance on for a +long trip. I only know two fellows I would like to have along, and we +can't get them. One is Walter Hazard, the Ohio boy who chummed with us +down here for so long. The other is that little Bahama darky, Chris, +whom Walter insisted on taking back north with him and putting in a +school. There wasn't a yellow streak in either one, and Chris was a +wonderful camp-fire cook." + +"I wrote to Walt two days afore I wrote to you," observed the captain, +calmly. + +Charley stared at the simple old sailor in frank amazement. "You +surely don't imagine he'll drop whatever he is doing and travel a +thousand miles just for a trip with you and I?" he at last recovered +himself enough to demand. + +The captain nodded complacently. "I've sort of got a feelin' that way, +an' if I ain't mistaken, them's his pony's hoofs comin' now--someway +they sound different from what yours did, though." + +Both adventurers rose to their feet and stood eagerly peering into the +darkness from which there came the thud of rapidly approaching hoofs. + +A moment later and two ponies were reined up in the circle of +fire-light. As Charley recognized one less robust than himself, he +gave a shout of delight and with a rush dragged him from his saddle in +an affectionate embrace, while the captain, his eyes dancing with +pleasure, was wringing the hand of a widely-grinning little darky who +had dismounted from the other animal. + +"Go easy, Charley," said the newcomer with a happy grin, "you're +squeezing all the wind out of my body, and that is all there is in it +now. Chris and I had to hustle to make connections and get here on +time. We haven't had a bite to eat to-day." + +"Walter Hazard, you are the one person I would have picked out for this +trip," Charley cried joyfully, "and Chris, too, it seems almost too +good to be true. But come over to the fire, and we will cure that +empty feeling in a minute. The captain is helping Chris put the ponies +up." + +Charley quickly routed out a clean plate, and heaped it up with bacon +and hardtack, reserving, however, a generous portion for Chris. + +"Fall to and don't wait," he commanded, and Walter lingered for no +second bidding. + +In a few minutes they were joined by the captain and the little negro, +who was quickly helped to the balance of the bacon and coffee. + +As the two munched away, the captain and Charley plied them with +questions which the hungry newcomers answered between mouthfuls. + +"How was you gettin' along when that thar letter of mine reached you, +Walt," asked the captain, gravely. + +"Good and bad both," said the youth, draining his cup with a sigh of +satisfaction. "Some time before I had bought up the mortgage on the +farm without saying a word to father or mother. I was selfish, I +guess, but I wanted the pleasure of their surprise." His eyes sparkled +moistly. "My! it was great. It was worth every cent, although it took +nearly every dollar of my little pile. You had ought to have been up +there to see them the morning the mortgage fell due. Their faces were +sad, enough to have made you cry. Thirty years they had worked and +lived on that farm, and I guess there is no spot on earth quite the +same to them. When mother lifted up her plate and saw the canceled +mortgage underneath, it was some time before she grasped its meaning, +and then she just broke down and cried. There were tears of joy in +father's eyes, too, and I began to feel a lump in my throat, so I just +got up and streaked it out for the barn, where I stayed until things +calmed down a bit. But I am making a long story out of how my money +went. I went to work in a store after that, but it wasn't long before +I began to run down and the doctor would have long talks with father +and mother. Then your letter came, and--well, here I am." + +"And Chris, how did he happen to come?" inquired Charley. + +"Trace chains couldn't have held him back when he heard I was coming +back to join you. They wouldn't give him a vacation, but they would +not keep him in the school after he began to have regular violent +fits," said Walter, dryly. + +"Fits," exclaimed Charley, with a glance at the grinning ebony face, +the very picture of health. "He never had a real fit in his life." + +"Maybe not, Massa Charley," admitted the vain little darky, "but, +golly, I couldn't let you chillens go off alone widout Chris to look +after you. Dey was powerful like real fits, anyway. I used to get +berry sick, too, chewin' up de soap to make de foam. Reckon dis nigger +made a martyr of hisself just to come along and look out for you-alls." + +Charley turned to the captain to hide his grin. "It's your turn now, +Captain. We've all showed our colors, even to Chris. It's up to you +now to explain this business." + +The captain knocked the ashes from the bowl of his pipe before +remarking sagely, "I've noticed as how fish will bite at a good many +kinds of bait, but if you want to make sartin sho' of a boy, thar's +only one bait to use, and that's a good big chunk of mystery." + +He glanced around at the suddenly crestfallen faces about him, and +hastened to continue, "Don't look so down, lads. I ain't brought all +of you so fer just for a joke. I just wanted to make sure of you and I +didn't want the town people nosin' around and askin' questions, that's +why I named this meetin' place." + +The three faces brightened again. "Go on, Captain, come to the point," +urged Walter, eagerly. + +But the captain was enjoying their suspense, and with a twinkle in his +eye proceeded slowly, "I was sort of loafin' around town one day about +two weeks ago when I come across a Seminole, who, I reckon, had been +sent in by his squaw to trade for red calico and beads," he paused for +a moment and Charley exclaimed impatiently-- + +"Bother the Indian, we are not bound for the Everglades to fight them, +are we?" + +"He was about the drunkest brave I ever saw," continued the captain, +calmly ignoring the interruption. "When I came across him he was +sittin' on the end of a waterin' trough declaimin' what a great Injun +he was, givin' war-whoops, an' cryin' by turns. One of his remarks +sorter interested me and I didn't lose no time in makin' friends. +Lads, I couldn't have stuck no closer to that redskin if he had been my +long lost brother. I kept him away from other folks, an' by an' by I +tipped him into the waterin' trough, kinder accident-like. The water +sorter sobered him up a little an' pretty soon he began to want to hit +the trail for home. I helped him out of town an' started him back for +camp, where, I reckon, his old lady was waitin' to give him fits for +forgettin' the calico and beads." The captain paused as if his tale +was completed. + +"For goodness' sake, Captain, what has your drunken Indian got to do +with us?" demanded Charley, his patience at an end. + +The captain lowered his voice dramatically. "Lads, that Seminole was +carryin' around on him over five hundred dollars' worth of white and +pink aigret plumes." + +"Whew!" whistled the boys, half incredulously. + +"Yes," affirmed the captain, "an' I found out where he got them, too. +He let out that he bagged them all out by the Upper St. John's River, +due west of here. He declared the birds were as thick as the stars at +night, but I reckon some allowance has to be made for poetic license +and the red liquor he had in him." + +Three boyish faces were shining, now, and questions and answers mingled +in eager confusion. + +"How far is it to the river?" + +"Two long days' travel." + +"What kind of birds bear the plumes?" + +"The blue heron, and the pink and white egret." + +"What are the plumes worth?" + +"Five dollars an ounce for perfect ones." + +"Whew, it will be just like finding money." + +Likely the eager young hunters would have talked the entire night away, +but the captain soon interrupted their flow of questions. + +"Plenty of time to talk to-morrow, lads. Get to bed now, for we want +to start at daybreak." + +The boys promptly obeyed. Blankets were spread out near the fire, and +with their saddles for pillows the little party were soon in the land +of dreams, blissfully unaware of the terrible experiences through which +they were soon to pass. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +ON THE WAY. + +It seemed to the boys that they had only just fallen asleep when a +crash like that of mighty thunder brought them startled out of the land +of dreams. Instinctively both reached for their belts and pistols, +which they had placed close to their hands on retiring. There was no +need for their use, however, for the author of the deafening racket was +only Chris who, with a grin on his face, was beating on a tin-pan close +to their heads. + +"You little imp, I thought it was an earthquake," cried Charley as he +hurled a shoe at the little darky, who dodged it nimbly. + +"Just couldn't wake you no other way," grinned Chris. "Time to get up, +Massas, daylight dun come." + +The sky in the east was glowing rosy-red, and the boys lost no time in +slipping into their outer clothes and strapping on their pistol belts, +which completed their attire. + +The captain was already astir, busily engaged in strapping the packs on +the animals, while, early as it was, Chris had breakfast ready. + +"I tell you what it is," declared Charley, while munching his hardtack +and bacon, "we'll soon tire of this fare. We must get some fresh meat +very soon." + +"A wild turkey roasted over the coals would go pretty well," suggested +Walter. + +"Deer foah dis nigger," declared Chris, "you-alls just ought to taste +de venison steaks when I dun broil 'em." + +"I like bear steaks, sizzling brown," said Charley, thoughtfully. + +"Oh, keep still, you gluttons," laughed the captain. "We ain't likely +to get any of those things unless we stop and have a regular hunt, an' +I don't like to take the time for it. Maybe we'll pick up somethin' or +other on our way. But now hurry up, boys, it's time we were startin'." + +After taking the precaution to cover their fire with sand, all were +soon in the saddle, and with Charley in the lead, took up the trail +just as the sun rose above the distant tree-tops. + +After half an hour's riding, Charley reined in his pony. "Trail's come +to an end," he announced. + +"Good!" cried Walter, with all of a boy's delight in the unknown, "that +means we are getting beyond the range of hunters. Hurrah for the land +beyond." + +The captain produced a small compass and handed it to Charley. "Steer +due west as near as you can," he directed. + +Then followed hours of twisting and winding in and out amongst the big +trees, now headed one way, now another, but keeping the general +westerly direction. All hands kept their guns ready, but, although +they saw evidences of big game on every hand, the noise of their +advance must have frightened the wild creatures to their hiding-places +long before our hunters came in sight. + +As the party advanced the forest grew denser, the trees closer +together. At last, when they began to fear that further progress would +be impossible, they burst suddenly into a stretch of open country +extending as far as the eye could see. + +"Isn't it great!" exclaimed Walter; "just look at those pretty little +lakes, you can see one no matter in what direction you look." + +"It is pretty," agreed Charley, "but I am thinking more of dinner than +scenery. I suppose it has got to be bacon and hardtack again. I'm--" +but Charley did not finish the sentence. His pony had put its foot in +a hole and stumbled, while Charley, taken unawares, pitched over the +animal's head and landed on all fours in a little heap of sand beside +the hole that had caused the mischief. To the surprise of his +companions, he did not rise, but remained in the position in which he +had fallen, staring at the hole. + +"Are you hurt, Charley?" cried the captain, anxiously. + +"Not a bit," grinned Charley as he regained a sitting position on the +sand-heap. "I'm just holding down our dinner," he added calmly. "Get +off, gents, and help me finish the job." + +"Now, Chris," he directed, when they had dismounted, "do you see that +tall slender sapling over there? It's just the thing I want. Please +take the axe and get it for me, and don't cut off all the limbs." + +Chris obeyed with alacrity, for experience had taught him that Charley +never made useless demands. In a few minutes he was back dragging the +sapling after him. + +With a few strokes of the axe, Charley lopped off all the branches save +one close to the small end of the trunk. This one he cut off so as to +leave a projecting stub of about four inches, thus making of the end of +his sapling a sort of rude harpoon. + +His companions looked on with curiosity, but asked no questions, for +they knew their chum delighted in surprises. + +The pole finished, Charley poked the barbed end down into the hole. +Down, down it went, fifteen, twenty feet, then struck with a dull thud. +He began twisting the sapling over and over, then drew it slowly and +gently up, but the end came into view with nothing adhering to it. +Again and again was the fruitless operation repeated, and a look of +disappointment had begun to settle on Charley's face when at last his +harpoon came into view with a dark mass clinging to it. + +"A turtle," exclaimed Walter in delight. + +"No, a gopher, but I'll admit it is a kind of land turtle, although it +feeds entirely on grass and never goes near the water," explained +Charley, proud of his capture. "Chris, ride on to that first little +lake yonder and get a fire started. We'll be there in a few minutes." + +Charley fastened a buckskin thong to one of the gopher's flippers and +hung it from his saddle-horn, then all remounted and turned their +ponies toward the place where Chris had disappeared among the trees +fringing the lake. + +They had covered part of the distance when there came a yell and Chris' +pony broke from the trees and bore down upon them at a run. The little +darky was clinging to its back, his face ashen and his eyes bulging +with terror. + +"Go back, Massas," he shouted, "hit's a lake of blood, hit's a lake of +blood!" + +Walter grabbed the flying pony's rein and brought the animal to a halt. +"Nonsense," he said, roughly, "you're crazy, Chris. Come on all, let's +see what's scared him so." He spurred forward followed by the others +and still retaining his hold upon the bridle of Chris' pony, in spite +of the little darky's chattering, "Let me go, Massa Walt. Please let +me go." + +In a few moments the little party entered the fringe of timber and +reined in their horses on the shore of the tiny lake. For a moment +they sat speechless in their saddles, and truly there was in the sight +excuse for Chris' chattering teeth. The little wavelets which broke at +their feet were the color of blood, while the lake itself lay like a +giant ruby in its setting of green; glistening and sparkling in the +sun's bright rays. + +Charley dismounted from his horse and from his saddle-bags produced a +small medicine glass, which he filled with the liquid and held up to +the light. The fluid sparkled clear as crystal and of a beautiful +crimson hue. + +"It beats me," he announced, "I thought it might be the bottom gave it +that color, but whatever it is, it is in the water itself." + +Walter wheeled his horse and studied the encircling trees carefully. +"I've got it," he announced, "do you notice all these trees are of one +kind?" + +"You're right," Charley exclaimed, "they are all red bays. It's their +roots that color the water." + +The boys turned to chaff Chris, but he had slipped away at the first +words of the explanation. Soon he reappeared with an armful of dry +wood. His face was still ashen, but his teeth had stopped chattering. + +"Golly," he exclaimed, pompously, "reckon dis nigger had you-alls scart +dis time. Dis nigger shore had de joke on you dis time." + +The boys glanced at each other and grinned. "I wouldn't try it again, +Chris," Charley chuckled; "you might throw a fit next time, you act so +real." + +While Chris was making a fire and preparing a bed of coals, Charley +cleaned the gopher. + +This animal is very much like a turtle, but the tissue which unites the +upper and lower shells is so hardened as to be impervious to a knife. +Charley solved the problem by wedging it in the fork of a fallen tree, +and after two or three attempts he succeeded in separating the shells +with an axe. + +"Let me finish hit, Massa Charley," pleaded Chris; "dis nigger knows +just how to fix him now you got him open." + +Charley was nothing loath to turn over the disagreeable task of +cleaning to the little darky, who swiftly completed it. He removed the +meat from the shell, skinned the edible portions, and threw the offal +far from the fire. Next he washed both meat and shells carefully, +salted and peppered the meat, and replaced it in the shell, laying on +top of it a few thin slices of pork. Then, he bound both shells +tightly together with wisps of green palmetto leaves. Lastly, he +wrapped another green leaf around the shell and buried it in the bed of +glowing coals now ready. + +"That's a new idea," grinned Walter, "making your game supply its own +cooking-pot. My! but it smells good, though." + +In a very short time, Chris pronounced the gopher done and it was +lifted from the coals and the shells cut apart revealing the steaming, +juicy meat within. + +Our hungry party pronounced the meat far sweeter and more tender than +chicken, and the empty shells soon bore evidence to their sincerity. + +After a brief rest, they mounted and again took up the trail, soon +leaving behind their halting-place, which the boys named Lake +Christopher, much to the vain little darky's chagrin. He had a shrewd +suspicion that he would not hear the last of his fright for many a day. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +WOODCRAFT. + +For a while the little party rode forward in silence, winding in and +out between pretty lakes and bunches of timber, with no path to guide +them, but with the help of the compass, managing to edge slowly to the +west. Charley still maintained the lead, but in the open country +through which they were traveling it was possible to ride abreast, and +Walter soon spurred up beside his chum. + +"Do you know, Charley, I begin to feel like a babe in the woods," he +confessed. "I suspect you are the only one of us who knows anything +about woodcraft. I know nothing about it, I am sure Chris doesn't, and +I suspect the captain is far more at home reefing a top-sail. You have +got to be our guide and leader, I guess." + +"I have hunted a good deal, and a fellow can't help but learn a few +things if he is long in the woods," said Charley, modestly, "but I've +never been so far into the interior before. I wish, Walt," he +continued gravely, "that there was someone along with us that knew the +country we are going to better than I, or else that we were safely back +in town once more." + +"Why?" demanded Walter in astonishment. + +"I dread the responsibility, and," lowering his voice so the others +could not hear, "I have seen something I do not like." + +"What?" queried his chum, eagerly. + +Charley produced a square plug of black chewing tobacco from his +pocket. "I picked that up in the edge of the clearing this morning," +he explained. "It wasn't even damp, so it must have been dropped after +the dew settled last night." + +"Some lone hunter passed by in the night," suggested Walter, cheerfully. + +"I wish I could think so," said Charley anxiously. "But you know as +well as I that there are some gangs of lawless men in Florida, gathered +from all quarters of the globe, and, Walter," lowering his voice to a +whisper, "I saw signs that there was more than one man near our camp +last night." + +"What kind of signs?" his chum demanded. + +"Broken bushes, the marks of horses' hoofs, and a dozen other little +things of no importance when considered separately." + +"A fig for your signs, you old croaker," laughed Walter, "you'll be +seeing ghosts next. I didn't see any of the signs you talk about. +Besides, if anyone had wished to do us harm they could have done so +without hindrance last night." + +"I know it," Charley admitted, "and that's what puzzles me. As for the +signs, your not noticing them proves nothing. It's the little things +that make up the science of woodcraft. The little things that one does +not usually notice." + +"My eyes are pretty good, and I don't go around with them shut all the +time," began Walter hotly, but Charley only smiled. + +"Look around and tell me what you see, Walt," he requested. + +"A flat, level country, covered with saw palmetto, dotted with pretty +little lakes, what looks like a couple of acres of prairie ahead, and, +oh yes, a lot of gopher holes all around us like the one you robbed +this morning." + +"We'll begin with the gopher holes," Charley said with a smile. "Tell +me what is in each hole as we pass it." + +"Why, gophers, I suppose." + +Charley reined in his horse before four large holes and pointed at them +with his riding-whip. "Gopher in that one," he declared without +hesitation. "Mr. Gopher is away from the next one, out getting his +dinner likely; a coon lives in the next, but he is away from home. +Rattlesnake, and a big one, lives in the fourth, but he is also away +from home, I am glad to say." + +Chris and the captain had ridden up to the boys, and they with Walter, +stood staring at Charley in silent wonder. + +"It's easy to see," explained the young woodsman. "When a gopher goes +down his hole, he simply draws in his flippers and slides, but when he +wants to get out he has to claw his way up. You'll see the first hole +has the sand pressed smooth at the entrance, while the sand in the +other hole shows the mark of the flippers. That third hole is easy, +too; you can see the coon tracks if you look close, and you will notice +that the claws point outward. The last hole is equally simple, you can +see the trail of the snake's body in the soft sand and those little +spots here and there made by his rattles show which way he was +traveling." + +The captain brought his hand down on his knee with a hard slap. "I +reckon I can handle any ship that was ever built," he said, "but I'm a +lubber on land, boys. Charley's our pilot from now on, an' we must +mind him, lads, like a ship minds her helm." + +"If I'm going to be pilot, I'll make you all captains on the spot," +laughed Charley, as he spurred forward again into the lead. + +"Do those wonderful eyes see anything more?" mocked Walter, as he once +more ranged alongside. + +"Don't make fun of me, Walt," said his chum, seriously. "What I have +done is nothing. It's just noting little things and putting two and +two together. You can easily do the same if you will train yourself to +observe things closely." + +"Do you really think I could?" asked Walter, eagerly. + +"Certainly you can, and now for the first lesson. Look closely at all +the bushes as we pass them and see if you notice anything out of the +way." + +They rode on in silence for a few minutes, Walter scanning the scrub in +passing with a puzzled expression growing upon his face. + +"Well, what do you make of it?" Charley asked. + +"I don't know what to make of it," Walter confessed. "Every few +hundred feet there are branches partly broken off and left hanging. +Queer, isn't it?" + +"Look closer and see if you can notice anything peculiar about those +branches." + +"They haven't been broken off very long, for they are not very much +withered. I should say it was done about ten days ago." + +"Good," exclaimed Charley, approvingly, "notice anything else?" + +"Yes," declared Walter, his wits sharpening by his success, "although +those boughs seem to be broken accidentally, yet all are caught in +amongst other twigs so that each one points in the same direction--the +way we are going. What does it mean, Charley, if it means anything?" + +"My color is wrong to tell you all that those broken branches mean, but +I can tell you a little. About ten days ago a party of Indians passed +through this way bound in the same direction we are. They expected +another party of their people to follow later so they marked the way +for them as you have seen. If I were a Seminole, I could tell from +those broken twigs the number of the first party, whither they were +bound, what was the object of their journey, and a dozen other things +hidden from me on account of my ignorance of their sign language." + +"Indians, Seminoles," said Walter, bewildered, "I had almost forgotten +there were any in the state." + +"There isn't, legally. Years ago the United States rounded them all up +and started to transport them out west to a reservation. But at St. +Augustine a few hundred made their escape and fled back to the +Everglades, where they have lived ever since without help or +protection, and ignored by the United States government." + +"What kind of a race are they?" asked Walter, curiously. + +"The finest race of savages I ever saw," declared Charley, warmly; +"tall, splendidly-built, cleanly, honest, and with the manners of +gentlemen--look out!" he shouted, warningly. + +Walter's horse had reared back upon his haunches with a snort of +terror. Walter, though taken by surprise, was a good horseman, and +slipped from the saddle to avoid being crushed by a fall. + +A few feet in front of the frightened pony lay coiled a gigantic +rattlesnake, its ugly head and tail raised and its rattles singing +ominously. Two more steps and the pony would have been upon it. + +"Don't shoot," pleaded Walter as Charley drew his revolver. "I know +where I can sell that skin for $25.00, if there's no holes in it." + +"Let me shoot it, Walt," pleaded Charley, anxiously, "they're awfully +dangerous." + +"Aye, lad," seconded the captain, who, with Chris, had reached the +spot, "better let him shoot it, those things are too dangerous to take +chances with." + +But Walter's obstinacy was roused. "Keep back, I'll fix him," he +declared confidently. "I'm going to have that skin and that $25.00." + +Breaking off a dead bough from a scrub oak he approached the snake +cautiously while the rest sat in their saddles silently anxious, and +Charley edged his restive pony a little closer to the repulsive reptile. + +Slowly Walter moved forward, his gaze fixed intently upon the slowly +waving head before him with its glistening little diamond eyes. Nearer +and nearer he crept till only a few feet separated him from that +venomous head with its malignant unwinking eyes. + +"Strike, boy, strike, you're getting too close," shouted the captain. + +"Oh, golly," shrieked Chris, "look at him, look at him." + +Walter had stopped as though frozen in his tracks. His face had gone +deathly pale, and great drops of sweat stood on his forehead. The hand +that held the stick unclasped, and it rattled unheeded to the ground. + +"He's charmed," cried the captain. + +"Jump to one side, Walt, jump," Charley shouted, "for God's sake, jump. +It's going to strike." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +A LESSON. + +The reptile's swaying head had drawn back and the huge snake launched +itself forward from its coils straight for the dazed lad only a few +feet in front of it. + +Quick as was its spring, Charley was quicker. He dug his spur cruelly +into his little pony's flank. With a neigh of pain the animal leaped +forward. For a moment there was a tangle of striking hoofs and +wriggling coils of the foiled reptile, while Charley leaning over in +his saddle struck with the butt-end of his riding whip at the writhing +coils. Though it seemed an eternity to the helpless watchers it was +really only a few seconds ere the pony sprang away from its loathsome +enemy and Charley with difficulty reined him in a few paces away. The +snake with a broken neck lay lifeless on the ground, while Walter, +sobbing dryly, had sunk into the arms of the captain, who had flung +himself from his horse with surprising agility for a man of his age. + +With a glance at the group, Charley dismounted, and petting and +soothing his trembling horse, ran his keen eyes over the animal's legs +and flanks. From the little pony's left foreleg trickled a tiny stream +of scarlet. + +"Bring up the packhorse, quick, Chris," he commanded, with a break in +his usually steady voice. + +Quickly he removed pack, saddle and bridle from his mount. Rapidly as +he worked, he had only just removed the bridle when the pony sank to +its knees, struggled for a moment to rise, then sank slowly to the +ground, where it lay looking up at its master with dumb appealing eyes. + +Something welled up in Charley's throat. He flung himself on the +ground beside his pony and put his arms around its neck. + +"Good-bye, Billy," he whispered. "We haven't known each other long but +I've got mighty fond of you, Billy, and when the time came you didn't +fail me. You acted like a gentleman, old man." + +Poor Billy's legs kicked restlessly to and fro as the tremors went +through him. + +With a mist in his eyes, Charley arose and looked down on the faithful +animal. The wounded leg had already swollen to twice its natural size, +the body was twitching with spasms, and the large brown eyes were +eloquent with pain and suffering. + +"I've got to do it, Billy. It's to save you torture, old fellow, just +to save you useless suffering, Billy." He drew his pistol from his +belt, took careful aim just behind the pony's ear, and, turning his +head away, pulled the trigger. + +With never a backward glance at the still form, he strode over to the +pack pony and removing the pack transferred his own saddle to the +animal. + +The pack was quickly broken up into smaller packages and distributed +equally amongst the party, and soon all were moving forward again on +their westerly course. + +It was a still, white, and shaken Walter who once more rode beside his +silent chum. + +"You saved my life, Charley, and it's a poor return to merely thank +you," he said earnestly. + +"Don't say anything about it," protested Charley, cheerfully. "The +shoe may be on the other foot next time, and I know you will do the +same for me then." + +But Walter had not finished. "I want to say," he continued, "that you +are the only one of us qualified to lead this party. Hereafter, what +you say goes with me. I know it will with Captain Westfield too." + +"There's Chris," said Charley with a smile. "I fear he will have to +have his little lesson before he gets in that frame of mind. Walt," he +continued earnestly, "I do not want the responsibility but I am not +going to shirk it now that it is thrust upon me. Frankly, though, I +can't help wishing that this trip was over and we were safe back in +town once more." + +"Thinking about our visitors of the other night!" Walter inquired. + +Charley nodded. "If they meant any good to us, why did they not make +their presence known to us," he reasoned. "Mark my words, we have not +seen the last of them,--but hush, here comes the captain and Chris, +there is no need to worry them with vague conjectures." + +"See that prairie ahead, Charley?" asked the captain. "Chris says +there's a big bird in the middle of it, but I can't see anything but +grass." + +The party was now only a few hundred yards from the small prairie-like +patch. Charley rose in his stirrups and scanned it carefully. + +"Chris is right," he said. "It's a big sand-hill crane." + +"Good to eat, Massa Charley?" demanded the little darky, eagerly. + +"I have eaten some that were equal to the finest turkey." + +"Dat settles it," Chris shouted. "Golly, I reckon dis nigger goin' to +show you chillens how to shoot some. My shot, I seed him first." + +"Don't shoot, Chris," said Charley, gently, "you can't get it and it +won't be fit to eat if you do." + +But Chris' obstinacy and pompous vanity were aroused. "Tink dis nigger +can't shoot, eh? You-alls just watch an' Chris will show you chillens +somfin'." + +Charley said nothing more but his mouth set in a grim line. "Time for +his lesson," he murmured to Walter. + +Chris waited until they had come within a hundred yards of the crane +when he unslung his rifle and dismounted while the others reined in to +watch the outcome. + +The little darky rested his gun on his saddle and took careful aim. +The crack of his rifle was followed by a hoarse squawk and the tall +bird tumbled over lifeless. + +Chris danced with delight. "I got 'em, I'se got 'em," he cried. Like +a flash he was on his pony and galloping towards the dead bird. + +"Come back, Chris," shouted Charley, but the little darky galloped on +unheeding. + +And now the rest of the party beheld a curious thing. Chris' pony had +reached the edge of the grass and had stopped so suddenly as to nearly +throw its rider over its head. In vain did the little negro apply whip +and spur. Not a step further would the animal budge. They saw Chris +at last throw the reins over the pony's head and leaping from his +saddle plunge into the grass. Only the top of his head was visible but +they could trace his progress by that and it was very, very slow. At +last he reached the crane and slinging it over his shoulder began to +retrace his footsteps. His return was infinitely slow, but at last he +regained his pony and dragging himself and his burden into the saddle +headed back towards the group of curious watchers. As he drew nearer +they stared in silent amazement. He was wet from head to foot, his +clothing was in tatters, and the blood flowed freely from a hundred +cuts on face, hands and arms. + +He rode up to Charley with a sickly smile. "I got 'em, Massa Charley," +he boasted weakly. + +Without a word Charley reached over and took the crane from him. +Stripping away the feathers, he exposed the body of the great bird and +held it up to view. The captain and Walter gave an exclamation of +disgust. The body was merely a framework of bones with the skin +hanging loosely from it. + +"It's their moulting season," he explained simply. + +"Why you doan tell me dat place full of water, dat grass cut like +knife, an' dat ole mister crane wasn't no good nohow," Chris demanded, +hotly. + +Charley gazed at the pathetic, wretched, little figure and his +conscience smote him. + +"I told you not to go, Chris," he said gently, "but you would do it. +This time there was plenty of time to explain to you that what you +thought was merely a plot of grass was really a saw-grass pond, and +that sand-hill cranes are not fit for use this season of the year; but +suppose that a danger suddenly threatened us. Is it likely, Chris, +that I would always have time to stop and explain just why I wanted you +to do this or that?" + +But Chris was suffering too much pain and humiliation to be soothed by +Charley's explanation. With a snort of anger he dug the spurs into his +pony's flanks and soon was far ahead of the rest of the party. In a +few minutes he came tearing back to them, his face shining with +excitement. + +"River ahead, river ahead," he shouted. + +"It's the St. Johns," declared Captain Westfield, scarcely less +excited. "There's no other river in these parts." + +Although they spurred forward their jaded steeds the animals were so +worn out that it was dusk before they reached the river bank, and they +went into camp immediately. + +After the supper was over, Chris approached Charley, who was sitting +apart from the rest, grave, silent, and evidently buried in deepest +thought. The little darky began awkwardly, "Massa Charley, Massa Cap +say you de leader an' he going to do just what you say widout axin' no +questions, Massa Walt say same ting, an' I guess Chris better say same, +now. Golly, I jus' reckon dis nigger made a big fool of hisself over +dat bird." + +But although he answered Chris lightly and kindly, Charley was not +elated over his unsought leadership. Vague suspicions were flitting +through his mind, and his new responsibility was weighing heavily upon +his young shoulders. As the evening wore on he still sat silent, +buried in thought. The captain was reading aloud from an old newspaper +he had brought along. Suddenly Charley straightened up, and a swift +glance passed between him and Walter. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +THE 'GATOR HUNTERS. + +The captain was laboriously spelling out the scare-head articles by the +flickering firelight. + +"Desperadoes at large." + +"Last night twelve convicts, all of them life prisoners, escaped from +E. B. Richardson's turpentine camp near Turnbull. The escape was +effected by their overpowering the guards while their supper was being +served them. One guard was killed and the balance were gagged and tied +up to posts in the barracks. The revolters stripped their prisoners of +arms, ammunition and what money they had. Next they broke into the +commissary, taking a large amount of clothing and provisions and +wantonly destroying the rest. They then made their escape on horses +belonging to the guards. As soon as their absence was discovered, +bloodhounds were put upon the trail which led towards the interior. +The dogs were soon completely baffled, however, for the fugitives had +evidently taken to water whenever they came near a pond or creek. This +ruse, as well as the whole uprising, is believed to have been the +headwork of 'Indian Charley,' one of the escaped prisoners, who, it +will be remembered, was drummed out of his tribe and sentenced by the +courts for the murder of a white settler last spring. Small outlying +settlements will rejoice when this body of hardened desperate men are +once more in the grasp of the law." + +"I've got it!" exclaimed Charley, so suddenly that the captain looked +up in mild surprise. + +"Got what?" he inquired. + +"A pretty bad attack of sleepiness," Charley said with assumed +lightness. "I feel all done up to-night. Guess I'll turn in." + +But although he was first to turn in, it was along in the wee small +hours of morning before slumber crept in on his tired brain. + +He was awakened by Walter shaking him vigorously. + +"Get up, you lazy rascal, get up. The sun is half an hour high, and +breakfast is ready. Get up and gaze upon the beautiful St. Johns." + +"What does it look like?" inquired Charley, sleepily, as he buckled on +his heavy leggins and strapped on his pistol belt. + +"For a dismal, wretched, man-forsaken stretch of country it beats +anything I ever saw," Walter exclaimed in disgust. "The river itself +is about a half mile wide, but it twists, turns, and forks every few +yards so as to puzzle a corporation lawyer. The shores for half a mile +back from the water are nothing but boggy marsh, with here and there a +wooded island. Ugh, the sight of it is enough to make a man homesick." + +"Not giving out already, Walt," Charley said, cheerfully, as he made +his way through the boggy marsh to the water to wash, followed by his +chum. + +"Not much," said Walter grimly, "I for one am not going back +empty-handed after coming so far. But I'm beginning to realize that +this is not going to be all a pleasure trip. You noticed the article +that the captain read last evening about the convicts escaping. Can it +be they are the party you saw signs of?" + +"I believe they are," agreed his chum as they turned back towards the +camp where the captain and Chris were patiently waiting breakfast. "I +may be wrong, but I thought it all over last night and I decided it was +only fair to tell the others what I suspect." + +"The captain will want us all to pack right back home," said Walter, +glumly. + +His fears proved true, for when Charley related his suspicions over the +frugal breakfast, the captain was visibly worried. + +"I'm the cause of leading you into trouble again, boys," he reproached +himself. "However, I reckon thar ain't nothing to be gained by +regrets. As soon as we have finished eating, we'll pack up and head +back for the coast." + +But Charley opposed the plan of returning decidedly. "They have had +plenty of chance to kill us off easily on the way here if they had +wanted to," he argued. "Why they haven't done so puzzles me. Perhaps +they fear a searching party would be sent after us if we do not return +promptly. I have a feeling, though, that they are after bigger game, +although I have not the slightest idea what it can be. Anyway, I am +not going back, now, empty-handed, if there were twice as many +jail-birds at my heels." + +"I am with you, Charley," Walter said quickly. + +"Me too, Massa," grinned Chris, who was plucky enough when he +understood the nature of the threatened danger. "Golly, I jest reckon +dis nigger got to stay and look out for you chillens." + +The captain, whose only concern had been for the boys, brought his hand +down on his knee earnestly. "Then I'm with you, lads, till the last +mast carries away. You're the pilot in these waters, Charley. What +course shall we steer now, lad?" + +"I think," suggested Charley, modestly, "that the first thing is to fix +up a shelter in case of rain. We must be careful, and if we come into +contact with any of those fellows we must not let them see that we +suspect what they are. That would cause trouble right away, I am sure." + +"Go ahead and give your orders, lad; we will carry them out." + +"Then I'll deputize Chris to see if he can't get us some fresh fish," +said Charley with a smile. + +Chris, his face beaming, darted away to his saddlebags after his +fishing-tackle. If there was one thing the little darky liked above +all others it was fishing, and wherever he might be, his tackle was +never far away. + +As soon as he had departed, Charley, accompanied by the others, set +about selecting a site for their permanent camp. + +"You see," Charley explained, "we want a place that we can stand a show +of defending if we should be attacked, and at the same time a place +from which we can escape by water if we have to." + +They did not have to go far before they found the very place they were +hunting for, a long, narrow, scantily grassed point that penetrated +through the marsh far out into the river. + +"It's just the thing," Charley declared. "We will lead the ponies out +to the end and then fell a few pines across the neck here. That will +form a kind of a fence and keep them from straying away. There's grass +enough on the point to keep them busy for a week at least." + +Within half an hour the three eager workers had felled enough pines +across the neck of the point to form a kind of rude stockade. Then +they moved out to the end of the point and began the erection of their +shelter. It was quite primitive and simple. Two saplings about twelve +feet apart were selected as the uprights, and to them, about eight feet +from the ground, two poles were lashed securely with buckskin thongs, +the other ends of the pole being imbedded in the ground. Other smaller +saplings were trimmed and laid across the slanting poles, and on them +were piled layer after layer of fan-like palmetto leaves. In a short +space of time they had completed a lean-to which would protect them +from any storm they were likely to experience at this season of the +year. + +"Have you noticed that, Charley?" inquired Walter, as they placed the +last leaves on the lean-to. He pointed to a point, similar to their +own, scarce two thousand yards away, from which rose a thick column of +smoke. + +"Yes, I've been watching it for some time," Charley said. "I guess +it's our friends, the convicts. They are late risers. Somehow or +other, Walt, I've got what prospectors call a 'hunch' that they are not +after us and will not bother us as long as they think we are ignorant +of their true character." + +"I'll never trouble trouble 'till trouble troubles me," hummed Walter, +cheerfully. + +"A good motto," said his chum gravely, "but nevertheless it's better +still to be ready for trouble if it does come. Now we must provide a +means of retreat. Come, let's open packs one and two, we'll need their +contents soon anyway." + +Packs one and two, when opened, revealed bundles of numbered pieces of +tough, thin flexible steel and packages of thick water-proofed canvas. +Under the captain's skilled direction, the steel was quickly framed +together, the canvas stretched over it, and in a short time two canvas +canoes were floating lightly at their painters at the end of the point. + +All had been too engrossed in their labors to note the passage of time +until the captain snapped open his old-fashioned silver watch. + +"One o'clock," he exclaimed in surprise. + +Charley and Walter looked at each other apprehensively. "What can be +keeping Chris?" Walter cried. + +"Maybe he is having good luck and hates to quit," suggested Charley. +"Let's give him a while longer." + +But two o'clock came and no Chris appeared. + +"Get your guns, boys," commanded the captain. "We must go hunt him. +Something's the matter." + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +SOME SURPRISES. + +Loosening their pistols in their holsters, and grabbing up their guns, +the little party struck out in the direction in which Chris had +disappeared. + +They were proceeding almost at a run when Charley checked their +headlong speed. + +"Let's go slow," he panted, "it may be that the convicts have got him +and we may be running right into an ambush." + +He but voiced the fear in the minds of the others, and they slackened +their advance to a slow walk, keeping a cautious eye on every bush or +tree large enough to conceal an enemy. + +Trampled marsh grass and broken twigs gave them an easy trail to +follow, and in a few minutes they were in sight of the river bank. +Charley, who was in the lead, suddenly stopped short with an +exclamation of relief and disgust. + +"Just look at that," he said. + +On a little grassy knoll close to the water was Chris flat on his back, +his mouth open, fast asleep. A half dozen fine bass lay on the grass +beside him, the end of his fishing line was tied to one ebony leg, and +a coil of slack line lay upon the turf. + +"Let's give him a scare for causing us so much worry," Walter suggested. + +"Wait a minute," cautioned the captain, "he's gettin' a bite, let's see +what he will do." + +The little party drew in behind some bushes, where they could peep out +at the slumbering little darky. + +The slack was running out rapidly, and at last the line tauted with a +jerk on the sleeper's leg. + +Chris sat up with a start, rubbed his eyes and looked at the sun, then +at the pile of fish beside him. The continued jerking of the line at +his leg seemed to bring him out of his drowsiness. With a broad grin +he began pulling in the line, hand over hand. + +The three watchers stood peeping eagerly through the bushes, expecting +to see another fine bass appear. + +As the hooked victim was drawn in close to the knoll, Chris gave a +hearty yank and landed it on the grass beside him. + +But the result was not what the watchers expected. With a howl of +terror the little darky leaped to his feet and dashed away at a +bounding, leaping run, breaking through the undergrowth as though it +were reeds. One glance, as he flew by the watchers without seeing +them, caused them to hold their sides and double up with laughter. The +line was still fastened to Chris' leg, and drew after it the captive of +his hook. One glance behind and Chris began to holler, "Help, help, +Massa Walt, help, Massa Charley. De snake's goin' to get dis nigger. +Oh golly, oh golly!" + +The line caught on a bush and broke short off, but Chris was making for +the lean-to with championship speed and knew it not. + +Charley picked up the severed line and held up the prize to view. + +"The biggest, fattest eel I ever saw," he declared exultantly. "Guess +it must have been the first one Chris ever saw. They certainly do look +like snakes." + +"Keep it out of sight till we hear what he says," Walter said, and +Charley with a smile agreed. + +The captain gathered up the fish and stringing them upon a cord slung +them over his shoulder. + +In a few minutes they were back at the camp, where they found Chris +stretched out on the ground breathing heavily, his face an ashen hue. + +"Why you-alls doan come when Chris hollers for help?" he demanded +indignantly. "'Pears like you don't care if dis nigger's killed." + +"We came as soon as we could, Chris," said Walter, soothingly, "what +was the trouble, anyway?" + +Chris, mollified, sat up. "Done got into nest ob snakes," he declared, +"reckon I killed fifty of 'em, but more and more kept coming so I had +to run. Golly, I 'spect thar was mighty nigh a hundred chased me most +to camp. Dat's why I yells for you-alls." + +The captain smilingly laid down the string of fish, and Chris' +countenance fell. + +Charley swung the eel into view. "It isn't a snake, Chris," he +explained, "it's an eel; they are not poisonous, and are mighty good +eating." + +For once the little darky was fairly caught without chance of evasion. +Without a word he started building a fire, gutted the fish, washed them +clean, and without removing head or scales, thrust them into the +glowing coals. In twenty minutes they were done, the heads were cut +away, the skin with its load of scales peeled off, and our hungry +hunters sat down to a dish fit for a king. + +They were in the midst of the meal when Charley arose and getting his +rifle put it down by his side. "Get your guns quick and keep them +close to you. We are going to have visitors," he said. + +The bushes were crackling loudly at the neck of the point and a moment +later a body of men came into view. As they clambered over the +barricade, Charley counted them. They were twelve in number, one of +them an Indian, his face disfigured by a long scar that gave to it a +sinister, malignant expression. + +"Keep close together and your guns handy," counseled Charley, as the +band approached. "I declare, if they aren't all unarmed," he added. + +"What in the world is the matter with them?" whispered Walter in +amazement; "see, some of them can hardly walk." + +As the men drew nearer, our little party's wonder grew. Most of them +dragged themselves forward with stumbling footsteps. Their faces were +haggard, their hands moving restlessly and their features twitching. +They looked like men who had been for days undergoing severe mental and +physical strain and were on the verge of collapse. + +Our hunters drew close together with their guns, close to hand and +awaited the convicts' coming with lessened apprehension as they saw +that they carried no guns. + +The leader staggered in front, the balance following him like starved +sheep. He stopped before the captain and sank to a seat on a stump. +The perspiration stood in great drops on his face and he was breathing +heavily. + +"Strangers," he said hoarsely, "if you've got any tobacco, fer mercy' +sake, loan us some. We haven't had a scrap for two days." + +The boys had hard work to restrain a laugh, but the captain hastily +unbuckled the flap of his saddle-bags and brought out a huge package of +plug tobacco which he passed over to the spokesman. + +"I brought it along to give to the Indians in case we met any, but I +reckon you need it a heap sight worse," he said mildly. + +Without a word of thanks the man tore the package open and distributed +the plugs amongst his followers, and in a moment jaws and pipes were +going vigorously on the enslaving weed. + +In five minutes a change was visible; slouching backs began to +straighten, dull eyes commenced to brighten, and the color to steal +back into haggard faces. + +"I'm glad I never got into the habit of using it, now I have seen what +a slave it can make of a strong man," whispered Walter in disgust. + +"Some of our soldier boys in Cuba went crazy for a while when deprived +of the use of it," said Charley. "None of it for me. It doesn't do a +young growing fellow any good." + +As his muscles and nerves relaxed under the influence of the powerful +narcotic, the leader of the convicts removed his pipe from his mouth +with a sigh of relief. + +"You sho' saved our lives that time, partner," he cried; "we done +forgot the bacca when we wus getting up our supplies, an' didn't find +it out until we'd come too far to go back. Jim thar," (with a glare at +the culprit,) "had a sizeable piece, but he had to go and lose it on +the way." + +"Out for a hunt?" inquired the captain politely. + +"'Gators. We're just plain, honest 'gator hunters, working powerful +hard for a mighty poor living," declared the ruffian. "An' you-alls, I +reckon one guess will hit it, arter plumes, I allow." + +"We haven't said so," said Charley quickly. + +The ruffian favored him with an appraising leer. "Don't have to say +so," he drawled, "if you ain't, what have you-alls got them dinky +little canoes for, an' if you were after 'gators you'd be packing big +rifles 'stead of them fancy guns. You ain't got no call to deny it, +for I was aiming to give you a bit of neighborly advice." + +"What is it?" inquired Walter curiously. + +"That it ain't no use for you-alls to stop here. The Injuns have got +this section combed out clean. You couldn't get enough plumes around +here to pay for your bacon. Now, I knows of a tidy little island 'bout +twelve miles south of here where there's stacks of the birds. If you +start right now you'll hit it before them pesky varmints of redskins +find it. I'm telling you in pay for that tobacco. Max Hilliard ain't +the kind of man to take nothing without paying for it," he concluded, +grandly. + +"Them Indians don't seem to be bringing many plumes into town," said +the captain. + +"'Cause why? 'Cause they have to turn the bulk of what they get over +to their chiefs for tribute, an' them varmints are getting so foxy they +just hoards 'em up. They know the price is goin' up right along. Oh, +them pesky varmints are getting cunning these days. But come, boys, we +must be getting back to camp." + +The reinvigorated gang of cut-throats arose and with awkward, surly +thanks stamped away. + +Their leader lingered behind for a moment. "Better pack right up and +get out for that island right now, partners," he advised. "Thar's a +gang of Injins coming down the river day after to-morrow, an' they'll +be sure to clean it out." His voice grew low and menacing. "Anyway, +you fellows want to get out of here afore day after to-morrow." + +Before any of the hunters could question him, he was gone. + +"He seems set on our leaving here," said Walter, anxiously. + +"I reckon it was sort of an error of judgment that we didn't tie them +fellows up while we had the chance. They was too plum wore out to put +up much of a fight," said the captain, regretfully. + +Charley said nothing, but his expression was that of one who after long +puzzling has solved a troublesome problem, and has found the solution +not that which he desired. The outlaws' statement that there was a +party of Indians on their way _from_ the Everglades had given him the +key. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE QUAGMIRE. + +It was already late when the convicts departed, and our hunters +immediately began their preparations for their first trial with the +plume birds. + +"I wonder where we had better strike in at first," said the captain, +"there seems a powerful lot of them islands, an' they 'pear to me +pretty much alike." + +"I have been keeping a kind of eye out all day," Charley answered, "and +it seems to me that there has been a lot of birds flying around that +little island of dead trees in the marsh right across from us. Suppose +we try that first." + +The others readily agreed, and, while Chris was cooking supper, the +boys prepared a number of torches from fat pitch pine and looked over +their fowling-pieces carefully. + +As soon as it was dark, Charley and Walter entered one of the canoes +and the captain the other. Chris begged hard to be taken, but Charley +was firm in his refusal. + +"We will have to take turn about at tending camp, and you'll have to +stay to-night, Chris," he said. "It won't do to leave the camp alone. +You'll have to keep a sharp lookout to guard against any possible +surprise from wild animals or men. Keep up the fire so we can find our +way back, and have some hot coffee ready. We'll need it when we get +back. Keep a sharp eye out, Chris," he concluded. "It isn't everyone +I would choose for such a responsible place." + +"Golly, Massa Charley," exclaimed the little darky, the bald flattery +tickling his great racial vanity, "I jus' reckon nothin' goin' to get +past dis nigger, though I sure 'spects I'd ought to go along so as to +watch out for you chillens." + +"We'll be careful," Charley assured him gravely. "If anything troubles +you or you see anything wrong, fire off your gun twice, and we will +hustle back. Shove her off, Walt." + +Walter obeyed with a vigor that nearly upset their frail craft. "My, +but she's cranky," he exclaimed. + +"She is pretty ticklish," Charley admitted, "but just the craft for our +purpose. She's so light she will float on a good heavy dew, and then +she's so easy to take to pieces and pack away. But we'd better stop +our chattering, for we are getting near the island now." + +The moon was shining brightly, giving to the dead whitened trees on the +little island a peculiar ghostly appearance. The canoes soon grounded +in the marsh grass, and, fastening them to paddles, stuck down in the +mud, our hunters shouldered their fowling-pieces and trudged ahead +through the mire. They had prepared themselves well for the trip and +each wore a pair of rubber boots reaching to the hip drawn on over +their rawhide boots and legging. + +"I guess we are on the right track," grinned Charley, ere they had +proceeded far. + +"Goodness, it's awful," exclaimed Walter. "I wish I had a clothes-pin +on my nose. Smells just like as island of Limburger cheese set in a +lake of broken spoiled eggs." + +"I reckon that's comin' it a little strong, Walt," chuckled the +captain. "I guess though we've stumbled onto a good big rookery for +sure. That smell comes mostly from the dead baby birds, broken eggs, +an' such like. But let's keep quiet, lads, we're nearly there now." + +A few minutes more and the hunters entered the fringe of dead trees. +By the time they reached the center of the little island where the dead +trees were thickest, the little party was nearly overcome by the +horrible stench. At every step they crushed in nestfuls of decayed +eggs which sent up their protests to high heavens. + +At last Charley commanded a halt. "We've gone far enough," he +whispered. "Let's light up our torches together and make as short work +of it as possible. Gee, but I'm sick for a mouthful of sweet, fresh +air." + +The fat pine-sticks flared up as though saturated with oil, their +flickering blaze lighting up a weird scene; the gaunt, bare, white +trees, ghosts of a departed forest, the miry ground strewn with eggs of +all sizes, shapes and colors, and dead birds of many kinds, in amongst +which writhed and twisted dirty-looking, repulsive water moccasins and +brilliant yellow and black swamp snakes, while overhead on the whitened +limbs, roosted hundreds of birds partly roused from their sleep by the +glare of the torches. + +"We'll have to shoot with one hand and hold our torches with the +other," said Charley. + +The guns were very light fowling-pieces, and the birds were clustered +too thickly together to be easily missed. The three guns belched out +their deadly message almost together and a score of birds fell to the +ground. Again and again were the volleys repeated before the dazed +birds recovered their senses enough to take to their wings. + +The hunters paused only long enough to pluck from the backs of the +fallen birds the long, silky plumes, which they carefully placed in a +stiff leather valise, then hastened on to another part of the island +where the same performance was repeated. + +At first all three hunters stuck close together, but they soon +separated, each picking out for himself what seemed to be choice places +in the little wood. Yielding to the incessant firing the birds began +to desert their roosts in great flocks until at last but few lingered +on the barren limbs. Charley was about to call his companions together +and propose a return to camp when a sudden cry sent the blood tingling +through his veins. It was Walter's voice, and its tone was that of +fear and horror unutterable. Pausing a second to locate the direction +of the sound, Charley bounded away for it at the top of his speed. As +he passed a thick clump of trees the captain broke out from among them +and lumbered on in his wake. + +"What's the trouble, Charley?" he panted. + +"Something's happened to Walt," he shouted back, "something terrible, +too--just hear him calling." + +The cries rose again with redoubled vigor, a world of dread in their +cadence. + +The island was small, and in a few minutes Charley was close to the +scene of the cries with the captain right at his heels. Suddenly they +broke out of the underbrush into a small open space perhaps forty feet +across. Near the center of this place was Walter, waving his torch +frantically back and forth. He ceased his cries as their lights +flashed into view. "Stop, stop!" he shouted, "don't come a step +further. I am sinking a foot a minute. The ground is rotten here. I +guess it's up to me to say good-bye, chums," he continued in a voice he +strove vainly to make steady. "You can't help me, and I'm sinking +deeper every minute." + +"Cheer up, lad, we'll find a way," declared the old sailor, with a +hopefulness he was far from feeling, for he knew well, by hearsay, of +the terrible swamp quagmires that swiftly suck their victims down to a +horrible death in the foul mud. + +Already Walter had sunk to his waist, and it was only a question of +minutes ere the slimy ooze would close over his head. It was a +situation that demanded instant action. For a moment Charley stood +silent beside the captain gazing hopelessly at his doomed chum. Then +he turned swiftly and darted away like an arrow. + +"Throw branches, boughs, anything that is light," he shouted back; "I +am going to get the canvas painters." + +Frantically the old sailor tore down dead limbs and flung them to the +entombed lad. His labor was in vain, for as each branch struck the +quagmire its own weight sunk it out of sight in the liquid mud. + +"Better give it up, Captain," advised Walter, cheerfully. "They are +doing no good, and Charley will soon be back with the ropes." + +The captain measured the distance to the helpless lad with a practised +eye, and groaned in despair. "They'll fall short by a dozen feet," he +murmured hopelessly. "God forgive me, for bringing him to this plight." + +In a moment Charley was back with the painters from the two canvas +canoes knotted together. His first toss confirmed the captain's fears, +the rope foil ten feet short. + +Charley's face grew sickly pale under the torch light, and he stood for +a space like one in a daze. The captain near him was kneeling praying +fervently. + +Of the three, Walter was the coolest. He had resigned himself to his +fate at the failure of the first cast of the rope. Already the mire +had sucked him down so that he had to throw his head far back to keep +the filthy stuff from entering his mouth. + +"Good-bye, old chums," he called cheerfully, "we've made our last camp +together. Don't feel too down, Charley. Remember what the jockeys +say, 'There's nothing to a race but the finish.'" + +Charley roused from his momentary trance. "You shan't die," he cried +wildly, "you shan't, you shan't,--you shan't." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +THE BATTLE. + +All around the quagmire were the skeletons of what had once been great +lusty trees with far-spreading limbs. As Charley uttered his defiance, +his glance rested for a moment on the most advanced of these and a +gleam of hope lit up his face. Although this dead giant of the island +was many feet from the sinking lad, yet in its youth it had sent out +nearly over him one long, slender, tapering limb. In a second +Charley's quick eyes had taken in the possibility and the risk, the +next moment he had skirted round the quagmire at the top of his speed +and was swinging up the giant trunk. + +The captain was not slow in divining his intention, "Come back, +Charley," he called wildly. "It'll break with you, lad. Come back, +come back." + +Walter managed to twist his head around until he obtained a glimpse of +what was going on. "Don't try it, Charley," he implored, "or there +will be two of us gone instead of one." + +But Charley was smiling now and confident. He knew the kind of tree he +was climbing up. It was a black mangrove and among the toughest of +woods when well seasoned. To him it had become merely a question of +reaching the end of that limb before the mire closed over his chum's +head. Never did sailor go aloft more quickly than he swung himself up +from branch to branch. Quickly he reached the overhanging bough. At +its juncture with the trunk he paused for a second to catch his breath, +then swung himself out on it cautiously, hand over hand. The bough +creaked and cracked ominously, but did not break. Near the end of the +limb he stopped, and throwing a leg over to free his hands, he knotted +one end of the rope to the branch and flung the other end to his chum. + +"You'll have to pull yourself out, Walt," he sang down cheerily, "this +limb will not bear two." + +Fortunately Walter had managed to keep his arms above the mire. He +caught the rope and began to pull. He had occasion now to bless the +years of hard work that had made his body vigorous and his muscles hard +and strong. Slowly he drew himself up out of the clinging ooze which +closed behind him with a sickening, sucking sound. Once clear of the +mud, it was an easy feat to go up the rope hand over hand and soon he +was standing beside Charley at the foot of the tree where they were +speedily joined by the delighted captain. + +"Let us thank God, boys, for your wonderful escape. He put that plan +into Charley's head and gave him the courage and daring to carry it +out," the captain said. + +Devoutly the two boys knelt at the foot of the tree, while the old +sailor in simple, uncouth speech, offered up a little prayer of humble +thanks for the deliverance of the two lads he loved so well. + +As they arose from their knees, Walter caught Charley's hand and wrung +it vigorously. "You saved my life again, old chum," he cried. + +But Charley, embarrassed and blushing like a girl, pulled his hand +away. "I guess we'd better be getting back to camp," he stammered, +eager to change the subject. + +"Ever modest are the brave," quoted Walter with a laugh. "But you are +right about getting back to camp. I, for one, have had enough +slaughter and adventure for one night." + +The guns and plumes were quickly gathered together and, guided by the +light of the camp-fire, the two canoes were soon made fast again at the +point and their occupants were soon busy removing their rubber boots +and drying themselves before the roaring fire. + +Chris' eyes shone with delight when they spread out to view the +beautiful feathery pink, white and blue plumes. + +"Sixty-three of 'em," he announced after a hurried count. "Golly, +guess dis nigger goin' to be a rich man afore we get back home." + +The captain rummaged in his saddle-bags and brought out a small pair of +steelyards. The plumes were tied carefully together in a bunch and +suspended from the hook. + +"Twenty ounces," he announced. "At five dollars an ounce that makes +one hundred dollars, lads. That ain't half bad for our first night's +work." + +But in spite of their success the boys' faces were grave and depressed. + +The captain glanced shrewdly from one to the other. "I reckon you-alls +are thinkin' now of just what I've been studyin' on. You're thinkin' +of all them poor innocent birds we've killed to get them feathers. +You're thinkin' of them and of the dozens you only wounded which are +bound to die a lingerin', sufferin' death, poor things." + +Charley shuddered, "I killed one and it didn't fall," he explained, "I +climbed up and looked, and it was resting on a nest containing five, +cute, little fluffy ones." + +"We can't go on with it," declared Walter with deep feeling. "It's fit +work for brutes like those convicts but not for us." + +"Pulling out the plumes won't kill 'em, an' I don't think it hurts 'em +much," said the captain, thoughtfully. "Maybe we can rig up some sort +of trap that will do the work without killin' 'em. It's time for bed, +now, lads, but think it over and, perhaps, we can hit on some scheme. +Had we better take turns at keeping watch, Charley?" + +"I don't think we'll be bothered for a while yet, at any rate," said +Charley, thoughtfully, as he stretched out on his couch and pulled his +blanket over him. "Good-night, all; here goes for the land of dreams." + +Although he closed his eyes and endeavored to sleep, it was a long time +before it visited his excited brain. He was only a boy in years and +the responsibility for the safety of the little party now trustfully +thrust upon him bore heavily upon his young shoulders. It would not +have been so bad were it not for the close proximity of that band of +twelve, armed, desperate, escaped murderers. Their attitude towards +the hunters, together with scraps of conversation they had uttered, had +bred in Charley's active mind a theory for their actions and object, a +theory involving a crime so vile and atrocious as to stagger belief. + +"I'll be getting flighty if I keep brooding on this thing by myself +much longer," Charley mused. "I am beginning to fear my own judgment +is wrong. I'll confide it all to someone else to-morrow and see if +their opinion agrees with mine." With little reflection, he decided on +Walter as the fittest one to tell. This resolve lifted a burden from +his mind and he soon drifted off into healthy slumber. + +"I've got something I want to talk over with you, Walt," he found a +chance to whisper while breakfast was cooking next morning. "Let's get +away somewhere where the captain and Chris will not hear us," he +cautioned. + +Their chance came soon after breakfast while Chris was cleaning up the +things and the captain was engaged in sorting out and packing away the +plumes in the tin boxes they had brought with them. + +The two boys strolled off slowly and carelessly together, but did not +stop until they had reached the grassy knoll by the river. + +"Hurry up, tell me what it is, you have got me half wild with +curiosity," cried Walter, flinging himself at full length upon the turf. + +Charley smiled as he pointed at a thin wisp of smoke rising from the +convicts' camp. "It is about our neighbors," he said. + +"Have you learned anything new?" Walter demanded eagerly. + +"No, but I've been putting two and two together concerning them again +and again until I'm uncertain whether I've got the proper answer or +have got everything distorted by long brooding over them. I want to +know what the conclusion would be to a mind that is fresh." + +"Good," said Walter, gleefully, "sounds just like a lawyer, go ahead, +I'll be the judge." + +"First," said Charley, gravely, "we can admit as an undisputed fact, +that those fellows over there were either close behind or ahead of us +at least part of the way here." + +Walter nodded assent, too interested to interrupt. + +"From the closeness with which they tally to that newspaper account, +even down to the renegade Indian, we are, I think, justified in +assuming that they are the escaped convicts." + +"Their faces would convict them without any evidence," Walter declared. + +Charley was now so absorbed in his chain of reasoning that he scarcely +heeded the interruption. "Twelve life convicts, which by the laws of +this state means twelve murderers, men without mercy, who would +hesitate at nothing, are for several days and nights close to a party +of four who do not even keep a watch at night. Why do they not kill +off the four and help themselves to several things that would make them +more comfortable?" + +"I give it up," said his puzzled chum. + +"Again," said Charley following his line of reasoning, "what do bodies +of men who have broken prison always do when they escape? Separate as +soon as possible, and scatter in all directions, make their way to +small, isolated places, change their appearance as much as possible, +and each shift for himself. To remain together increases the risk of +capture for each and all. There must be some powerful motive to make +them take such risks. Such men risk nothing except for money. But +there are no banks here to be looted, no strangers to be waylaid in +dark alleys, not even a blind beggar to steal pennies from." + +"Then, for goodness' sake, what is their object?" demanded the +mystified Walter. + +Charley's voice lowered in its seriousness. "I know there is a party +of Indians on the river now. I found traces on the shore, where they +had embarked in boats, they are likely the same party that were hunting +in the woods and have now returned to the Everglades. By the signs I +pointed out to you there is another party following. I told you I +could tell but little from the signs, but there is among the convicts +one of their race who can read their signs like an open book." + +"But the Indians are poor," Walter objected. "I don't see the +connection." + +"Remember what the leader of the convicts said yesterday, that each +Indian had to give the larger portion of his plumes to his chief as +tribute. Consider a party of expert hunters after a long hunt of +weeks; why, the chief's share must run up into the hundreds of dollars +to say nothing of each brave's individual portion." + +"What a diabolical scheme!" cried Walter in horror, "they mean to +slaughter the Indians for their plumes as they come down the river from +the 'Glades.'" + +"That's the conclusion I reached," said Charley coolly. "I am glad +that you prove I am not going crazy brooding over the matter." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE BEES AND THE BEAR. + +Walter's first feeling was of horror and indignation, mingled with +frank admiration for the cleverness with which Charley had reasoned the +matter out to its logical conclusion. + +"You have got a great head on you, old chap," he said, affectionately. +"It certainly seems as though you have hit the nail on the head this +time. I understand, now, why their leader was so anxious to have us +move away. They expect to encounter the Indians somewhere in this +neighborhood and they do not want any witnesses. What shall we do, +Charley?" + +"We are in an unpleasant fix," said his chum, musingly. "The only safe +thing to do, I guess, is to take that convict's advice and move away at +once. If we interfere with their plans or even let on that we know +what they are, it will mean fight, with us outnumbered three to one." + +"But we can't leave here and let those fiends ambush and murder those +unsuspecting Indians," said Walter indignantly. + +"Certainly not," said his chum, heartily. "But we must be prepared to +take some risks. We can't fight that crowd in the open, they are too +many for us. We'll have to outwit them and put the Indians on their +guard without letting the convicts suspect that we have had a finger in +the pie. It would be an easy trick to turn if it were not for that +renegade Indian with them. I guess there isn't anything much that +escapes those black, beady eyes of his." + +"You have a plan then?" said Walter eagerly. + +"One, such as it is. You see, we are between those fellows over there +and the Everglades. A party of savages coming from the Glades would +have to pass us before coming in rifle range of the convicts' camp. +Now we could halt them here and explain matters, but that would give us +dead away to the enemy." + +Walter's face fell. "They would be sure to catch on," he admitted. + +Charley pointed far to the south where, half a mile distant, another +long point jutted out through the marsh into the river. "That is the +key to the situation," he declared. "The Seminoles are not expected +until to-morrow, if that man's remarks are true. Well, beginning +to-morrow morning early, one of us will be on that point while daylight +lasts,--Indians do not generally travel at night, and when we sight +them we will signal and warn them, and the convicts will be none the +wiser. The Seminoles are no cowards and we can join them and wipe that +scum of humanity off the face of the earth." + +"Splendid," approved Walter enthusiastically. "But let's head for camp +now. The others will be wondering what has become of us." + +At the camp a surprise awaited the two boys. The captain was stumping +back and forth near the fire, his usually good-natured face nearly +purple with suppressed anger, while, squatting on his heels before the +fire, sat Indian Charley, his face impassive but his keen beady eyes +watching the irate sailor's slightest movement. + +At the sight of the boys, the captain lumbered towards them, waving a +dirty piece of paper. "Read that," he roared, "just brought in by that +copper-faced, shoe-button-eyed son of a sea cook." + +It was a piece torn evidently from a paper bag and on it was scrawled +in big, almost undecipherable characters. + +"The shootin' an' racket you-alls are doin' air drivin' the 'gators +away. You-alls have got to move. This is our huntin' ground. For +sake of that tobacco, which comes mighty handy, we'll give you-alls +'till to-morrow noon to move peaceable afore we comes down on you, +hands and feet." + +"How's that for gall?" demanded the captain, his wrath increasing, but +Charley silenced him with a shake of his head and turned to the +impassive redskin. "Tell your leader, that we are figuring on making a +move to-morrow," he said, courteously. The Seminole's beady orbs met +his in a suspicious glance, then he turned without a word and glided +noiselessly away among the bushes. + +Walter and Charley exchanged significant glances. "That means they do +not expect them before to-morrow afternoon," Charley commented. + +"Who! expecting who? Don't talk in riddles, lads," exclaimed the +captain, testily, his temper still suffering from the unaccustomed +restraint he had put upon it. + +In a few words Charley related his suspicions to him and Chris, and +detailed the plan he and Walter had agreed upon. + +The captain's face beamed with unenvious admiration as he gave Charley +a hearty thump on the back that well-nigh drove the breath out of the +lad's body. + +"Reasoned out plain an' fair as day," he exclaimed, "I reckon you've +hit it right plum center first shot, lad. You bet we'll be on the +watch to warn them poor Indians, an' if there's any fightin' we'll sho' +help to rid this country of them ornary, low-down, murderin', +cut-throats. It's a great head you've got for young shoulders, +Charley. You've reasoned it out like a detective and made your plans +like a general." + +Charley blushed with pleasure. "It looks logical and I hope it will +work out all right," he said, secretly pleased at the tribute to his +mental powers. But, as a great detective or general sometimes does, +Charley had passed over the simple, vital, obvious point that was the +most important of all and from its omission, destined to be far +reaching and terrible to hunters, Indians and convicts. + +"There's nothing special to do this morning," said Walter, "so let us +make a trip to that point and pick out a good place for our lookout." + +"Judging from their actions and their note, our neighbors don't intend +to make a move against us until to-morrow, so I guess it will be safe +for all of us to go," said Charley. "We will take the guns and make a +kind of all day hunting trip." + +"Den, I spect dis nigger's got to rustle around an' fix up some lunch," +said Chris, his face falling. "Golly, I spect you-alls going to be +powerful hungry nigh noon." + +"No, this is going to be a holiday for all of us," declared Walter with +boyish enthusiasm. "For one day let's all be just like the Indians, +get our food with out guns and not even take a frying-pan with us." + +To Chris' great delight the others gave ready assent to the plan. The +horses were watered and staked in fresh spots, and, with guns over +shoulders, our party followed their point in to shore, then struck off +southward along the margin of the marsh toward the distant point, +destined to be Point Lookout. + +They found it much like their own point, but somewhat more heavily +wooded. + +"Here's the very place for our lookout," exclaimed Walter, pausing +beside a clump of great oaks. "See, it couldn't be better if it had +been made to order. This knoll commands a good view of the marshes and +river towards the Everglades, while those trees will hide the watcher +from our point, and of course from the convicts' camp. I have got a +big, red, bandanna handkerchief which we can use as a flag. When the +one on watch sees the Indians coming, he can fasten it to that dead +sapling further out. That will be a signal to those in camp to get +ready for a hot time." + +"Bravo," said the captain approvingly. "You have got the right course +logged out to a point by the compass. Steer as you are going, lad, and +you'll have stored in your head as well packed and sorted a cargo as +good as Charley's here." + +"Or me, or me, Massa Captain," chimed in Chris. "Golly, I reckon +you-alls don't know what a smart nigger I is when I gets de chance." + +"We are all wonders, in our own minds," laughed Charley. "We have got +a chance to show our smartness right now. I, for one, am getting +mighty hungry and we haven't bagged anything for dinner yet." + +"We are for the woods, then," cried Walter, "on, noble leader. Shall +we separate or go together?" + +"We must stick together, provided you will try to keep that mouth of +yours closed and quit guying me," Charley retorted. "If not, I shall +feel it my duty to take you across my knee and give you a good +spanking." + +Walter checked the ready sally which was on his tongue's end, for they +had been moving on while talking and Charley was now leading them into +the dense forest where silence was absolutely necessary if they hoped +to secure any game. + +For some time they picked their way carefully through the forest, +warily avoiding dry twigs, and maintaining an absolute silence. But +although they saw numerous signs of game, both large and small, not a +glimpse of even a rabbit or squirrel rewarded their eager watchfulness. + +At last when all were beginning to get a bit discouraged, Charley +called a halt. "Now, all of you listen hard as you can for a few +minutes and then tell me what you hear," he said. + +For a full minute his companions listened intently, then the captain +gave an exclamation of disgust. "Can't hear anything out of the +usual," he declared. + +"Once or twice I thought I heard something, but I guess it was only my +imagination," said Walter. + +"And you, Chris?" inquired Charley of the little darky, whose face wore +a puzzled expression. + +"Golly, dis nigger hear something powerful plain but he can't just make +it out. Don't sound like anything he ever heard, afore. Now hit +sounds like a big dog growling an' then again hit sounds like one +whinin'." + +"Your ears are pretty good, Chris," Charley commented. "I guess we'll +follow up that sound for a little while." + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +SHOOTING A THIEF. + +"Are you working one of your little surprises on us?" Walter inquired +eagerly of his chum as the little party again advanced in the direction +Chris indicated. "Come, confess now that you know what is ahead of us." + +"I am all at sea this time," admitted Charley. "I heard just what +Chris described, but I can't fit the sounds to any animal I know. It's +getting plainer now, surely you can hear it." + +"Yes," said Walter, with a puzzled frown, "but what under the sun, +moon, and stars can it be?" + +"A few minutes will settle the question. It's only a little ways off +now. My! it's getting to be a terrible din, we must be close at hand." +Charley's prophecy soon proved true for they suddenly came out of the +forest into a space which had evidently been fire-swept years before, +for it was bare of undergrowth and of the former mighty pines nothing +remained but the white, lifeless trunks. + +For a moment the hunters stood in the edge of the clearing, gazing in +speechless astonishment at the sight before them. + +Close to one of the largest of the dead pines was a large black bear, +reared back on his haunches and striking with both paws viciously at +some unseen foe. The hair of muzzle, head and paws was matted and +plastered with some thick liquid, giving him a curious frowsy +appearance. He was evidently in a towering rage but it was also +apparent that he was suffering great pain, his ferocious growls being +interspersed with long, low, pathetic whines. + +"He acts as though he had gone crazy," exclaimed Walter, recovering his +speech. + +At sound of his voice, the bear's head turned in their direction. With +a growl of fury he dropped to all fours and with incredible speed made +for the hunters. + +Charley had been quick to take in the meaning of the strange scene. + +"Shoot and run," he shouted, as the maddened animal charged. + +He, Walter and the captain shot almost at once. The shots struck home +but the sorely wounded beast still lumbered forward at a rapid pace. + +"Run," shouted Charley, striking into the forest at the top of his +speed, closely followed by the captain and Walter. They had run but a +few paces before Walter, who was in the rear, stopped suddenly. "Chris +has stayed," he shouted to the others, "we can't leave him." + +Almost as rapidly as they had fled, the three retraced their steps to +the edge of the clearing. + +"Stay where we are and watch," commanded Charley, with a grim smile. +"The bear's too badly hurt to be dangerous. Watch him, fellows, just +watch." + +Chris had knelt where he had been standing when the bear charged, had +rested his rifle on his knee, and was taking careful aim at the +advancing beast. There was a look of stubborn determination on his +little ebony face while his heart was beating with pride and +exultation. Here was his great chance to turn the tables on his white +companions. No longer would they dare tease him about running from the +eel or about his adventure after the crane. He would be able now to +twit them all, even the captain, with running away while he, Chris, +stood his ground. + +"Run, Chris, run," shouted Charley from the edge of the clearing, but +the little darky ignored the warning. + +His keen eyes could see that the bear was badly wounded and liable to +drop at any minute. Already it was swaying drunkenly from side to side. + +Now it was forty feet away, now thirty and almost ready to drop. Ten +feet more and he would fire, Chris resolved. But that ten feet proved +the ambitious little darky's undoing. A concentrated drop of buzzing +liquid fire struck him above the eye, while hand and legs seemed +splashed with molten fire. Down went the rifle with a thud and with a +shrieked "Oh golly, oh golly, oh golly!" a black streak cleared the +open ground with kangaroo-like leaps and shot into the forest. + +"Run for the marsh and roll in the mud, Chris,"' shouted Charley after +the streak. + +The bear stumbled forward a few feet further, then sank slowly to the +ground. Charley looked after the flying Chris, shaking with laughter, +while the others stood beside him in silent amazement. + +"Hold on a minute," said Charley, as the captain stepped forward toward +the bear which was kicking, out in the last convulsive throes of death. + +"Aye, aye," agreed the captain cheerfully, stopping short, "you're the +pilot in these waters, lad." + +"I promise you I will not keep you at anchor long, Captain," laughed +Charlie, as with his hunting-knife he began hacking at a clump of +scrub-palmetto. + +A few minutes was all the time needed to accumulate a heap of the big, +fan-like leaves. These Charley made into three torch-like bundles, +taking care to place a dead dry leaf between each two green ones. +Binding each bundle together with a wisp of green leaf, he struck a +match and lit up the three, passing one to the captain and Walter, and +keeping one himself. + +The dry leaves blazed up like tinder but the green ones only smoldered, +sending forth a volume of black, thick pungent smoke. + +"Keep waving them about you," he cautioned, "that's the way. Now all +ready. Forward, march." + +As they drew nearer to the carcase of the hear, they became aware of a +curious humming sound in the air. The cause was soon apparent and the +mystery that had puzzled them was solved when they reached the beast. +The carcase was covered with bees while close above it hummed a swarm +of others watching for an exposed place to plant their stings. + +A few minutes beating about with the smoking torches cleared the scene +of the vicious little insects, those not stupefied by the smoke beating +a hasty retreat back to their home in the hollow log which bruin had +tried to despoil. + +The hunters had now a chance to view their prize without being +molested. It was only a common, black Florida bear, weighing not over +four hundred pounds, but fat and in the pink of condition. Its thick, +glossy fur had protected its body from the bees' assault, but swollen +muzzle, eyes, and ears, told of the penalty it had paid in playing +robber for its favorite food,--honey. + +All fell to work with their hunting-knives and speedily had the heavy +skin removed. + +Walter smacked his lips as he cut away a couple of huge steaks with a +thick rim of fat. "Gee, those are fit for a king," he exclaimed. "I +wonder where our cook is. Do you suppose he has stopped running yet?" + +Charley chuckled. "It's mean," he admitted, "but I can't help but +laugh when I think of how he looked kneeling there in stern resolve to +be covered with glory, and the transformation when he was covered with +bees." + +The three laughed heartily at the recollection, but Walter's laugh +ended in a hungry sigh. "I wish he was here to cook these steaks. If +he comes back, don't let's tease him, fellows. He's suffered enough +for one time." + +"I bet he will be back by the time we get this fellow cut up and a fire +going," Charley said. + +But the big animal was all cut up, what was not wanted for immediate +use cut into thin strips for drying, and a roaring fire going, and +still no sign of the missing one. + +"Well, I guess we will have to cook some of it the best we can, +although I expect we'll make a sorry mess of it without Chris. I guess +broiling some of it will be the easiest way." + +Each cut himself a long, green palmetto stem which would not take fire +readily and sharpened one end to a point upon which he impaled a +generous slice of steak. With flushed faces and singed fingers they +kept turning the meat over and over before the blaze. It was an +unsavory mess, burnt and ash covered, which they at last pronounced +done and deposited upon a clean palmetto leaf. Hungry as wolves, each +cut off a generous mouthful and began to chew. They chewed and chewed +looking at each other with keen disappointment on their faces. + +Walter at last spat out his mouthful in disgust. "It's tough as sole +leather and about as tasteless. We even forgot the salt, too." + +A little figure lurking behind a tree on the edge of the clearing +evidently deemed this just the proper time to make its presence known, +for it stepped boldly out from behind its shelter. Its right eye was +closed tight by an enormous swelling, and its nose was twice its +natural size, but it strode forward with head up and dignity in its +tread. + +"Chris," shouted in delight the three beside the fire. + +The little darky looked down on the pile of burnt and ruined meat in +disgust. "I knowed you chillen's would go an' spoil de best part ob my +bear. Now you-all jis get out ob de way an' dis nigger goin' to show +you how to cook b'ar meat." + +"But it's so tough, Chris, that we can't chew it," Walter objected. + +"You chillens jes get out of de way like I tells you," said the little +negro vaingloriously. "Just come back in forty minutes an' dinner will +be ready. Leave dis nigger alone 'till then 'cause he's powerful cross +to-day." + +Charley nudged the captain and Walter and the three withdrew to a +little distance, leaving Chris in possession of the field. + +"Chris will fix it up all right," Charley assured them. "While he's at +it, let's have a try for some of the honey the bear was into," he +suggested. + +His two companions gave an eager assent. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +THE PAWPAWS. + +Three more torches of palmetto leaves were quickly made, lighted up, +and, with extra handfuls of the green leaves, our party advanced +towards the tree where they had first seen the bear. They were met by +a buzzing horde of the workers who swarmed out to defend their homes, +but these were soon silenced by the pungent smoke of the torches and +our hunters soon stood by the tree where bruin had met his Waterloo. + +A few feet from the ground was a massive limb and a little above it was +a cavity in the trunk itself, around which more bees buzzed +industriously. A few waves of the smoke torches quieted these, and +Charley swung himself up on the limb beside the hole. A little more +smoke completed the job and with his hunting-knife he dug out great +squares of the clear, dripping comb, which he passed down to his +companions who had stripped off a slab of hickory bark for its +reception. + +"That is more than we can eat," he at last declared, slipping to the +ground, "besides I've got a 'hunch' that Chris has got that bear meat +ready for us and I am hungry as a wolf." + +"It may be cooked all right but it will still be too tough to eat," +mourned Walter. + +"Don't you believe it," chuckled Charley, "those bear steaks are going +to be as tender as chicken. If you will not give me away to Chris, I +will show you the reason why." + +The captain and Walter eagerly gave the promise of secrecy. + +"See that shrub?" said the instructor, pointing to a banana-like stalk +of a tree-like shrub without branches, but from which protruded large, +round glossy leaves with short stems. Close to its trunk near the +crown hung a close cluster of golden fruit about the size of an apple. + +Walter plucked one of the ripe fruit and bit into it hungrily, but spat +out the mouthful in disgust. + +"You have to acquire a taste for it, the same as you have to for turtle +eggs, olives, and a dozen other things that taste unpleasant at first," +Charley said. "You'll find that little tree scattered all over Florida +where the soil is at all rich. It is called pawpaw by the natives, who +regard it highly for the sake of its one peculiar virtue. A few drops +of the juice of its ripe fruit spread over a tough Florida steak will +in a few minutes, make it as tender as veal. The same results can be +attained by wrapping the steak in the leaves and letting it lay a +slightly longer time. The best of it is that meat treated in this +manner is not injured in the slightest. In fact it seems to gain in +flavor from the treatment. But there is Chris waving to us. Keep +quiet about the pawpaws. I want to hear his explanation." + +They were too hungry to lose any time in obeying Chris' signals. The +little darky had arranged a kind of tablecloth of moss on the ground +and had put upon it slabs of clean cut bark for plates, while upon each +rude plate reposed a thick, juicy, bear steak, done to a turn. The +steak was delicious and tender as chicken and with a taste all its own. + +"You're a born cook, Chris," declared Walter, as he paused to take a +full breath. "What makes it so tender, now? that which we cooked was +tough as leather." + +"You chillens doan know how to cook like dis nigger," declared the vain +little darky, proudly. "Hit's all in de cookin', Massa Walter, hit's +all in de cookin'." + +Charley turned over a morsel of his steak, examined it closely and +sniffed it critically, while Chris watched him with anxious suspicion, +and Walter with mischief dancing in his eyes. + +Slowly Charley's eyes took on an absent, far-away look, his arms and +legs seemed to stiffen, and a tremor ran through his limbs. Chris +watched him with distending eyeballs. + +"I see," Charley said, in a low, hollow voice, "I see a tree, not a big +tree, but a small one. It has round, green leaves and a cluster of +golden fruit near the top. What is it I see creeping toward the tree, +a monkey? No, not a monkey, though it looks like one. It's a boy, a +small black boy. He nears the tree. He looks around to see if anyone +is watching. He shins up the tree and breaks off several of the +leaves. I see him again near a big fire. He still has the leaves. He +is wrapping them around pieces of meat. As he does it, I can hear him +chuckling to himself. I see----" + +"Oh golly, stop him, stop him! He's got de 'haunts'!" cried Chris in +terror, as he grabbed Charley by the shoulder and shook him wildly. + +Charley seemed to come to with a start. "Where was I, what was I +saying?" he murmured. + +"You was filled wid de haunts," declared Chris solemnly. "You was jes' +tellin' to yourself how dis shiftless, lying nigger got dem pawpaw +leaves to make dis bar meat tender." + +Walter and the captain were roaring with laughter, but Chris went on +solemnly with his confession. "Golly, but dis nigger's been a powerful +liar lots ob times, but you doan ketch him at it any more. You sho' is +got de conjerer eye, Massa Charley, else how you know dat lake wid de +crane on it was full of grass like knives, else how you see bees round +dat bear when you is too far off to see 'em, else how you see Chris +getting dem pawpaw leaves when you is clean out ob sight. I guess dis +nigger doan lie any more when you is round, Massa Charley." + +"Well, if you are all through, we had better make back for camp for the +sun is getting low," said Charley, hurriedly, to forestall a lecture on +the wickedness of lying, which he saw by the working of the captain's +features, he was preparing to deliver to the little culprit. + +Their things were quickly collected together and they were soon headed +back to their point. With the passing of the excitement of the day, +they all began to have vague alarms as to what might have happened +during their absence, and to reproach themselves for leaving the place +so long unguarded. + +Their reproaches were wasted, however, for they found everything as +they had left it, save stuck in the bark of a pine tree near the fire, +was the badly scrawled notice. "Don't forget to pull out from these +diggin's afore to-morrow noon." + +"They evidently mean business," said Walter, as the hunters stood +together reading the dirty, ill-written paper. + +"And I'm not so sure but what we would be wiser if we obeyed their +warning, but I hate to run away from such a crowd," observed Charley +gravely. + +"I feel the same way," agreed Walter, "but it would be cowardly to go +now and leave the Seminoles to their fate." + +"Aye, aye, lad, truly spoken," said the captain, firmly, "stay we must." + +"Golly, I jis guess dis nigger ain't none scairt of their +threatenings," chimed in Chris. + +"Well, we seem to be pretty well agreed," Charley said, trying in vain +to shake off the vague feeling of impending evil, that had suddenly +settled over him. "Speaking for myself, I feel too keyed up and +anxious to do anything much until we get this thing over with. I move +we get all our gear into shape and try to plan some way to get the +plume birds hereafter without killing. That will take us until dark, I +guess. Then let's quietly take our blankets and move back into the +forest a ways. Our neighbors may take a notion to pay us a visit +without waiting for to-morrow." + +The others readily agreed to this proposal and were soon busy trying to +scheme out some means to take their feathered prey alive. + +It was Chris who at last solved the problem. + +"You know dat stuff we used puttin' dem boats together?" he demanded. + +"A quick drying glue," exclaimed Charley, catching the idea at once. + +"Golly, I should say hit was," grinned Chris, "hit dun stick my fingers +together so tight that it peared like I'd never get 'em apart. Now +doan you reckon by spreading hit thick-like on dem limbs whar dem birds +roosts dat hit would hold 'em down till we-alls got ready to pry 'em +off?" + +"The lad's got the right idea, I reckon," allowed the captain. "We +could fix the limbs up just before dusk and needn't bother about 'em +any more until it was broad daylight." + +The boys were unstinted in their praise of Chris' suggestion until the +little darky forgot the humiliation of the day and was once more his +bright, vain, cheery self. + +As night shut down on the point, more wood was heaped upon the fire, a +hasty lunch was made from the remains of dinner, and, taking their guns +and blankets with them, our hunters stole off into the depths of the +wood. They soon reached a little open spot that they had noted during +the day. Their blankets were spread out upon the moss-covered ground +close together so as to be encircled with the hair rope which Charley +had brought to protect them from snakes while sleeping. + +Before they wrapped themselves in their blankets, the captain offered +up a fervent, simple prayer of thanks for past protection and a plea +for blessings on the work before them on the morrow. + +"How much of that glue stuff is there, Chris?" whispered Walter as they +stretched out to rest. + +"'Bout two quarts, I reckon." + +"Pshaw, that will not last us any time," said Walter in disappointment. +"It will be all gone in a week." + +It was well for the lad's peace of mind that he could not look forward +into the future and see how little of Chris's discovery was destined to +be used. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +CHARLEY'S MISTAKE. + +All were awake early next morning, in fact, the captain and Charley had +slept but little during the night. They were worried and anxious as to +what the coming day would bring forth. As he lay awake during the long +silent hours, Charley felt his burden of responsibility grow heavy +indeed and doubts began to assail him as to the wisdom of the course he +was pursuing. After all, there was yet time to retreat. He had only +to say the word and his companions would willingly follow. His plans +in remaining were built largely on guesswork and theory. If they +worked out as he had reasoned, the Indians would be warned. With their +aid the convicts could be surrounded, captured, and sent back to a +coast town under guard. Some blood would likely be shed but not as +much as if they were left free to run at large. But if his reasoning +were wrong, if his plan for some unforeseen reason, failed,--the boy +shuddered as he thought of himself and three companions pitted against +twelve desperate ruffians, far away from any help or assistance. Deep +down in his active brain some awakened cell was trying to send a +message of warning, but it would not rise to his consciousness, he +could not quite grasp it or its meaning. Thus tortured and worried, +our young leader passed a weary night, and was relieved when dawn began +to break and his companions to awaken. + +As soon as it was light enough, they made their way back cautiously to +the camp, where they found everything as they had left it. Evidently +they had had no visitors during the night. + +"Well, it was just as well to be on the safe side," Charley announced, +"anything is liable to happen now. I guess while you make some coffee, +Chris, I will stand guard at our wall. Walt, you make up two packages +of provisions, say enough to do for a couple of days and put one in +each of the canoes. Captain, if you will, please look over the outfits +and pick out what we will be able to carry and what would be most +useful to us if we should have to take to the canoes in a hurry. Don't +be alarmed," he said cheerily, noting the grave look on the others' +faces. "Things are going to go all right, but a good general always +looks to it that he has a way of retreat ready. Now, as soon as Chris +has coffee ready, we will have one last talk together about this +thing." Shouldering his rifle, he made his way to the breastwork of +fallen trees, where he paced back and forth until Chris came to relieve +him for breakfast. + +During the meal, Charley went over the whole puzzle again, explaining +freely his doubts and fears, and the possibility of his whole chain of +reasoning being wrong. "Now you know all I know about it," he +concluded. "There is yet time to escape. If you say the word, we'll +start in half an hour." + +The captain shook his head gravely. "Your reasoning seems clear as +print to me, lad. You have just brooded over it so long that it's +natural you should begin to have doubts and fears. To me it's as sound +as when you first gave it. That being so, we can't run an' leave them +poor ignorant savages to be shot down maybe like snipe. It wouldn't be +Christian like to go when that chance remains." + +"Those are my sentiments exactly," said Walter eagerly. + +"Good," Charley sighed in relief, "this shifts at least part of the +responsibility from my shoulders. Now for our plans. Walter, I am +going to put you to watch at Lookout Point to-day. If you see the +Indians, signal them in and tell them of the whole plot against +them,--there's sure to be one or more of them who understands English. +As soon as you make them understand, lead them back through the woods +till you get to the neck of the convicts' point, then post them behind +trees and stumps so the convicts cannot get by them. Then fire two +shots close together and we will be with you in ten minutes, and our +birds will be caged. Have Chris fix you up a lunch, for the Indians +are not likely to pass the point until afternoon." His voice sank from +the crisp tone of command to a softer note, and his hand for a moment +rested affectionately on his chum's shoulder as he continued. "I hate +to send you out there alone, old chap, but I have got to stay here. +The convicts may try to drive us out of this place this morning. No +matter how much shooting you may hear, don't desert your post." + +"But, if for some reason you want me, how am I to know?" + +Charley reflected for a moment. "I have a couple of rockets in my +saddle-bags," he said; "if I send up one, you may know it's a signal to +come back. Now be sure to keep your eyes out for trouble as you near +the point. No one can tell, now, what the situation may be." + +The two chums silently clasped hands in a hearty, farewell grip, and +Walter, picking up his rifle and some of the remnants from breakfast, +vaulted the tree breastwork and with a cheery nod and wave of his hand +to those left behind, quickly vanished in the forest. + +Charley stood for a moment gazing after him with something like a mist +in his honest brown eyes. "Dear old fellow," he murmured, "God grant +that all will turn out well and that we may be safe together again +before night falls." + +The captain's voice brought him back from his musing. "Well, Charley," +he sung out cheerily, "I've got together the things we can't well spare +and distributed them between the canoes. I reckoned that was where you +wanted 'em. What's the next orders, General?" + +"Nothing, but to get our guns and all the spare ones, and take stands +along the wall. Those fellows may try to drive us off this morning." + +The captain grinned with satisfaction as he took his place behind the +barricade. + +"I reckon they'll have to be pretty smart to get on this point," he +commented. "There's a tidy stretch of right open ground to be crossed +before they reach here." + +"I picked it out just for that reason," Charley admitted. "We can +stand them off here during the day, but at night we cannot stop them, I +fear." + +"Aye, aye," nodded the captain thoughtfully, "that's the reason for +fixing up the canoes." + +Charley nodded in turn. "I hope we won't have to take to them," he +said. "It would come hard to lose our ponies, our packs, and all that +helps to make our camp life comfortable." + +"We won't lose 'em," declared the captain, cheerfully. "This time +to-morrow night we'll be safe and hearty sitting around the fire +figuring up our share of the rewards they must be offering by this time +for those pretty jail-birds." + +This ended the conversation, for each took his position behind the tree +barricade with all senses alert for any indications of an attack. + +For long Charley kept shifting his gaze from the woods before him to +the tall sapling on Lookout Point. At last a smudge of red showed near +the sapling's top for a minute, then disappeared, and he gave a shout +of relief. "Walter's there all right," he called to his companions, "I +saw his signal." + +The morning wore slowly away without a sign of their enemies. + +"What have you figured out is the reason they ain't troubling us, +Charley?" the captain called when the noon hour was at last reached. + +"I have been studying over it for a long time, sir," the lad answered, +"and have come to the conclusion that they have decided to postpone +finishing us up until they have disposed of the Indians. I guess they +are afraid that the noise of firearms would put the Seminoles on their +guard if they happen to be within hearing. Anyway, I guess, we can +spare Chris long enough to get us a lunch." + +Chris lost no time in getting together a hasty dinner, which was as +quickly disposed of by the sentinels. + +From now on Charley kept his eyes anxiously on the distant point and +sapling, hoping, longing, and expecting to catch a glimpse of the +fluttering square of red which would wave the welcome news that Walter +had sighted the Indian fleet. + +One o'clock passed, two o'clock, three, and still no signal. + +"Take it calm, lad, they'll be along soon," the captain said +soothingly, to Charley, who was nervously pacing back and forth, his +face drawn and anxious. + +"For de Lawd sake, look over there by dem convicts' point. Oh, golly, +oh golly!" cried Chris, suddenly. + +Charley gave one glance and buried his face in his hands to shut out +the coming horror. "Fool, fool that I was," he moaned. "Not to know +that it would be the home-bound Indians loaded with plumes they would +be laying for, not the empty handed ones coming out of the glades." + +The captain was by his side in a second. "Don't take it hard, lad," he +said, gently. "You done your best. We all stumbled into the same +mistake. Look away for a minute, lad. It will soon be over, I dare +say." + +But Charley, though torn with regrets, took his hands from his face and +gazed steadily at the tragedy nearing its climax. + +Winding past the convicts' point in single file, came a long line of +some thirty canoes, uncouth, shapeless things, each hewed out of a +great cypress log. In the end of each an Indian stood erect plying a +long pole which sent their clumsy looking crafts forward at surprising +speed. Magnificent savages they were, not one less than six feet tall, +framed like athletes, and lithe and supple as panthers. + +One man in each boat was the rule, but in the leading canoe a young +Indian lad was also squatted, in the bow. + +With breathless suspense our hunters stood helpless to warn or help as +the long line glided on to its fate. + +Ten, twelve, fourteen, fifteen stole past the point. Then the horror +of horrors happened. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +THE BATTLE. + +From the point burst out a sudden cloud of flame and smoke. Six of the +canoes in the lead and six in the rear of the long procession came to a +sudden halt. Of their occupants, some crumpled up where they had stood +like bits of flame-swept paper. Others pitched forward in the bottom +of their crafts, while still others stood for a minute swaying from +left to right like drunken men, to finally crash over the sides like +fallen trees, taking their cranky crafts over with them in their plunge +of death. + +Only for a second was there confusion amongst the remaining canoes. +Before the volley could be repeated, they had drawn closer together. +Each Indian had dropped his pole, and seizing his rifle crouched low in +the bottom of his craft, his keen eyes searching the point. + +"They're heroes, that's what they are," cried Charley, his eyes +flashing and cheeks aflame, "they are as good as dead if they stay, and +yet they will not flee." + +"Suicide, I call it," said the captain harshly, to conceal his emotion +of horror and admiration. "But there's one there who is going to save +his skin. See that young lad who was in the first canoe. He is poling +away now that his companion has fallen." + +"But not willingly," said Charley, who had been watching the little +by-play, "did you see him pick up his gun? He wanted to fight, but the +rest shouted and made signs to him till he put it down. I've got it," +he exclaimed, "it was the chief in that canoe. They are trying to +cover his retreat, poor fellows. They are what I call men." + +There had been no cessation in the fighting while the captain and +Charley were talking; flame and smoke continued to burst out from the +point in almost a continuous stream, while those in the canoes were not +inactive. Where an arm or leg showed to their hawk-like eyes, their +rifles cracked sharply, to be generally rewarded with a howl of pain +from some cutthroat who had been winged. But there could be but one +end to such a battle. The convicts were well protected behind big +trees, while the flimsy sides of their canoes afforded the brave little +band of Seminoles almost no protection. Still they fought stubbornly +on, answering shot with shot until the point and canoes were shrouded +in a fog of smoke. + +"They see the young Indian, they see him," cried Charley in an agony of +suspense. "Look, look, they are all shooting at him." + +The young Indian had passed out of the smoke pall, but his flight had +not been undetected; some of the convicts, with an eye out for just +such escapes, had drawn back to higher ground where they could see +above the smoke which hung close to the water. These at once gave the +alarm, and a shower of bullets began to rain around the dugout. + +The Indian lad stood stoically at his poling, not even glancing back, +and paying no more attention to the hail of bullets than if they were +so many flies. The little Seminole seemed to bear a charmed life, +bullets struck the pole he was handling, and again and again they sent +out splinters flying from the sides of the dugout itself, but still he +shoved steadily ahead. + +"By the ghost of the Flying Dutchman," shouted the captain, "he is +going to get away from them. Two hundred feet more and their bullets +won't hurt if they hit." + +"He's hit," cried Charley, a second later; "watch him." + +The Indian lad had given a sudden, involuntary start and one hand went +to his head, he sank to his knees, struggled to rise, then slowly and +gently slipped down; a huddled heap in the bottom of his canoe, while +an exultant yell rose from the convicts' camp. + +Charley's face was white and haggard, but his voice was steady and cool +as he turned to the captain. "Please go to my saddle-bags. You'll +find two rockets there. Set them both off; that will bring Walter, and +we will have need of him soon. I am going after that Indian and bring +him in dead or alive. You and Chris had better mount guard again at +the wall; those cut-throats will be here soon." + +One look at Charley's face convinced the captain that remonstrances +were useless, so, with a hearty squeeze of the lad's hand, he turned +away to his duties. + +Charley unmoored one of the canvas canoes and, taking his place in the +stern, with a mighty shove of the paddle drove it far out into the +stream. + +"Massa Charley, my own Massa Charley, going to be killed," wailed +Chris, giving way to his fears and grief with the emotionalism of his +race. + +The captain shook him vigorously. "Shut up," he said, roughly, partly +to hide his own feelings, "Charley's comin' back without a scratch. +The good Lord, I reckon, don't make lads as true and white as he to be +killed off by a pack of jail vermin. Come to the wall as he told us +to. Maybe we'll get a shot at those murderers before the day is done. +Come along an' stop that blubberin'," and he grabbed the soft-hearted +little darky by the arm and dragged him to the post. + +The convicts were quick to see and interpret Charley's action, and +their guns were quickly turned upon his frail craft. As he drew nearer +the drifting dugout and came within range, a perfect hail of bullets +splashed the water into foam around him. He did not falter or +hesitate, but with long clean strokes of the paddle, sent his light +little craft flying towards his goal. Perhaps it was this very speed +that saved his life. Bullet after bullet pierced the thin canvas sides +and one struck a corner of his paddle, tingling his arm and side like +an electric shock. A few minutes of this furious paddling brought him +to the bow of the dugout. Seizing its rawhide painter, he fastened the +end to a seat in his own boat. Then taking the paddle again, he headed +back to the point. The leaden hail fell as thickly as ever, but by +crouching low he was shielded somewhat by the high sides of his tow. +His return progress was now slow, but gradually he worked the two +crafts out of the range of the convicts. + +Walter had lost no time in getting back to camp at the call of the +rockets, and was waiting at the water's edge to receive his chum. + +"Haul both boats in and make them fast," Charley ordered as he wearily +paddled in. + +Walter waded out knee deep, and seizing the bow of each boat as it came +in reach, drew it up on the shore, and taking the painter, quickly made +them fast to a nearby pine. + +"We have got some heavy, quick work ahead of us," Charley said quickly +enough to forestall the volley of eager questions on the tip of his +excited chum's tongue. "Every minute counts now. I dare not call +either Chris or the captain away from their posts. Help me into the +lean-to with these poor fellows, then get your gun and join the +captain. Those murderers may be over here any minute now. They are +bound for their own safety to let no witness of their horrible crime +escape." + +As he rose from his cramped crouching position, Charley got his first +glance of the interior of the dugout and his face grew dark with anger +towards those who had brought this thing to pass. + +Prone on his face in the bottom lay a magnificent specimen of savage +manhood. His height, when standing, could not have been less than six +feet three. His shoulders were broad and clothed with great, powerful +muscles. His body sloped away gracefully to a slim waist and straight, +muscular limbs--the ideal body, striven for by all athletes. His dress +was that usual to Seminoles on a hunt--a long calico shirt belted in at +the waist, limbs bare, moccasins of soft tanned deer-skin, and a +head-dress made of many tightly-wound crimson handkerchiefs bound +together by a broad, thin band of polished silver. In the turban, now +dyed a richer hue from the blood flowing from the warrior's shoulder, +was stuck a large eagle feather, the insignia of a chief. At his feet, +where he had crumpled down under the enemy's bullets, lay the Indian +lad in a huddled heap. It did not need the tiny eagle feather in the +diminutive turban to convince Charley's observant eye that it was a +case of father and son, a chief and son of a chief. + +All that we have taken so long to describe, Charley had taken in at one +swift glance. + +"Both are still living," he declared. "Run to the lean-to, Walt, and +get a blanket. We will have to drag that big one up to the camp. It +will be pretty rough, but it's our only way. We cannot carry him." + +In a minute Walter was back with a thick, strong horse-blanket, which +he spread out on the turf close to the water. + +It took every ounce of strength the two lads possessed to lift the +heavy body from the dugout to the blanket, then each taking a forward +end of the blanket, they drew it gently after them sled-wise up to the +lean-to, avoiding rough places as much as possible. There, they had to +exert themselves to the limit of their strength to lift their burden +from the blanket to one of the couches. + +Their second trip was easier. The Indian lad, though showing promise +of great future strength, was still only a stripling, and they bore his +limp body in their arms without difficulty. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE VICTIMS. + +"Hurry back to the captain, Walt," urged his chum as soon as the Indian +boy was laid on another conch. "He may need you any minute. Those +demons will be here as soon as they finish off the Seminoles. Thank +the Lord, the firing is still going on. I will do what I can for these +poor chaps and be with you as soon as possible." His eye flashed and +his face darkened as he added, "Tell the captain everyone must shoot at +anything that shows itself--and shoot to kill." + +As soon as his chum had gone, Charley turned his attention to the +Seminole chief. From the clotted mass of blood, he guessed the +location of the main wound, and with his hunting-knife he rapidly cut +away the shirt, exposing the warrior's chest and back. As he drew back +the blood-soaked cloth, he gave a sigh of relief. The bullet had +passed clear through the body close to the lungs,--a serious wound, but +one which perhaps with proper care need not prove fatal. The amateur +surgeon had no antiseptic except common salt, but with that and water +he quickly cleansed and sterilized the wounds and tearing up one of his +own clean shirts, he first scraped a strip with an old case knife until +he had a quantity of soft lint with which he stopped both the ugly +holes made by the bullet, and then with other strips of the same, he +neatly bandaged the wounds. Next he drew on one of the captain's +shirts in the place of the one he had cut away. Lastly, he broke open +a pack and took out a quart bottle of brandy. Pouring out a large +drink he let it trickle slowly down between the Indian's set teeth. + +The effect was noticeable at once. Slowly the warm blood flowed back +into the dusky cheeks, the limbs began to twitch, the breathing grew +audible, and the wounded man began to show signs of returning +consciousness. + +Before turning to his other patient, whom he reckoned as good as dead, +Charley stepped outside the wigwam and cast a quick look around. A +smile of satisfaction parted his lips as he noted the distant figures +of his companions behind the tree barricade, each at his post, gun in +hand, nervously alert. From them, his glance went on to the point, +where the battle was still going on. To even an unobserving person, it +was clear that the firing from the canoes was slackening rapidly, and +with a sigh of regret and anxiety, the lad turned back into the lean-to. + +When he bent over the Indian lad, he uttered an exclamation of joy; +from the matted hair and abundance of blood he had believed him shot +through the head. A closer examination showed, however, that the +bullet had only ploughed a neat little furrow down to the skull. +Charley washed the wound clean, forced some of the brandy down the +boy's throat, and dashed a cup of cold water in his face. The effect +was startling. In a few minutes the little Indian was sitting up, +swaying drunkenly and in a half dazed way staring about the little +shelter. + +"You arc coming around all right, old chap," said Charley, cheerily. + +His voice and face brought back to the Indian lad with a rush the +memory of the recent ordeal he had been through. He gave one glance at +the unconscious form on the other couch and his hand darted to the +hunting-knife at his hip as he staggered, dizzily, to his feet. + +"Stop, you are among friends," cried Charley, holding up both empty +hands palm upward as a token of peace. "You were grazed on the head by +a rifle bullet and it knocked you out for a few minutes, so I went out +in my canoe and towed you in. Your father is hurt pretty bad, but I +have fixed him up good as I can and I think he will pull through with +care." + +The little Indian lad's keen, beady eyes searched the white lad's open, +smiling face, his hand dropped from his knife, and he sunk back weakly +on the couch. + +"My father over there, heap big chief," he declared proudly, in +guttural English. "Name Big Tiger. Me, they call Little Tiger." A +shade of suspicion crept over his face. "You white you say you friend. +More whites hid behind trees and shoot and kill many of Big Tiger's +braves," he said with an ironical smile. + +Charley saw that now, if ever, was the time to clear his little party +from the natural suspicion of the Seminole. He sat down on the couch +opposite and his honest blue eyes met the other's keen, black ones +unwaveringly. "The Seminoles, once a mighty people, have grown as few +in number as the deer in the forest," he began, falling naturally into +the speech of the Indians. "Yet, few though they became, there walked +among them, at least, one of their race whose heart and mind was like +the night when the moon shines not and clouds have hid the stars. One +day this evil one rose up and slew a harmless white settler. The wise +men of the tribe took counsel together, saying, 'times are changing, we +will turn him over to the law of the white men.' The ears of the +Little Tiger may have heard whispered the name of the white settler's +slayer." + +The Indian's eyes were gleaming with scorn and hatred. "Injun +Charley," he hissed. + +"The white men judged the slayer of the settler according to their +laws. They sent him to ha shackled with chain and iron ball and do +heavy, squaw-work in misery the balance of his years. They did not say +because this Indian was bad that all Seminoles were slayers of white +men." + +The young Indian started up and began to speak, but Charley silenced +him with a gesture and gravely continued. + +"No, these judges were not fools to believe that a whole people should +be judged by the crimes of one, or a few of its race. Among the +paleface race were brother, squaw, and father murderers, in great +numbers, not because the white race is worse than the red, but because +they exceed the red men in number as the leaves exceed the trunks of +the tree." + +"With the bad Indian, serving out a lifetime of work and exile, were +eleven white men just as bad. When those that watched them had their +eyes turned away, the twelve plotted. One night they rose up and +murdered the guards, took their guns and ponies, and, under the lead of +the bad Indian, came as the crow flies for here, where were camped +myself and three companions, seeking only the bird that bears plumes +upon its back. The balance you know," he concluded, gravely. "As +brother to brother, should the Seminoles be judged by the slayer of +whites, or the white hunters by lawless murderers whose color is the +same as theirs?" + +During Charley's short argument, the suspicion had fled from the young +chieftain's face. At the conclusion, he drew himself up proudly erect +and extending his hand spoke the one English word he knew that stood +with him for friendship and confidence,--"How." + +"How," said Charley cheerfully, giving the offered hand a hearty shake. +"Now let's get outside and take a look. As soon as they have finished +with your followers, I expect the bad men to come down upon us." + +Short as had been the time they had spent in the lean-to, a great +change had taken place at the scene of the battle. The firing had +ceased from all the canoes but one, and even as they looked, a rifle +cracked, the canoe's occupant half rose, then crashed down over its +side, and the last Seminole rifle was silenced. + +The pall of smoke had drifted away from the point, revealing a terrible +sight, twenty-nine canoes or dugouts drifted on the quiet water at the +mercy of wind or current, some floated bottom upward, others' sides +were punctured and splintered with innumerable bullets. Here and there +was one splotched and spotted with the crimson life-blood of its heroic +defender. Not a sign of life was visible amongst the little squadron. +As Charley looked, one of the convicts ventured out from his place of +concealment and with a long branch, drew the nearest canoe in to shore. +With a coil of rope in one hand, he jumped in and shoved out amongst +the drifting craft. His errand was easy to be guessed, to make fast to +the drifting canoes and tow them all in to shore. + +At the sight of the wiping out of the last of his comrades, the young +Indian had sunk to a seat on a log and buried his face in his hands. +Now, Charley tapped him gently on the shoulder. "It is not a time for +the son of a chief to be grieving like a squaw," he said, "his +followers are gone, but they died like brave men. Paleface history +tells of no braver stand than they made to-day. It's not meet for the +son of a chief to sit repining. His thought should be of punishment +for the doers of the evil." + +The young Indian sprang to his feet, his eyes gleaming fiercely. +"How?" he demanded. "They have slain the pack. Will they not soon +come for the leaders? Has the young white chieftain magic to work +against their many guns and canoes?" + +"When the blood runs hot is not the time to reason coolly," said +Charley, calmly. "I go now to help my comrades. Go you into the +wigwam and watch by your father; when he awakens tell him all. As soon +as we may, we will all meet here in council, and the counsel of a chief +will shed a light in the dark around us." + +Without a word the young Seminole whirled on his heels and disappeared +in the lean-to, while Charley hurried in to the barricade, where his +presence was now sorely needed. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A FLAG OF TRUCE. + +From the woods beyond the barricade the convicts were pouring in a +rapid fire upon its defenders. Luckily the little band of hunters were +so placed that the shower of bullets pinged harmlessly against the +thick logs. Whenever a convict showed an arm or leg one of the +defenders' rifles cracked and a howl of pain from the forest sometimes +followed the report. + +Charley crept to where Walter was crouching, his face flushed and eyes +shining as he peered eagerly through a crack between the logs watching +for a chance to shoot. "Gee, this is great sport," he exclaimed as he +caught sight of his chum. "They are afraid to cross that open space +and are hiding amongst the trees just wasting powder and lead on these +logs." + +Charley looked up thoughtfully at the sun, which was now less than two +hours high. "You saw the killing of those innocent Indians," he said +gravely. "It was terrible." + +"It was grand the way they stayed to the last man and died that their +chief might escape," declared Walter with boyish enthusiasm. + +"Grand but terrible," his chum agreed. "But we must look out for +ourselves, now. They are not going to let us get back to town, now, +with our tale of their crime and whereabouts. We can keep them off +from this barricade until night, but what then? They have boats now, +and can attack by land and water at the same time. We are too few in +numbers to defend both ends of the point." + +"What can we do, then?" demanded the other. + +Charley smiled grimly. "I am not going to trust my own judgment alone +this time, after the terrible mistake I've made. We must scare those +fellows off for a bit and then hold a council to decide on the wisest +course. Thank goodness we have cartridges to burn. Fill your magazine +full, and when you see me raise my hand pour all sixteen shots into the +wood. I'll have the captain do the same at the same time. Chris and I +will fire while you two are reloading. If we keep that up for a few +minutes, I think we will drive them off long enough to talk over the +situation." + +Walter nodded comprehension and began stuffing shells into the magazine +of his Winchester. + +From him, Charley passed on to the captain and Chris, to whom he gave +the same explanations and instructions. As he took his own place +behind the barricade, the young Indian crawled quietly up beside him. + +"Why did you not stay with your father?" said Charley, impatiently. +The little Indian drew himself up proudly and recklessly to his full +height, inviting a storm of bullets, all of which happily missed their +mark. Before the volley could be repeated, Charley pulled him down on +the turf beside him out of danger. + +"The chief has awakened from his sleep," said the young Seminole with +dignity. "Of the things you had told me and I had seen, I told him all +and he believed. Then he bade me come forth, saying, 'Where the +bullets sing is the place for the son of a chief.'" + +"Then keep close to me and shoot when I do," Charley ordered. He +raised his right hand in the air and the captain's and Chris' rifles +sent thirty-two bullets zipping and singing in amongst the trees. +Before the convicts recovered from their surprise, forty-eight more +leaden messengers whined through the air above them. The effect was +magical, the convicts ceased their fire, and puzzled and alarmed by the +sudden leaden hail, sought shelter behind the largest trees they could +find. + +For ten minutes the hunters poured volley after volley of lead into the +forest. Suddenly a white rag tied to a stick was thrust out from +behind a tree. + +Instantly Charley gave the signal to stop firing. As it ceased, a man +stepped out into the open, bearing the flag of truce in his hand. + +Charley laid down his smoking rifle and leaped lightly over the +barricade. + +"Don't go to meet him, Charley," Walter implored, "anyone of those +murderers are likely to take a pot shot at you. Do come back." + +"Better listen to the lad, Charley," said the captain, earnestly. "You +can't count on that gang respecting a truce flag. Don't go, my boy." + +But Charley only smiled determinedly. "I want to hear what he has to +say, and I don't want him to see the weak points in our barricade," he +said, "besides, the other day, I was noticing that fellow coming. +Criminal he may be, but he is far too good for the company he's in. +I've got a feeling that he would not stand to be a decoy. Here goes, +anyway. Don't worry." + +Midway of the open space the two met. The convict was a young man, +with a dark, handsome face and bold, reckless eyes. He greeted the +young hunter as coolly as though they were meeting for a pleasant +social chat. + +"I came because the rest were afraid," he explained, cheerfully, eyeing +the other from head to foot with cool assurance. "They are so crooked +and treacherous themselves that they think that your companions will do +as they would do,--not hesitate to fire on the bearer of a white flag." + +"They have a good chance at me now," said Charley with a smile. + +The stranger grinned as he skilfully rolled a cigarette with one hand. +"I gave them to understand before I left that they would have to reckon +with me if they tried any such trick," he remarked, cheerfully. "I +guess that will keep the brutes quiet for a while. But let's get down +to business. I have," he said ironically, "the distinguished honor to +be their messenger, but first let me say that, although with that gang +of beasts, I am not of them. I've killed my man, but it was in fair +fight, and not by a knife in the back. I have no kick coming over what +the law dealt out to me. Furthermore, if I had known the animals, I +would have to travel with, I would not have let my longing for freedom +draw me away from the turpentine camp. Lord knows, I wish I was back +there now." His voice, which had grown earnest, dropped again into a +sarcastic note. "But I am wandering, as I said before, my noble, +gallant friends have made me their messenger and agent. It will help +you to understand their demands if I state that the afternoon's work +has been far from satisfactory. So many of the canoes were overturned +that the plumes secured will not amount to more than seven hundred +dollars where my friends expected to reap as many thousand as the fruit +of their labor." + +"Come to the point," said Charley, impatiently, his eyes shifting +anxiously to the declining sun. + +The other's tone grew still more bitterly sarcastic. "We have been +bitterly disappointed," he declared. "My brave, valiant companions +have suffered sorely in body and spirit. You saw them engage a mighty +fleet of a race whose color was an offense in their eyes. It was also +rumored that the fleet contained many thousands of dollars in bird +plumes which it was clearly wrong to leave in the possession of those +who would not know how to spend the money intelligently. + +"It is true my dear companions kept in the shelter of the largest +trees, but the incautious ones,--there was an arm barked here and a leg +scratched there, and pain stalked abroad in our midst. Then, when the +battle was over, judge of the bitterness of mind of my noble comrades +when they searched the canoes not overturned and found less than seven +hundred dollars' worth of plumes, barely enough for one good right's +drunk and carouse in town." + +Charley was interested in spite of himself in this gay, humorous young +outlaw, who was so evidently superior to his brutal companions, and he +would have liked to let him come to the point in his own amusing way, +but the sun was getting low, and he feared to waste more time. "Cut +out your nonsense and come to the point," he said curtly. "What do you +want with us?" + +The other dropped his mocking tone. "We want that chief and his boy, +whom you are harboring in your camp. According to our Indian +companion, they own, or know of the hiding-place of, a fortune in +plumes. If the plumes are not to be easily reached, we can still hold +the chief and boy for a big ransom. His people will raise it quick +enough, for he is a big man among them." He hesitated and then went +on. "The gang said for me to tell you, if the chief and boy were given +up, your party would not be troubled further." + +Charley smiled incredulously. "And what do you say?" he demanded. + +"That whether you give them up or not, you are all as good as dead," +exclaimed the other in a burst of frankness. "Good Lord, boy, do you +dream that they figure on letting any eyewitness escape to a town and +set the officers of law on their trail? You can hold them off here +until night, but when darkness comes you'll be wiped out like the +blowing out of a candle." + +Charley laid his hand on the other's arm. "You are too good for that +gang, better come over to our side," he said, earnestly. + +The young outlaw hesitated for the fraction of a second, then shook off +the hand roughly. "No matter how bad they are, they are my comrades, +and I am no traitor," he said curtly. "Your answer, please." + +"Tell them we will not give up the chief or boy," said the young envoy +earnestly. "Tell them that they have not got us yet by a long shot. +Tell them that the one object we are going to work for from now on, is +to get them back into the hands of the law." + +The young outlaw gave him a look of admiration. "You've got the nerve, +all right," he said. "Well, so long, till we meet again," and whirling +around he sauntered slowly off in the direction of the forest, merrily +whistling as he went. + +Charley for a moment looked after him regretfully, then turning, he +quickly rejoined his companions behind the barricade. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +THE RETREAT. + +A few words gave his companions the substance of the conversation. +"Now," he continued, "I wish we could all get together in the camp for +a few minutes to talk this thing over, and decide on our next move, but +it's too risky to leave the wall unguarded, although I don't believe +they will try another assault before dark." + +The young Seminole spoke up, "when the Big Tiger speaks, the whelp is +silent, I will stay." + +"Golly, I reckon dis nigger ain't no good at planning, spec I better +stay here, too," observed Chris. + +A parting volley was fired into the forest, and under cover of the +smoke the rest retired quickly to the lean-to. + +The wounded man was lying awake on his couch, his keen, black eyes +burning with an unnatural light. + +Although he must have been suffering intense pain from his wound, his +features were calm and composed. He tried to rise as the hunters +entered, but could not raise himself even on his elbow. + +"Don't try to move," exclaimed Charley, hurrying to his side. + +"How," said the sufferer, in greeting, extending a hand surprisingly +small and well-formed for a man of his size. + +Charley gave it a hearty shake and his companions crowding around, +gravely followed his example. + +The wounded man lay silent for a moment surveying the little party with +shrewd, appraising eyes. A friendly gleam shone in his beady orbs as +they lingered for a second on the captain's kindly, weather-beaten +face. He looked a trifle longer at Walter's eager, open countenance, +but his glance came back to rest on Charley's face, and to him his +words were addressed. + +"He, whom his people call the Big Tiger, was made as weak as a tiny +papoose by the bullet of a jackal," he began in broken English. "The +Little tiger has told me all; how the jackals would have taken their +prey but for your coming in the canoe of cloth and bringing the +helpless ones here. The jackals' bullet has sped true, and the Big +Tiger will lead his followers no more in the hunt, but the son of a +chief will remain and his life will be at the young white chieftain's +command." + +The stricken man burst into a fit of coughing, and Charley noted with +pity that flecks of scarlet stained the sufferer's lips. "Shot through +the lungs," he decided, but he allowed no trace of pity to show on his +face. + +"A chief of the Seminoles must be wise with the wisdom of the owl in +council," he said, as soon as the fit of coughing had left its victim. +"Payment from father or son we desire not, only the counsel of wisdom +now. We are but braves in the hunt or fight, and great danger +threatens, now, but the ripe wisdom of a great chief may be able to +point out a path to safety." + +Clearly and in few words, he described their present desperate position +and the demands and threats of the outlaws. + +The Indian listened in impassive silence and for some time after +Charley finished, remained buried in profound meditation. + +"The young white chief carries an old head on young shoulders," at last +he said approvingly. "He speaks truly when he says that the air is +thick with danger. When the blackness of night comes, then will come, +also, those who make war from behind the trees of the forest. In the +darkness, how is the young white and his friends to tell enemies from +friends? The jackals will wriggle through and over the wall of trees +like snakes through tall grass. After what they have seen, can my +white friends expect mercy at hands already stained red?" + +Charley shook his head. "Thou speakest my thoughts, but are we to be +murdered in the dark by creatures such as those?" + +"The mind of the young is ever quick and hasty in its flights," +reproved the wounded chief, gravely. "What use for the medicine man to +point out the sickness, unless he has the proper barks and plants?" + +"Well," said Charley, "let the wisdom of one grown wise in councils +tell us of the cure for this disease." + +The wounded savage was again seized with a fit of coughing, and it was +some moments before he could reply. "Between the glades and here--a +swift half day's journey--a small island lies in the middle of the +river. There, four men could stand off an army. If I commanded the +paleface friends as I do my tribe, I would say, bury all things too +heavy to carry away in the canoes of cloth, while it is yet light, turn +the ponies loose that they may not starve. Put all else in the cloth +boats. Let some keep up a noise and fire from the wall of trees to +convince the white men without hearts that you are going to stay and +fight. With the first darkness of night let all take to the boats. I +with the Little Tiger will lead the way, then may come him you call +captain with the little one whose face is like the night, lastly, may +come you and the one with the eager face (Walter). Without noise must +we go, and keep close to each other, for the river has many arms +stretched out for the unwary stranger. At the island of which I spoke, +you may camp in safety while we go on alone. I stop at my wigwam to +die, alone, in peace and quietness with the great spirit, as becomes a +chief of a long line of chiefs, but he, who will soon he chief, will +travel quickly on gathering together my people. With them he will +return, and of the twelve who murder from behind trees not one shall +return to boast of his deeds. When the buzzards are feeding off their +bones, then, may you return and secure that which you have buried, the +ponies, and all of that which is yours. That is the counsel of one of +a race of chiefs. What is the answer of the young white chief?" + +"I must consult with those who share my dangers, Chief," said Charley +gravely. "We talk not like squaws, and in five minutes you shall have +our answer." + +The Seminole rolled over on his side exhausted from his long speech and +frequent coughing spells, while Charley beckoned the captain and Walter +out of earshot. + +"You have heard it all, now I want your opinion," he said simply. +"After this last terrible mistake of mine, it will be long before I +trust to my judgment again." + +"We all fell into the same error, lad," said the captain, kindly. "The +blame, if any, belongs to us all. Forget it, Charley, and don't let it +weaken your self-confidence. Now what do you think of the plan of our +red-skinned friend?" + +"I believe it's our only chance for life," he answered regretfully, +"those cut-throats have got us foul. It's run away or be killed." + +"Then I'm for running. But, think you, he can be trusted to pilot us +aright?" + +"He will not pilot us far, I fear," said Charley, sadly. "I doubt if +he will reach his wigwam. That bullet touched a lung all right. If he +dies on the way we must look to the son; he is of the same spirit as +the father, or I am no judge of character." + +"They both speak English wonderfully well," said Walter musingly. + +"So do most of the Seminoles," explained Charley. "They come in to the +outlying towns at rare intervals to exchange their venison and skins +for ammunition and cloth, and it's wonderful how quickly they pick up +the language. But I am rambling. The question before us is, shall we +abandon all our things and run away with a fair chance of escaping with +whole skins, or stay and fight it out with the certainty of being +killed, sooner or later?" + +"Run," said the captain decisively, "and trust to luck and the chief to +recover our things." + +"Retreat," voted Walter regretfully. + +Without another word, Charley turned back to the bedside of the +suffering savage, whose pain-tortured eyes had never strayed from their +faces during the conference. + +"Chief, we have decided that your plan is the only one to follow," +Charley said, simply. + +Exultation showed for a second on the Indian's, set features. "Good," +he exclaimed, "listen, young white chief. Do not mourn the loss of +ponies and things such as you must leave behind. To-day you risked +your life to save a stranger Indian and his boy. Great shall be your +reward when this trouble is over. That with which to trade for many +ponies shall be yours." + +In his excitement the wounded man had partly raised himself on his +elbow, but the exertion was too much; there was a rush of blood from +his lips and he sank back on his couch in a dead faint. In a second +Charley was by his side forcing down more brandy between the clenched +teeth. The powerful stimulant acted quickly. In a moment the sufferer +again opened his eyes to consciousness. Charley beckoned to his chum. +"Go relieve his boy," he whispered, "and send him here. I want him to +get his instructions from his father before there comes another attack. +The captain and I will fix for our departure." + +"Good," exclaimed the chief, whose keen ears had caught the +low-whispered conversation, "we won't die yet, though. Die in our own +wigwam when Great Spirit tolls the bell of mystery." + +Walter was off like a shot, and the young Seminole soon stood by his +father's couch. While the two indulged in earnest conversation in +their own tongue, the captain and Charley worked hastily, for the sun +was already setting. What things they dared risk carrying were hustled +into the frail canoes. One of the couches was conveyed to the dugout +and spread out in the bottom and two of the thickest blankets spread on +top of the leaves. The ponies were cast loose to shift for themselves. +Their remaining stuff was shoved into the water-proof bag and buried in +a high spot. By the time this was done, the first shades of night had +fallen. At Charley's suggestion, all hurried into the barricade, and +for fifteen minutes poured a hail of bullets into the forest to +convince the outlaws that they were still there and on the alert. + +Then all hurried back to the camp. Many hands made easy and gentle +work of conveying the wounded man from his couch to the comfortable bed +in the dugout. The young Indian took his place in the stern of the +ticklish craft, and with a single shove of his long pole sent it far +out into the stream. The captain, with Chris, followed a few yards +behind, paddling with soft noiseless strokes. A few yards in their +wake came the last canoe containing Walter and Charley, and quickly the +outline of the point was lost in the darkness behind. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +THE FLIGHT BY NIGHT. + +As the canoes glided silently towards the convicts' camp the paddle +strokes of the fugitives grew slower and more guarded, the blades of +the paddles were no longer lifted clear of the water lest the falling +drops from them should be heard by those on shore. The river narrowed +suddenly opposite the point, and the canoes would be compelled to pass +within a hundred feet of the enemy's camp. All of the convicts might +be in the woods surrounding the hunters' camp, waiting to close in on +their supposed victims, but there was a chance that they had had the +foresight to count upon this very attempt at escape and had left some +of their number on the point to cut off the retreat. + +Charley thought of all this as he knelt in the stern of his little +craft and plied the paddle slowly and with infinite caution, his every +nerve tense, and sight and hearing strained to catch any sound of +movement on the rapidly nearing point. Were it white men only that +they were seeking to elude, he would have felt far less apprehension, +but he recognized that in the person of Indian Charley they had to deal +with a mind crafty and cunning, that would be likely to provide against +the very move they were making. Even in his anxiety, Charley could not +but notice and admire the marvelous skill with which the young Indian +in the dugout handled his clumsy craft. He hugged close to the farther +shore and glided along its border as noiselessly as a shadow. The +captain, although but little used to the paddle, was also doing +surprisingly well and was following closely in the wake of the dugout. +Silently the dugout at last glided past the dangerous point, and a +moment later the captain's canoe also slipped gently by. + +Charley gave a sigh of relief. They were safely past and could laugh +at any attempted pursuit in the clumsy dugouts the convicts possessed. + +But that one unguarded moment of relief was disastrous in its result. +In a deep, careless stroke, his paddle struck a submerged log and the +slender blade snapped short off with a loud crack, the ticklish canoe +careened suddenly to one side, then righted again with a sullen splash. +At the sound the silent point quickly stirred with life. There was the +hum of excited voices and a blinding flash of flame lit up the +darkness, followed by the sharp crack of rifles and the hum of +bullets,--they were discovered. + +"Give way all," shouted Charley, as he fumbled in the darkness for the +spare paddle, which he at last succeeded in finding. "Are you hurt, +Walt?" he called anxiously to his companion. + +"Not a bit," answered his chum cheerfully, "but hurry up or we will be +getting another volley." + +The canoe had drifted beyond the point before her way died out, but was +still less than a hundred yards from it. By the splashing of water the +boys could tell that the convicts were launching one of the dugouts in +pursuit. With vigorous strokes Charley sent their light craft flying +ahead; a few minutes and they would be out of rifle-shot and out of +danger, but again there was the crack of rifles and Charley called to +his chum with a voice hoarse with pain, "You'll have to take her, Walt, +they got me that time." + +"Bad?" cried Walter anxiously, as they changed places. + +"In the shoulder," weakly, "but don't mind about me. Shove her ahead +as fast as you can, the others have got quite a start of us, and we've +got to catch them." + +For half an hour Walter paddled silently on, putting all his strength +into the strokes that sent the light craft leaping ahead, leaving the +pursuing dugout far behind. + +"Charley," he called at last, "isn't it time we were up with at least +the chief's dugout?" + +But only silence greeted his question, his plucky chum had fainted from +pain and the loss of blood. + +For a few moments Walter let the canoe drift, while he pondered as to +what he should do. He felt sure that they had passed the captain and +his companions--but how? In the excitement of the pursuit he must have +passed unnoticed a point where the river branched and had taken the +wrong fork. There were, he knew, dozens of such forks to the river and +the mistake was one that might easily have been made under any +circumstances. The question now was what to do about it. To return +was to run the risk of falling into the hands of the convicts, and the +chance of finding the stream the others had taken was exceedingly +small. There might be a dozen tributaries between him and the +convicts' point, and how was he to tell which was the right one? In +desperation he crawled forward to his unconscious companion and +sprinkled his face again and again with water from the river. + +At last Charley opened his eyes with a moan of pain. + +"We're lost," shouted Walter eagerly. "I can't find the captain or +chief, what shall I do?" He bent his head to catch the feeble answer +from the wounded lad's lips. + +"Keep on, keep on. When the river forks, take the largest stream, +and--" but Charley had fainted again. + +With a heavy heart, Walter crept back to his place in the stern and +resumed the paddle. It was a terrible situation for a young, +inexperienced lad; lost on a great river in a frail canoe, pursued by +relentless enemies, and alone, except for a wounded, and perhaps dying +companion. It was enough to strike terror into one much older than our +boy hunter. + +Throughout the long night the despairing lad paddled steadily on, +praying for the day to break. At last it came with a blaze of glory in +the east. When it grew light enough to see, he rose cautiously and +gazed around him. + +The prospect was disheartening enough. The river had narrowed to less +than a hundred yards in width and wound and twisted amongst the waste +of marsh that stretched desolately ahead and astern as far as the eye +could see. To the east and west the marsh extended back at least a +mile before it met solid timbered land, here and there, and an +occasional long point jutted out until it met the stream. Although the +weary lad strained his eyes in all directions, not a sign could he see +of the other canoes or of any human life. With a sigh of despair, he +sank again to his knees and crawled forward to where his chum lay half +unconscious and moaning in pain. + +Dipping his handkerchief over the side, he gently sponged Charley's +pale face with it. + +The contact of the cold water seemed to revive the wounded lad. He +opened his eyes and attempted to smile, although his lips were +twitching with pain. "What a nuisance I am, old chap," he said faintly. + +"Not a bit," declared Walter, cheerfully, overjoyed at his return to +consciousness. "Here, take a drink of this cold water, and then I am +going to have a look at your wound." + +With his hunting-knife, Walter cut away the bloody shirt from the +shoulder and exposed the gaping hole to view. It was still bleeding +slightly, but he noted with satisfaction that the bullet had passed +completely through the fleshy part of the shoulder without touching the +bone, a painful wound, but not a fatal one. He washed it clean with +river water and bound it up with strips from his own shirt. "You'll be +all right in a few days," he declared cheerfully. "Now just lay quiet. +I am going to paddle in to the nearest point and start a fire and make +you some broth." + +Walter's heart was lighter than it had been in many hours as he again +resumed his paddle. Day had brought fresh hope and courage. Charley +was getting along far better than he had dared to hope during the +night. He soon would be well enough to take command, and then, thought +Walter, they would soon find their friends. He had great confidence in +Charley's ability to get them out of their present predicament. + +Suddenly Walter paused in his paddling and sat staring at the point, +which was now scarce a hundred yards distant. A thin wisp of smoke +curled up above the thick growth of palmettos with which the point was +covered. + +"Charley," he called softly, "there is someone on the point; they have +just started up a fire." + +"Better sheer off and give it a wide berth, then," counseled his chum. +"If it were the captain or the chief, you would see the canoes." + +"But the boats may be pulled up among the mangrove bushes," Walter +objected. "If it should be the captain and Chris, just think what our +passing by them would mean. We might never see them again, Charley. I +am going to have a look." + +"All right," agreed his chum, "but be very careful, Walt." + +The fire was located well in on the point, and Walter steered to land +some distance out from it. A few strokes of the paddle sent the light +canoe gliding in amongst the mangrove bushes that fringed the shore. +Climbing out upon the curious gnarled roots, Walter pulled the canoe +far enough in to effectually screen it from sight. Next he examined +his pistols to see that they were properly loaded, and with a parting +word of cheer for his chum, he made his way slowly and cautiously over +the intervening roots to the shore. + +He soon found that it was no easy task he had set himself. Between +himself and the fire fifty yards away, intervened the heaviest growth +of timber he had ever seen; palms, sweet gums, satinwoods, and pines +mingled in close and wild confusion, while the ground beneath them was +a matted mass of vines and creepers. + +For a moment Walter hesitated. Some of the vines and creepers, he +knew, were poisonous. To touch them meant sores, swellings, and +suffering. But it was only for a moment he paused. The thought of how +much might depend on his errand drove him on. Tearing two strips from +his already tattered shirt, he wrapped them around either hand, and +dropping on hands and knees he cautiously wound his way towards the +fire. + +His progress was slow and painful. Dangling brier vines drew blood +from arms and face, and sharp thorns repeatedly lacerated hands and +knees. At each move forward he had to pause and remove the dead +branches and twigs from his path lest their cracking should betray him +to the campers. At last, however, he could catch the sound of voices, +and wriggling forward with infinite caution, he reached a place from +which he could get a glimpse between the trees at the group gathered +around the fire. + +The sight was not reassuring. Near the blaze a half dozen of the +convicts lay lounging at their ease, while another one was busily +engaged in making coffee and frying bacon. The neighing of ponies in +the background told the watcher how they had arrived at the point +before him. They must have ridden most of the night to have covered +the distance, and Walter felt a sinking of heart as he realized the +determination of their pursuit. The conversation that came to his ears +did not tend to reassure him. + +The convicts were evidently tired and in bad humor, and a hot argument +was raging. + +"I tell you it's all foolishness, this losing sleep and wearing +ourselves out," declared a tall, thin, pasty-faced individual. "Here's +my plan: just break up into parties of two or three and each party +strike out for a different town and catch a freight out of the state. +I 'low we're just wasting time and making trouble for ourselves by +following up them chaps." + +"Bill Salino, you've got as little sense as courage," declared a man +whom Walter recognized as the leader of the gang. "The time for +scattering and getting out of the state has gone by. There will be men +watching for us at every point, and to be caught means hanging for all +hands now. We've got to lay quiet here for six months or so until they +give up watching for us. We're safe enough here unless them chaps get +away and bring the Indians or a sheriff's posse down on us; and they +won't get away if I have to follow them into the heart of the +Everglades," he declared vindictively. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +CAPTURED. + +From the expression on their faces, Walter judged that the other four +convicts were in doubt as to which of the two plans they should lend +their support to. "Are you sure we'll catch 'em, Cap?" inquired one, +doubtfully, "there are so powerful many forks to this river, it's like +hunting for a needle in a haystack." + +"If we don't get 'em, Injin Charley will," declared the leader, +confidently. "I wouldn't be surprised to see him show up with 'em any +minute now. He's an Injin and knows just what course them redskins in +the dugout will be likely to take." + +Still the outlaws seemed to waver, and the leader shifted his +arguments. "If you fellows take up with Salino's fool idea, just think +what shape you'll be in, even if you don't get caught. You won't have +no money and will have to go around like a hobo until you make a +strike. Now if we catch this chief, I reckon we can torture him, till +he tells us where his plumes are hid. Then when things have quieted +down a bit we can send a man in to dispose of 'em and walk out of here +like gentlemen with money in our pockets." + +This argument seemed to appeal to his companions, and the murmuring +ceased. + +Walter decided that he had heard enough, and turning, started to +retrace his way back to the canoe. His second movement forward, +however, was his undoing. A large limb upon which he had trusted his +weight broke noisily under him, and he was precipitated forward into a +huge clump of briars. Before he could regain his feet, strong hands +seized him and dragged him, still vainly struggling, out into the +clearing. + +"One of 'em," cried the leader triumphantly, "I reckon the rest ain't +far off. Scatter and search the point for 'em, boys,--but wait a bit, +maybe this young cub can save us trouble." + +But Walter had been thinking rapidly. If he was to save his chum it +was no time for nice scruples. With a silent prayer for forgiveness, +he waited the outlaws' questions. + +The leader drew a revolver, cocked it, and presented it at the lad's +head. "You can tell me the truth now or I'll blow your head off," he +growled. + +Walter's face took on an expression of fear and cringing terror far +greater than he was really feeling. The brutal ruffian eyed this +appearance of fear with every evidence of satisfaction. "Now I guess +you'll answer my questions truthfully," he said threateningly. "First, +where are your companions?" + +"They left us in the darkness and we could not catch up with them. +They must be way up the river by now," Walter stammered. + +His questioner swore loudly. "Got past us, did they? Well, no matter, +we'll get them easily now, we know for sure which stream they took." + +Walter could hardly conceal his delight at having put the ruffian upon +a false trail, but he was ready for the next question, which came +quickly. + +"How did you get here?" + +"The canoe struck a log, capsized, and sank. I swam ashore." + +"What became of the fellow in the boat with you?" + +"Drowned, I guess," said Walter with a sob. + +The leader turned to the others. "I reckon he's too scairt to be +lying," he said, "however, you had better take a look around the point. +Be quick about it, though, for we will have to hurry to catch up with +those other chaps. Here, tie this fellow up before you go." + +Walter was seized, his hands tied behind him, and he was lashed with +his back to a small satinwood tree. + +He watched the departure of the ruffians with sinking heart. If they +searched thoroughly, Charley and the canoe were sure to be discovered. + +The outlaws soon returned, however, after a very careless search and +reported nothing in sight. Truth to tell, tired as they were, they had +quickly wearied of trying to force their way through the dense jungle. + +After a hasty breakfast, the leader gave the order to mount. "You two +stay here and wait for Injin Charley," he commanded, indicating two of +the gang. "We have got to let him know what we've learned. I reckon +we'll be back by night, if we ain't, you follow us in the morning." + +"What shall we do with the kid?" inquired one of the men. + +"Turn him over to Injin Charley when he comes in. I reckon he'll know +what to do with him," said the leader with a grin so evil and +suggestive that it made the helpless lad's blood run cold. + +The four outlaws and their leader mounted their ponies and soon were +lost to sight among the trees. The two left behind proceeded to make +themselves comfortable without a thought for the exhausted lad whose +tight bonds cut cruelly into arms and legs. They raked up beds of +leaves upon which they spread their blankets and then proceeded to make +up for the sleep they had lost during the night. + +Walter was not only suffering much physically, but was in great mental +distress as well. He feared that at any moment Charley, alarmed by his +long absence, might call or fire off one of the guns and bring the +outlaws to his hiding-place. How could he warn him of the danger he +was in? Suddenly the bound lad was seized by an ingenious idea. +Assuring himself by their deep breathing, that his captors were fast +asleep, he began to whistle, softly at first, then gradually louder and +louder till the weird, mournful strains of the "Funeral March" filled +the air. + +One of the guards tossed restlessly and woke up cursing. "Shut up that +whistling," he shouted, "that blooming thing gets on my nerves." + +Walter had no option but to obey, but the awesome tune had carried its +doleful message. The mournful notes had reached the ears of the +wounded lad in the canoe. Its message was plain to him. Walter was a +captive, or in great danger. And now began a contest between +will-power and pain and weakness from which many a man would have +shrunken. + +Three times Charley struggled to rise to his feet, only to sink back +exhausted with great beads of sweat standing out on his brow. At last, +abandoning the attempt, he began to wriggle back towards the stern of +the canoe. His progress was slow and painful, and even in the short +distance to be covered, he had often to lay quiet and rest. At last he +succeeded in reaching the stern, but here his difficulties were by no +means ended. Working awkwardly with his left hand he managed to draw +his hunting-knife and slash open the pack of provisions they had +brought with them. From these he selected a can of milk. It was slow +work opening it with one hand, but at last he succeeded in removing the +top. Part of the contents he swallowed as it was, the balance he +diluted with water and broke hardtack up in it. By the time he had +finished the food, a little color had crept back into his face. He was +still very weak, however, and another attempt to rise met with failure. +For a few minutes he lay quiet thinking, then rummaging in the pack he +brought forth a pint bottle of brandy. With repugnance written on his +face, he took several swallows of the fiery liquor. It ran through his +veins like fire. Shoving the bottle into his pocket, he succeeded in +staggering to his feet and slowly pulled himself up on one of the +mangrove's roots, and, pausing frequently to rest, gradually worked his +way to the shore. + +Walter's captors slept heavily until the noon hour, when they awoke, +stirred up the fire, and prepared some dinner; but they offered none of +it to the unfortunate lad, who watched its preparation with hungry +eyes. Their repast finished, the two ruffians enjoyed a long smoke, +after which they played a few games of cards which ended in a violent +dispute that nearly resulted in blows. + +As the afternoon wore on without the appearance of the party they were +expecting, they again composed themselves to slumber. Slowly the +afternoon wore away and the two outlaws still slept on. The sun went +down and night began to fall and still the two showed no signs of +awakening. + +Suddenly Walter felt the bonds that held him slip to the ground and +Charley's voice whispered, "Drop on all fours, Walt, and work your way +back into the thicket." + +Walter did as he was bid as quickly as his stiffened limbs would permit +and soon caught up with his chum, who had begun to retrace his steps as +soon as he had severed the captive's bonds. In fact, he dared not wait +or tarry, for the false strength engendered by the brandy was fast +leaving him. To give out on the way would be fatal to both. He must +reach the canoe before the last remnant of his strength gave out or all +was lost. + +Slowly the two boys wormed their way through the jungle, expecting +every second to hear the sounds that would indicate that the prisoner +was missed and pursuit begun. + +At last they reached the clump of mangroves that concealed the canoe. +Here outraged nature claimed its due and Charley sank on the edge of +the shore unable to go further. It required nearly all of Walter's +remaining strength to drag his insensible chum over the roots and lower +him into the canoe. Precious as was each moment lost, Charley demanded +instant attention, his wound had broken open again from his exertions +and his tattered shirt was wet with blood. Walter stuffed bits of +cloth into the hole and bound it up as well as he could in the +darkness. This labor completed, he cast loose the canoe, and with a +few strokes of the paddle sent her over to the other side of the +stream. Here he laid aside his paddle and sank back to rest and think. +The friendly darkness completely hid them from the gaze of anyone on +the point. Until the moon rose they were as safe there as any place on +the river. The plucky lad sorely needed rest and refreshment. For two +days and a night he had been without sleep and for twenty-four hours +without food. This, with the strenuous labor and excitement through +which he had passed, had rendered him nearly as weak as his unconscious +companion. Sleep was out of the question until they were safe from +their enemies, but food was handy and he lost no time in making a +hearty meal on a can of corned beef, crackers and a tin of milk. The +repast brought fresh strength and courage, although his head felt very +heavy and he could hardly keep his eyes open. + +With the outlaws ahead and behind them, there was little choice of the +direction in which they should flee, and Walter paddled steadily on up +the river, keeping close to the opposite shore from the convicts. + +Hour after hour passed and found him still paddling wearily onward, +every muscle and nerve in his body aching with fatigue. At last a +brightening of the sky in the east warned him of the rising of the +moon. As its bright beams lit up the gloomy river and desolate +marshes, Walter gave a cry of joy; directly ahead, right in the middle +of the stream, lay a small island, its shores fringed with a dense +growth of mangroves. As the canoe drew nearer, Walter surveyed it with +increasing delight. Here was surely a safe place of refuge where they +might stay as long as their provisions lasted and until their enemies +tired of the pursuit. Where the island lay, the river had widened out +into a fair sized lake and the nearest shore was out of gunshot. There +was no way that the outlaws could reach them except by boat, and they +had none with them. + +With lightened heart, Walter ran the canoe far up into the mangroves +and fastened it securely to a large root. Making his way ashore he +soon found a small space of cleared ground, to which he speedily +conveyed their blankets which he spread out on the dry sand. Returning +to the boat he endeavored in vain to rouse Charley from the stupor into +which he had fallen. At last he gave up the attempt and half carried +and half dragged his chum ashore and laid him on his blanket, then +quickly stretching himself out by his side, was soon fast asleep. + +Once in the night Walter was awakened by a loud splashing. With pistol +in hand he stole to the water's edge. Many dark masses were slowly +gliding to and fro on the surface of the stream. "Alligators," he +exclaimed with a sigh of relief and returned to his blanket and sleep, +from which he was only aroused again by the rising of the sun. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +THE SWAMP. + +Walter's first thought on awakening was for his chum. Charley was +tossing restlessly on his blanket, his face and hands flushed and hot +with fever. All of Walter's attempts to rouse him met only with +unintelligible words and phrases. The exertion of the previous day in +his weak state, the opening of his wound afresh, and the unhealthy +river water he had drank, had all combined to bring him to a dangerous +condition. + +Walter removed the bandages and looked at the wound. It was of an +angry red and greatly swollen, and its changed appearance frightened +him. "Charley," he called, shaking him gently, "don't you know me?" + +Reason gleamed for a moment in the sufferer's eyes. "Sure, it's Walt," +he muttered. + +"Listen and do try to understand," begged Walter, earnestly. "We are +safe, Charley. The convicts cannot get at us now. We can stay here +and rest up as long as we want to and you can lay quiet and get well +again. Now, I am going to light a fire and get you some broth and +strong coffee, and, after you have taken them, I am going to heat some +water and give that wound a good cleansing. Do you understand, old +chap?" + +"Yes," murmured the sufferer, wearily. + +After putting his own blanket under Charley's head for a pillow and +making the sick lad as comfortable as possible, Walter began his +preparations for breakfast. Selecting a spot where the ground seemed +soft and free from roots, he dug a hole about two feet deep to contain +his fire. It required only a few minutes to make one large enough for +his purpose, and his next step was to bring up the provisions and +cooking utensils from the canoe. + +It was only a short distance to where the little craft lay moored +amongst the mangroves and a few steps carried Walter to the spot, but +on the edge of the bank he paused with a cry of surprise and dismay. + +The canoe lay bottom side up in the water. + +With the strength of despair, Walter succeeded in righting the +overturned craft and pulled it up on shore where he quickly tipped the +water out of it. + +One glance at the interior confirmed his worst fears, nothing remained +inside but the paddle, which had been wedged under the seats; +provisions, guns, and ammunition were all gone. + +Walter sank down on the bank in despair and buried his face in his +hands. He understood now, the meaning of the splash he had heard +during the night. A curious alligator had upset the light craft with +its nose or a flirt of its powerful tail. + +For a long time Walter sat silent and still, pondering on their now +desperate situation. One fact stood out clear in the mind of the +sorely tried and unhappy boy; they must, without delay, leave the +island, which only a few hours before had promised them a safe and +comfortable refuge. Their only chance lay in finding their friends +before he became helpless from lack of food. It needed no great +medical knowledge to tell him that Charley was fast sinking into a +critical condition. Without food or proper medicine, the injured lad +was not likely to last long and every moment they tarried on the island +lessened their chances, which were already very slight, of escaping +with their lives. + +When he had arrived at this conclusion, Walter arose and made his way +back to his companion, who was lying as he had left him, tossing +restlessly from side to side. + +"I'm sorry, Charley, but you'll have to wait a little longer for your +broth," he said, cheerfully. "I have decided we had better waste no +more time here but hurry on and catch the captain; he has medicines +that will soon fix you up and make you all right again." + +His explanation was wasted so far as Charley was concerned, for the +wounded lad was beginning to rave in the delirium of fever. After a +few unsuccessful attempts, Walter abandoned the effort to rouse him to +consciousness, and, leaving him as he lay, proceeded to make ready for +their departure. He cut a pile of small myrtle boughs which he carried +down to the canoe and spread out upon the bottom and upon these he +stretched their blankets, making a soft and comfortable bed for his +chum to lie upon. Now came his hardest task, the getting of the sick +boy down to, and aboard of, the canoe. Fortunately the hearty meal and +rest of the night before had so far restored his strength, that he was +able, by half carrying and half dragging him, to get Charley, at last, +upon the bed prepared for him. Then pausing only long enough to get +his breath again, Walter took his old place in the stern and paddled +out into the stream, where he headed once more for the south, and with +long, steady strokes sent their little craft flying towards the unknown. + +As they slid over the water, leaving the miles rapidly behind them, +Walter kept a sharp watch on either bank for signs of the outlaws. +That they were still hunting for him and his friends, he felt no doubt, +but he cherished faint hopes that he had distanced them during the +night. He consoled himself with the thought that even were they +captured, death by a bullet would be far quicker and less painful than +a slow, lingering death from fever and starvation. + +All day the despairing lad paddled ahead, pausing only at noon for a +brief space to rest his wearied arms and drink sparingly of the river +water, which, black and foul as it was, reeked with fever. + +Charley, on his bed in the bow, tossed and muttered incessantly. Every +once in a while, Walter would crawl forward and sprinkle cold water on +the lad's hot face; it was all he could do to relieve the sufferer, +whose ravings fell heavily on his anxious heart. + +As the afternoon wore away, Walter's strength began to fail; the mental +strain, steady work, the blistering sun, and lack of food, were fast +telling on him. The temptation to stop and rest and sleep grew almost +irresistible, but he bravely fought off the weakness. Their only hope +lay in pushing on and on until they found their friends or came out +upon civilization. Whither the river led he knew not, but was in hopes +that it might at last bring them out into a settled country. To stop +now meant certain death. + +As night settled down, his tired eyes caught the gleam of a fire on the +shore not far ahead. A wild hope possessed him that it might prove to +be the captain and his companions, but, warned by his previous +experience, he approached the blaze cautiously. + +Slowly he drifted in towards the fire, against which he could soon +distinguish moving figures. At last, he approached near enough to +recognize the forms against the bright firelight, and hope fled. It +was another party of the outlaws, four in number, and, the disappointed +lad swung the canoe around to the further shore and paddled safely past +without being discovered. + +The night passed slowly away, and through the long hours the lad in the +canoe urged it steadily forward into the darkness. His tired, aching +brain was now possessed of but one thought, to paddle on, and on, and +on. His hands had cramped to the paddle handle, and the strokes were +feeble as a child's, but the blade still rose and fell regularly, and +the canoe still moved slowly ahead. + +Daybreak found him in the same position, the paddle still slowly +moving, and his bloodshot, staring eyes still fixed ahead. + +The rising sun brought him staggering to his feet, a cry of hope on his +lips. + +Dead ahead, and more than a mile away, the river disappeared in a great +forest of strange-looking trees. Amongst its shelter might be found +food and friends, thought Walter, and the hope gave him fresh courage +and strength. + +Before sinking back into his seat he carefully surveyed the further +shore. His gaze was arrested at a point about a mile behind the canoe. +There for about a half mile, the shore lay comparatively clear of +timber, very likely having been swept by fire at some time in the past. +It was not the character of the shore, however, that arrested Walter's +attention. His gaze was fixed upon four objects moving swiftly across +the open space and headed towards him. It required no great reasoning +to tell him that the four figures wore mounted outlaws and that they +had sighted the canoe. It was to be a race between ponies and canoe, +as to which should reach the forest first. + +With the strength born of desperation, Walter forced the light canoe +ahead. Behind him the riders spurred their ponies on at the top of +their speed. Walter could see, by glancing over his shoulder from time +to time, that the outlaws were steadily gaining, but the canoe was +moving swiftly, also, and was rapidly drawing near to the strange +forest, and Walter decided with a thrill of joy that the enemy would +not arrive in time to cut him off from the shelter of the trees. + +The outlaws were not slow to recognize this fact. Their rifles began +to crack and the bullets to whistle around the canoe. Fortunately the +motion of their mounts made their aim uncertain, and the bullets did +but little damage, only one touching the canoe, and it passed +harmlessly through the side far above the water line. Before the +pursuers could draw near enough to make their fire certain, the canoe +had passed in amongst the trees and the outlaws reined in their mounts +swearing loudly. + +As he neared it, Walter had watched the forest with growing amazement. +The river seemed to end at its edge, but as he drew closer the reason +for the anxiety of the outlaws to prevent his entering it was plain. +No horse could travel through that dark, gloomy expanse. It was a +floating forest. Great cypress and giant bays reared their mighty +stems from the surface of black scummy water. Amongst their boughs +bloomed brilliant orchids and from limb to limb stretched tangled +masses of creeping vines and briers. + +The trees with their huge spreading roots grew so closely together that +it was with difficulty that Walter forced the canoe in and out between +them. His exultation at his escape from their enemies had given way to +a settled despair. From descriptions he had heard, he recognized this +mighty floating forest as the fringe which surrounds that greatest of +all mysterious, trackless swamps, the Everglades. Before him lay the +mighty unknown, unexplored morass, reeking with fever, and infested +with serpents; behind him waited sure death at the hands of the outlaws. + +One faint hope alone remained to him. If his strength held out, he +might in time come upon a camp of the Seminoles, the only human beings +in this unknown land. + +Considering the small numbers of the Indians and the vastness of the +swamp, it was a faint chance indeed that he or his companion would live +to see any of the tribe, but, faint as it was, no other hope remained +and Walter sent the canoe onward with feeble strokes. + +Gradually the trees grew further and further apart until at last the +canoe passed out from their shadows into a lake, surrounded by tall +growing grass and reeds. Far as the eye could reach stretched the +dismal swamp, broken here and there by lakes or creeks and now and then +by an island of higher ground rising from the rotting mud. + +Under the heat of the blazing sun there rose around the canoe thick +vapors from the scum-covered water and rotting vegetation, bearing in +their foul embrace a sickening, deadly stench. + +The paddle strokes grew slower and slower, and gradually ceased, +Walter's eyes slowly closed, and he sank down unconscious. His paddle +fell from his nerveless hand and floated away on the stagnant water +just as a dark, shapeless mass crept out of a bunch of reeds and struck +the canoe with a gentle thud. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +SAVED. + +Darkness, black as night, floated over Walter's reeling brain; +darkness, pierced by a thousand gleaming, twinkling lights, brilliant +as stars, then came a void and nothingness. Slowly at last he felt +himself struggling up out of the void, battling, fighting for +consciousness, then came a delicious sort of languor. If this was +dying, it was very pleasant. Forms seemed to be flitting before his +half-opened eyelids and the hum of voices seemed to float in his ears. +One voice irritated him greatly; it was faintly familiar in its loud +joyousness. What was it saying? + +"Golly, Massa Captain, bless de Lawd, he ain't dead." + +Another voice responded, "No, thank God, he's goin' to live, Chris. +Bear a hand and we'll get him into the wigwam." + +There was a sensation of being home through the air, and Walter +surrendered to the delicious languor,--and slept. + +When he opened his eyes again an ebony face was bending over him and +Chris' voice demanded, "Golly, don't you know me, Massa Walt?" + +"It's Chris," Walter said, smiling feebly, and the little darky danced +about in joy. + +Walter raised his head with an effort and looked about him. He was +lying on a bed of soft moss with a pillow of blankets under his head. +He seemed to be surrounded by walls of bark which met in a point far +above his head; opposite him lay another figure on a bed similar to his +own. + +"Where am I, and how did I get here?" he demanded confusedly, "the last +I remember was being in the canoe a few minutes ago and everything +getting dark before me." + +"A few minutes ago," cried Chris, excitedly. "Why, it's dun been two +days since Massa Captain come on you when he was paddlin' around the +lake. You was layin' in the bottom of the canoe like you was dead." + +"Two days," exclaimed Walter in astonishment; then, with a sudden note +of dread in his voice, he cried, "Charley!" + +"He's gettin' along pretty well," said the little darky cheerfully, +"he's lyin' right across from you thar. Now you jus' keep still an' +doan' talk no more," he commanded. "Massa Captain out fixing up some +soup. Reckon he'll let you talk some more after you drink it." + +The captain soon appeared with a gourd full of steaming liquid. He was +overjoyed at finding Walter conscious, but firmly insisted that he +should remain quiet, and he fed him liberally with the hot soup. +Indeed, Walter felt little desire to talk; a few swallows of the warm +liquid made him very drowsy, and he quickly sank into a deep sleep from +which he awoke feeling much stronger and almost like his old self again. + +To his great joy, he found Charley conscious, and without fever, +although still very weak. He sat down on the edge of the invalid's bed +and the two talked over the thrilling adventures through which they had +passed. + +They were interrupted by the entrance of the captain and Chris, the +captain bearing an armful of yams and Chris a string of fresh fish. +"We are layin' in a stock of provisions against the appetite I reckon +you lads will have now you are gettin' better," explained the captain, +cheerfully. + +Walter caught the old sailor by the sleeve and held him tightly. "Now +you have got to sit right down and tell us your story before I will let +you go," he said. "First, Charley and I want to know where we are." + +The captain filled his old black pipe, and got it to drawing good +before he answered. + +"You're on an island about two miles inside the Everglades, as near as +I can calculate." + +"Did you build this shelter since you have been here?" asked Charley +eagerly. + +A shade of sadness passed over the captain's open face. "No," he said +slowly, "this island belonged to the chief an' this wigwam was where he +lived, an' it was here we brought him to die." + +"To die?" echoed both boys together. + +"Aye, lads, he passed away the same day we reached here," said the +captain, sadly. "He was a white man clean through, if his color was +red. I got to know him powerful well on the trip here, an' he sure had +all of a white man's feelings." + +The boys remained silent in face of the captain's evident grief, and +the old sailor, after a pause, continued. "We buried him under a big +oak tree, with his gun and plenty of food by his side, just as he had +directed, an' I reckon his spirit is up in his happy hunting-grounds +now." + +"And the young chief, his son, what has become of him?" Walter asked +after a pause. + +"Gone to gather his people together an' swoop down with them on the +murderin' convicts. He found out from signs, that I couldn't make +nothin' of, that his tribe had divided into two parties, one going +towards a hunting-ground called Big Cypress, an' the other to another +place where deer an' bear are thick. As soon as the chief was buried, +he jumps into his dugout an' starts to round 'em up. If he gets back +with them in time to catch them outlaws, may the Lord have mercy on +their murderin' sin-stained souls, for the young chap will have 'em +slowly tortured to death if he catches them." + +"Tell us all about your trip," Walter urged, "how did we get separated, +I wonder?" + +"It puzzled me for a bit as to what had become of you, but the chief +soon explained it by saying that you likely had taken another stream. +Chris an' I was for turnin' back an' huntin' you, but the chief +reasoned us out of it, by saying that you might have taken any one of a +dozen forks and that there would be mighty little chance of our hitting +on the right one, while we would be almost sure to run right into the +convicts' hands again. But what influenced us most, was his explainin' +that all streams thereabout ran into, or from, the Everglades, an' that +all we had to do was to get here first and keep a sharp lookout along +the cypress for you, and you'd soon show up. The chief had great +confidence in your good sense, Charley, an' seemed to feel certain that +you would reason that the only safe thing to do was to keep right on up +the stream you had taken. 'Course, we never suspected that you had +been shot." + +"Well, I guess my successor in command did all I would have done and +perhaps more," remarked Charley with a smile. + +"It was just by luck that I happened to do the right thing," said +Walter, modestly. + +"You didn't appear like as though luck had helped you much when I found +you, Walt," remarked the captain, dryly. "It sorter looked to me like +only hard work an' an amazin' lot of pluck an' grit had brought you +that far." + +"Now don't you go trying to make a hero out of me," said Walter, hotly, +"I won't have it. I only did what anyone would have done, and I made a +whole lot of foolish blunders besides." + +"Well, you can have it your own way, lad," agreed the captain, with a +glance of affection at the embarrassed young hunter. "I reckon that's +about all of our story worth tellin'," he concluded. "We made the best +speed we could so as to get here before you. We caught sight of +parties of the convicts searchin' for us now an' then, but the chief +was more than a match for them an' they never caught sight of us. +Since we got here, Chris and I have patrolled the rivers' mouths for +sight of you every day, but we had begun to despair when we came upon +your canoe day before yesterday. And now, that's all, my lads, except +that I feel we had all ought to join in thankin' our Heavenly Father +for deliverin' us from our enemies an' bringin' us together again." + +With hearts full of gratitude, the young hunters sat with bowed heads +while the kindly old sailor offered up a simple, fervent prayer of +thanksgiving for the mercies they had received from the One who heeds +even the sparrow's fall. + +"Thar's one thing more to tell you, an' then I'm through," said the +captain, breaking the thoughtful silence that had followed the prayer. +"The chief seemed to set great store by you, Charley. I reckon it came +from your savin' his life at the risk of your own. Anyway, he spoke +right often of the 'young white chief', as he called you, an' once he +said you should be honored with riches. Not an hour before he died, he +gave me this an' charged me to give it to you." + +Charley took with wonder the object the captain handed him. It was a +piece of exquisitely dressed doe-skin about six inches square. On the +smooth side was traced in a reddish sort of ink a kind of rude sketch +of a lone palm tree, amongst the leaves of which a large bird was +perched. Resting against the foot of the palm was an object that bore +a faint resemblance to a paddle. + +"It is sign language, but I cannot make out what it means," said +Charley in perplexity. "I wonder why he wanted me to have it and what +he wanted me to do with it." + +"I've puzzled over it some myself," said the captain slowly, "an' I +can't make anythin' out of it. From what the chief let fall from time +to time, though, I gathered he wanted to make you a valuable present, +an' I've been kinder thinkin' that picture tells what an' where it is." + +Charley folded the piece of doe-skin and put it carefully away in an +inner pocket. "I will try to find out what it means when my head is +clearer," he said. "Just now, all I can think of is something to eat." + +"And you shall have something to eat right off," said the captain, +heartily, "it's about time for supper anyway. Hustle up, Chris, an' +get them fish cleaned. I reckon it won't hurt the lad to have a bit of +solid food, now, providin' it's well cooked." + +The sun was just setting when the captain and Chris reappeared bearing +gourds full of smoking fish, and sweet sugary yams, and ears of curious +small kernelled Indian corn. + +The boys made merry over the delicious meal, but a curious constraint +seemed to rest upon the captain and Chris. Once Walter surprised them +exchanging glances full of a strange, expectant uneasiness. The +circumstance aroused his curiosity, but he refrained from asking any +questions, deciding that the captain would explain the trouble in his +own good time. + +As the evening wore away, the change in the captain's manner became +more and more marked. All his cheeriness of the day had departed, +leaving him glum and silent. He took no part in the lively +conversation going on between the boys, but sat apart answering their +questions in monosyllables. His manner, Walter decided, was that of a +man who faces some great impending evil. + +With the coming of darkness the air was filled with the noises of the +swamp; the croaking of multitudes of frogs, the hooting of owls, and +the hoarse bellowing of many alligators. + +Suddenly the boys sat up erect and stared at each other in amazement. +"What is it?" Walter cried. + +Clear and sweet above the noises of the night rang the tolling of a +silver-toned bell. + +"It's the bell of the spirits callin' us," said the captain gloomily, +while Chris sat ashen-faced trying vainly to control his terror. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +THE TREASURE. + +"Nonsense, there are no such things as spirits," cried Charley, hotly. +"That tolling is made by a big bell, and a remarkably sweet-toned one, +too." + +"It's over a hundred miles to the nearest settlement," said the captain +gloomily, "do you reckon you could hear the biggest bell made that far?" + +"No," the lad admitted, "but that bell is not over two miles away. +Some Indian has traded for a bell and tolls it for his own amusement." + +The captain lowered his voice to a superstitious whisper. "It's a +mystery to the Indians," he declared, "and they avoid the sound like it +were an evil spirit. Even the chief could not tell me what it was, +although all his life he had heard its tolling. He wasn't so much +afraid of it as are the other Indians an' he built this wigwam here so +as to be within sound of it." The captain's voice dropped still lower +as he added impressively, "It tolled all the night after he died." + +"Have you tried to follow up the sound and discover where it comes +from?" demanded Charley, sharply. + +"Not me," declared the captain, solemnly, "I ain't got any call to +interfere with the doings of the dead. I tell you, lad, this is a land +of mystery, an' a man's got no call to fool with what he can't +understand." + +Charley checked the angry reply rising to his lips. He bethought +himself that the captain had spent his life in a calling that often +makes the strongest minded superstitious, while Chris inherited a +belief in ghosts and spirits from his race. Though he lapsed into +silence, Charley resolved that as soon as he was able to get around, +the mystery should be solved. + +For about an hour the air rang with the sweet chiming notes, then they +ceased as suddenly as they had begun and the boys dropped off to sleep +to dream of this strange incident in this mysterious swamp. + +Walter was astir early, apparently as well as he had ever been. +Hastily dressing he lifted up the bark flap which covered the doorway +and stepped out of the wigwam. + +The captain was busy cooking breakfast over a rude fireplace of stones, +a few feet away, while Chris on the bank by the water was industriously +fishing. + +The island upon which they were camped was only a couple of acres in +extent but rose high above the water. It was barren of timber, except +for a large live oak and one lonely palm which Walter noted with an +increasing interest. Some attempt had been made to cultivate the loamy +soil, and flourishing little patches of yams, sugar-cane, gourds, and +Indian corn testified to its fertility. + +"Well, Captain, it doesn't look as if we ran much risk of starving to +death," remarked Walter, approaching the old sailor. + +"No, thar ain't much danger of that, I allow," said the captain with a +heartiness from which all depression of the night before had fled. +"Over thar is the place you come in at, Walt," he continued, pointing +to the distant fringe of cypress. + +Walter looked long and earnestly in the direction indicated. "I can +see a thin line of smoke above those tree-tops," he declared finally. + +"Aye, I noticed it too," agreed the captain. "'Pears like them friends +are going to hang at our heels until they get another chance at us. I +wouldn't borrow any uneasiness if it weren't for that Injin bein' in +the party. I warrant he's found out already that the Injins are all +gone, an' is layin' his plans accordingly." + +"Well, they can't get to us without boats," said Walter, hopefully. + +"No, but they can make one if they are determined enough," observed the +captain, gravely. "I sorter calculate to paddle up near enough to them +to-day to learn what kind of mischief they are up to." + +"I'll go with you," said Walter, eagerly. + +"No, you ain't strong enough yet. Jes' keep quiet for a day or two, I +reckon that will be a plenty to keep you busy. Wall, I guess this stew +is done an' we might as well have breakfast." + +The kettle with its contents was carried into the wigwam, and from a +cake, made of pounded Indian corn, and the stew, our hunters made a +hearty breakfast. + +After the meal, a council of war was held. The captain outlined their +situation in a few simple words. "We are fairly comfortable here at +present, lads, but it's goin' to be a week or ten days before Young +Tiger gets back with his people. We've got plenty of food to last a +good while, but I reckon this swamp is about the most unhealthy place +on earth an' we run a good big risk of being sick with fever before the +Indians come. On the other hand, it's risky to try to get out of here +any way but the one we came in. We'd be about sure to get lost in the +swamp, an' there's no tellin' what might happen to us. We can't get +out the way we come in as long as those fellows are standin' guard +outside waitin' for us." + +"I vote to stay where we are," said Walter, promptly. "We may be able +to escape the fever if we take good care of ourselves." + +Charley and Chris quickly agreed with Walter. + +"I guess it's the wisest thing to do," admitted the captain, "although +I will be mighty glad to get out of this creepy place. I tell you this +ain't no place for white men, lads. But I've got to leave you now, +boys. Make yourself as comfortable as you can, an' keep out of the sun +during the heat of the day. I reckon I'll be back long before sundown." + +Walter accompanied the captain down to the canoe and begged hard to go +with him, but the old sailor was firm in his refusal and Walter watched +him paddle out of sight with a dim foreboding of evil at his heart. + +On his way back to the wigwam, Walter paused a moment on the island's +highest elevation to take a more careful survey than he had yet done of +the surrounding country. He discovered nothing new, however, save what +was apparently a large island lying some two miles to the west of their +own. It seemed to rise far above the surrounding swamp and was +evidently very heavily timbered. + +Passing on into the wigwam, he was greeted with an exultant cry from +Charley. + +"I've solved it," he shouted. + +"Solved what?" demanded Walter in amazement. + +"This," cried his chum excitedly, extending the square of doe-skin with +its red ink tracings. "It's really absurdly simple," he continued. +"According to the captain, the chief talked about leaving me riches of +some sort. I took that circumstance for my key and tried to think what +a race as poor as the chief and his people would consider as riches. +The picture of that bird answered the question. Plumes are their only +form of wealth, hence plumes must be the treasure of which he spoke." + +"Reasoned like a detective," approved Walter, scarcely less excited +than his chum. + +"The rest was simple. The picture of the tree was to show where it was +hidden and the object at its base is intended as a shovel to tell that +I would have to dig for the treasure, but," and his face fell, "how are +we to find that identical tree?" + +"There's only one palm on the island," Walter assured him. + +"Then all we have to do is to go there and dig and we'll find the +treasure," Charley declared. "But we must wait for the captain, we +must all be present when it is unearthed." + +The morning slipped away quickly, the boys amusing themselves by +exploring their little island, fishing from the bank, and loafing in +the shade of the solitary palm, at whose base was supposed to lie the +buried treasure. + +Dinner time came and the meal was eaten without the captain, who had +not returned. As the afternoon wore away without any sign of the old +sailor, the boys began to feel a vague uneasiness which increased as +the sun set and night began to fall. Walter, who alone knew the real +object of the captain's trip, was greatly worried. Long after the +others had retired to the wigwam for the night, he sat alone straining +eye and ear for sight or sound that would herald the absent one's +return. As the night wore away, anxiety deepened into certainty with +the troubled lad. Something must have happened to the captain. +Impatiently the lad waited for daylight, determined to set off at the +first break of dawn in search of the missing one. Suddenly, the lad +started up from the reclining position weariness had caused him to +assume. Full and deep upon the still night air rang out the tolling of +the mysterious bell. To the anxious watcher, its tones no longer rang +full and sweet as upon the previous evening, but sounded slow and +threatening, as if freighted with an ominous meaning. + +A step sounded behind him and the overwrought lad sprang to his feet, +every nerve a-tingle. + +"Where are you, Walt?" called Charley's voice from out of the darkness. + +"Here," answered Walter, with a sigh of relief. + +"The captain not here yet?" asked his chum, fearfully, as he found his +way to his side. + +"No," said Walter sadly, "and I am sure something must have happened to +him. I am off to search for him as soon as it's light enough to see." + +"And I am going with you," Charley declared. + +"You are not," said his chum, decidedly. "You are too weak for such a +trip yet. You would only make my task harder. You have no business +even to be out in this night air and dew. It may bring your fever back +on you." + +"I could not rest inside when I saw your bed and the captain's empty +and heard the tolling in the air." + +"What do you suppose it really is, Charley?" asked his chum, eagerly. +"It cannot be produced by anything human. Remember the captain's +saying that it had been tolling this way longer than the oldest Indian +could remember back." + +"It's a bell," declared his chum, a trifle uneasily. "Nothing else +could produce those tones and that regular tolling." + +"Charley," and Walter's voice lowered with the horror of the thought, +"the captain said it tolled all night when the chief died, and now the +captain himself is gone and the awful thing goes on as though it would +never stop." + +Charley, with an effort shook off the feeling of dread that was fast +stealing over him. + +"Nonsense," he said, cheerfully, "you are getting as bad as Chris and +the captain. I repeat, it is a bell: listen how regularly it tolls." + +As though in mockery at his words, the long, even reverberations +changed to a quick, harsh, discordant clatter and suddenly ceased. + +For awhile both boys sat silent, Walter striving to overcome the +superstitious dread tugging at his heart, and Charley searching his +active brain for some explanation of the mysterious sound, that would +harmonize with common sense and reason. + +At last Walter, by sheer will, regained his mental balance. "I am +tired and nervous, or I would never imagine such foolish things," he +said. "Of course it is as you say, produced by natural causes, and I +will likely laugh at my fears as soon as we stumble on the key to the +mystery. And now I am going to insist upon your going back inside, +Charley. It won't do for us to have you down with the fever again. +For our sakes, as well as your own, you must be very careful." + +Reluctantly, Charley retired to the wigwam and Walter once more was +left alone. + +With the first hint of gray in the east, he began to prepare for his +departure. What cooked food was on hand he stored in the bow of the +canoe, and casting off the painter took his seat in the stern. Then he +paused for one last look around before dipping his paddle. + +Away in the distance a moving speck on the water caught his eye. For a +few minutes he watched it in suspense, then gave a cheer of delight. + +It was the captain's canoe. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +DISAPPOINTMENT. + +As the speck drew nearer all doubt vanished, it was the captain's canoe +with the old sailor himself in the stern paddling with slow, weary +strokes. + +Walter's cheer had brought forth his companions from the wigwam, and +all now gathered on the bank to welcome the wanderer. + +Slowly the canoe drew in to the shore, and Walter at last was able to +catch the painter and haul the light craft's bow up on the sand. Its +occupant sat still in the stern unable to move. His clothes were +stained and tattered, his hands torn and bleeding from many scratches, +and his pale, haggard face told of hardship and suffering. + +"Don't look scairt, lads," he called out cheerily, "I ain't hurt none; +jes' scratched up a bit, an' powerful tired. I reckon you'll have to +give me a hand to get me out. I'm cramped that bad I can't move a leg." + +Walter and Chris flew to the old sailor's help and between them +assisted him out of the canoe and up into the wigwam. Then Chris +quickly kindled a fire and soon presented the weary man with a gourd of +steaming coffee and the cold food which Walter hastened to bring from +the canoe. + +The captain ate like one famished, while the boys stood around eager to +hear his story. + +"I'll spin my yarn as soon as I've rested a hit, lads," he said, as he +finished the last morsel of food. "I'm clean spent, now, and want to +stretch out for a while." + +The boys helped him up and onto his bed, which he had no sooner touched +than he was fast asleep. + +It was noon before the old sailor awoke to find a hot dinner ready and +the boys patiently waiting. He was surprised to find that his +stiffness had nearly all disappeared, and, except for the cuts on hands +and face, he was as well as ever again. + +"My, this grub tastes good," he exclaimed, attacking the smoking fish +and yams. "I didn't have a bite to eat all day yesterday. But I +reckon I had better start at the beginning of my yarn. I reckon you +boys are some curious how I happened to turn up again in such shape. +Wall, after I left here I paddled on, till I came to that fringe of +cypress right opposite where the smoke was curling up. When I got that +far I got mighty careful, an' the way I coaxed that little craft in +between them cypresses was so quiet that I didn't even wake up the +water moccasins asleep on the roots. When I came near the outer edge +of the cypress, I fastened the canoe to a root and crept forward on +hands an' feet from one cypress tussock to another, sorter calculatin' +that I'd make less noise that way than in the boat. At last, I got +where I could glimpse out between the trees and get a view of the fire. +There was the whole twelve of them rascals workin' away as hard as +honest men. I watched them quite a while afore I caught on to what +they was doing, an', when I found out, it didn't make me feel any +easier. Lads, they was hollowing out the biggest dugout you ever seed. +They had got a giant of a cypress chopped down, hewed it sharp at both +ends and were burning it out inside with fire. While I was watchin', +that varmint of an Injin, Charley, left the gang an' struck into the +cypress an' passed by so close to where I was hid that I was sartin +sure he'd see me, but he didn't. I lay still there for hours, afeard +to move for fear I'd meet him comin' back. It was most sundown when he +returned, and I stayed on quite a bit after that listenin' to the +conversation. As I guessed, he had been out scouting an' had found out +that we were on the island an' that his tribe was too far away to +interfere with any plans he had in his head. Cute as he was, though, +he hadn't learned that the old chief was dead and the young one gone +for help. When I had learned all I could, I crawled back to the canoe +and struck out for the island. It was being cramped up so long in one +position in the cypress and in the canoe, that made me so stiff and +sore." + +"They surely can't be so reckless as to think of entering this swamp!" +exclaimed Charley. + +"'Tain't so very reckless, the way they look at it," observed the +captain. "You see they think that the Indians are all far off an' +ain't likely to come back for some weeks. When the redskins started on +their hunt they left plenty of signs behind to tell where they had +gone, and them signs are plainer than print to Injin Charley. Now, +them fellows figures they can drop down on this island, kill off all +hands but the chief, an' torture him 'till he gives up the plumes he's +counted on havin', an' be off, an' safe out of reach afore the +Seminoles return from their hunt. No, it ain't such a foolish sort of +undertaking after all." + +"How long will it take them to finish the canoe?" Walter inquired. + +"I calculate it will take at least three days more," said the captain, +reflectively. "You see, the cypress is green an' burns pretty slowly." + +"Three days," mused Charley, "and it will be at least a week before +help can come. We have got to count on meeting this danger by +ourselves." + +"I don't see nothin' to do but push on into the swamp," said the +captain disconsolately. "They outnumber us three to one. An' this +island ain't got no shelter for us to find cover behind." + +"Let's not worry about it now," urged Walter cheerfully. "The captain +says it will be three days at least before the canoe is finished so we +have plenty of time. If we decide to leave the island, we can easily +keep ahead of a clumsy dugout in our light canoes." + +"I am of Walter's opinion," agreed Charley. "Something may turn up in +the next two days, and, anyway, there are some things I want to +investigate before I vote to leave this neighborhood. I can promise +you one thing, captain, those fellows will never handle the plumes that +belonged to the chief." + +The captain listened in admiring astonishment as Charley recounted his +solution of the chief's legacy. "We have been wild to dig for the +treasure," Charley concluded, "but we would not touch a spadeful of +earth until you could be with us to share in the excitement." + +"Then you needn't wait another minute," cried the old sailor, who was +nearly as excited as the boys. "Get your spade an' we'll start right +in." + +"We haven't got one," confessed Charley, suddenly crestfallen. "What a +fool I was not to think of that." + +"Golly, I reckon dis nigger goin' to fix up somethin' to dig with +mighty quick," cried Chris, whose eyes were sparkling with anticipation. + +Running down to the canoe, the little darkey was back in a moment with +one of the paddles. "Reckon dis will do," he said, "got to be mighty +careful not to break it, though." + +Armed with the implement, which Chris' thoughtfulness had provided, +they lost no time in making their way to the lone palm. + +The next perplexing question was on which side of the tree to dig. + +"It's as likely to be on one side as the other," Charley declared. "We +might as well start in at random and dig a circle around the tree until +we come to it." + +The others had no better plan to suggest, and Walter, seizing the +paddle, began to throw the dirt away. Luckily the soil was not packed +hard, for even, loose as it was, progress was very slow with the rude +implement he was wielding. At the end of an hour, he was content to +surrender the paddle to the captain, who, when tired, turned it over to +Chris. + +It was slow work and the sun was getting low in the west when the +circle around the palm was at last completed, and the diggers stood +looking at each other with disappointment written on their faces. + +"We must go deeper," Charley declared, "I am certain that this is the +right spot, and the chief would have had no interest in deceiving or +misleading us." + +"We have gone down two feet already," said Walter, in a discouraged +voice, as he started wielding the paddle again. "I guess there is +something wrong with our calculation, Charley." He stopped suddenly +and looked up with a comical look of surprise and anticipation. + +"I struck something," he announced breathlessly, "something kind of +soft and yielding." + +"Go on," Charley shouted in his excitement, and Walter bent to his task +again. + +The removal of a few more shovelfuls of earth exposed to view a large, +dark, hairy object. Stooping, Walter with difficulty lifted it out of +the hole. + +All clustered close around it in their eagerness. + +What had looked at first glance like a large, dead animal, proved to be +a deer-hide stretched on framework, the hairy side out. A few slashes +of Charley's hunting-knife laid open this rude leather box and revealed +to their eager gaze a smaller similar box inside. Charley lifted it +out and cut away the top. + +By the now dim light, they could only see the tapering shapes of +hundreds of long plumes carefully packed inside. + +"There must be all of fifty pounds of them," said Walter, in an +awe-struck voice, "why, they'll make us rich men." + +"Give me a hand to carry them up to the wigwam," said Charley. "Run +ahead, Chris, and stir up the fire so we can see what we have got." + +The excited captain swung the box upon his shoulder and strode forward +hard upon Chris' heels. He laid his burden down close to the fire and +all crowded around. + +One look and a loud murmur of disappointment broke from every lip. + +What the dim twilight had hid, the firelight revealed in all its +disheartening truth. What had been once a beautiful heap of valuable +plumes, now lay an ugly mass of mildew and mould. + +For a moment no one spoke, so keen was their disappointment. At last, +Charley summoned up a feeble smile. + +"Well, we are no worse off than we were before," he remarked with a +voice that he endeavored to render cheerful. + +"That's the way to take a disappointment, lad," said the captain, +heartily. "A pound of meat is worth more to us now than a hundred +pounds of plumes, anyway. Now, Chris, quit your grieving an' see if +you can't rustle up some supper. I reckon we'll all feel better after +a warm bite." + +"What shall I do with them, Charley?" asked Walter, who had remained +kneeling by the ruined treasure. + +"Throw them away, they are valueless," exclaimed his chum somewhat +testily, for his disappointment was almost more than he could bear +cheerfully. + +Walter lifted the leather box and disappeared in the darkness toward +the water. He did not throw it into the stream, however, but after a +moment's hesitation on the bank, descended to his canoe and, shoving +his burden far up under the stern deck, retraced his steps to the fire. + +In spite of their attempts at cheerfulness, the gloom of their +disappointment hung heavy upon them, and it was rather a silent group +that gathered in the wigwam after supper. Chris and the captain soon +sought their beds and ere long their loud, regular breathing told that +they had found solace for the disappointment of the day. The two boys +felt too excited to sleep and sat long talking over their still +perilous situation. + +Suddenly, as on the other two nights, began the now familiar tolling of +the mysterious bell. + +The captain stirred uneasily in his sleep and Chris opened his eyes +drowsily but soon fell off to sleep again. + +"Come outside, Walt, where we can talk without the chance of being +overheard," Charley whispered. + +The two lads stole softly out of the wigwam and down to the water's +edge where they sat down on the grassy bank. + +"Now listen closely," Charley commanded. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +MORE MYSTERY. + +The two boys remained quiet for several minutes listening to the bell's +deep toned tolling. At last Walter remarked, "It don't sound as though +it was very far away from us, not over two miles, I should say." + +"Good," exclaimed Charley with satisfaction, "I was about to ask you +what you thought the distance was. Two miles is about what I had +estimated. We can't say very exactly, for sound is likely to travel +far in this still air. But let us make a liberal allowance for the +stillness. I think we are safe in saying that the sound comes from a +point not more than four miles distant from this island. Now, the next +question is, from what direction does it come?" + +"It's hard to tell exactly, the sound seems to fill the air so, but I +should say that it came from the westward," said Walter after another +moment of careful listening. + +"We agree again," declared Charley, "it is not likely that we are both +mistaken. Now that we have settled the distance and the direction from +which the sound comes, what do you say to starting out in the morning +and trying to solve the mystery?" + +"The captain will not let us go," Walter objected. + +"For this once, I do not intend to consult him," Charley said. "We +will get off before he is awake. We can leave a note saying that we +will be back before dark." + +"Good," exclaimed his chum, "even if we accomplish nothing else, we may +find an island that can be defended better than this one." + +So it was settled and the boys crept back to bed eager for the coming +of the morrow. + +The eastern sky was just beginning to lighten a little when the boys +got up and dressed, collected what cold food they could find, and, +leaving a note where the captain could not fail to find it, stole down +to the canoe and quietly embarked. + +Charley's shoulder was still too sore to permit of his using the paddle +so he made himself comfortable in the bow while Walter in the stern +wielded the blade. + +The canoe was headed around to the westward, as near as they could +determine, for the point from whence had come the tolling of the bell. +"I noticed what looked like a large island, from our camp, about two +miles off and in the direction we are headed," observed Walter as they +glided swiftly away. + +"I noticed it too," Charley answered, "and I do not think we can do +better than start our search there, if it proves to be an island. We +will be there in an hour at this rate. I wish I could spell you, Walt, +but it don't seem right for you to be doing all the work." + +"Nonsense, I am enjoying it," his chum protested, "everything about +this swamp is so novel and strange. See those cute little turtles on +every log, and those curious looking smoke-birds, and did you ever see +anything more beautiful than those trees with their hanging moss and +with every bough full of orchids of every color of the rainbow?" +Walter ceased his paddling for several minutes and the canoe drifted +slowly on while the two boys gazed with delight at the novel beauty +that surrounded them. The dark, stagnant water through which they +drifted was nearly hidden from view by great white and gold +water-lilies and the butterfly flowers of water hyacinths, the trees on +either side stood like beautiful gray ghosts under their festoons of +Spanish moss through which flashed the blazing hues of flowering +orchids. Brilliant-hued paroquets and other birds flitted amongst the +tree-tops, while to finish the delicious languor of the scene the air +hung heavy with the subtle, drowsy scent of wild jasmine. + +"It is the great swamp in its happiest mood," observed Charley, "but +even here under all this beauty are hidden countless serpents and +crawling things, while everywhere under this fair appearance lurks +fever and disease." + +Walter resumed his paddle with a sigh of regret and sent the canoe +flying around a point and away from the scene of beauty. Here the +stream widened out to about half a mile in width and increased in +breadth as they advanced. Half a mile ahead lay the island they were +seeking, its banks rising high above the great lagoon in which it lay. +It was about four hundred acres in extent and its shores were covered +with a dense tropical growth. Between it and the canoe was another +tiny island about two hundred yards distant from its big sister. +Between the boys and the smaller island floated a score of dark masses +like the roots of trees. + +"Alligators," declared Walter as they drew nearer to the floating +objects. + +"I am not so sure about that," said Charley, who was watching the +objects with closest attention. "Sheer off, Walt, and give them as +wide a berth as possible." + +He watched with anxiety as two or three of the strange creatures, as +though impelled by curiosity, swam lazily out towards the canoe. "Give +way, Walt," he cried, "paddle as fast as you can." + +Under Walter's vigorous strokes the canoe shot past the lazily swimming +creatures whose curiosity did not appear to be great enough to induce +them to increase their exertions. + +When they were left behind Charley heaved a sigh of relief. "They are +crocodiles," he explained, seeing his chum's look of surprise. +"Alligators are harmless, generally speaking, but if one of those +fellows should upset you, you'd be chewed up into mince meat in a +jiffy. But here's island number one. I guess we do not care about +landing there now, do we? The bigger one looks far more promising, +let's try it first." + +Walter gave ready assent, and they passed by the little island with +only a casual glance. + +In a few minutes more they had left it behind and had drawn close to +its bigger sister. Choosing a place at which the timber seemed +thinnest they ran the canoe up on shore and fastened it securely. + +With guns in hand they scrambled up the high bank and stood for a +moment surveying the surroundings. From that elevation, they could see +quite clearly for a couple of miles in each direction. Save for the +little island they had passed they could see no other solid land within +the range of their vision. + +Charley noted the fact with satisfaction. "The solution of our mystery +must lie on one of these two islands," he declared, "and the chances +are in favor of this one, so here goes to discover it," and he plunged +into the timber with Walter close at his heels. He had taken no more +than twenty steps when he stopped with an exclamation of surprise and +astonishment, his way was barred by a great wall of stone that towered +several feet above his head. It had once been a fortification of +considerable strength, but growing trees had made breaches in it here +and there, their thrusting, up-growing trunks tumbling its blocks to +the ground, where they lay hidden by covering vines. + +"Whew," whistled Walter as he readied his chumps side, "who could have +built this? It could hardly have been done by the Seminoles." + +"No," said Charley, who was examining the strange wall carefully, "this +stone is all limestone, which is found only along the coast or at a +great depth. It has been brought here from a considerable distance. +Indians may have done the work, but they never did it willingly. If +they did it at all, it was as slaves. But we have no time for idle +speculation. Let's walk along it and see how far it extends." + +But after forcing their way along the wall for almost a quarter of a +mile, at the expense of a good deal of exertion, they gave up the task. + +"I believe it extends clear around the island," Walter declared, "we +can't spare any more time to follow it up; it's noon already. Let's +see what is inside." + +Charley offered no objection, and the two boys climbed through a gap in +the wall and reached the great enclosure. + +At first glance, they could see but little difference between the dense +growth amongst which they stood and that outside the wall, but a closer +examination showed that, while the timber was very thick, it was of +smaller size than that which they had left behind. + +"This was a clearing at one time, years and years ago," Charley said, +"see, there is an ironwood stump there that still shows the signs of an +axe. It takes generations and generations for one of those stumps to +rot." + +"Look, Charley," cried his chum who had pushed a little ahead, "just +see this." + +A couple of strides brought Charley to his side, "A road," he cried in +amazement. + +Straight as an arrow, it extended before them into the depth of the +forest. So well and carefully had its smooth surface been laid that +even the assaults of time and the forest had been unable to dislodge +the great blocks of stone of which it was composed. Vines and creepers +had grown over its surface and the forest trees had met in solid mass +above it, but still it lay intact, a triumph of road building, as solid +and strong as when built. + +With a feeling of awe, the boys moved forward over its hard surface. +They had to stoop continually to avoid branches and the tangled vines +and briers had often to be cut away, but their progress was easier and +far more rapid than it would have been through the forest itself. + +They had proceeded perhaps a quarter of a mile when the road ended +suddenly at the base of another wall. A break in the wall told of an +ancient gateway but the gate itself was gone, probably rotted into dust +by the passage of time. + +The boys pushed through the gap and stopped short with a cry of wonder. +Before them lay an inclosure of perhaps two acres, and in its center +stood a half dozen buildings of stone, all in a fair state of +preservation. Near the building closest to the boys, a sparkling +little spring gushed forth and flowed away down a gentle incline +towards a corner of the wall. + +"Someone must be living here," Walter cried, "see, there are no trees +or vines growing here." + +But Charley stooped and scratched away the dead leaves blown in from +the trees of the forest. "As I suspected," he said, after a moment's +inspection, "this enclosure is paved like the road. My, what workmen +those fellows that did this job must have been for their work to +continue so perfect down to this day! I tell you this thing makes me +feel creepy, Walt." + +"And me too," agreed his chum. "Instead of solving a mystery, we have +discovered a greater one." + +But the young hunters were not the kind of boys to remain long under a +superstitious dread, and they were soon approaching the buildings +before them. + +The first building was the largest of the group. It was constructed +entirely of stone and had been little hurt by the passage of time. Its +doors and windows had, of course, rotted away, but otherwise it +appeared uninjured. Passing through the arched doorway the boys found +themselves in a large apartment divided into two by a stone partition. +Small holes here and there in the walls left little doubt as to the +character of the building. + +"It was their strong house or fort," Charley declared, as he gazed +around. "Here was where they used to gather when danger threatened. +The other buildings are no doubt dwelling-houses where they lived in +time of peace. You take one side and I will take the other and we will +search this one over carefully." + +But although the boys searched closely they could discover nothing to +tell them who had been the builders of this little city in the swamp. + +By the time they had completed their search of the larger building, it +was nearly noon and they sat down in the shade in the great arched +doorway and ate the lunch they had brought with them. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +MORE SURPRISES. + +"What do you make of it, Charley?" Walter inquired, as he munched away +at his fish and yams. + +"The roads, walls, and these buildings were undoubtedly built by the +Spaniards," said his chum, decidedly. "I have seen lots of their work +in St. Augustine, and the West Indian islands, and there is no +mistaking its character. They are the greatest road-builders since the +Romans." + +"But history contains no mention of such a place as this," Walter +objected. + +"Yet here it is, history or no history," Charley replied. "Perhaps all +the voyages of gentlemen adventurers following Columbus were not known +to the historians of the time. Perhaps this place may have been built +by a detachment of De Soto's expedition. We must bear in mind that +Florida was long the favorite land amongst the Spaniards. From the +small number of buildings, I should say that this place was very likely +built by a comparatively small party, using, no doubt, the Indians for +slaves." + +"And the slaves at last destroyed their masters," Walter suggested. + +"I am not so sure about that," replied his chum. "I expected to find +bones in the fort but we discovered none. Perhaps the builders +abandoned this place even after going to so much trouble to fortify it." + +"Maybe we can find something to throw light upon it in the other +buildings," Walter remarked. "While you are finishing your dinner, I +am going to see where that spring goes to." + +Walter followed the little rivulet to where it disappeared in a small +gully under a corner of the wall. Climbing the stones the lad dropped +down lightly on the other side. + +Charley finished his lunch, washed his hands at the spring, and +resuming his seat in the doorway, leaned back upon one of the great +pillars to wait for his chum. The air was soft and warm and the noises +of the swamp stole to the tired lad's ears with a gentle lulling sound. +His eyes slowly closed and his head dropped forward upon his breast and +he slept. + +Quickly the hours slipped away and the sun was getting low in the west, +when Charley awoke. One glance at the declining sun brought him to his +feet, anxiety and dread in his heart. What could have become of +Walter? It took the thoroughly alarmed lad but a moment to reach the +wall where his chum had disappeared. He swarmed up it like a monkey +and dropped down on the other side. But no solid ground met his +descending feet. Instead, he crashed through leafy boughs and landed +in a tangled mass of vines. In the second before the vines gave way +under his weight, Charley succeeded in grasping a limb and swinging +himself in to the trunk of the tree where he found a safe resting-place +between two branches. Below him yawned a gigantic pit, its edge hidden +from view by the clustering trees. + +"Walter," he called anxiously, "are you down there?" + +"Yes," growled his chum's voice, "and I have been here for hours. +You're a nice companion for a man when he gets in trouble." + +"I fell asleep," confessed Charley, sheepishly. + +"Well, don't sleep any longer," said his chum sharply. "Help me out of +this, quick. It is awful down here." + +"All right, be patient a minute and I will have you out," Charley +answered as he climbed nimbly up his tree and reached the edge of the +pit. A moment's search and he found what he wanted, a long, stout +grape vine strong as a rope. He cut off a piece some forty feet in +length, fastened one end to the tree, and dropped the other down into +the pit. "You'll have to pull yourself out, Walt," he called. + +With the help of the grape vine and the aid of foot holds on the trees +growing up from the sides of the pit, Walter succeeded in scrambling +out. His face was pale and there was a look of horror in his eyes. + +"I believe I would have died if I had been compelled to stay down there +all night," he declared in a voice that trembled. + +"What is there down there?" asked Charley regarding his chum curiously. + +"The demon work of the fiends who built this wall," said Walter +fiercely, "It's their old stone quarry. They didn't bring rock from +the coast, they just dug down till they found the kind they wanted. +And Charley, all around the sides, chained to the solid rock, are the +skeletons of the workers." + +"I am right about the Spaniards building this place then," Charley +observed. "That's the way that most Christian nation always used to +treat its captives." + +"Let's go," his chum urged, "I guess my nerve is shaken from being down +there with those skeletons so long. The sun is getting low, anyway. +We will not have time to more than get back home before dark." + +"You're right, we must go, but I wish we had time to go through the +balance of those buildings," said Charley, regretfully. + +The two boys soon regained the canoe and paddled safely past the +floating crocodiles. + +"We haven't solved the mystery, after all," remarked Walter, as he +urged the canoe forward. + +"No, but we have done far better," declared Charley, enthusiastically, +"we have found a place where we will have ample protection in case we +are attacked by the outlaws. I am in favor of moving our camp there +to-morrow morning." + +"Of course that is the wisest plan," Walter agreed, "but since my +experience in that pit I have a dread of the place." + +"That will wear off in time. Hallo, there's our island and there's the +captain and Chris on the bank waiting for us." + +"I expect we will get a good lecture," grinned Walter, "I guess we +deserve it, too." + +But the captain was so delighted over their safe return, that he let +both off with a light scolding. + +Over the supper, the boys related the story of their discoveries amid +exclamations from the captain and Chris. + +The captain readily agreed to their proposal to move camp to the larger +island. "The young chief showed me how to fix signs that would tell +him which way we had gone in case we left the island before he +returned," the captain observed. + +This removed the only possible objection to the plan, and early next +morning the hunters prepared to shift camp. + +The little patch of yams was dug up, yielding several bushels of the +sugary tubers, the remaining ears of Indian corn were plucked from the +stalks, and a large quantity of dry gourds gathered, these, together +with the little that remained of their stock of provisions, were +conveyed to the canoes and our hunters were ready to depart. Before +leaving, the captain arranged the signs agreed upon with the young +chief. These were very simple, consisting merely of twigs partly +broken off and laid to point in the direction they had gone. + +"I reckon he'll see those," observed the captain, "The worst of it is, +though, that Injin Charley ain't likely to overlook them either." + +"That can't be helped," said Charley, "and once we are in our new home, +we will stand some show of being able to defy them. I only wish we had +the two rifles that were lost when the canoe upset. I wouldn't fear +the outlaws at all then." + +"I wish we had more provisions," Walter added. "Chris used the last of +the coffee this morning, and there is not much of anything else left." + +"It ain't no use wishing, lads," declared the captain, "we had ought to +be thankful for what we have. The Lord will provide. Jes' think of +the trials an' dangers He has brought us through already." + +A thoughtful silence, that continued until they reached the island, +followed the old sailor's gentle reproof. + +Although they had been partly prepared by the boys' account of their +discoveries, the captain and Chris were astonished at the sight of the +great wall, the road, and the group of stone buildings. It was plain, +too, that there was a good deal of superstitious dread mingled with +their wonder. + +Charley was quick to note this in their faces and gave them no time to +brood upon their fears. "We have got a lot of work to do," he +declared, as they deposited the loads they had brought up from the +canoes. "I think, we will get along better if we divide it up and go +at it with some system. Now, the captain and I will bring up the +balance of the things, and the canoes,--it will not do to leave them +where the outlaws can find them if they pay us a visit. While we are +doing that, Walt, you pick out one of the buildings for us to +occupy--the fort is too big, we would be lost in it; and you, Chris, +light up a fire and get us something to eat." + +The two addressed, accepted Charley's suggestions, cheerfully, and he +and the captain departed to carry out their own task. When they +returned laden with the balance of the canoe's cargo, Walter was +standing idly by the fire watching Chris prepare the dinner. + +"What, through already?" demanded Charley in surprise. + +"No, just resting," smiled his chum. But the moment the captain's back +was turned, his face became grave, and he gave a warning shake of his +head in Chris' and the captain's direction. + +Charley was quick to catch its significance. "I am afraid that +carrying is too much for my shoulder," he said, quietly, "Chris, you +give the captain a hand with the canoes, and I will look after the +dinner." + +No sooner had the two disappeared, than Charley turned to his chum. +"What's the trouble?" he demanded eagerly. + +"Come and see," said Walter soberly. + +He led the way quickly to the first building and entered the open +doorway, followed closely by Charley. At the threshold, Charley paused +in horror. The room in which he looked was about twenty by fourteen +feet in size. In the center a great slab of stone rested on four large +blocks of the same material. It had evidently once done duty as a +table for at one side of it was a bench of stone, and upon the bench +sat, or rather lolled, four white, ghastly, grinning skeletons. Death +had evidently come to the sitters like a bolt from the sky. One +rested, leaning forward, with the bony claws clinching the table, while +yet another held a pewter mug as if about to raise it to his grinning +jaws. They had evidently been feasting when the grim visitor came, for +before them on the table sat a great stone jug and dishes of crockery +stained and discolored with age. + +"You acted wisely, Walt," declared Charley, recovering his composure. +"If Chris and the captain had caught sight of them, we would never have +been able to keep them on the island. We will have to work quickly and +get them out of sight before they return." + +With deep repugnance the boys immediately began the grewsome task of +removing the bodies. + +"We have no time to bury them now," said Walter, "let's lower them into +the pit; they will not be seen there, and we can bury them at the first +opportunity." + +The lads did not linger any over their task, but quickly bore their +ghastly burdens to the wall. With the aid of grape vines, the whitened +bones were hoisted to the top of the wall and lowered into the pit. + +They had only time to get back to the fire and pretend to be busy with +the dinner when the captain and Chris appeared bearing the first canoe. + +"Now for the other buildings," said Charley, sharply, as the two again +disappeared, "we have got to work lively if we are to finish before +they return." + +From building to building the lads swiftly passed. In all but one they +found ghastly occupants, some stretched out in the posture of sleep, +some sitting at table like the first seen, but all showing that death +had come suddenly and unexpectedly. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +THE CHAPEL. + +The boys worked with the utmost swiftness, expecting every moment to +see the captain and Chris appear, but, luckily, those two, wearied by +their hard work, had paused to rest before returning with their load. + +"Thirty-one," counted Walter as he lowered the last grinning skeleton +into the pit. "There seems a kind of stern justice in their present +position, Charley," he continued. "Now, they are resting side by side +with those whom they tortured and enslaved while living." + +"They paid terribly for their cruelty," said his chum, fingering the +flint arrow-heads he had found by the skeletons. "The whole story is +as plain as print. The thirty men whose bones we have just disposed +of, enslaved and tortured members of what was at that time a great +race, working them as slaves in building these walls, and in that +terrible quarry. I confess to a feeling of admiration for them, in +spite of their cruelty. They must have been great warriors, though so +few in numbers, to hold at bay one of the bravest of the Indian tribes." + +"I wonder why they remained in this awful swamp," said Walter, musingly. + +"Case of necessity, perhaps," Charley replied, thoughtfully. "They had +probably lost many men by the time they reached this island, and had +concluded that to continue on meant utter annihilation, while here +they, with their superior arms and suits of mail, could stand off the +enemy. So they decided to remain and make the best of it. With the +labor of the Indians they captured from time to time they proceeded to +fortify the island and make it more secure." + +Walter gazed at his chum admiringly. "You talk as though you saw it +all in front of your eyes," he declared. + +Charley did not heed the interruption. "Years went by," he continued, +musingly, like one in a dream, "years in which they grew more and more +confident of their own power, and learned to despise their red foes. +But the Seminoles were only waiting with the patience of their race. +Mark the cunning of the savage. There comes a day and night of +feasting and rejoicing in the Spaniards' religious calendar. Work and +worry is laid aside and they gather in their homes to feast and +rejoice. Night comes and as the sun sets the sentries cast a look +around. Nothing is in sight. There is nothing to fear. They join the +merry-makers, and care and their suits of mail are laid aside, and +merriment prevails. The Indians' hour has come. Over the walls swarm +a red horde, creeping towards the unsuspecting feasters. One long +war-whoop, a shower of arrows, cries of agony, and all is over." + +Charley stopped. "I've been talking like a five cent novel," he said, +sheepishly. + +"I'll bet that is just the way it really happened," his chum declared. +"That explains why the fort was empty." + +"Perhaps," Charley said, "but here comes Chris and the captain, and +we'll have to change the subject." + +"I 'spect you-alls don't pay no 'tention 'tall to dis dinner," grumbled +Chris. "De fire's all out, mighty nigh." + +"We are not good cooks like you, Chris," said Charley soothingly, and +the vain little darky grinned at the compliment. + +"Golly, I reckon dat's so," he declared pompously, "you chillens sho' +don't know nothin' 'bout cookin'. Spect you-alls mighty near starve to +death if it warn't for dis nigger. You chillens jes' get out, an' I'll +finish gettin' de dinner." + +The boys, relieved of the cooking, turned their attention to other +tasks. They carried the two canoes into the empty fort and placed them +bottom up in one corner. The other goods they piled up in the shade of +a tree. + +Charley then disappeared but soon came back with a large kettle he had +noticed when removing the skeletons. "It's copper," he said, +exhibiting it proudly, "with a little cleaning it will be as good as +when it was made. We need it for boiling water, for we have got to +clean house this afternoon." + +While he carried the copper to the spring and scrubbed lustily away +with sand to remove the green verdigris with which it was thickly +coated, Walter attempted the manufacture of a mop. Selecting a +straight piece of the root of a scrub palmetto, which grew in abundance +around the wall, he trimmed it with his knife into the desired shape +and size. Laying the piece, thus prepared, upon a large stone, he +pounded one side of it lustily with a piece of rock. A few minutes +sufficed to pound out the pith and leave the harsh fiber exposed. + +By the time the two lads had completed their respective tasks, Chris +announced that dinner was ready and all fell to with appetites +sharpened by the morning's work. + +As soon as dinner was finished, the copper kettle was filled with water +and placed upon the fire. By the time the water had come to a boil, +the party was sufficiently rested to attack the house cleaning. + +The building nearest the fort was selected as their future abode, and +never did mansion receive a more thorough scouring. Walter plied the +brush, while the captain dashed the water about, and Chris wiped the +floor dry with armfuls of Spanish moss. Charley, on account of his +still lame shoulder, was excused from this labor. + +Leaving his companions thus busily employed, Charley took his way to +the building that had aroused his curiosity in the morning, the one in +which they had found no skeletons. + +This building was a trifle larger than its fellows and differed very +little from them in external appearance, except that from its roof +projected a little tower. It was the inside, however, which had +excited our young hunter's curiosity. At one end was a kind of raised +platform and the space between it and the entrance was filled with +benches of stone. Charley reverently removed his hat ad he entered, +for he had guessed the character of the place during his morning visit. +It was a chapel that the hardy adventurers of long ago had erected for +the worship of their Maker. + +Upon the stone altar stood several vessels, likely of gold or other +precious metal for they were apparently untouched by the ravages of +time. Charley gave them hardly a glance but passed on to the end of +the building until he stood beneath the tiny tower. + +One glance upwards, and he uttered an exclamation of satisfaction. +Directly above his head in the little tower hung a large ship's bell. +A part of the mystery of the tolling was solved, but the most puzzling +part remained. + +Charley sat down on one of the stone benches and fell into a deep +study. There was the bell but where was the mysterious ringer? The +bell rope had long ago rotted away. The walls had once been plastered +and were still too smooth to offer a foothold to the most expert +climber. How then to account for the regular nightly tolling? The +mystery had in reality deepened instead of lightened. + +When Charley at last left the building, he was still puzzled in mind +and had decided to say nothing about his discovery to his companions. +Chris and the captain would be sure to view the matter in its most +supernatural light. + +On his return, he found the house scrubbed sweet and clean and the +workers taking a rest after their labors. Feeling that he had not +performed his just share of the work of the day, Charley took upon +himself the carrying in and arranging of their possessions. With these +unpacked and arranged, the room looked less bare and much more cozy and +home-like. + +But Charley viewed their scanty possessions with a trace of +dissatisfaction. Two rifles, two shotguns, a half of their ammunition, +and a half of their scanty stock of provisions had been lost when the +canoe upset. Of their original outfit, the two boys retained only +their pistols and ammunition and the tattered clothes they were +wearing. The captain and Chris still had their four guns but their +clothing was as rent and tattered as the two boys'. Of the provisions +there only remained a little sugar, a few pounds of flour, and a small +strip of bacon. + +"I tell you what it is," said Charley, as he joined his companion +outside, "we have got to do some tall hustling the next two days. We +have got to lay in a stock of food sufficient to last us for at least a +week, and we have got to make some kind of windows and doors for that +building, besides, which, we have got to manufacture some kind of +clothing for ourselves--mine are almost dropping from me." + +"My, what a list of impossibilities!" groaned Walter. "Frankly, I do +not feel as though I could do another stroke of work to-day." + +"No, we are all too tired for further effort to-day," Charley agreed, +"but we must get an early start in the morning. We will get some +boughs for beds, have supper, and knock off for the day." + +"I know just the stuff we want for beds," Walter declared, "there are +lots of the bushes growing just outside the wall." + +The bush Walter referred to, proved to be a species of myrtle with +small leafy boughs of a delicious, spicy fragrance. It grew so +abundantly, that in a few minutes the boys had gathered a large +quantity, which they carried back to the building and spread in four +great heaps on the floor. Upon these their blankets were spread, and +the room took on a cozy, homelike appearance. + +Supper was cooked over the camp-fire outside and by the time it was +eaten, night had begun to fall. The little party at once repaired to +their room. They know that the night air of the great swamp was +peculiarly unhealthy. Already they had exposed themselves far too much +to its baneful influence. + +They stretched out on their soft, fragrant couches and talked cheerily +over the events of the day and their present situation. Not since they +had left the camp on the point, had the boys felt so bright and +hopeful. They were well housed, none were sick, they were all together +once more, and even the threatened danger from the convicts did not +cause them great uneasiness. They felt confident of their ability now +to keep the outlaws at bay until help arrived. + +But their content was not to last long, for soon, harsh, and menacing +in its nearness, rang out the tolling of the bell. + +The captain, brave as the bravest in most any kind of danger, turned a +sickly white and sunk to his knees in prayer, while Chris, trembling in +every limb, buried his face in the blanket to shut out the awful sounds. + +"Come, Walt," whispered Charley, and the two boys stole out into the +darkness of the night. A few steps brought them to the chapel, and +pistols in hand they circled around it in opposite directions, but +their eager eyes caught no sight of moving forms. + +"It must be on the inside," declared Charley, as they met near the +door. "Let's go in and see." + +It took all their courage to venture into that dim, mysterious +interior, but the boys never hesitated, but stepped boldly in. Back +and forth they paced the grim interior, searching every nook and +corner, and found nothing. Not even a sound fell on their strained +hearing, save only the strong, steady tolling above their heads. + +Charley stood under the little tower and gazed longingly up into its +darkness where the bell, under some mysterious power, swayed steadily +to and fro. + +"I wish I could get up there, I'd tie the thing down," he declared. +"If this keeps up, we will have our hands full to keep Chris and the +captain on the island." + +"Come away, Charley," said Walter, nervously, "this thing is getting +positively uncanny. I declare I am beginning to feel a sympathy for +Chris' terrors." + +The two lads retraced their steps to the hut where they found the +captain, in spite of his superstitious fears, preparing to sally out in +search of them. + +For long the two boys sat trying to argue the captain and Chris out of +their superstitious fears. They might as well have tried to argue +against fate itself. + +"Aye, lads," the captain would say in reply to their logic, "I know +spirits seem against reason to shore-staying folks, but sailors know +better. Now there was Tom Bowling who took to hearing bells during his +watch on deck, an' not two days later, poor old Tom was missing." + +"Went crazy and jumped over-board," muttered Charley, but the captain +shook his head with the air of a man who had no doubt as to the nature +of his friend's fate. + +It was not long after the bell ceased tolling that the last of the +little party fell into a troubled sleep. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +PREPARATIONS. + +At dawn Charley arose, feeling unrefreshed after his broken rest, lit +the camp-fire, started breakfast, and then awakened the others. + +"We had better divide the duties for the day," he said, as they +dispatched their light breakfast. "The two things most pressing, are +to secure more food and make our windows and door bullet-proof. I +suggest that we divide into two parties for the day, one to hunt, and +the other to keep camp and work on our building. Suppose we call for +volunteers for each party." + +"I stay an' do de cookin', an' maybe catch some fish for supper," said +Chris, promptly. + +"I reckon I had better stay with Chris," decided the captain, who had +in a measure recovered from his scare of the night. "You lads are +nimbler an' better shots, an' consequently, likely to have better luck +in the hunting." + +This arrangement delighted Charley and Walter who were eager to explore +the island. Pistols were oiled, cleaned and carefully examined. Their +own guns being at the bottom of the river, the boys had to borrow arms +of Chris and the captain. + +Walter took Chris' light shotgun while Charley shouldered the heavy +rifle belonging to the captain. Thus equipped they were prepared for +either small or big game. + +Leaving the clearing, the boys plunged into the forest and headed for +the interior of the island. Their progress was at first very slow, the +forest being almost as tangled and thickly grown as that which they had +encountered near the water. As they advanced, however, the trees +gradually grew fewer and further apart until, after a half hour's slow +traveling, they emerged from the forest into a kind of prairie country, +consisting of stretches of flat grassy land broken by clumps of timber. + +"This is just the place for game," declared Charley, "this grass seems +to be a kind of wild rice, there had ought to be birds here without +number." + +As he spoke there was a whirl of wings, Walter's shotgun spoke twice, +and a brace of plump partridges struck the ground with a thud. + +The report of the firearm woke the prairie into life. Hundreds of +birds rose from amongst the tall grass. For the next few minutes, +Walter was busy with his gun, while Charley with his heavy rifle could +only stand idle watching. + +"Never mind, my turn will come," he declared. "That little popgun you +have will not be any good against big game." + +When the frightened birds had at last passed beyond range, the boys +gathered up those that had fallen victims; four partridges, three +doves, and a full dozen of black and red rice-birds. + +"Good," approved Charley, as he surveyed the feathered heap. "Those +are all fine eating and will provide us with a couple of dandy meals. +The only fault I have to find is that they use up too much ammunition. +If we use it up at this rate, we will have none when the outlaws come." + +"We can make traps for the birds," Walter suggested. "I know how to +rig up a figure-four trap that will fool the wisest of them." + +"Well, we will not bother with traps this trip," Charley said. "We +have got enough birds for the present. We can come again to-morrow and +fix up for them." + +"What shall we do with these?" Walter inquired. "We don't want to turn +back yet, and they are too heavy to carry with comfort." + +"Leave them tied up in the first tree we come to and get them on our +way back," his chum answered. + +With this object in view, the two boys turned their steps towards the +nearest clump of timber. At their first step amongst its dry twigs and +branches, there was a crash amongst the bushes and a form of yellowish +brown shot past them like an arrow. + +Charley's rifle flew to his shoulder and its sharp crack woke the +echoes in the little wood. "It's a deer and I have got it," he +exclaimed, dashing off after the animal which was staggering and +wavering as it ran. + +Walter paused only to hang his birds high up in the crotch of a big +tree, and followed after his chum. + +But the deer, though wounded and losing blood at every step, was really +running faster than either of the boys calculated. It soon became +evident to both that they would have to work hard to overhaul the +wounded creature before it entered the main forest on the other side of +the prairie. Once amongst the dense growth, it would soon lose its +pursuers. + +Walter was only a few feet in the rear of his chum and running at the +top of his speed when Charley stopped so short and unexpectedly that he +collided with him with such force as to bring both to the ground. + +"Look," exclaimed Charley breathlessly, as he pointed ahead, "did you +ever see such a repulsive sight?" + +Charley had stopped just in time, not fifteen feet from where the two +had fallen, was a deep, saucer-like depression in the ground. In its +center, where the ground was soft, and muddy, was a writhing, twisting, +tangled mass of snakes of dozens of kinds, though the dirty, +sickening-looking, stump-tailed moccasin predominated. There must have +been thousands of serpents in the mass which covered a space twenty by +thirty feet, from which came the sibilant hiss of puff adders, and a +strong, nauseating odor. + +"It's an awful sight," shuddered Walter after one glance, "and just +think how close you were to running into that mass. You would never +have got out alive." + +"I would never know what struck me," Charley agreed. "I expect there's +a full quart of the deadliest of poisons distributed among those +beauties." + +"Ugh," said Walter, "the sight of them makes me sick. Come away, +Charley." + +"They have done us considerable damage anyway," Charley said, as they +pressed on giving the snake-hole a wide berth. "I cannot see anything +of the deer, can you?" + +"No, I expect he got safe into the forest while we were delayed. We +might as well follow up his tracks for a ways although I guess it's but +little use." + +The fugitive had left a thread of scarlet blood behind him so the boys +had no trouble in following the trail. + +At the very edge of the forest, the boys stopped with a cry of delight. +A motionless heap of yellowish brown lay half in half out of the fringe +of trees, the shelter of which the poor creature had striven so +gallantly to gain. + +The boys wasted no time in rejoicing but at once fell to work with +their hunting-knives to remove the skin. This done, they cut off the +valuable parts of the carcass and bound them up in the hide for +transportation back to camp. When the task was completed the noon hour +had been reached and the boys kindled a fire and broiled some of the +venison. + +"That was a lucky kill for us," observed Charley as he attacked another +juicy steak. "It will give us fresh meat for several days. What we +cannot use before it spoils, we can cut thin and dry. The hide +properly prepared will furnish us with a couple of stout fishing lines +and a shirt for one of us." + +After a brief rest the boys resumed their exploration. They had no +present need for more game and were loath to waste any more ammunition. +The wild folks of the forest seemed to be aware of the fact and showed +themselves fearlessly. + +"We won't starve for lack of game," declared Walter, "in the last half +mile, I have seen coons, possums, deer, and a wild-cat, to say nothing +of the thousands of birds." + +"Yes, it's a sportsman's paradise," agreed Charley, "it has probably +not been hunted since the Spaniards' time. Likely these wild creatures +have never seen a human being before." + +The boys had been pushing onward into the forest as they talked. By +the growing denseness of the jungle they surmised that they were +approaching the island's shore. This surmise proved correct, for about +a quarter of an hour after leaving their lunching place, they came out +on the bank directly opposite where they had landed on the island. + +This shore was very much like the other and the boys soon began to +retrace their steps. + +As they neared the place where they had left their venison hung in a +tree, their ears were greeted with a curious sound of mingled grunt and +growl. + +With their guns ready for instant use, the boys crept cautiously +forward. An exclamation burst from them as they came in sight of the +tree. Squatted round it in an angry, eager circle was a drove of at +least twenty wild boars; great, fierce-looking animals with dangerous +looking tusks. They were sniffing longingly, and looking up at the +suspended meat. + +"Don't shoot, Walt," cried Charley, but his warning came too late. + +Without pausing to think, Walter had discharged both barrels of his +shotgun at the huddled animals. + +The effect was not what he had anticipated. The shot glanced +harmlessly off their thick hides, and with grunts of rage, the whole +drove charged for the smoke and sound. + +"Get up a tree," shouted Charley, as he noted the effects of the shot. + +Walter did not wait for a second bidding but swung himself up the +nearest tree which happened to be a huge spreading live oak. Charley +swarmed up after him in such haste that he dropped his rifle at the +foot of the tree. He was not a moment too soon for a large boar made a +lunge for his legs just as he drew them up. + +"Now we are in for it," he exclaimed in disgust as he found a +comfortable seat in the fork of a limb. + +"Oh, I guess they'll soon get tired and go away," Walter said +cheerfully. + +But the boars seemed to have no such intention. They ranged themselves +around the foot of the tree as they had around the venison and sat +looking longingly up among the branches. + +"I am going to try a shot at that big fellow that seems to be the boss +of the gang," said Walter after an hour had dragged away without the +animals showing any signs of leaving. + +"Don't do it," Charley advised, "you can't kill him with that small +calibered revolver, and it will only make them madder than ever." + +Walter put back his revolver with a sigh. "I guess you're right," he +admitted, "but, I declare, it makes me mad the way that big brute is +leering up at me." + +Wearily the hours dragged away, the boys getting cramped and weary in +the tree, and the besiegers showing no sign of abatement in their +interest. + +The darkness found two, very tired, hungry boys seated in the tree +while the boars still grunted in a circle around them. + +With the rising of the moon came the distant tolling of the chapel bell +and the boys looked worriedly at each other. + +"The captain and Chris will be frightened to death with that thing +tolling and we absent," Walter said. + +"Yes, the captain will be sure to believe that we are all dead," +Charley agreed. "There is something unearthly about that ringing, but +of course there is a natural cause for it if we could only discover it." + +"After our experience last night I am almost ready to agree with the +captain and Chris," said Walter. + +"Except for its worrying those two, I would not mind it in the least," +Charley declared. "I am more upset by our position here. I guess we +will have to stay all night, those fellows below show no signs of +leaving." + +"What's that?" cried Walter, excitedly. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +A TERRIBLE NIGHT. + +A shrill piercing scream, like the cry of a tortured soul, rang out of +the forest, rising clear and trembling above the tolling of the bell +and the noises of the night. + +The boys looked at each other with white, frightened faces. + +"A panther," Charley cried, "a panther, and we penned up here helpless +as babes." + +"Look," said Walter, eagerly, "look at the boars." + +The great animals were stirring uneasily and their hoarse, threatening +grunts had dropped to a kind of frightened whine. Again the scream +rose shrill and clear, and, with a grunt of fear, the big leader +charged into the forest followed by the rest. + +"They are afraid of the panther, and I don't blame them," Charley +exclaimed. "Come, we must get out of here in a hurry." + +The boys slid to the ground as fast as their stiffened limbs would +permit, picked up Charley's rifle, and hastily cutting down the +venison, plunged out of the forest onto the prairie. + +The screams, rapidly drawing nearer, hastened their footsteps, but, +fast as they traveled, the sound continued to draw closer. + +"It has got a sniff of the venison and is following us up," Charley +declared. "We can never get away from it, and there is small chance of +our being able to kill it in the dark. We may as well stop right here +where there is a little wood and build a fire, that is our only chance." + +Charley had chosen this halting place wisely, for a large dead tree lay +on the ground, where he had stopped. + +Hastily the boys tore up a heap of dry grass and piling broken limbs on +it, lit the pile with a match. + +The dry stuff roared up with a flame not a minute too soon, the +flickering light revealed a crouching form not thirty feet away. With +a snarl of rage the creature retreated from the blaze and began +circling the fire from a distance. The soft pattering footfalls could +be easily heard. + +The boys crouched close to the fire filled with apprehension that +gradually decreased as they saw the panther feared to approach. Thrice +Charley fired at the dim skulking form, but, in the darkness, his +bullets went wide of the mark, and he stopped wasting more ammunition. + +"Let's set fire to the tree itself," Walter suggested, "it will make a +bigger fire, last a long time, and save us the trouble of gathering +wood." + +"Good," exclaimed Charley, and seizing a couple of blazing brands he +thrust them under the tree's trunk. The dry wood caught like tinder +and soon the whole tree was aflame. + +"I hope they will see it at the camp," Walter said. "If they do, they +will know we are still alive." + +As their fear of the panther decreased, the boys began to feel hungry +and tired. The venison was unwrapped and some thick steaks were cut +off and broiled over the fire, and from them the lads made a hearty +meal. + +They felt greatly refreshed after their hearty repast but they were +still very tired and sleepy. They strove to converse together and keep +awake but the fatigue of the day, the heavy meal, and the warmth of the +fire proved too much for them and every now and then one would catch +the other nodding. + +"There's no use of both of us sitting up all night, when one is all +that is necessary to keep an eye on the fire," said Charley, sleepily. +"Let's make up a bed of the prairie grass and take turn about sleeping +and keeping watch." + +Walter heartily agreed to the suggestion and they proceeded to make up +their couch without loss of time. They did not have to go outside the +circle of firelight for their mattress, for the wild rice grew all +around the blazing tree. All they had to do was to pull it up in great +handfuls and stack it before the fire. + +Suddenly Charley gave an exclamation and leaped back out of the grass. +"Come out of that grass, Walt," he cried, "I have been bitten by a puff +adder. I heard it hiss." + +"Oh, Charley," cried his chum in terror, "what can we do?" + +"Quick," commanded Charley, "open one of your shotgun shells and take +out the shot." While he had been speaking the lad had slipped one leg +out of his pants and exposed the wound to view. It was only a tiny red +puncture of the skin midway between knee and hip, but the bitten one +knew that tiny place was more dangerous than a rifle ball. Like a +flash, he drew his hunting-knife and cut out a chunk of flesh as big as +a hen egg where the wound had been. "Give me that cartridge," he +commanded, his teeth gritting with pain. + +Walter passed over the open shell and Charley emptied its contents of +powder into the open cut. Quickly, he applied a match to the black +grains and they caught with a hiss, there was a tiny cloud of black +smoke and a whiff of burning flesh. + +Walter sprang to his chum's side and caught him, as he staggered and +reeled under the awful pain. + +"Gee, but that was a plucky thing to do," he cried. + +"I guess I got it done in time," murmured Charley, through pale lips. +"It was the only thing to do. I would have been dead in half an hour +otherwise--and such a death. But I guess I've got the best of it, I +cut out that piece before the poison had a chance to get into the +circulation, I think. Give me a hand to bind up the cut before +anything gets into it." + +Walter hastened to comply and bound up the gaping cut as well as he +could with the means at his command. While Charley lay back and +gritted his teeth to keep back the moans of pain. + +"Strange the place don't bleed any," said Walter, curiously. + +"The heat of the powder flash cauterized the cut ends of the veins and +closed them up," Charley explained. "I have seen the same thing done +before and the wound never bled." + +"Is it always a good thing to do?" his chum inquired. + +"It is useless in some cases. It all depends upon the kind of snake +and where the person is struck. I never knew a case of a person +recovering when hit by a genuine Florida rattlesnake. Puff adders and +moccasins are deadly enough, but they are mild beside the rattler. The +rattler's fangs are so long that they strike deep and the quantity of +venom injected is enormous, some of it is almost instantly taken up by +the veins punctured. I do not believe that anything but instant +amputation would save the life of one struck. But all bitten do not +die equally soon. I have known a man struck in the ankle where the +circulation was poor, to live for several hours, while another struck +in the neck while bending over a flower, died almost instantly. The +poor fellow did not have time to straighten up even. But he was lucky +in dying quickly. There is no death more painful and horrible than +that from a rattlesnake bite." + +"What loathsome creatures," shuddered Walt, "and the state is accursed +with them." + +"They are few in number compared with what they used to be," Charley +remarked, "and I'll bet you can't guess what has thinned them out so." + +"The clearing up of the state and their wholesale destruction by +settlers," Walter suggested. + +Charley smiled in spite of his pain. "What settlers destroy in a year +do not amount to a ten thousandth part of the number born. Each mother +snake has upward of twenty-five little ones at a time. Birds, +especially the blue jay, kill a great many but their worst enemy is the +Florida hog." + +"The hog?" exclaimed Walter, in surprise. + +"Yes," Charley affirmed. "If you want to clear a patch of ground of +snakes, just turn in a drove of hogs, they will do the work for you in +short order. They kill and eat the most poisonous snakes without the +slightest hurt to themselves. Either their thick hide saves them, or +else they are immune from the venom." + +"No more Florida pork on my bill-of-fare," declared Walter in disgust. + +Pain and excitement had driven all thought of sleep from both boys' +minds and they sat close together by the fire and talked the night away. + +As the slow minutes slipped away, Walter watched his chum's face in an +agony of apprehension for any sign that the subtle venom was getting in +its deadly work. But the hours passed by and, although Charley was +suffering considerable pain, there was no indication that any of the +poison had passed into his system--the lad's prompt act had saved his +life. + +Dawn came at last and found two weary waiting boys, one of them weak, +pale, and haggard. + +As soon as it was light enough to see, Walter made his way back to the +edge of the forest, and cut a strong forked limb to serve as a crutch +for his chum. + +Before leaving the fire, the boys cooked and ate a couple more venison +steaks which gave them fresh strength and courage. + +Walter shouldered the guns and venison and staggered on in the lead +under his heavy load, while Charley hobbled painfully on behind. + +They had just crossed the remainder of the prairie and were resting a +bit before plunging into the forest on the other side, when Chris and +the captain broke out from the clump of trees and hailed them with +shouts of joy. + +Chris relieved Walter of a part of his load while the captain assisted +Charley forward, and the little party made good time on their homeward +way and before long reached the clearing. + +Chris' and the captain's haggard faces showed they had passed as +sleepless a night as the two lads. + +"Golly," said Chris, gravely, "when night comes an' you chillens don't +show up, an' de haunts begin a-tollin' dat bell, I spects Massa Captain +an' dis nigger went most crazy. When we seed you-alls' fire a little +later, we feels some better, but, Massas, I jes' tell you dat daylight +seemed powerful long comin' to dis nigger." + +Amid the others' breathless interest, Walter related the adventures of +the night. When the captain learned of Charley's accident, he brought +out the brandy bottle and insisted on his drinking what remained of the +liquor. His wound was then bathed, clean and bandaged again and he was +made to lay down upon his couch in the hut, while Walter stretched out +on his own bed for a nap. + +"Good," exclaimed Charley, as he caught sight of the windows and door, +"you and Chris made a good job of those, captain." + +The captain nodded in satisfaction. "I reckon it will take some +battering to get in there," he observed. + +Inside the hut, the two workers had planted large posts of palmetto +that effectually blocked the windows save for the cracks between the +posts. The door was similarly barricaded, save for one post left out +for present ingress and egress. It stood close to hand, however, ready +to be slipped into the hole provided for it, at an instant's notice. + +Charley suddenly staggered to his feet. "I can't waste time lying +here," he exclaimed. "Why, this is the day we expect the outlaw." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +PREPARATIONS. + +"Sit down, Charley," said the captain sternly, "are you crazy, lad? +You can do nothing in your present state, and if you go and make +yourself sick, you will cause us all a deal of trouble and worry." + +Charley sank back upon his couch. "But there is so much to be done, +Captain," he protested. + +"Now look here, lad," said the old sailor, "say those fellows have got +their boat finished and start for that island we left this morning, it +will take them quite a while to get there and I expect they will look +it over a bit before following us. Take the time spent there and the +time it will take them to reach here, an' I reckon it will be late in +the afternoon before we see anything of them." + +"It won't do to take any chances, Captain. We had ought to be ready +now." + +"Go ahead and say what you want done and we will do it while you +sleep," said the captain. "But if you persist in getting up, I'll be +hanged if I'll do a stroke of work, outlaws or no outlaws." + +"Me neither," chimed in Chris. + +"Better go to sleep, Charley," advised his chum. "I am going to get a +nap, myself. I know I'll be able to work better for it." + +Charley gave in with an unwilling sigh. "All right, I suppose I'll +have to do as you all say." + +"Tell us your plans and we will see that they are carried out," the +captain said. + +"We cannot keep those fellows from landing on the island," said the +young leader, thoughtfully. "There are so many places where they can +come ashore, and we are too few to guard the entire coast. I do not +think we can even hold the walls against so many. There are more gaps +in them than we could defend. I have thought it all over and I believe +that all we can do is to confine the defense to this house. We ought +to be able to hold this place until the Indians come." + +"My ideas exactly," approved the captain. + +"It's the only sensible thing to do," Walter agreed. + +"To be successful, it is necessary for us to have a good supply of food +and water. I intended to dry the venison, but there is not time to do +that, you will have to cut it into thin strips and smoke it, that will +not take long and it will keep for several days. That big copper and +all the gourds should be filled with water and brought inside. When +that is all done, we will have food and drink to last us a week with +care." + +"Chris and I will see to it all," said the captain arising. "Is that +all, lad?" + +"We had ought to keep a lookout at the landing so as to know when they +come and be ready for them." + +"We'll 'tend to that when we get the other chores done. It's too early +to expect them yet, anyway. Now you lie down and get a nap, lads, and +don't worry, Chris and I will look out for everything." + +Charley laid back and closed his eyes, obediently, while Chris and the +captain passed out of the hut to attend to the tasks set them. + +The two boys were soon fast asleep. + +It was noon before Walter awoke, sat up, and looked around him. He +noted that the workers had already completed their tasks; long strings +of smoked venison strips were hung down from the roof, gourds and +copper kettle were brimming full of sweet, clean water, and all of the +guns had been freshly cleaned and oiled. + +Treading softly so as not to awaken his chum, Walter passed out of the +hut. + +The captain and Chris were busily engaged in trying to dispatch a pot +of venison stewed with yams, and Walter lost no time in joining them. + +"Well, we are all through," observed the captain as he took a second +helping of stew. "We would have called you to dinner, but I reckoned +the sleep would do you more good. How do you feel now?" + +"All right," Walter answered. "You should have left some of that work +for us to do, Captain." + +"I reckon you will have enough to do before we get a chance to leave +this island," said the old sailor with a sigh. "If you are through, +Chris, take your gun and go down to the landing and keep a sharp +lookout. Those fellows had ought to be here this afternoon, some time. +I will come down and spell you in a couple of hours." + +"You had better go in and get a nap yourself, Captain, while there is +nothing doing," said Walter. "It may be all hands on deck to-night." + +"I reckon I'll take your advice, lad. I was awake all last night +worrying about you boys and I can't stand loss of sleep now like you +young fellows. I will just take forty winks. Call me when it is time +to spell Chris." + +Walter sat waiting until the old sailor's loud snoring proclaimed he +was asleep. Then filling a small gourd with water from the spring, he +made his way into the fort, where he righted one of the overturned +canoes and fished out a large package from under the stern and undid +its fastenings. "I wonder they did not notice it when they carried the +canoe up," he muttered. + +For a long time he was busily engaged with the contents of the package +and the gourd of water. At last he gave a sigh of triumphant +satisfaction which died away as he heard Charley's voice calling his +name from the hut. + +With an exclamation of impatience, he emptied out the water, quickly +bound up the package again, and thrust it back in its old place under +the canoe's stern deck, then turning the canoe again bottom up, he +passed out of the fort whistling, carelessly. + +Charley in the door of the hut eyed him curiously as he approached. +"What has happened to you?" he exclaimed, "you look as happy as if you +had discovered a gold mine." + +"Well, I haven't," laughed his chum, "how's your leg now?" + +"Stiff as a ramrod, and, whew, how it hurts," Charley said with a +grimace of pain. "I can't bear my weight on it." + +"You don't want to try to," said Walter, severely. "Just go back to +your bunk and keep still. All the work is done, now, and I am going +down to the landing right off to relieve Chris so that he can get a +little sleep." + +Charley obeyed and Walter made his way down to the landing where he +found Chris sitting on a log watching intently. + +Walter took the gun from the tired little darky and sent him up to the +hut to rest. + +The hours passed swiftly by without any signs of the outlaws. When +darkness fell, Walter abandoned his now useless post and made his way +up to the hut where he found his three companions gathered around the +camp-fire outside. + +"Have you seen anything of them?" Charley inquired anxiously as he came +in sight. "Not a sign," Walter answered. "I think you have done wrong +in lighting that fire," he continued gravely. "There was a bare chance +that they would have given up the chase after not finding us at the +chief's island. If they are anywhere near, though, that fire will give +us dead away." + +"They would not have given up the chance of getting the plumes they +have worked so hard to obtain as easily as all that," said his chum +decidedly. "Remember, they believe that Big Tiger and his son are +still with us and that the rest of the Indians are far away. No, they +would not have given up so easily after the trouble they have been to." + +Walter said no more but helped himself to an ear of corn and a piece of +fish and fell to eating. + +The silence that had fallen upon the party was broken by an exclamation +from Chris. + +"Golly, dar dey is," he cried. + +Far off in the direction of the chief's island, a tiny shaft of light +pierced the darkness. + +"They are on the island we left," exclaimed Charley, "that's their +camp-fire." + +"No, no," said Walter. "See, it is getting bigger, I bet they have +fired the wigwam." + +In a few minutes all the party agreed with Walter, there was no +mistaking the cause of the pillar of flame that rose high in the air on +the distant island. + +They watched it in silence until it died down and nothing remained but +a faint glare. + +"Let's go to bed," said Charley at last. "If they are on the chief's +island, they will not bother us to-night." + +But after a short discussion, it was decided to stand guard and watch, +Charley and Walter to stand on guard until midnight, and then to be +relieved by Chris and the captain. + +The two sentinels climbed up on a portion of the wall that lay in the +shadow of a big tree and from which they could command a good view of +the rest of the wall and inclosure itself. + +"I have been thinking that the unsavory reputation of this island may +keep those fellows from coming here," Walter observed in an undertone. + +"It will likely keep Indian Charley away, and I am more afraid of him +than all the balance. I do not think it will stop the rest though," +Charley answered, and they lapsed again into cautious silence. + +The minutes had lengthened into an hour when there fell upon their ears +the now familiar tolling of the bell. + +"I am going to have another look in that chapel," declared Walter, as +he slipped down from his perch. + +"I'd like to go with you," said Charley, wistfully, "but my game leg +won't carry me that far." He watched his chum until he disappeared in +the shadow of the church. + +Walter hesitated for a moment at the chapel doorway. It required more +courage to enter that gloomy, black, mysterious interior, alone, than +it had when he and Charley were together. Summoning up all his +resolution he passed through the gaping doorway into the blackness +beyond. All was dark and still inside, the bright moonlight shining +through the high little windows threw patches of ghostly light upon the +white, ghastly walls. Walter felt his flesh creep as he made his way +through the darkness up towards the bell. + +He stumbled often and bruised his knees against the stone seats but at +last he reached the little platform and stood beneath the little tower. +He could not see up into its gloomy interior, but the great bell above +him tolled mournfully on. + +For a space Walter stood silent, a superstitious dread creeping over +him. "Dreaming, dreams no mortal ever dared to dream before." A +horror grew upon him, a feeling that something, some being +antagonistic, repugnant to his very nature was sharing the darkness +with him. The strokes of the bell above him seemed to grow horribly +menacing to his feverish fancy. He struggled with himself to throw off +the mantle of terror descending upon him but the feeling grew and grew. +With a rush of unreasoning anger he flung up his gun and fired at the +swaying bell. + +A shrill, human-like cry rang out, the bell ceased tolling, and a heavy +body crashed down at the terrified lad's feet. + +Throwing out his arms Walter sank to the floor in a dead faint. + +He opened his eyes again to see Charley bending over, examining him by +the light of a flaring torch. + +"What, what was it?" he whispered. + +Charley shifted the torch and held it close to a dark figure stretched +out on the stone floor. + +Its glare lit up a face strangely human, and bearing the apparent mark +of centuries in its furrowed features and wrinkled skin. + +"A big monkey," gasped Walter in astonishment. + +"Yes," said Charley gently, "an old man monkey, old, old, very, very +old." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +THE ENEMY. + +Walter broke into a weak, hysterical laugh, "and I took that for a +spirit," he exclaimed. "Well, our mystery is solved now." + +"Yes," his chum admitted, looking down at the dead bell-ringer with a +kind of regret, "still there are some points about it which still +remain a mystery, and always will. There is no record of there ever +being monkeys found in this state. It must have been brought here by +one of the Spanish gentlemen as a pet and taught the trick of ringing +the bell, and yet, that theory is unbelieveable. Consider, Walter, if +such is the case, this creature has reached an incredible age." + +Walter bent down and flashed the torch in the monkey's face. "He looks +as though he had lived for centuries," he exclaimed, "his face is like +that of a shriveled mummy, and see, that look of cunning and +aged-wisdom in his features. Charley," continued the tender-hearted +boy with a break in his voice, "I feel as badly about it as I would if +I had shot a man. Think of the poor, harmless creature, remaining true +year after year to the one task he knew how to perform, and then to be +shot down at last while doing it." + +"Nonsense, this is no time for sentiment. We must get back to our +post, we have left it altogether too long. You will have to help me +back, I guess, Walt," Charley said. + +"How did you get here?" demanded his chum, the current of his thoughts +suddenly changed. "Why, your trousers' leg is wet with blood and you +are as pale as a ghost." + +"I couldn't have walked a hundred feet under ordinary circumstances, +but that scream brought me here on the run. Now that the excitement is +over I feel weak as a kitten," Charley answered. + +"You're going back to bed and stay there until that wound is completely +healed," declared Walter as he put his arm around his chum and assisted +him out of the chapel. + +Before he could get the exhausted lad to the hut, he had become a dead +weight in Walter's arms. Walter let him down gently upon the ground +and ran to the hut where he aroused Chris and the captain, and the +three bore Charley inside and laid him on his couch. + +Captain Westfield bathed the wound and bandaged it afresh. His face +was very grave as he examined the unconscious lad's skin and pulse. +"He has a high fever," he declared anxiously. "I thought yesterday +from the way he was yawning and stretching that he was in for an attack +of swamp fever. With a dose of it on top of this hole in his leg it is +likely to go hard with the poor lad. I'd give a sight now for some +brandy and quinine." He glanced up at Walter's haggard face. "You get +to bed this minute or we will have two on our hands," he commanded. +"Chris and I have had a good nap and we'll keep watch the balance of +the night, though, I 'low, there ain't much use in doing it." + +Walter was too near collapse, himself, to offer objections and dropping +down on his couch was soon sleeping the sleep of exhaustion. He woke +again just as the sun arose feeling rested and quite his old vigorous +self, but his spirits soon fell as his chum's meanings fell upon his +ears. + +Charley was tossing restfully upon his couch in a high fever and the +wounded leg was greatly swollen and flushed an angry red. + +There was nothing he could do to relieve the sufferer, so Walter with a +heavy heart stole out of the hut. + +The captain and Chris were busy over the fire preparing breakfast. +They greeted Walter with grave faces for Charley's condition was +resting heavily upon them. + +"If I only had some quinine I could check that fever," sighed the old +sailor. "He is healthy and clean-blooded and I reckon he'd get over +that bad leg in time, but he can't fight them both. How in the world +did he come to start the wound to bleeding again?" + +Sadly Walter recounted the adventures of the night. He told of their +previous discovery of the bell, their first fruitless search of the +chapel, and of his venturing in alone and the shooting of the +bell-ringer. + +As he proceeded with his narrative the captain's face grew crimson with +mortification and chagrin, as he saw his much-asserted ghostly theories +shattered. + +The effect on Chris' humorous nature was different. The first +expression of relief on his little ebony face was succeeded by a broad +grin. + +"Golly," he giggled, "an' me an' Massa Capt was scart nigh to death by +a poor ole harmless monkey." + +Few men like to be placed in a ridiculous position and the captain +turned on the little darky in a rage. + +"Shut up, you grinning little imp," he shouted, "or I'll thrash you so +you can't sit down for a week. What call have you got to be giggling +over the death of one of your ancestors?" + +Chris checked the flow of words on his tongue, but sat rocking back and +forth in glee muttering, "Golly, only a monkey. A poor, old, +he-monkey," until the irate captain chased him out of ear-shot. + +Leaving the captain and Chris to the settlement of their trouble, +Walter took one of the canoes' paddles and proceeded to the chapel. +Just outside its wall he dug a deep grave, and carrying the faithful +old monkey to it he lowered him gently to the bottom and filling up the +grave again, heaped a little pile of stones on the mound. + +To the tender-hearted lad there was something pathetic and touching in +the way the poor creature had met its death. + +Charley's illness cast a gloom over even the irrepressible Chris, and +breakfast was eaten in sad silence. + +As soon as he had finished, Chris shouldered one of the rifles and +headed for the landing to watch for the outlaws, while the captain and +Walter repaired to the hut to attend to the stricken lad. + +There was little they could do to relieve his sufferings beyond +sponging his hot body with a wet cloth and giving him sparingly of the +water that he called for incessantly. At last he sank into a kind of a +stupor and the heavy-hearted watchers stole outside for a breath of +fresh air. + +Walter at last broke the silence that hung like a cloud upon them. +"I've been thinking," he said, "that it might not be a bad plan to meet +the outlaws at the landing. We could dispose of several before they +could get on shore." + +"No," said his companion decidedly, "they would only land in some other +place and maybe cut us off from the hut. You mark my words, lad, +Charley thought over every side of this question before he laid his +plans an' we can't do better than follow them. The most we can hope to +do is to hold this hut until Little Tiger comes with his people." + +Their further discussion was cut short by the sudden appearance of +Chris. + +"Dey's comin', Massa, dey's comin'," shouted the excited little darky. +"Dey ain't more dan a half mile away." + +Gathering together the cooking utensils scattered around the fire, the +three entered the hut and soon had the last post secured in its hole, +effectually barring the doorway. + +Through the cracks in the windows and door, the hunters watched for the +appearance of the foe. + +An hour of suspense passed slowly by, then suddenly there came the +noise of a falling stone and an evil face peeped cautiously over the +wall. + +Walter fired quickly but missed, and the face disappeared with +ludicrous haste. + +For some minutes the outlaws remained quiet, no doubt conferring +together, then a tiny square of white was hoisted above the wall, to be +quickly followed by the youngest outlaw who dropped coolly down into +the inclosure bearing the flag in his hand. + +"We can't fire upon him," declared Walter as Chris raised his gun. "He +bears a truce flag and is unarmed. You keep a sharp watch on the +others and I will talk with this fellow. If I am not mistaken, it is +the one Charley was so impressed by." + +The young outlaw approached the hut at a careless sauntering walk, +waving the flag jauntily in his hand. He noted the barred openings and +protruding rifle barrel with a cool smile and strolled around to the +door. + +"Hallo in there," he called, cheerfully. "I want to talk to you." + +"Go ahead," Walter answered grimly, "we're listening." + +"Come now, that's no way to receive a visitor," said the young fellow, +lightly. "I want to talk with that bright-eyed chap I talked with +before." + +"You can't," Walter said, sadly. "He's dying of fever." + +"Why don't you cure him up?" demanded the envoy, sharply, "the swamp +fever is nothing if it's treated right." + +"We haven't a grain of medicine," Walter replied. "But state your +errand," he added sharply. + +"Look here," said the young outlaw after a short pause. "I talked +those fellows into this conference idea so as to get a good chance to +speak with you fellows. I am sick of that gang. I am not as bad as +they, and I am clean disgusted with them. I want to join forces with +you fellows. I know they are bound to finish you sooner or later, but +I would rather die with gentlemen than to live with murderers." + +"We cannot afford to take any chances," Walter said decidedly. + +"But you are taking chances, chances on the life of your friend," said +the outlaw sharply. "I can cure him, I tell you. I studied medicine +and I have a few things in my bag." + +"Can we risk it?" said Walter, wavering, and turning to the captain for +advice. + +"We can risk anything for Charley's sake," said the old sailor, +eagerly. "We can shoot him at the first sign of treachery. Let him +in, Walt." + +"I have got to go back for my things," interrupted the outlaw, whose +keen ears had caught the low conversation. "I'll be back again in a +minute. I'll fix up some excuse to return. I guess pretending that +you are considering surrendering will do as well as anything else." + +Walter gazed after the young fellow's retreating form with reluctant +admiration. "He moves like a trained athlete and he hasn't got a bad +face," he admitted. "I pray he does not prove to be our undoing." + +"We must take the chance, lad," said the captain. "Better remove the +post so he can get inside quick." + +In a few minutes the outlaw strolled carelessly back towards the hut. +A yell of rage went up from the convicts behind the wall as he darted +through the opening into the building. + +Walter quickly replaced the post and turned to watch the newcomer. + +Without a word, he had marched over to where Charley lay and knelt by +his side with his finger on the lad's pulse and his keen eyes searching +his face. + +After a moment's examination he turned to face the others. "Your +friend is nearly dead," he said quietly. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX + +THE ATTACK. + +"He has a bare chance yet," declared the outlaw, noting their looks of +grief. "I will do what I can for him, but I wish I'd been here an hour +sooner." + +He took a little package from the bosom of his shirt and spread the +contents out upon the table. "I couldn't bring much without arousing +suspicion," he said regretfully, "but I guess I can make out with what +I've brought." + +With deft fingers, the newcomer measured out a powder from one of his +packages and administered it to the unconscious lad and next turned his +attention to the wounded leg. Emptying a spoonful of liquid from one +of his bottles into a gourd of water he began to bathe the inflamed +limb. + +The hunters could not but admire the deftness and skill with which the +stranger worked. His long tapering fingers seemed to have the +suppleness and deftness of a woman's and his whole attention seemed +concentrated upon his patient. + +The hours passed slowly away, each seeming a day in length to the +anxious hunters. The convicts remained hidden behind the wall and +there was nothing to do but to keep a sharp lookout. At noon the +watchers made a light lunch on the smoked venison and water, but the +young outlaw waved away the offered food and remained engrossed by the +patient's side. At intervals of a few minutes all during the +afternoon, he administered medicine to the sufferer and repeatedly +bathed the wounded leg with the solution he had prepared. + +The sun was barely an hour high, when he arose from the side of the +couch with a weary sigh. "I think he will live," he announced, "he was +almost gone for a while, though. I gave him enough strychnine during +the first few hours to have killed a normal man, but his heart had +weakened so that the stimulant hardly raised his pulse a single beat. +The heart action is better now, and with close attention he had ought +to pull through." + +"How can we ever repay you for what you have done?" said the old +sailor, with tears of thankfulness in his eyes, while Walter wrung the +stranger's hand warmly. + +"The saving of many lives will hardly atone for one I took once, though +the deed was done in self-defense," said the outlaw gravely. "I am +glad to have been of help in this case." He glanced around the room +with a return of his former light careless manner and nodded +approvingly as he noted the stores of provisions and water. "Good," he +exclaimed, "you are better prepared than I expected and certainly in +much better shape than my former gentle companions dream. Why, it will +be impossible for them to take this place by force." + +"Can you tell us of their plans, Mr.----," inquired Walter, hesitating +for want of a name. + +"You may call me Ritter, James Ritter," supplied the outlaw promptly. +"I am not ashamed of my real name but my relatives had cause to be +ashamed of its owner in his present condition. Their plans are almost +self-evident, my lad. They will wait until dark and then slip over the +wall, some will stop in that big building while the balance will make +their way around to a building on the other side of you. They will +then have you surrounded and have only to watch and wait to starve you +out. They have plenty of provisions with them and can get that spring +behind the fort without exposing themselves. It is only a question of +time before you will have to give up, and then may the Lord grant us +all a speedy death." + +"Don't be too sure of it, friend," observed the captain. "The Lord +never deserts those who fully believe and trust him. Those villains +may be defeated yet." + +The outlaw grinned as he looked around the room. "My dear friends are +badly fooled," he chuckled with glee. "They believe the chief is with +you, and he is not here. Why, they have already spent, in imagination, +the money that they are going to derive from the sale of his plumes. +What a shock it will be to them when they learn that the bird has +flown. I wish I could see their faces when they hear the news." + +"The chief is dead," said Walter, "do you think they would go away if +they knew the truth?" + +"No, I do not," replied Ritter, after a moment's thought, "in spite of +all you might say, they would have a suspicion that you had secured the +plumes yourselves, and, anyway, they are so mad that they will not +leave until they have finished the job." + +The hunters were favorably impressed with the frankness of the former +outlaw. He had the speech and the manners of a gentleman, and his +earnestness and apparent sincerity went far towards removing their +suspicions, and, much to their surprise, they found themselves soon +talking to him with the freedom of old acquaintances. + +Ritter chuckled with delight when they told him of the young chief +going for aid. "That gives us a fighting chance," he declared, +joyfully. "We must put ourselves on short rations and try to hold out +until they come." + +"Where is Indian Charley?" asked Walter, "is he with the others?" + +"No, they could not induce him to set foot on the island. The place +evidently has a bad name among the Indians and I am not surprised after +what I have seen. Even the convicts are puzzled and a little alarmed +by the walls, courts, and buildings. They none of them know enough +about history to lay them to the Spaniards as you folks have probably +done. Charley, the Indian, swears that there is a mysterious bell +which tolls every night. Have you heard anything of the kind?" + +Walter briefly related their adventure with the bell-ringer, omitting +any reference to the captain's superstitious fears, much to the old +sailor's relief. + +Further conversation was interrupted by darkness and preparations for +the night. + +Chris built a little fire near the door where the smoke would pass out +through the cracks and prepared a stew of venison and some broth for +Charley. + +Taking turns the besieged made a hearty meal which did wonders in +renewing hope and courage. + +It was decided that they should take short shifts of watching during +the night, two in each watch. It fell to Walter to share the watch +with the young outlaw, for which he was not at all displeased, for he +was greatly interested in the strange character, and their turns at the +watch passed quickly in pleasant conversation. + +The outlaw spoke freely of the incident that had brought him to the +convict gang, claiming firmly that the deed which had made him a felon +had been done in self-defense, but, owing to lack of witnesses and to a +well-known enmity between him and the dead man, the jury had brought in +a verdict of murder in the second degree. + +Walter, under the spell of the man's attractive, strong personality, +could not but believe his assertion. + +At the end of their watch, Walter awoke Chris and the captain and +stretched out for a nap, but the outlaw never closed his eyes during +the long uneventful night. When not watching, he was hovering over +Charley's bedside administering medicine or working over the bitten +leg. Yet daylight found him as cool and fresh as ever, apparently +unaffected by his long vigil. + +To the hunters' great delight, day found Charley visibly improved. He +had fallen into a deep sleep, his body was wet with profuse +perspiration, and the swelling of the limb had greatly decreased. + +They showered thanks upon the outlaw until he was visibly embarrassed +and begged them to say no more. + +The morning passed as had the night, without any hostile demonstration +by the convicts. Smoke curling up from the fort and from a building on +the other side of them told the besieged that the enemy had taken up +their positions during the night as Ritter had prophesied. Evidently +they were willing to wait for their triumph rather than risk any lives +by trying to take their victims by assault. + +When Chris started to make a stew for dinner, Ritter stopped him. "We +can't spare any more water for cooking," he declared. "I have used a +good deal on the patient, and the gourds are already almost empty. Our +only hope of life is in husbanding our water and it would be wise to +put ourselves on an allowance now. I figure that there is enough in +that big copper to allow each of us a pint and a half per day for ten +days." + +The others saw the wisdom of his proposal and immediately agreed to it, +and they made their dinner of roasted yams, smoked venison broiled +before the fire, and a few swallows of water. + +Once during the afternoon a convict tried a shot at a crack between the +posts barricading the window. The bullet passed through, missing +Ritter's head by a scant two inches. The former outlaw never winced +but began singing mockingly, "Teasing, teasing, I was only teasing you." + +A perfect storm of bullets answered his taunt. + +"The rascals don't appreciate good singing," he said with a grin. + +Charley's condition continued to steadily improve under the outlaw's +careful ministrations and by nightfall, he was conscious once more and +comparatively free from pain. + +Night brought no change in the condition of the besieged. Watches were +arranged as on the night before, and those off duty retired as soon as +darkness had fallen. + +"Do you believe in premonitions," asked Ritter, gravely, as he and +Walter stood peering out of the windows. "Do you believe that coming +events cast their shadows before them?" + +"I hardly know," answered Walter, thoughtfully, "sometimes I almost +believe that we are given warnings of coming events, but I can never +quite convince myself that the happenings confirming, for instance, say +a dream, are anything more than coincidences." + +"A few days ago I would have laughed at such an idea, but all day I +have had a vague presentiment of coming evil which I have found +impossible to shake off," explained his companion. + +"It's your liver, I dare say," said Walter cheerfully, "for my part, I +feel that we are going to get out of this hole all right, and live +happy ever after as the story books say." + +"There can be but little happiness for me in the future, however, if we +come out of this affair," said his companion sorrowfully. "Death, I +sometimes think, would be the best thing that could befall me. I am a +life convict, you remember, found guilty by a jury, and condemned to +pass a life at hard, degrading labor in company with ruffians of the +lowest, most debased type. It is not a future to look forward to with +pleasure!" + +Walter remained silent, he could not but admit the truth of the man's +words and reflect upon the misery of such a life would naturally bring +to a man of education and refinement like this one. "You might escape, +go to some other state, and begin life anew," he at last suggested. +"After what you have done for us, and believing you innocent as we now +do, we should do all we could to help you to get away." + +"The life of a fugitive would be worse than that of a convict," +declared the other bitterly. "In every face I would read suspicion, +and dread of detection and arrest would haunt me all the time." + +Walter could say nothing more to encourage this strange, unfortunate +character, and with an effort the other shook off the black mood that +had fallen upon him. + +"I guess you're right, it must be my liver," he said lightly. "After +all there is something in the old jockey saying, "There is nothing to a +race but the finish." If I live a convict I can at least die a +gentleman." + +A sympathetic silence fell upon the two that lasted unbroken until +their watch ended. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +THE PARLEY. + +Only once during the night were the watchers disturbed. Two convicts +endeavored to worm their way up to the hut unseen but were quickly +spotted by the captain who emptied his revolver at them without any +other effect than to cause them to take to their heels. Aside from +this incident the besieged were not disturbed. + +The convicts were evidently keeping as keen a watch as the besieged to +guard against the possibility of any of them escaping. A hat which +Chris squeezed out through a crack between the posts was promptly +riddled with bullets. + +Morning found the hunters and their new friend weary with suspense and +their long inactivity. All longed for a stroll in the open air, a +chance to stretch their legs, and an unlimited supply of water to +drink. It almost seemed that their meager allowance of a pint and a +half each for the twenty-four hours did little more than increase their +thirst. They could not safely alter their unpleasant situation, +however, and they wisely made the best of it and did not grumble. + +They had one great consolation in Charley's rapid progress towards +health. He was gaining with astonishing rapidity and bid fair to be +completely recovered in a few days. + +With the coming of another day, the convicts opened an irregular fire +upon the doors and windows of the hut. Many of their bullets passed +between the cracks in the post barricades and imbedded themselves in +the walls. The defenders husbanded their ammunition, firing only when +a convict exposed arm or leg. They were satisfied now of the +impregnability of their building and their main concern was to keep out +of the way of chance bullets. + +The morning was well advanced when Walter, who was watching at a +window, felt a curious sensation in the soles of his feet, and, +startled, looked down to find that he was standing in a tiny pool of +water. With a cry of alarm he sprang to where the big copper sat. A +glance confirmed his worst fears; a stray bullet had torn a great hole +in the vessel near the bottom, and of their precious store of water +barely a cupful remained. + +It was a staggering blow to all. Food they could exist without for +several days, but in that warm, humid climate life could not be +sustained without water for any length of time. Before forty-eight +hours had passed they would be confronted by the alternatives of +surrendering to the convicts, or to suffering the awful tortures of +thirst. + +"We must hold out as long as we can," declared Ritter, "something may +turn up. Even death by thirst would be better than torture at the +hands of those fiends. What little water is left, I would suggest that +we save for the sick lad. We can stand thirst longer than he." + +The rest agreed heartily to this proposal and the little water +remaining was poured into an empty gourd and placed where it would be +safe from bullets. By tacit consent they agreed that their loss should +be concealed from Charley, who had slept throughout the incident. They +knew him well enough to be sure that he would not touch the little +water remaining if he knew they were suffering from thirst. + +To add to the troubles of the little party, the day proved very hot and +sultry, not a breath of air stirring. By noon all were very thirsty, +and when night came without bringing any relief from the heat, they +began to suffer severely for lack of water. + +The hot night dragged slowly away to bring another breathless sultry +day, the close of which found the little party almost at the limits of +their endurance. Since the night before they had been unable to eat +the dry venison as it greatly increased their thirst. Their tongues +and throats were dry and swollen and every nerve and atom of their +heated bodies clamored for water. + +As night fell, Ritter got out the punctured copper and busied himself +in plugging up the hole. + +"What are you doing that for?" Walter inquired. + +"I'll tell you when the rest are asleep," whispered the young outlaw, +"there is no use alarming them." + +It was late in the night before the others, tortured by fear and +thirst, fell into uneasy slumber, and Walter and Ritter were free to +continue their conversation. + +"We are in a desperate condition," declared Ritter. "In this heat we +cannot exist very much longer without water. Something has got to be +done at once if we are to hold out another forty-eight hours." + +"But what can we do?" said Walter, hopelessly. "It's sure death to +venture outside." + +"I am not so sure about that," said the other, "anyway, I am going to +try it, anything is better than the tortures we will soon be suffering." + +"You'll be killed," exclaimed Walter. "I'll go, Ritter, I can be +spared better than you." + +"Death by bullet is better than death by thirst," said his companion +coolly, "and you cannot be spared as well as I. Your companions are +fond of you and your death would be a terrible blow to them, while I am +only an unknown convict whom no one will miss. But I am getting +tragic," he continued, lightly. "I really think there is a good chance +of success, the night is dark, and the very boldness of the attempt +will be in its favor. They will not dream of one of us venturing right +under the shadow of their fort." + +Although he spoke with apparent sincerity, Walter was not deceived. +Both knew the hopelessness of such an attempt. In vain did Walter +attempt to dissuade the other, Ritter remained firm. + +"We will remove a post from the doorway as quietly as possible and you +do your best to protect me with your rifle," he said. + +With a heavy heart, Walter assisted the other to remove the post. He +had grown very fond of Ritter in the few days they had been together. +He admired him for his bravery and the cheeriness and sweetness of his +disposition under trials and suffering. He gave the outlaw's hand a +long, friendly clasp at parting. + +"May God bring you back safe and sound," he whispered, brokenly. + +With a return pressure of the hand, Ritter dropped to his hands and +knees and wound his way out of the doorway into the darkness. Walter +watched his progress from the doorway with an anxious heart. He saw +him crawl a considerable distance from the hut, then rise to his feet +and saunter carelessly towards the fort. The very boldness of the act +made it successful. The convict on guard no doubt thought the figure +one of his companions, needlessly exposing himself to a bullet from the +hut, and only wondered vaguely at his taking needless risks and perhaps +speculated dully as to what was the nature of the large object he bore. + +Carelessly, Ritter sauntered slowly past the fort and approached the +spring. There was no guard posted on that side of the fort and he +partly filled the copper and kneeling by the cool water took a deep +drink and bathed his feverish face in the refreshing liquid. Half of +his mad task was performed, but, as he fully realized, the riskiest +part was yet to come. + +Taking another long drink, he lifted the heavy copper and, bearing it +in front of him so as to conceal it as much as possible by his person, +he walked slowly back towards the hut. + +Two-thirds of the return was covered in safety when the convict guard +shouted with an oath, "Come back, you fool, do you want to get the +daylights shot out of you?" + +Ritter's answer was a taunting laugh as he bounded towards the hut. + +The guard's rifle cracked and the fleeing man staggered drunkenly but +sped on, while the convict working the lever of his Winchester with +remorseless cruelty, emptied its contents after the fleeing figure. + +At the doorway of the hut, Ritter crumpled to his knees. + +"Take the copper," he cried to Walter, "I'm hit." Walter quickly +placed the vessel inside, then, heedless of the rain of bullets, +dragged the wounded man inside. + +The others had been awakened by the noise and were quickly at his side. + +"Chris, give me a hand to lay him on my bed; Captain, replace the post +in the doorway," Walter commanded with heartsore calmness. + +The wounded man opened his eyes as they laid him gently on the couch. + +"It's no use bothering with me, old chap," he said, quietly. "I'm hit +in a dozen places and I'm doctor enough to know that I'm going fast." + +Walter buried his head by the dying man's side and sobbed dryly. + +"There, there," the other said, soothingly, "don't feel bad about it. +It's just what I wished for. I'm going to die like a gentleman." + +Walter hushed his sobs with an effort to catch the feebly spoken words. + +The wounded man's eyes closed, and Walter held his breath for a second +thinking him dead, but in a moment he opened them again and smiled +faintly, "There's nothing to a race but the finish," he whispered. + +A little longer he lay still breathing heavily. Suddenly by a mighty +effort he raised himself on his elbow, his eyes shining with a strange +light. "Not guilty, your honor," he said in a firm voice, then sank +back still and white. + +"He's dead," said Walter, brokenly. "He had his wish; he died like a +hero." + +They covered the still form reverently with a blanket, and the silence +of bitter grief settled on the little party. The others had not become +so intimate with the dead man as Walter, but they had grown to admire +him greatly, and the thought that he had given up his life in their +service added to their grief. + +Walter's suffering was intense and it was well that his mind was of +necessity soon forced into other channels. + +The convicts, exasperated at the way they had been outwitted, opened a +heavy continuous fire upon the hut, under cover of which several +attempts were made to carry the hut by assault. But the assaulting +parties were easily discouraged by the steady fire that met them at +each attempt. + +"It looks as if they were getting desperate," said the captain. "I +reckon they know now that we can hold out for a long time yet, and they +are gettin' discouraged," and his companions agreed with him. + +Towards morning the convicts' fire slackened and gradually ceased. + +Just as day was breaking, the distant report of a rifle was borne to +the ears of the besieged. + +Charley, who was now able to leave his bed, listened eagerly. "It's +Indian Charley's rifle. I know the sound," he declared, "ten shots; I +wonder what it means." + +From the fort, came an answering volley of ten rifle shots. + +"It's a signal," cried Walter. "I wonder what it's for." + +"Hallo there in the but, we want a parley," hailed a rough voice from +the fort. + +"All right," answered Charley, "send forward one man, unarmed." + +A convict emerged from the fort and advanced towards the hut with +fearful, hesitating footsteps. + +"Don't be afraid, we won't hurt you," Walter called to him +encouragingly. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +HELP. + +"Say what you want and be quick about it," said Charley sharply, as the +convict halted close to the hut. + +"Me and my mates want to know if you are ready to call this thing +quits," the man growled. "We agree to leave you the island all to +yourselves right off if you won't fire on us while we are leaving." + +Charley turned to the others for counsel. + +"There's something in the wind," he declared in a low tone. "This +proposal coming so soon after that signal means something. Maybe the +Indians are coming." + +"We can't bank on that, it's hardly time for them yet," observed the +captain. "Better agree to their offer, lads. I guess they are just +tired of the game." + +"We can't well stop them if they have taken a notion to leave," said +Walter. "I agree with the captain. Let them go." + +Charley turned to the man. "We agree, provided you leave at once," he +said. + +The convict, with a surly growl, turned and rapidly retraced his steps +to the fort. + +The convicts were in evident haste to be gone, for their envoy had +hardly got inside before they began to file out, each bearing his gun +and other belongings. + +Within ten minutes from the envoy's visit the last of the outlaws had +scaled the walls and was lost to sight. + +The hunters waited for half an hour before they removed the barricade +from the door and let the fresh cool morning breeze into their stuffy +prison. Even then they did not venture outside, for they still feared +some trick on the part of the convicts. As the moments, passed quietly +by, however, without any sign of their foes, their fears began to +decrease. + +"I am going to find out what has become of them," Walter at last +declared. "Unless we make certain now of what they are up to, we will +be afraid to venture outside for a week to come." + +His companions in vain tried to dissuade him from his rash project, his +mind was made up and he turned a deaf ear to their words. + +Shouldering one of the rifles, he made his way to the wall, clambered +over it nimbly and disappeared on the other side. + +It was over half an hour before Walter returned. His companions had +begun to feel uneasy about him when he appeared on the top of the wall +and dropped down inside with a hearty cheer. + +"Come out, all of you," he shouted, "there's nothing more to fear from +the convicts." + +The little party crowded around him with eager questions. + +"I followed them down to the landing," he said. "They had just shoved +off in their dugout and were headed back for their old camp and +paddling away for dear life. + +"I had not long to wait before I discovered the reason for their haste. +Far up the stream was a big fleet of Indian dugouts coming down, there +must have been forty of them at least. Then all was as plain as print: +the convicts were aiming to get back to their ponies and make their +escape on them. Likely they would have done so if Indian Charley had +only warned them a little sooner, but they were too late." + +"Go on," said Charley, eagerly, as Walter paused in his story. + +"They had only got as far as that little island near this one, when +another big fleet of canoes appeared just ahead of them. I guess they +realized that they stood no show to make a successful fight for it, +crowded up as they were in the dugout; anyway, they ran ashore on that +little island and threw up mounds of sand and are lying behind them." + +"Have the Indians attacked them?" Charley demanded. + +"Not a shot has been fired. The Indians have formed a circle around +the island with their canoes just out of good gunshot and seem to be +waiting." + +"Let's all go down to the landing," proposed Charley, eagerly, as +Walter concluded his account. + +The others were as excited as Charley and readily agreed to the +proposal. + +They found the situation just as Walter had described, the little +island with the band of convicts on it with the circle of canoes around +it. + +"They won't stand much show if the Indians attack them in earnest," +observed the captain, "there ain't a bit of shelter on that island and +it ain't hardly a foot above water." + +As the little party gazed eagerly upon the scene, the next act in the +grim tragedy occurred. + +"Look," exclaimed Charley, "they didn't fasten their canoe and it is +drifting away. They are so busy watching the Indians that they haven't +noticed it yet." + +A yell of dismay from the convicts soon told that they had discovered +their loss. A few dashed down to the water as though they would plunge +in after the drifting craft, but they evidently lacked the courage to +face the bullets that would surely greet them if they ventured the act, +for they stopped at the water's edge and soon returned to the +breastworks of sand. + +An Indian paddled out from the circle of canoes and securing the +drifting craft, towed it back to the others. + +"Just look," exclaimed Walter, "I wonder what the Seminoles mean by +that move." + +The others gazed eagerly with many exclamations of astonishment. + +The circle of besieging canoes was breaking up, first one dropped out +of the circle, then another, until the whole fleet had formed in one +long, unbroken line. Paddles flashed in the water and the long line +came sweeping gracefully on past the little island. + +"You may hang me to the cross-trees, if they ain't agoin' to let them +scoundrels go," cried the captain in disgust. + +"It certainly looks like it," admitted Charley, sadly. "All they have +to do is to swim to shore and make their way out on foot." + +The big fleet came sweeping steadily on, headed directly for the +landing where the little party stood. + +An exultant yell burst from the convicts as they saw the dreaded attack +so quickly abandoned. + +A hundred yards from the landing, the fleet of canoes seemed to slacken +speed, many of the Indians stopped paddling, and the long line was +thrown into confusion. + +An Indian in the leading canoe stood up and seemed to be haranguing the +others. + +"That's Little Tiger," said Walter eagerly, as he recognized the +orator. "He's making a speech." + +The hunters could, of course, make nothing of the speaker's words, but +the tone of his voice told him that the young Indian was terribly in +earnest. His clear, resonant voice seemed to now ring with despairing +scorn, now sink to touching appeal. + +"My, but he's a born orator!" exclaimed Charley in admiration. "It +sounds as though he was lashing them up to some desperate undertaking." + +The Indian at last ceased speaking and resuming his paddle sent his +craft forward, his companions following in his wake. + +He grounded his rude canoe at the hunters' feet and sprang out with the +light, lithe leap of a panther. + +"How," he said, gravely, extending his hand to each in turn. + +The hunters shook the small, shapely hand with genuine pleasure. They +were all struck by the change in the young Indian. In the short time +since they had seen him last he had changed from a care-free stripling +to a thoughtful chief whose word was law with his people. His manner +had become grave and reserved, and there was about him an air of +conscious power that well became his manly bearing. + +He glanced from one to the other of the little party with keen eyes. +"It is well," he said, in his clear, musical voice. "All here, none +missing, not even the little one with a face like night. The Little +Tiger's heart was heavy with fear lest he should come too late. But +neither the jackal's tribe nor the spirits of the night have harmed his +friends." + +"Did not the young chief fear to land on the island of the spirits?" +asked Charley with a smile. + +The Indian drew himself up proudly. "Shall a Seminole fear to follow +where the paleface dares to tread?" he demanded. + +"Even the palefaces were filled with fear," said Charley, quickly, +regretting his attempt at pleasantry, "but they found that they had +been only children frightened at shadows. They have slain that which +made the noises full of mystery." + +"Does the young white chief speak with the tongue of truth?" asked the +Seminole, eagerly. + +"Even as he would be spoken to," answered Charley, gravely. "If the +Little Tiger will come with his paleface friends, they will show him +many wonderful things." + +For a moment the young Indian hesitated, the fears bred in him by +tradition struggling with his curiosity, but curiosity conquered. +Turning to his followers, who had all drawn in to the landing, he gave +some sharp commands in his own language. They stepped ashore with +evident reluctance and there was considerable murmuring amongst them. +The chief looked them over with a scornful eye. + +"Some of my warriors are not men, but squaws in men's clothing," he +said, bitterly. "Their blood is like water in their veins with fear." + +The murmuring Seminoles grew silent under their chief's scornful gaze, +and when he moved forward with his white friends they followed closely +in the rear. + +On the way up to the wall, Charley explained to the young Indian about +the bell and its nightly ringer. + +The chief listened with relief and satisfaction on his face and quickly +communicated the news in his own tongue to his followers. Immobile as +were the Indians' faces, they could not conceal entirely their relief +and pleasure at the explanation of what had been to them a life-long, +fearful mystery. + +Little Tiger was astonished when he saw the ancient road through the +forest, and, at the sight of walls and buildings of stone, he exhibited +a childish delight. "This is an island worthy of being the home of a +great chief," he declared. "In the big wigwam of stone (the fort) the +Little Tiger will rest in peace when not on the hunt, and the squaws +shall make of this dirt of black, great fields of yams and waving corn. +It is good, that which the palefaces have done; how can their red +brother reward them?" + +"By lending them one of his warriors to guide them back to where their +ponies and goods are waiting," answered Charley, promptly. + +"It shall be done," said the chief, "though the hearts of their red +brothers will be heavy at parting. Their hearts were filled with +gladness with the hope that the palefaces would bide with them and take +unto them squaws from among the Seminoles." + +The captain was on the point of exploding with indignation at the +thought of an Indian squaw, but Charley spoke up quickly. + +"Little Tiger does his friends great honor, yet, though their hearts +are heavy at the thought of parting, they must go." Charley glanced at +the captain and added mischievously, "He with the gray hair on face and +head has, without doubt, many squaws amongst his people whose hearts +are longing for his return." + +The old sailor glared at the speaker in speechless indignation. + +"There cannot be too many hands to till the fields," observed the +chief, gravely. "I will give him another squaw to take back with him +to his wigwam." + +Charley silenced the embarrassed captain with a shake of his head. +"The chief is kind," he said, "but squaws are not as men, there would +be great enmity and hair-pulling between the white squaws and the red, +and when squaws quarrel the wigwam is sad for the warrior." + +The chief nodded gravely. "The young white chief speaks truly," he +said. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + +THE SEMINOLES. + +The conversation on the part of the hunters had so far been conducted +by Charley. Walter had remained silent, busily thinking over the +wrongs that had been done them by the convicts. He could not forget +the still, cold form in the hut that had been robbed of life by the +murderers' bullets. He was not usually a vindictive boy, but, as he +thought of Ritter's noble act and sudden death, his passion steadily +grew and at last he turned scornfully to the young chief. + +"Little Tiger speaks with the tongue of a man, but his deeds are those +of a squaw," he declared, bitterly. "Are he and his braves afraid of +the murderers of his people and the slayers of his father that they +leave them to escape in peace and safety?" + +"They will not escape," said the young Indian, his face darkening with +anger at the savage taunt. "A man's death for a man, but jackals shall +die like jackals. With hearts of terror and blood turned to water in +their fear, they shall die a death more horrible than the palefaces can +give them." + +"You have offended him, Walter," said Charley, as the young savage +walked proudly away. "Why couldn't you be more patient? I have felt +all along that he had some plan for dealing with the convicts." + +"I suppose I have put my foot in it," said Walter regretfully, "but +it's no use crying about it now." + +The Indians were already lighting fires and preparing breakfast, but +the hunters had a task before them which they felt they must perform +before they could touch food, and they immediately set about it. + +In the shade of a majestic live oak, they dug a deep grave and in it +laid to rest the body of the unfortunate Ritter. Their eyes were moist +as the earth covered the remains of the young hero. + +Little Tiger rose to meet them as they approached the group of Indians. + +Walter walked up to him with outstretched hand. "I am sorry for my +angry, foolish words," he said. "When sorrow bears heavy on the heart, +the tongue grows bitter." + +The young Seminole grasped the offered hand with evident pleasure. +"Even squaws forgive and forget, and a warrior should be nobler than a +squaw," he said, sagely. "The palefaces shall be seated and share the +food of their red brothers." + +The hunters would gladly have declined, but could not well do so +without giving offense, so they seated themselves in the circle +surrounding the steaming kettle containing the food and with inward +qualms partook lightly of the stew. + +There was a kettle to every fifteen Indians, and their manner of eating +left much to be desired. Spoons and forks they had none, but they +solved the problem by dipping their hands into the pot and fishing out +the portions desired. With true courtesy, the guests were given the +first dip into the pot. + +As they ate, the hunters had an opportunity to study their hosts more +carefully than they had yet done. + +They were all splendid specimens of savage manhood. Not one was less +than six feet tall, and each was shaped and muscled like an athlete. +All wore the usual Seminole dress, a long shirt belted in at the waist, +moccasins, and turbans of tightly wound red handkerchiefs. They were +extremely neat and cleanly in appearance, a virtue not common with +Indian tribes. + +There were a few squaws among the company, but they did not tempt a +second glance. They were wooden-faced, slovenly-looking creatures +almost disgusting in appearance. They were loaded with string upon +string of colored beads forming a solid mass, like a huge collar, from +the point of their chins down to their chests. + +"Which one have you picked out for your own, Captain?" whispered +Charley. "That big one over there seems to have her eye upon you." + +The old sailor flushed with embarrassment. "Look out or they'll have +you," he cautioned fearfully, "I kinder feel that big one has singled +me out, an' I don't want to encourage her none." + +The Indians seemed to regard the day as a holiday to celebrate the +laying out of the spirits and the adding of a large fertile island to +their domain. + +The morning was given over to feasting and to running, jumping and +wrestling matches. Only the young Indians indulged in these contests, +the warriors sitting gravely looking on. + +Our young hunters tried their strength and skill with the Indian lads, +but, although they were stronger and more nimble than most boys of +their age, they found that they were no match for the young Seminoles. + +While the boys were enjoying the contests, the captain sat moodily +apart, keeping a worried eye upon the squaws. + +With a mischievous twinkle in his eye, Charley drew aside one of the +Seminole lads, whom he had found could speak English, and whispered +eagerly to him. + +The Indian lad's bright, beady eyes twinkled as he listened, and, when +Charley concluded, he nodded his head and slipped away into the group +around the fire. + +"Look, Walt, oh, look," shouted Charley a moment later, "look at the +captain, oh my, oh my," and Charley rolled on the grass in wicked glee. + +The young Indian had done his work well. A dozen of the squaws had +formed a ring around the old sailor and were slowly closing in. The +captain had struggled to his feet and with red face and horrified eyes +was waving his arms frantically, shouting, "Go away, go away," much as +one would shoo a flock of chickens. + +"Don't be afraid, captain," called Charley, "they only want to embrace +you." + +"I won't be embraced, I won't, I won't," cried the old sailor, +frantically. + +"Come, Captain, do the Hobson act," said Walter, "the ladies expect it." + +"Help, help," shouted the captain appealingly, as the circle of +grave-faced squaws steadily advanced, "I won't be embraced, I won't." + +With a sudden howl of terror the squaws turned and fled. + +In his fear, the captain had opened his mouth a little too far and his +false teeth had tumbled out. The old sailor caught them in his hand +and continued to wave his arms. "I won't be embraced," he shouted. + +But there was no need of the defiance; the squaws would not, for untold +beads, have come near the strange being with the movable teeth. + +"Shame, Captain," said Charley severely, as the two boys approached the +old sailor. "You must have been flirting with those ladies to make +them act like that." + +"I guess they was just attracted by my appearance," said the captain +modestly, "I always was a favorite with the ladies." + +"Looks as if they were headed this way again," said Walter. + +With a cry of fright the old sailor turned and dashed away for the +shelter of the hut as fast as he could run. + +The boys shouted with laughter, and even the grave warriors smiled at +the scene. + +After dinner the celebration was renewed, but this time the youths +formed the audience while their elders held shooting matches and more +sober contests of skill and strength. + +The captain did not emerge from the hut until nearly sundown, and when +he did appear he carried both upper and lower teeth in his hand. +Whenever a squaw approached anywhere near him he would open his mouth +to its fullest extent and wave the teeth in the air. + +"They will get used to seeing you without them and soon think you as +beautiful as ever," Charley said to him, gravely. + +"Charley," said the old sailor, solemnly, "for good or ill, we leave +this island to-morrow. It ain't often them Injin women meets with a +man of my looks, an' it has drove 'em plum crazy. It ain't safe for me +to stay longer." + +"I'm wondering what that widow lady in Shelbourne will say when she +hears of this," said Walter musingly. "She will naturally think that +you must have given them great encouragement." + +"If either of you lads breathe a word of this in town, I'll throttle +you," declared the apprehensive old sailor. + +"We won't say a word," said Charley, severely, "but I must say you have +been setting Walter and I a terrible example, captain." + +After this parting shot, the two tormentors retired quickly, for the +old sailor was almost at the exploding point with indignation. + +The captain was not the only one to whom the afternoon had brought +trials. Chris had not been without his share of troubles. The +Seminoles treated him with marked disdain and would not even permit him +to eat with the others. + +"The Indians consider the darky as an inferior being," Charley had +confided to Walter in a whisper. "There are rumors that there is more +than one negro slave in the heart of the Everglades. The Seminoles +have a proverb, 'White man, Indian, dog, nigger,' which expresses their +opinion of the colored race." + +Chris' troubles reached their climax when the little party was seated +around the fire with the Indians in the evening. + +The chief, who had been watching the little darky closely all day, +turned to Charley: "Me buy 'em," he said, indicating Chris with a wave +of his hand. "Me buy nigger." + +"I ain't no nigger," shouted Chris in a rage, "I'se a free-born black +Englishman, dat's what I is." + +Charley silenced the indignant little darky with a wave of his hand. + +"He already has a master and is therefore not ours to sell," he said, +while Chris bristled with indignation. + +"Who master?" inquired the Seminole with an appraising glance at the +sturdy little darky. + +"A man called King Edward," said Charley gravely, and Chris' +indignation subsided. + +"Too bad," grunted the chief, and dropped the subject. + +"What's that?" exclaimed Walter suddenly, as distant rifle shots echoed +in the air, were repeated irregularly and finally ceased. + +"The convicts, I guess," whispered Charley, "I don't understand why +they are firing, though. All the Indians are here." + +Significant glances passed between the Indians. + +"Jackals are dead," said the chief, a fierce exultation in his face. + +"Who killed them?" cried Charley. + +"Crocodiles," said the Seminole, briefly. + +The little party stared at each other in horror. They understood now +why the Seminoles had not made an attack, and had showed so much +confidence in the convicts not being able to escape. + +Much as the hunters hated the men who had persecuted them, they felt +shocked and horror-stricken at the horrible fate that had overtaken +them. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + +THE RETURN. + +The hunters soon withdrew from the circle around the fire and made +their way to their hut. + +"This has been a queer trip," said Charley musingly. "I do not believe +I care to make another like it. Look at all we have been through, and +what have we gained by it? Nothing." + +"We might stop on the St. Johns on our way back and hunt again for +plumes," suggested Walter. + +But the others negatived the proposal decidedly. + +"It would be like tempting Providence, after the dangers we have been +spared from," the captain declared. + +"Dis nigger wants to get out ob a kentry where a black Englishman is +called a nigger," said Chris. + +"Don't mention plumes to me," exclaimed Charley, "I am sick of +everything connected with this trip." + +Walter smiled. "I am quite sure that I would not feel at all bad if I +knew we were carrying back several thousand dollars' worth of plumes +with us," he said. + +"Oh, quit your dreaming and go to bed," exclaimed Charley, testily, +"instead of carrying back a few thousand dollars' worth of plumes with +us, we will all have to hunt for a job, when we get to the coast." + +But in spite of Charley's dire prophecy, Walter was smiling as he +undressed in the dark. + +The hunters were astir at break of day and preparing for an early +start. They cooked and ate a hasty breakfast and then carried their +canoes down to the water. + +The Indian whom the chief had assigned as their guide was already +patiently waiting in his dugout. + +It did not take the hunters long to stow away their few belongings and +they were soon ready for their departure. + +The chief followed them to the water accompanied by all his band. + +The hunters parted with the young Seminole with genuine regret, and he, +for his part, seemed greatly affected. + +"The Little Tiger hopes that his white brothers will return again to +the Glades," he said as he shook hands with each. "His wigwam will be +always open to them. Will not he with the hair like the Spanish moss, +consider again, and choose from among them one of the squaws to cheer +his wigwam?" + +"No, thank ye, chief," said the old sailor hastily, "it would only make +the rest of 'em jealous." + +The rest of the Indians gathered around and each shook hands with the +little party, gravely saying "How," the only English many of them knew. + +The hunters stepped aboard their canoes, and took up their paddles. +The Indian guide in his dugout took the lead and with flashing blades +the hunters followed closely in his wake. + +As they passed the little island where the convicts had met their +death, the hunters could not repress a shudder of horror. Around it +lay the repulsive-looking crocodiles, placidly sleeping on the water, +and amongst them floated a man's straw hat. It was all that remained +of the cruel, merciless band. + +"They deserved death, but the death they met was too awful for any +human being," Charley murmured. + +"I wonder what became of Indian Charley," said Walter. "He was not +with the others." + +Their guide's quick ears had caught the question. "He tied to tree in +swamp for mosquitoes to eat," he volunteered pleasantly. + +"I think," remarked Charley, after a long pause, "I think I would +rather be a Seminole's friend than his enemy." + +"Aye, lad," agreed the captain, "they are savages still in their loves +and hates." + +The Seminole guide led them out of the Everglades by a short cut, and +the hunters sighed with relief when the great swamp was left behind. + +For two days they traveled while daylight lasted, making camp at night +on some convenient point. On the morning of the third day they reached +their old camp where their things were buried. Here they went into +camp again while the Seminole scoured the woods for their ponies. He +returned triumphant the second day riding one of the horses and driving +the others. The animals were sleek and fat from rich feeding and long +inactivity. + +The hunters made their guide presents of a couple of clasp knives and a +revolver with its ammunition and sent him away delighted. + +"I wanted to wait until we got home to give you a big surprise, but I +can't keep it concealed any longer," said Walter regretfully, as his +companions began to take the canoes apart preparatory to stowing them +in the packs. + +While the others gazed at him in surprise, he drew out a bundle from +under the thwart of one of the canoes. Undoing it he took out a long +feathery plume. + +"Where did you get that?" exclaimed Charley in surprise. + +"It's one of those we dug up on the chief's island," explained Walter. +"You see I used to work in a store where they used to handle such +things, and I got an idea when we first opened the package that those +plumes were not in as bad shape as they appeared. I did not say +anything about it, because I did not want to run the risk of possibly +causing more disappointment, but I put the box in the canoe and the +first chance I got on the island I took a weak solution of vinegar and +water and went to work on them. I had only time to clean two or three, +but I am sure that at least three-fourths of them can be made saleable." + +"Walter, you're a trump," exclaimed Charley in delight, and the others +were not much behind in expressing their admiration and joy. + +Owing to Walter's thoughtfulness, it was a gay, happy party that took +up the trail back for the coast. + +The return trip was made without any uncommon incident and the little +party arrived safely at the little seacoast town of Shelbourne. Here +they sold their ponies and arms, and renting a little house, went +busily to work cleaning and preparing the damaged plumes for market. +When the task was finished and the last plume sold, they found +themselves the happy possessors of the not insignificant sum of $3,200, +which divided between them gave each a capital of $800. + +With the first money they received from their plumes, they purchased a +handsome repeating rifle which they despatched to their friend, Little +Tiger, by an Indian who had come into town to trade. + +A couple of weeks after, the hunters received a visit from the Seminole +who had acted as their guide. He was the bearer of a bundle of +beautifully tanned deer-skins, a present from the chief. + +"The Little Tiger mourns for his white brothers," said the chief's +messenger, "the beautiful rifle speaks to him like a message from them. +He bids them when they will to return and end their days in the shelter +of his wigwam. He says, if the gray-haired one desires, the offer of a +squaw is still open." + +The joke on the captain was too good to keep, and the boys have told it +to the widow lady whom the captain is interested in. She sometimes +tasks him with having given the dusky ladies too great encouragement, +and the old sailor gets very red and protests that such was not the +case; that he couldn't help it; that he always was a great favorite +with the ladies. At first, he used to call upon Walter and Charley to +prove the truth of his statements, but they would only shake their +heads ominously and remain gravely silent. + +Upon their return the hunters had prepared a full statement of the +death of the convicts and mailed it to the proper authorities, but, +much to their indignation, their story was not believed but was +regarded as an attempt to secure the reward money that had been offered. + +Chris is just now greatly incensed over a song that every one seems to +be humming. We believe the chorus runs, "Coon, coon, coon, how I wish +my color would fade." He regards "coon" as a much more offensive title +even than nigger, and contends that it is no name to be applied to a +free-born black English gentleman. + +Just now all our hunters are resting up from their terrible +experiences. One would think that they had passed through enough to +discourage them from undertaking another hazardous trip, but adventures +breed a love for adventure, and the free, open air calls loudly to +those who have followed stream and forest. + + + + +THE END. + + + + + + +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS SERIES + +By FRANK FOWLER + +A Series of Stirring Stories for Boys, that not only contain +considerable information concerning cowboy life, but at the same time +seem to breathe the adventurous spirit that lives in the clear air of +the wide plains, and lofty mountain ranges of the Wild West. These +tales are written in a vein calculated to delight the heart of every +lad who loves to read of pleasing adventure in the open; yet at the +same time the most careful parent need not hesitate to place them in +the hands of his boy. + + +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS AT KEYSTONE RANCH; or, + +Three Chums of the Saddle and Lariat. + +In this story the reader makes the acquaintance of the devoted chums, +Adrian Sherwood, Donald McKay, and William Stonewall Jackson Winkle, a +fat, auburn-haired Southern lad, who is known at various times among +his comrades as "Wee Willie Winkle," "Broncho Billie," and "Little +Billie." The book begins in rapid action, and there is surely +"something doing" up to the very time you lay it down, possibly with a +sigh of regret because you have reached the end; yet thankful to know +that a second volume is within reach. Besides the adventure, there is +more or less rollicking humor, of the type all boys like. + + +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS DOWN IN ARIZONA, or, + +A Struggle for the Great Copper Lode. + +The scene shifts in this story, from the free life of the cattle range, +and the wide expanse of the boundless prairie, to that rugged +mountainous section of Arizona, where many fabulous fortunes have been +won through the discovery of rich ore. The Broncho Rider Boys find +themselves impelled, by a stern sense of duty, to make a brave fight +against heavy odds, in order to retain possession of a valuable mine +that is claimed by some of their relatives. That they meet with +numerous strange and thrilling perils while enlisted in this service, +can be readily understood; and every wideawake boy will be pleased to +learn how finally Adrian and his chums managed to outwit their enemies +in the fight for the copper lode. + + +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS ALONG THE BORDER; or, + +The Hidden Treasure of the Zuni Medicine Man. + +Once more the tried and true comrades of camp and trail are in the +saddle, bent on seeing with their own eyes some of the wonderful sights +to be found in that section of the Far Southwest, where the singular +cave homes of the ancient Cliff Dwellers dot the walls of the Great +Canyon of the Colorado. In the strangest possible way they are drawn +into a series of happenings among the Zuni Indians, while trying to +assist a newly made friend: all of which makes interesting reading. If +there could be any choice, this book would surely be voted the best of +the entire series, and certainly no lad will lay it down, save with +regret. + + +THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS ON THE WYOMING TRAIL; + +or, A Mystery of the Prairie Stampede. + +As the title will indicate to readers of the previous stories in this +Series, the three prairie pards finally find a chance to visit the +Wyoming ranch belonging to Adrian, but which has been managed for him +by a relative, whom he has reason to suspect might be running things +more for his own benefit than that of the young owner. Of course they +become entangled in a maze of adventurous doings while in the Northern +cattle country. How the Broncho Rider Boys carried themselves through +this nerve-testing period makes intensely interesting leading. No boy +will ever regret the money spent in securing this splendid volume. + + + * * * * * + +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS SERIES + +By RALPH MARLOW + +A Series of Splendid Stories, in which are contained the Strange +Happenings that befell a bunch of five lively boys, who were fortunate +enough to come into possession of up-to-date motorcycles. + + +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS' SWIFT ROAD CHASE; + +or, Surprising the Bank Robbers. + +It is doubtful whether a more entertaining lot of boys ever before +appeared in a story than the "Big Five," who figure in the pages of +this volume--Rod Bradley; "Hanky Panky" Jucklin; Josh Whitcomb; Elmer +Overton; and last, but far from least, "Rooster" Boggs. From cover to +cover the reader will be thrilled and delighted with the accounts of +how luckily they came by their motorcycles; and what a splendid use +they made of the machines in recovering the funds of the robbed Garland +bank. + + +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS IN TENNESSEE WILDS; + +or, The Secret of Walnut Ridge. + +In this story the boys with the "flying wheels" take a trip through +Kentucky, and into Dixie Land. The wonderful adventures, and amusing +ones as well, that were their portion on this glorious spin, have been +set down by the author in a way that will be most pleasing to the boy +reader who delights in tales of action. There is not a single dry +chapter in the book; and when the end is finally reached, the happy +possessor will count himself lucky to have it handy in his library, +where, later on, he may read it over and over again. + + +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS THROUGH BY WIRELESS; + +or, A Strange Message from the Air. + +Even in a quiet Ohio town remarkable things may sometimes happen +calculated to create the most intense excitement. The five motorcycle +boys were put in touch with just such an event through a message that +came to their wireless station while many miles away from home. What +that "voice from the air" told them, and how gallantly they responded +to the call for action, you will be delighted to learn in the third +volume of this intensely interesting series. + + +THE BIG FIVE MOTORCYCLE BOYS ON FLORIDA TRAILS; + +or, Adventures Among the Saw Palmetto Crackers. + +Once more a kind fortune allows Rod Bradley and his four +"happy-go-lucky" comrades a chance to visit new fields. Down in the +Land of Sunshine and Oranges the Motorcycle Boys experience some of the +most remarkable perils and adventures of their whole career. The +writer spent many years along the far-famed Indian River, and he has +drawn upon his vast knowledge of the country in describing what befell +the chums there. If there could be any choice, then this book is +certainly the best of the whole series; and you will put it down with +regret, only hoping to meet these favorite characters again in new +fields. + + + * * * * * + +The Boy Spies Series + +These stories are based on important historical events, scenes wherein +boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of +history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home +life, and accurate in every particular. + + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS. + A story of the part they took in its defence. + By William P. Chipman. + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY. + A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL. + A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT. + A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE. + The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY. + The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS. + The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots to drive the + British from that State. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX. + The story of General Marion and his young spies. + By James Otis, + +THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN. + The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette in the Siege of + Yorktown. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA. + The story of how the young spies helped the Continental Army at + Valley Forge. + By James Otis. + +THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD. + The story of the part they took in its brave defence. + By William P. Chipman. + +THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK. + The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of General + Washington. + By James Otis. + + * * * * * + +The Boy Scout Series + +By HERBERT CARTER + +New stories of Camp Life, telling the wonderful and thrilling +adventures of the Boys of the Silver Fox Patrol. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; + +or, Marooned Among the Game Fish Poachers. + +Through a queer freak of fate, Thad Brewster and his comrades of the +Silver Fox Patrol find themselves in somewhat the same predicament that +confronted dear old Robinson Crusoe; only it is on the Great Lakes that +they are wrecked instead of the salty sea. You will admit that those +Cranford scouts are a lively and entertaining bunch of fellows. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; + +or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp. + +New and startling experiences awaited the tried comrades of camp and +trail, when they visit the Southland. But their knowledge of woodcraft +enabled them to meet and overcome all difficulties. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMP FIRE; + +or, Scouting with the Silver Fox Patrol. + +This book is brimming over with thrilling adventure, woods lore and the +story of the wonderful experiences that befell the Cranford troop of +Boy Scouts when spending a part of their vacation in the wilderness. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; + +or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners. + +Those lads who have read The Boy Scouts' First Camp Fire will be +delighted to read this story. It tells of the strange and mysterious +adventures that happened to the Patrol in their trip through the +"mountains of the sky" in the Moonshiners' Paradise of the old Tar Heel +State, North Carolina. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; + +or, Scouting through the Big Game Country. + +The story recites the many adventures that befell the members of the +Silver Fox Patrol with wild animals of the forest trails, as well as +the desperate men who had sought a refuge in this lonely country. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; + +or, The New Test for the Silver Fox Patrol. + +In the rough field of experience the tenderfoots and greenhorns of the +Silver Fox Patrol are fast learning to take care of themselves when +abroad. Thad and his chums have a wonderful experience when they are +employed by the State of Maine to act as Fire Wardens. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; + +or, The Search for the Lost Tenderfoot. + +A serious calamity threatens the Silver Fox Patrol when on one of their +vacation trips to the wonderland of the great Northwest. How apparent +disaster is bravely met and overcome by Thad and his friends, forms the +main theme of the story, which abounds in plenty of humor, and +hairbreadth escapes. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; + +or, The Secret of The Hidden Silver Mine. + +By this time the boys of the Silver Fox Patrol have learned through +experience how to rough it upon a long hike. Their tour takes them +into the wildest region of the great Rocky Mountains, and here they +meet with many strange adventures. + + +THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA. + +A story of Burgoyne's defeat in 1777. + + * * * * * + +The Boy Chums Series + +By WILMER M. ELY + +In this series of remarkable stories by Wilmer M. Ely are described the +adventures of two boy chums--Charley West and Walter Hazard--in the +great swamps of interior Florida and among the cays off the Florida +Coast, and through the Bahama Islands. These are real, live boys, and +their experiences are well worth following. + + +THE BOY CHUMS ON INDIAN RIVER; + +or, The Boy Partners of the Schooner "Orphan." + +In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard meet deadly rattlesnakes; +have a battle with a wild panther; are attacked by outlaws: their boat +is towed by a swordfish; they are shipwrecked by a monster manatee +fish, and pass safely through many exciting scenes of danger. This +book should be read first. + + +THE BOY CHUMS ON HAUNTED ISLAND, + +or, Hunting for Pearls in the Bahama Islands. + +This book tells the story of the boy chums' adventures on the schooner +"Eager Quest," hunting for pearls among the Bahama Islands. Their +hairbreadth escapes from the treacherous quicksands and dangerous +waterspouts, and their rescue from the wicked wreckers are fully told. + + +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST; + +or, Hunting for Plume Birds in the Florida Everglades. + +The story of the boy chums hunting the blue herons and the pink and +white egrets for their plumes in the forests of Florida is full of +danger and excitement. In this story is fully told how the chums +encountered the Indians; their battles with the escaped convicts; their +fight with the wild boars and alligators; and many exciting encounters +and escapes. This is the third story of the boy chums' adventures. + + +THE BOY CHUMS' PERILOUS CRUISE; + +or, Searching for Wreckage on the Florida Coast. + +This story of the boy chums' adventures on and off the Florida Coast +describes many scenes of daring and adventure, in hunting for ships +stranded and cargoes washed ashore. The boy chums passed through many +exciting scenes, their conflicts with the Cuban wreckers; the loss of +their vessel, the "Eager Quest," they will long remember. This is the +fourth book of adventures which the boy chums experienced. + + +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO; + +or, a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek Spongers. + +This story of the boy chums hunting for sponges is filled with many +adventures. The dangers of gathering sponges are fully described; the +chums meet with sharks and alligators; and they are cast away on a +desert island. Their rescue and arrival home make a most interesting +story. This is the fifth book of adventures of the boy chums. + + +THE BOY CHUMS CRUISING IN FLORIDA WATERS; + +or, the Perils and Dangers of the Fishing Fleet. + +In this story Charley West and Walter Hazard embark upon a new and +dangerous quest for fortune. With their old and tried comrades, +Captain Westfield and the little negro, Chris, they join the great army +of fishermen that yearly search the Florida seas for the thousands of +kinds of rare fish and water creatures that abound there. The Florida +waters hide many strange and unknown dangers. The perils the chums +encounter from weird fishes and creatures of the sea and the menace of +hurricane and shipwreck, make very interesting and instructive reading. +This is the sixth book of adventures of the boy chums. + + + * * * * * + +The Navy Boys Series + +A series of excellent stories of adventure on sea and land, selected +from the works of popular writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading. + + +THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY. + A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772. + By William P. Chipman. + +THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND. + A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776. + By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA. + Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam in 1772. + By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG. + A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg. + By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES. + A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776. + By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO. + The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING. + A boy's story of privateering in 1780. + By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY. + A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The Laughing + Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy. + By James Otis. + +THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY. + The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "providence" + and the Frigate "Alfred." + By William P. Chipman. + +THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE. + The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter + "Margaretta," in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS. + The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an + American Squadron in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + +THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS. + The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in his + discovery of America. + By Frederick A. Ober. + + + * * * * * + +The Girl Chums Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and +full of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting +motives, vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl +readers. + + +BENHURST CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning. + +BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris. + +BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison. + +DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row. + +FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham. + +HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings. + +JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage. + +KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow. + +LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder. + +MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright. + +MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning. + +MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning. + +MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow. + +ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning. + +PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright. + +RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne. + +THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow. + + + * * * * * + +The Girl Comrades Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and +full of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting +motives, vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl +readers. + + +A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER. By I. T. Thurston. + +ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry. + +ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + +ANNICE WYNKOOP. Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. +Rouse. + +BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + +HELEN BEATON, COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide E. Rouse. + +JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins. + +NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + + + * * * * * + + +THE LITTLE GIRL SERIES + +By AMANDA M. DOUGLAS + + +A series of stories for girls by that popular author, Amanda M. +Douglas, in which are described something of the life and times of the +early days of the places wherein the stories are located. Now for the +first time published in a cheap edition. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD NEW YORK + +This is a pretty story of life in New York 60 years ago. The story is +charmingly told. The book is full of vivacious narrative, describing +the amusements employments and the social and domestic life of Old New +York. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD BOSTON + +The story deals with the bringing up of little Doris by these Boston +people, who were her nearest relatives. It is a series of pictures of +life in Boston ninety years ago. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD BALTIMORE + +This tells the story of how a little girl grew up in a Southern city a +hundred years ago. A host of characters of all sorts--women, children, +slaves, rich people and poor people, fill the pages. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD PITTSBURG + +An interesting picture is given of the pioneer settlement and its +people; while the heroine, Daffodil, is a winsome lass who develops +into a charming woman. + + +A LITTLE GIRL OF LONG AGO + +This story is a sequel to A Little Girl in Old New York. This is a +book for girls and boys of the present age, who will enjoy going back +to the old times. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD CHICAGO + +Ruth Gaynor comes to Chicago with her father when she is but eight or +nine years old. Ruth is a keen observer and makes a capital heroine. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD NEW ORLEANS + +The story gives a very picturesque account of the life in the old +Creole city. It is a well told and interesting story with a historical +background. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD SAN FRANCISCO + +This is the story of the little Maine girl who went to live in the +strange new city of the Golden Gate; she grows up a bright and charming +girl. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD WASHINGTON + +This story carries one back to Washington, a city then in its infancy. +The story throws a strong light on the early customs and life of the +people. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD PHILADELPHIA + +Little Primrose was the child of Friends, or Quakers. The author tells +Primrose's experiences among very strict Quakers, and then among +worldly people. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD QUEBEC + +The heroine is called "The Rose of Quebec." The picturesque life of +this old French city, as seen through the eyes of the little girl, is +here pictured. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD SALEM + +Cynthia Leveritt lived in old Salem about one hundred years ago. +Cynthia grows up, and so dear a girl could scarce have failed to have a +romance develop. The book will be enjoyed by all girls. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD ST. LOUIS + +This story will give a delightful treat to any girl who reads it. The +early days of this historical old city are depicted in a manner at once +true and picturesque. + + +A LITTLE GIRL IN OLD DETROIT + +The stirring times in which the little girl lived, and the social life +of a bygone age are depicted very happily. The heroine is a charming +girl. + + + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Boy Chums in the Forest, by Wilmer M. Ely + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY CHUMS IN THE FOREST *** + +***** This file should be named 27561.txt or 27561.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/7/5/6/27561/ + +Produced by Al Haines + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/27561.zip b/27561.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d30888e --- /dev/null +++ b/27561.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e873003 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #27561 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/27561) |
